JP2022068516A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of controlling a game state appropriately.SOLUTION: There is a time shortening game state separately from an opening/closing execution mode as a specific game state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state. As the time shortening game state, there is a second time shortening game state to which a shift is made on the basis of a ceiling number being reached and a third time shortening game state to which a shift is made on the basis of a particular failure result. When a special symbol winning/losing lottery turns out to be the particular failure result, a particular ready-to-win failure performance is executed as a performance for a game round. An order of control processing is stipulated so that update processing for the number of times of failures is executed before variation pattern setting processing is executed in one game round.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and based on the lottery result being a specific result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is obtained. Those to be transferred are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, in a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling a gaming state.

The present invention comprises a special determination means for executing a special determination based on the establishment of predetermined determination conditions.
A transition means for a special gaming state that can shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result.
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means and
An update means capable of updating a predetermined update information based on a predetermined update opportunity, and an update means.
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state that can be transferred based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result, and the result of the special determination having a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the above. The second specific gaming state that can be transferred based on the result of the specific determination performed in the game times that the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state becomes the predetermined determination result, and Has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
A notification setting means for setting the predetermined notification to be performed when the special determination or the result of the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result, or when the second specific gaming state shifts to or shifts to the second specific gaming state.
Equipped with
One game is characterized in that the update is performed by the update means before the setting is performed by the notification setting means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably control the gaming state.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the open state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the pass / fail table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special figure, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a miss. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the hold look-ahead process. It is a block diagram which shows the electric composition of a staging control device and its peripheral equipment. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process in MPU of a staging control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the hold storage area. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notice effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold change point during the game round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the production scenario lottery table. (A) is a flowchart showing the first execution process of the hold notice, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the display mode storage area. It is a figure for demonstrating change suggestion effect. (A) is a flowchart showing a shift command correspondence process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a shift process of a hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd execution process of a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd execution process of a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion process of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing which concerns on the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the staging mode switching process which concerns on the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the return determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display time table which concerns on the modification 3 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a figure which shows an example of the return determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. (A) is a flowchart showing the information acquisition process according to the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a figure which shows an example of the upper limit display mode table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the modification 5 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in MPU of a staging control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for returning of the hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th execution process of a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion process of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process according to the modified example 6 of the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display mode. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the staging mode switching process which concerns on modification 7 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for mode switching. It is a figure which shows the mode of the switching restriction of an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the switching mode of the effect mode which concerns on the modification 8 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for hold notice. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for the winning / failing lottery which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special figure, and (c) is an example of a second time-saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table for a low frequency support mode, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table for a high frequency support mode, and (c) is an example of a character opening / closing game. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for high-probability mode update / termination. It is a flowchart which shows the process for high frequency support mode update / termination. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning to the 2nd time saving game state. (A) is a flowchart showing a process for starting a definite display, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process for ending the definite display. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game times control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of an accessory. It is a block diagram which shows the electric composition of a staging control device and its peripheral equipment. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process in MPU of a staging control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st transition effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd transition effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for end. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. (A) is a flowchart showing an update process for displaying the remaining number of times, and (b) is a flowchart showing an update process for displaying the number of missed times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 2nd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 2nd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 2nd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 2nd time saving game state of the modification 1 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd time saving game state which concerns on the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning to the 2nd time saving game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 2nd time shortening game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning / failing table which concerns on the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the type table for a big hit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special deviation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning to the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the confirmation display start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a variation start. It is a figure which shows the display example of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 3rd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of transition to the 3rd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the normal game round in the final game round. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning / failing table which concerns on the modification 4 of the said 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a type table for big hits, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning to the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing a first transition effect setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a game rotation effect for a first time-saving game state. (A) is a flowchart showing a third transition effect setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a game rotation effect for a third time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation start process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a variation display pattern and a game rotation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect A to the specific effect E. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning / failing table which concerns on the modification 5 of the 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a type table for big hits, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning to the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning / failing table which concerns on the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a type table for big hits, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving gaming state, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. .. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating a high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the transition determination of the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending a high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning a time-saving game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the confirmation display start. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing which concerns on the modification 7 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the transition determination of the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special deviation according to the modified example 8 of the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process B of the 3rd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process B of the 2nd time shortening game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transitioning a time-saving game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing which concerns on the modification 9 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing which concerns on the modification 10 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition determination process of the 2nd time shortening game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external signal which concerns on the modification 11 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external signal which concerns on modification 12 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an external signal. (A) is a diagram for explaining the connection terminal, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of the external signal.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported in a state where it can be opened and closed by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. The support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It is equipped with 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. See Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is blocked from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels back and forth with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp portion (annular illumination portion) 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The lamp unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the lamp unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize ball lamp that lights up during the payout of the prize ball is provided on the left and right sides thereof. A portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33.

Further, an effect operation unit 36 (specifically, a push operation button) manually operated by the player is provided on the upper surface portion of the upper bulge portion 31. For example, by manually operating the effect operation unit 36 according to the suggestion displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, which will be described later, the effect content on the display screen G or the like becomes a predetermined effect content corresponding to the operation. Become.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball that has entered the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. ..

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protrusion shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

An insertion hole for inserting a hook fitting 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotation tip side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the hook receiving member for the front door) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 cannot be unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the locking device 55 has a plurality of inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 57 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 to lock the gaming machine main body 12 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated in the locking device 55, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13 and inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11 when the key is turned counterclockwise.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 has a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE on which the game ball flows down is formed on this exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 60. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating port 62, and the second operating port 63, it is detected by the winning sensor (detection sensor), and a predetermined number is detected based on the detection result. Benefits such as payout of prize balls are given to the player. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. Is executed. Further, when the ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are paid out, and when the ball enters the second operating port 63, one game ball is paid out. Is executed. By the way, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, the game ball is not paid out.

The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same, or the number of prize balls may be the same. The number of prize balls according to the above may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening portion, and the game ball has passed through the opening portion as well as the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 68, the entry into the general winning opening 61, the operating openings 62, 63, the variable winning device 65 or the through gate 64 is described. Also expressed as a prize.

Further, in the game board 60, a large number of nails 69 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. The flow of the game ball is diversified by various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 61 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back surface side of the game board 60 (FIG. 3), and the display screen G can be visually recognized through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 so as to correspond to the peripheral edge of the opening.

The center frame 76 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is avoided that the game ball flowing down the game area PE flows into the inner area of the center frame 76 and comes into contact with the display screen G. Further, the center frame 76 disperses the flow path when the game ball flows down the game area PE to the left and right, and forms a left route passing through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route passing through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes) on the left route or the right route is determined by the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, that is, the launch force of the game ball. Since the launched game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, the stronger the launching force of the game ball, the easier it is for the game ball to flow down the right route.

Specifically, when the player performs the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the launched game is performed. When the ball flows down the left route and the player performs a rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in the second range which is equal to or more than the reference rotation amount as the second launch operation, the launched game ball is released. Go down the right route. The predetermined rotation amount is the rotation operation amount that enables the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 described later and enter the game area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the top of the center frame 76. It is the amount of rotation operation to launch a game ball with a reachable launch force.

Below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67), a first operating port 62 opened upward is arranged. The first operating port 62 is located at the center of the left and right sides of the game board 60, but game parts such as nails 69 are arranged so that the game ball flowing down the right route does not win the first operating port 62. That is, only the game ball flowing down the left route can win a prize in the first operating port 62. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first operating port 62, the game ball is fired and played so that the game ball flows down the left route. The first operating port 62 is provided with a winning sensor 62a (FIG. 7) for the first operating port, and the winning sensor 62a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating port 62.

A second actuating port 63 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second operating port 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The second operating port 63 is provided with a general electric accessory 63a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces rotatably supported in the left-right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening as the second operating port 63 from both the left and right sides.

Then, by rotating each of the movable pieces, the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) shown in FIG. 5A and the open state (supported state or guided state) shown in FIG. 5B are obtained. It is possible to switch to. Specifically, a protruding portion 63d is provided on the upper portion of the second operating port 63 so as to project forward, and when the movable piece is in an upright posture as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the movable piece is in an upright posture. The gap between each of the movable pieces and the protruding portion 63d becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is prevented. On the other hand, when the movable piece is rotated so as to be inclined outward as shown in FIG. 5B, an opening having a size through which the game ball can pass is formed between the movable piece and the protruding portion 63d. , The inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is allowed. The second operating port 63 is provided with a winning sensor 63c for the second operating port, and the winning sensor 63c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second operating port 63.

Further, the general electric accessory 63a is provided with a drive unit 63b for driving each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by a drive unit 63b through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between an open state (tilted posture) and a closed state (standing posture). Incidentally, the first actuating port 62 is not provided with a universal electric accessory (opening / closing structure).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize in the second operating port 63 when it is in the closed state, but it may be a configuration in which a prize can be won. That is, although it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 63 in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. The point is that the ease of winning a prize in the second operating port 63 may differ between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. Further, the configuration of the general electric accessory 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the movable piece can be rotated back and forth, or slid back and forth or left and right to open and close the second operating port 63. It may be something to do.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is arranged above (upstream side) of the second operating port 63 on the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 64 can also win the second operating port 63. The through gate 64 is provided with a through winning sensor 64a (FIG. 7), and the winning sensor 64a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 64.

The through gate 64 is a trigger for opening the general electric accessory 63a provided in the second actuating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 64, and the result of the internal lottery is an open result (support winning), so that the general electric accessory 63a is changed from the closed state to the open state. After that, the accessory opening / closing game (support execution mode) for returning to the closed state is executed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operating port 63 on the right route. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening 65a that opens forward and an opening / closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The large winning opening 65a has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The large winning opening 65a communicates with a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening 65a are configured to be guided to the guide passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for a large winning opening is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the winning sensor 65c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a.

Further, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a drive unit 65d for driving the opening / closing door 65b. The opening / closing door 65b is driven by a drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown), so that the game ball cannot be won in the large winning opening 65a (FIG. 6A) and the game ball is placed in the large winning opening 65a. It is switched to the open state (FIG. 6 (b)) where a prize can be won. Specifically, the opening / closing door 65b is normally closed, and is switched to the open state when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (big hit game) is won in the internal lottery.

The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65, in the case of a big hit, the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) is set as one round, and it is variable up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 10 rounds). There is an embodiment in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened.

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 65a when it is in the closed state, but a configuration in which a prize can be won may be used. That is, in the closed state, it is possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 65a, but it may be a configuration in which it is harder to win (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. The point is that the ease of winning the large winning opening 65a differs between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, for the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65, only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65, the game ball is launched and played so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE, and projects forward from the front surface of the game board 60. On the front surface of the main display unit 81, a special drawing display unit 43 and a general drawing display unit 44 for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like are provided. Each of these display units 43 and 44 can be visually recognized from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. The gap between the front surface of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the main display unit 81, and the visibility of the various display units 43 and 44 is guaranteed.

The special figure display unit 43 is formed based on the first special figure display unit AS that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and the winning of the second operating port 63. A second special figure display unit BS for displaying the lottery result is provided.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 62. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped by the first special figure display unit AS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the above open / close execution mode.

In the second special figure display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 63. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the second special figure display unit BS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the above open / close execution mode.

In the following, the former is referred to as the first special symbol in order to distinguish between a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the first operating port 62 and a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the second operating port 63. Alternatively, it may be referred to as a first special figure, and the latter may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special figure.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 62 and 63, the variation display is started on the corresponding special figure display units AS and BS, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game in the special figure display units AS and BS. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is awarded to any of the actuation ports 62 and 63, the single display area is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game is played once until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. And.

Further, the main display unit 81 is provided with a special figure reserved number display unit AM. The number of times the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is held up to four times, and the special figure holding number display unit AM has the first special figure (first operation). The number of holdings of the mouth 62) and the number of holdings of the second special drawing (second operating port 63) can be displayed separately.

The general drawing display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly showing the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 64. In this case, the display unit 44 for normal drawing performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 64, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 64 is performed. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 64 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the general electric accessory 63a, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the normal drawing display unit 44. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the support status is entered. It should be noted that a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the through gate 64 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the winning of the through gate 64, the variable display is started on the normal drawing display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped until the normal drawing display unit 44 is stopped. Corresponds to one game in. In the following, in order to distinguish between the game times in the normal figure display unit 44 and the game times in the special figure display units AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal figure game time and the latter may be referred to as a special figure game time.

Further, the normal drawing display unit 44 is provided with a normal drawing holding number display unit FM. The number of times the game ball has won the through gate 64 is held up to 4 times, and the number of holdings of the normal drawing (through gate 64) can be displayed on the FM holding number display unit. ..

The special drawing display unit 43 and the normal drawing display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and are composed of other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. You may.

In addition, although not shown, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode. The round display unit starts displaying the number of rounds when the open / close execution mode is started or started. This display is continuously performed without changing the display content while the open / close execution mode is being executed, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends or ends.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 75 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 75 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 43, the variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 75 accordingly. Then, when the variable winning device 65 shifts to the jackpot game state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened, the symbol display device 75 stops and displays a predetermined symbol combination on a preset effective line. ..

Further, the symbol display device 75 is subjected to hold display corresponding to the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS. In this hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of holds for each of the operating ports 63 and 64 is indicated by the number of displayed images. The number of holdings is not limited to that shown by the holding image, and may be shown by numerical display. Further, the present invention is not limited to the symbol display device 75, and for example, a display unit provided on the game board 60 separately from the symbol display device 75 (a display unit separate from each hold number display unit AM and FM of the main display unit 81). The configuration may be indicated by a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) or the like.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 for launching a game ball toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41 is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the launch standby position. The ball feeding device 113 and the base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as the main configurations. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, whereby the game ball launching mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined up toward the game board 60 side. At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is provided. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and a launch control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply and the launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, in detail, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion).

In the game board 60, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subsequent game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. .. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought close to the lower end edge of the game board 60, and a gap is formed at a predetermined interval between the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. Will be. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower plate 34. As a result, the game ball that has become a foul ball is returned to the player while suppressing the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

In the resin base 50, a through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14), and a passage forming member is formed in this through hole. 121 is arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has an upper plate passage on the main body side and a lower plate passage on the main body side. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage. Below the lower plate passage on the main body side, the upper plate passage on the front door side is arranged.

Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and an urging member that urges the front position to close the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing portions are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A staging control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The staging control device unit 142 is configured to include the staging control device 143 and the mounting base 144, and the staging control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The staging control device 143 includes a staging control board that controls voice, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the staging control board is a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in and composed of.

On the back surface of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a set plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The collecting plate 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings, a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of game balls into various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with collection passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages descend from the ball entry portion along the back surface of the game board 60, and define a fall path for the game ball. The collection passages meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the entry part such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection passage. Become. The exit portion of each collection passage is open downward, and a discharge passage is provided on the front side thereof (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. The out port 68 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with a winning sensor (detection sensor) individually corresponding to various entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These various winning sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball is in a state where the drop path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. That is, when the game ball passes through the detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, it detects the entry of the ball into the entry opening such as the general winning opening 61. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to the main control device unit 160 (specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection signal of these winning sensors is transmitted to the main control device. Is output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configurations associated therewith will be described.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collecting plate 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. Has been done. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) for controlling the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like. There is.

The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is possible to easily discover that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

A plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These bonded pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the bonding piece and the bonded piece perform a sealing process between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Will be.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external output terminal 213 on the upper right side thereof. Various output terminals are provided in the external output terminal 213, and various signals are output to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By allowing the back pack unit 15, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the rotating tip portion of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to the fastened hole provided in the inner frame 13, and by fitting the fastener into the fastened hole. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and is open upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls discharged from the payout device 222 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the upper plate passage on the front door side, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the lower plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the front door side. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board 203 and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball derived from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181 the payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in the board box, and the state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply and launch control device 191, a power supply and a launch control board are housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is launched by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by the operation of the handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 are provided with a power failure monitoring unit (power failure monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power failure state such as a power failure. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. For example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the cutoff is stored in memory. Further, the power supply and the emission control device 191 are provided with a RAM erasing switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 312 is mounted on the main control board 311 of the main control device 162. The MPU 312 is a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 313 is executed. A certain RAM 314, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

The RAM 314 has a configuration in which data can be held (backed up) by the backup voltage from the power supply and the emission control device 191 even after a power failure state occurs, and various data and the like are temporarily stored in the RAM 314. There is a backup area separate from the area for the purpose. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer when the power is cut off, the values of each register, the I / O, and the like when a power failure occurs. At the time of recovery from the power failure state (at the time of power recovery), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and the RAM 314 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 312, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 181 and a power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the through gate 64, the general winning opening winning sensor 61a for detecting the winning of the variable winning device 65, and the first operating opening winning. A sensor 62a, a winning sensor 63c for the second operating port, a winning sensor 64a for the through, a winning sensor 65c for the large winning opening, and the like are provided. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, 65c, the MPU 312 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 312, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, and the through gate 64.

A payout control device 181 and an effect control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. The payout control device 181 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on a winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, as various drive units, a drive unit 63b for the general electric accessory 63a and a drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65 are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the drive control of the drive unit 65d is executed in the MPU 312 so that the open / close door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. Further, when the transition to the support state occurs, the drive control of the drive unit 63b is executed in the MPU 312 so that each movable piece of the utility accessory 63a is driven. Further, at each special figure game, the display control of the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS in the special figure display unit 43 is executed. In addition, the display control of the normal drawing display unit 44 is executed at the time of the normal drawing game round.

Further, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and through this external output terminal 213, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and information on lottery results such as big hits can be sent to the hall computer HC. It is output. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like with the hall computer HC.

The power supply and the launch control device 191 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 311, the payout control device 181 and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

The power supply and launch control device 191 are provided with a power failure monitoring unit 315, and the power failure monitoring unit 315 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and the launch control device 191. The power failure monitoring unit 315 determines that a power failure (power cutoff) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 is less than 22 volts, and outputs a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-massable) provided in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. Output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main control device 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power failure and immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power failure process based on this. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 191 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and when a power failure occurs or the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power is cut off. Power for storage retention is supplied from the power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 191 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The staging control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 350 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It is something to do. The display control device 350 executes the display control of the symbol display device 75 based on the command input from the effect control device 143. In this case, the staging control device 143 determines the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 162. Determine whether or not reach occurs and the content of reach production.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal 4R jackpot result or the 10R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol is used. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a result per normal large 4R occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped. Is displayed.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 10 regarding the variable display of each symbol sequence. When the game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 10A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 10B, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and waits for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 75, the symbol in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) is not stopped suddenly, but is gradually reduced while reducing the variable display speed. It is common to stop at. In this case, if the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) is configured to start stopping at the start of the stop display on the special symbol display unit 43, the deceleration time until the symbol stops on the symbol display device 75 is set. As a result, the time when the symbol is stopped is shortened, which leads to a substantial reduction in the stop display time.

Therefore, before the start of the stop display on the special figure display unit 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the stop display on the special figure display unit 43 is performed. It is configured to make the temporarily stopped symbol stop (confirmed display) according to the start timing of. The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the definite display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of a character (FIG. 8) such as an octopus constituting the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an incomplete stop state, although the design seems to be stopped at first glance (stop display). On the other hand, the definite display is performed so that the reciprocating fine movement and the movement of the character are not performed and the state is completely stopped.

The temporary stop display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 starts with the result of the winning / failing lottery or the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type, and then shifts to the confirmed display as it is, and the stop corresponding to the winning / failing lottery result or the jackpot type. After the stop display is temporarily displayed as a result, the stop result may be changed to the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery through the re-variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then the confirmation display may be performed.

By the way, in the special figure game time executed by the special figure display unit 43, the temporary stop display of the picture is not performed, and the variable display picture is suddenly stopped according to the lapse of the variable display time, and the state (picture). Is stopped and displayed) until the confirmed display time elapses. That is, the stop display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 becomes a definite display as it is. This also applies to the Fuzu game times executed by the Fuzu display unit 44.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. The combination of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9B, a hold display unit 200 for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of hold of the game times before execution is provided at the lower part of the display screen G, and hold. By visually recognizing the display unit 200, the player can recognize the reserved number. In the hold display unit 200, a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special figure and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special figure are set.

In the first hold display area Ga, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 having the same number as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 are divided and displayed so as to be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. There is. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 62, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Ga2, the 3rd unit hold display area Ga3, and the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62 is one, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is the first operating opening. When the number of reserved images in the case of winning 62 is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Ga1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area Gb, the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 having the same number as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the second operating port 63 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Has been done. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operating port 63, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Gb2, the 3rd unit hold display area Gb3, and the 4th unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is the second operating opening. When the number of reserved images in the case of winning 63 is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

Further, the execution display area D is set so as to be sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. In the execution display area D, a holding image corresponding to the game times to be executed (executed) is displayed. For example, when the game round ends and the next game round is started, the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is displayed. The displayed pending image is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved game times are executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 312 of main control device 162>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special drawing display unit 43, a setting of the display of the normal drawing display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, FIG. 11 As shown in, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI used for the above and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in each special figure display unit AS and BS in the special figure display unit 43 are used. Further, it is decided to use the random number counter C3 per figure used for the lottery as to whether or not the common electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is in the support state (open state).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is stored in the acquired information when a prize is won in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The hold ball storage area 314b includes a hold area RE including a first special figure hold area Ra and a second special figure hold area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43, and is executed at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, reach the maximum value (that is, 199), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 313a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 313. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG.

In the pass / fail table, the address information consisting of binary information and the jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and five types of "1" to "5" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is represented by a decimal number "7", "17", "27". , "37" and "47" are set, and these address information and the jackpot numerical information are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in "0" to "199" which is a numerical range of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the winning / failing lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the winning / failing lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that is a big hit, and in the high-probability mode, there are five more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is high. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for sorting the types when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 13 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)) are set. If the jackpot is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special figure is referred to, and if the jackpot is based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the first 2 The jackpot type table for special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed. Here, in the round game, the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable winning control is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once for one round game.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. Is. In this case, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the next big hit occurs (until the next open / close execution mode is started). By the way, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 is higher when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. The driving mode of the polyethylene accessory 63a is controlled so as to be relatively high and low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the normal-figure winning / failing lottery using the random number counter C3 per fu-figure is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened is also larger in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the second operating port 63 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 62 is higher than that of the second operating port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 62. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 63 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, after equalizing the winning probabilities of the winning / failing lottery in both modes, the normal power in the high-frequency support mode is used. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the opening time of one time may be given preferential treatment over the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient if the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and one of the conditions of the winning / failing lottery, the number of opening times, and the opening time is arbitrary. By differentiating the combination conditions, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the maximum number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains the low-probability mode. That is, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the low frequency support mode is set.

In the present embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13B, in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. The 10R probability variation jackpot result is that the number of round games executed is 10 times. Further, in the 10R probability variation jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is a big hit result. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode in this case are continued until the next big hit occurs.

The 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special figure is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special figure. That is, when a 4R normal jackpot result is obtained by winning a prize in the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The state is continued until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

In the present embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As described above, the probability of being distributed to the probabilistic jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the type table of the first special figure display unit or the type table of the second special figure display unit is used. However, when the probability variation jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special figure display unit is set to have a 16R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special figure display unit is set to have a 4R jackpot result. Has been done. That is, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is larger than that of the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the first operating port 62. The number will increase, and it will be possible to expect more game balls to be paid out. That is, the game in which the game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 will be awarded, and the second operating port 63 will be played accordingly. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning prizes, increases.

Further, the jackpot type counter C2 determines the stop result of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. Is also used. The stop result is determined with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of the stop result (the big hit pattern displayed in the stop display on each special figure display unit AS, BS) in the case of a big hit are set in correspondence with the value of the big hit type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the data of the plurality of stop results. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used for both the determination of the stop result and the determination of the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS and the jackpot determined at the time of the jackpot are used. It corresponds to the type.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the variation display time with respect to the variation type counter CS is stored as the variation display time table in the variation display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for big hits (FIG. 14 (a)) and a variable display time table for deviation (FIG. 14 (b)) are set. If the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is a big hit, the variable display time table for the big hit is referred to, and the winning of each of the above operating ports 62 and 63 is performed. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order, the variable display time table for out of order is referred to.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the information of the variation pattern are set in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 14, in order to facilitate understanding, information on the fluctuation display time is described together with the fluctuation pattern, but the information on the fluctuation display time is the time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation display time table. Is separately stored in ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the variation display time table for jackpot, variation pattern 1A (15 sec), variation pattern 2A (60 sec), variation pattern 3A (60 sec), and variation are available as selectable variation patterns. A pattern 4A (120 sec) and a fluctuation pattern 5A (120 sec) are set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the variation of the pattern on the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. The display is done.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating the variation pattern is transmitted to the staging control device 143 as a variation start command. The staging control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received fluctuation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the fluctuation display time corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern. As a result, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

Further, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game rotation effect such as a reach effect performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the variation pattern 1A corresponds to the normal reach hit effect, the variation pattern 2A corresponds to the SP reach (super reach) A hit effect, the variation pattern 3A corresponds to the SP reach B hit effect, and the variation pattern 4A corresponds to the SP reach B hit effect. The variation pattern 5A corresponds to the effect per SPSP reach A, and corresponds to the effect per SPSP reach B. That is, the effect control device 143 controls the display control device 350 so that when the variation pattern is grasped from the received variation start command, the game rotation effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach hit effects, after the reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hit symbols. Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (big hit). In the case of (result), the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started in the gaming machine in which the gaming state becomes the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player. This is a display state for the player to think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be possible is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, the symbol of the symbol row other than the final stop row is hit on the effective line in the display screen G in the state where the symbol of the final stop row is variablely displayed. The reach line is formed by displaying the stop display in a manner constituting the symbol combination of.

In the normal reach hit effect, after the above reach display is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols. The SP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the normal reach effect, and a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears after the formation of the reach line is performed, and after the predetermined effect, the symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot symbol combination. be. It should be noted that the content of the predetermined effect after the reach line is formed is different between the SP reach A effect and the SP reach B effect. The SPSP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the SP reach effect, and after the development effect developed from the SP reach effect is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols. The SPSP reach A production develops from the SP reach A production, and the SPSP reach B production develops from the reach B production.

The items in the "Remarks (Production mode)" column in FIG. 14A are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 1H, the variation pattern 2H (15 sec), the variation pattern 3H (60 sec), and the variation pattern 4H (variation pattern 4H) are selectable variation patterns. 60 sec), a variation pattern 5A (120 sec), and a variation pattern 6H (120 sec) are set. The point that the fluctuation display time is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is the same as the fluctuation display time table for big hits, but the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1H is the first special figure or the first special figure at that time. It varies depending on the number of reserved figures in the second special figure. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 2 or less, the fluctuation display time is 8 sec, and when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 3 or more. Is configured so that the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

The variation pattern 1H corresponds to the complete deviation effect on the symbol display device 75, the variation pattern 2H corresponds to the normal reach deviation effect, the variation pattern 3H corresponds to the SP reach A deviation effect, and the variation pattern 4H corresponds to the SP reach B deviation effect. The variation pattern 5H corresponds to the SPSP reach A out-of-effect effect, and the variation pattern 6H corresponds to the SPSP reach B out-of-effect effect.

In the complete off effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the off symbols without the reach display being performed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects, after the reach display is performed, each symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a combination of symbols out of reach (the symbol of the final stop row that is stopped and displayed on the reach line is the reach symbol. It is stopped and displayed in a state where it becomes a symbol other than the symbol that forms a big hit by the combination). It should be noted that the SP reach A off effect corresponds to the SP reach A hit effect, and after the same type of predetermined effect as the SP reach A hit effect is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the out reach symbols. Is. Further, the SP reach B off effect, the SPSP reach A off effect, and the SPSP reach B off effect also correspond to the SP reach B per effect, the SPSP reach A per effect, and the SPSP reach B off effect, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 2A, and "13" to "28" correspond to the fluctuation pattern. Corresponding to 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the variation display time table for deviation, "0" to "59" of the variation type counter CS correspond to the variation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to the variation pattern 2H, and "80" to "80". "89" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 6H. are doing.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 is the jackpot result, the variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is most likely to be selected, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is the wrong result. The variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is most difficult to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B effect is the reach effect that is most easily executed when it is a big hit and is the most difficult to be executed when it is off, so it functions as the highest reach effect with the highest expectation of a big hit. Become.

Fluctuation patterns other than the variation pattern 5A and the variation pattern 6H are also more likely to be selected when the jackpot is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the upper reach effect, and are less likely to be selected when the variation pattern is out of order. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach A production <SP reach B production <SPSP reach A production.

The random number counter C3 per normal figure is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The random number counter C3 per normal figure is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 63a to the open state by the value of the stored random number counter C3. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the general electric accessory 63a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the general electric accessory 63a is not controlled to the open state.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processing of the MPU 312 is roughly divided into a main processing activated when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing and a normal processing executed to advance the game, and an NMI activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
The NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 interrupts the control during execution. And start NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt process, first, in step Sa11, the data of the register used in the MPU 312 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step Sa12, a power failure flag (information on the occurrence of a power failure state) is set in the backup area. In step Sa13, the data saved in the backup area is returned to the used register of the MPU 312 again, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. If the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the register used by the MPU 312, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

After the NMI interrupt processing is executed, the power failure processing is executed by confirming that the power failure flag is set in the normal processing described later. The process will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 312.

In step Sa101, reading processing of various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the first operating port 62, the winning detection flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and the winning in the second operating port 63 is won. If it is determined that the flag has occurred, the winning detection flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sa102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the normal number per map random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the normal number per figure counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa104, a winning process for thru accompanying a winning to the thru gate 64 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. The value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step Sa103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c on condition that the number of reserved character holdings stored is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step Sa104, the process proceeds to step Sa105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

<Prize processing for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port of step Sa105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 62 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 62a for the first operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62, in step Sa202, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 181.

In step Sa203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62. In step Sa204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first special figure hold area Ra is read, and the start hold storage number RaN held and stored in the first special figure hold area Ra is set (hereinafter). , First start hold storage number RaN). After that, in step Sa205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa201 (when a prize has not been generated in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step Sa206, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second operating port 63. Is determined by the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63, a prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sa207.

In step Sa208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63. In step Sa209, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second special figure hold area Rb is read, and the start hold storage number RbN held and stored in the second special figure hold area Rb is set (hereinafter). , Second start hold storage number RbN). After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step Sa205, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa206 (when no prize has been awarded to the second operating port 63), the main prize processing is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in step Sa202 or step Sa207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sa205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa301, it is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa204 or step Sa209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage numbers of the special drawing hold areas Ra and Rb corresponding in step Sa302 are started. N is incremented by 1. In step Sa303, the value stored in the total number of reservations storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) is incremented by one.

In step Sa304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding free storage area of the reserved area for the special figure display unit, that is, in step Sa302. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages incremented by 1.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is set in the hold area Ra for the first special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure incremented by 1 in step Sa302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are set to the hold area Rb for the second special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure incremented by 1 in step Sa302.

In step Sa305, a hold look-ahead process for executing the hold notice effect described later is executed. The details of the hold look-ahead process will be described later. After the execution of step Sa305, this information acquisition process is terminated.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main processing is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is executed when an external power supply is supplied.

First, in step Sa2001, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a wait process is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (payout control device 181 or the like) to be in an operable state. In the following step Sa2002, the access of the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step Sa2003, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch of the power supply and the emission control device 191 is turned on, and in the following step Sa2004, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step Sa2005, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in step Sa2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step Sa2005 is compared with the RAM determination value saved when the power failure state occurs, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they match, the RAM determination value is regarded as normal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. On the contrary, when the two do not match, the RAM determination value is regarded as abnormal and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 314 is correctly stored.

If the RAM determination value is normal, the process proceeds to step Sa2007, the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 312, and the stack state is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step Sa2008, a power recovery command for returning the control device on the sub side (payout control device 181 or the like) to the gaming state before the power failure is output. In step Sa2009, the power failure flag stored in the backup area is cleared. After that, interrupt permission is set in step Sa2010, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa2003 (when the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa2006 (when the RAM judgment value is not normal), the process proceeds to step Sa2011, and the control device on the sub side (payout control) An initialization command is output to initialize the device 181 etc.). In step Sa2012, the used area of RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa 2013, the initialization process of RAM 314 is executed. After that, interrupt permission is set in step Sa2010, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps Sa401 to Sa408 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps Sa409 and Sa410 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step Sa401. In the external signal output processing of step Sa401, the output data such as the timer interrupt processing or the command set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. If an effect command such as a variation start command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 143.

In step Sa402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa403, the game times control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display unit 43, and the like are performed.

In step Sa404, the game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game times control process in step Sa403 and the game state transition process in step Sa404 will be described later.

In step Sa405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the general electric accessory 63a provided in the second operating port 63 is executed. In this electric service support process, a normal figure of whether or not to open the normal electric service object 63a by using the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C3 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314. A winning / failing lottery is performed, and if a winning result is obtained, the opening / closing process of the general electric accessory 63a is executed. In addition, the display control of the normal drawing display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery.

Here, as already described, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the general electric accessory 63a, and the game state transition process described later switches to either support mode. The migration will take place. Through this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, the high-frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric accessory 63a is in the open state when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 63a occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

In step Sa406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 191. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sa407, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power failure flag is set in the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed when the power failure state occurs, and is for the MPU 312 to grasp the occurrence of the power failure state.

When the power failure flag is not stored (when the power failure state has not occurred), whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step Sa408, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the current normal process ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step Sa409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314. Further, in step Sa410, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps Sa401 to Sa408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa407 (when the power failure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa411 to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process. In step Sa412, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sa413, the power failure flag is set in the backup area.

In step Sa414, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step Sa415, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Even after the power supply is completely cut off, the power supply and the power for holding the data storage of the RAM 314 are supplied from the power supply and the emission control device 191. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power supply is cut off remains as it is. It is retained for a period of time (eg, 1 or 2 days).

<Game times control process>
The game rotation control process of step Sa403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the processes after step Sa502, that is, the process for starting the game times in steps Sa502 to Sa505, the process for proceeding with the game times in steps Sa506 to Sa507, and the process for proceeding with the game times in steps Sa508 to Sa509 are completed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special figure game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating openings 62 and 63 have been won.

It should be noted that the game times (general game times) based on the winning / failing lottery triggered by winning the through gate 64 are executed regardless of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. That is, although the execution of the special figure game is restricted during the open / close execution mode, the normal figure game is executed in the same manner as when it is not in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, when the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery is a winning result in the opening / closing execution mode, the second operating port 63 (common electric accessory 63a) is opened.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step Sa502 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is in the variable display. It should be noted that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The variable display flag is stored when starting the variable display for either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS, and is cleared when the variable display ends.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step Sa503, and it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuating port 62 and the second actuating port 63. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

When the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data for setting the data stored in the first special figure hold area Ra or the second special figure hold area Rb for variable display in step Sa504. After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display in the symbol display device 75 in step Sa505, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process of step Sa504 and the fluctuation start process of step Sa505 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operation port 62) of step Sa602 to step Sa608 is executed, and the second start hold storage number RbN becomes. If it is not "0", the data setting process for the second special figure (second operating port 63) of steps Sa609 to Sa615 is executed.

As described above, where the data setting process is performed when the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold storage number RaN and the second start hold storage number. It means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", that is, the second special figure. It is configured to execute the process related to the hold information for the first special figure on condition that the hold information for the first special figure does not exist. Therefore, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first special figure and the hold area Rb for the second special figure, the second special figure stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure is stored. The hold information for the figure (second operating port 63) is preferentially processed.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, in step Sa602, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first special figure is decremented by 1. In step Sa603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa604, the data stored in the first area of the first special drawing reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa605, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area Ra is executed. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to the lower area.

In step Sa606, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the holding information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step Sa607.

After the execution of step Sa607 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa606 (when the second special figure flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa608, and the effect control device 143 is informed that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first special figure, that is, to the first operation port 62. A shift command including information that it is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sa608 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, in step Sa609, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second special figure hold area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sa610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa611, the data stored in the first area of the second special drawing reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa612, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area Rb is executed. In step Sa613, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step Sa614.

After the execution of step Sa614 or when a positive judgment is made in step Sa613 (when the second special figure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa615, and the control device on the sub side indicates that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. A shift command (shift generation information), which is information for being recognized by the effect control device 143, is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second special figure, that is, corresponds to the second operation port 63. A shift command including information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sa613 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa701, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The high-probability mode flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high-probability mode, and is set when shifting to the high-probability mode.

If it is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step Sa702 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode (for example, "7"). .. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode in step Sa703. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a value set as a jackpot winning for the high probability mode (for example, "7", "17", "27", "37". , "47")).

After the execution of step Sa702 or step Sa703, in step Sa704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sa702 or step Sa703 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in step Sa705, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step Sa706, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the first special figure display unit (FIG. 13 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step Sa707, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 10R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After the execution of step Sa706 or step Sa707, in step Sa708, the type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the lottery of S706 or step Sa707 is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sa709, the stop result for the jackpot is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result of the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa704 (when a big hit does not occur), the process proceeds to step Sa710, and a stop result for disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, only one type of stop result for disengagement is provided, and the stop result is set in step Sa710.

After the execution of step Sa709 or step Sa710, in step Sa711, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS. To execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step Sa801, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in this game round is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step Sa802, and a variable display time table (FIG. 14 (a)) for a big hit is acquired as a table for drawing a variable display time (variable pattern). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit but a miss, the process proceeds to step Sa803 to acquire a variable display time table (FIG. 14 (b)) for the miss.

After the execution of step Sa802 or step Sa803, the lottery process of the variable display time (variable pattern) is executed in step Sa804 using the variable display time table acquired in step Sa802 or step Sa803. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is specified from the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step Sa805, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified in step Sa804 is set as the variation display time of the current game times. In this step, the value of the fluctuation display time corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, when the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as a corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. After the execution of step Sa805, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after the execution of step Sa711, the variation start command and the type command are set in step Sa712. The fluctuation start command contains information on the fluctuation pattern. As the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern for the deviation are set separately (FIG. 14). Therefore, in the staging control device 143, the fluctuation pattern is analyzed from the fluctuation start command, so that the main control device 162 It is possible to determine the result of the hit / fail judgment performed in. That is, the fluctuation start command includes not only the information regarding the fluctuation display time but also the information regarding the result of the pass / fail determination. In addition, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. The type command is set only when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step Sa712 are transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. To. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 143.

In step Sa713, the variable display of the special figure display unit 43 is started. At that time, referring to the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, when the second special figure flag is stored, it is assumed that this game time corresponds to the second special figure, and the pattern of the second special figure display unit BS. Is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is not stored, the pattern of the first special figure display unit AS is variablely displayed, assuming that the game times this time correspond to the first special figure. After the execution of step Sa713, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game times control process (FIG. 21), if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa502 (when the special figure display unit 43 is displaying fluctuations), the process proceeds to step Sa506, and the fluctuation display time of the current game times is reached. Determines whether or not has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 is "0".

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step Sa507. In the variable display processing, the special figure display unit is displayed and controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display unit related to this game round. )do. After the execution of step Sa507, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step Sa508. In the variation end processing, each special figure display unit AS, BS is controlled so that the pattern displayed in variation is stopped and displayed at the stop result set in step Sa709 or step Sa710.

In step Sa509, a variable end command is set, and then the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set in step Sa509 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The staging control device 143 transmits the received variable end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the variable end command, the display control device 350 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition process>
The game state transition process of step Sa404 (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step Sa902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display on each special figure display unit AS, BS ends (confirmation display ends). If it is not the end timing of the variation display, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When it is the end timing of the variation display, in step Sa903, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, that is, whether or not the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. do. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by referring to whether or not the type flag (step Sa708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of this game round does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa903 (when the game result of this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa904 and the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the start process, the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. In addition, an opening period for waiting for the start of the first round is set while the variable winning device 65 is closed. Further, when the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, a process of clearing these flags is executed.

In step Sa905, a round display start process for notifying the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is executed. In this step, the current jackpot type is grasped based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. The display of the number of rounds on the round display unit is continued until the open / close execution mode ends.

In step Sa906, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not a 10R probability variation jackpot result, that is, either a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sa907. do. On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC in step Sa908.

After the execution of step Sa907 or step Sa908, in step Sa909, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

In step Sa910, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa901 (when the open / close execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step Sa911, and it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the opening period has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step Sa912.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa1001, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 65d. If the large winning opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step Sa1002 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 in step Sa1003 is "0". Determine if it exists. This process determines whether or not the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

When the value of the timer area T is "0", the process proceeds to step Sa1004, and the timer area T is set to "15000" as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. To set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. In step Sa1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit winning number (10 pieces) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step Sa1006, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven in order to open the large winning opening 65a. In step Sa1007, an opening command for notifying the staging control device 143 that the opening of the large winning opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa1002 (when the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa1003 (when the value of the timer area T is not 0), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is performed as it is. finish.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1001 (when the large winning opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step Sa1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". This process determines whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in step Sa1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sa1009, and it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large winning opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize is generated, the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step Sa1010, and then, whether or not the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" is determined in step Sa1011. judge. If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa1008 (when the value of the timer area T is 0) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sa1011 (when the value of the winning counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step Sa1012 and the drive unit. The 65d is switched to the non-driving state and the large winning opening 65a is closed. In step Sa1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step Sa1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”.

If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step Sa1015, and the period of waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable winning device 65 closed. As a value corresponding to (2 sec), "1000" is set in the timer area T.

In step Sa1016, a closing command for notifying the staging control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round game has ended) is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1014 (when the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, when the final round of the open / close execution mode is completed, the process proceeds to step Sa1017 and the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending period is set for waiting for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open / close execution mode ends) while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. In step Sa1018, an ending command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step Sa912, it is determined in step Sa913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the open / close execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process proceeds to step Sa914, and it is determined whether or not the ending has ended (whether or not the ending period has elapsed). If the ending is not completed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, when the ending is completed, the process proceeds to step Sa915, and the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step Sa1101, the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sa1102, and the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sa1103. As a result, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode (so-called probabilistic game state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After the execution of step Sa1103, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1101 (if the current jackpot is not a probable variable jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sa1104, and the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. To set. If the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, so that the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode by the processing of step Sa1104 (so-called time saving). Move to the game state). In the following step Sa1105, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure game is executed in the situation where the game is in a short-time game state, and when the value of the game count counter area becomes "0", the above-mentioned various flags are used. The high frequency support flag stored in the storage area 314e is cleared. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving game state ends after 100 game times are performed, and after that, the game state shifts to the game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. do. After the execution of step Sa1105, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of step Sa915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sa916. In this process, the round display unit is controlled so that the round display unit in the special figure display unit 43 is turned off.

In step Sa917, the end processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, a process of erasing the type flag and the open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

<Hold look-ahead processing>
The hold look-ahead process of step Sa305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. This process is executed when the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the first actuating port 62 or the second actuating port 63, and the acquired hold information is changed according to the hold information. Prior to the execution of the start processing (FIG. 23), the presence / absence of a big hit, the big hit type, and the lottery of the fluctuation pattern are performed.

First, in step Sa1201, the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the hold ball storage areas Ra and Rb of the hold ball storage area 314b and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 314b. And stores the information in the register of MPU312.

In step Sa1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step Sa304 (FIG. 18) based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 (randomness for determining whether or not to win). Numerical value) is grasped. In step Sa1203, the hit / fail determination is performed using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step Sa1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the hold information is acquired is the low probability mode, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and if the lottery mode when the hold information is acquired is the high probability mode. The pass / fail judgment is made by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

In step Sa1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sa1202 is a big hit winning. If the jackpot is won, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (lottery for the jackpot type) included in the hold information acquired based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in step Sa1205. Random numbers for).

In step Sa1206, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa1205. At this time, if the holding information is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special drawing (FIG. 13A) and hold the holding based on the winning of the second operating port 63. In the case of information, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is specified with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)). The processing of steps Sa1203 to Sa1206 is the same as that of steps Sa701 to Sa707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step Sa1207, the jackpot information indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot and the type information indicating the jackpot type drawn in step Sa1206 are stored in the register of the MPU 312.

After the execution of step Sa1207 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa1204 (when the jackpot is not won), the hold information acquired based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in step Sa1208 is added. Grasp the value of the included variation type counter CS. In step Sa1209, a lottery of the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is performed using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step Sa1208. At this time, if the acquired hold information corresponds to the jackpot, refer to the variable display time table for the jackpot (FIG. 14 (a)), and if the acquired hold information corresponds to the deviation. , The variation display time table for deviation (FIG. 14B) is referred to, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is specified. The process of this step is the same as that of steps Sa801 to Sa804 in the variable display time setting process.

In step Sa1210, the fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern drawn in step Sa1209 is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In step Sa1211, a hold command is set as an output target to the effect control device 143, and then the hold look-ahead process is terminated. In the hold command, in addition to the information indicating whether the hold information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, various information stored in the register (information of the start hold storage number RaN, RbN, common). Hold number CRN information, jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information) is included. As described above, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be grasped from the fluctuation pattern, a hold command may be set so as not to include the jackpot information. The hold command set in step Sa1211 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<About the electrical configuration of the staging control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configurations of the staging control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 342 is mounted on the staging control board 341 provided in the staging control device 143. The MPU 342 is a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A certain RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game turn control commands such as change start commands, type commands, and change end commands, and open / close execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands are available. Receive various commands.

As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 342, and the display control device 350 is connected to the output side.

Further, an effect operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. The staging operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the operation of the staging operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the staging operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the operation mode of what kind of operation has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377, respectively, are mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes the command received from the effect control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 372 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 372. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP375 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 377.

<About various processes executed by the staging control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the staging control device 143 will be described.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step Sa1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command from the main control device 162 has been received. The hold command received from the main control device 162 is stored in the command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command. Therefore, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be satisfactorily executed.

In the determination of step Sa1301, it is determined whether or not the hold command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. When the hold command is stored (when the hold command is received), in step Sa1302, for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 (FIG. 9B) of the display screen G. Executes pending command support processing. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later.

After the execution of step Sa1302 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa1301 (when a hold command is not received), it is determined in step Sa1303 whether or not a shift command from the main control unit 162 is received. If a shift command has been received, in step Sa1304, a shift command correspondence process for shifting the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 is executed. The details of the shift command correspondence process will be described later.

After the execution of step Sa1304 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa1303 (when the shift command is not received), in step Sa1305, the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc. The special figure variation display processing for performing the above is executed. The details of the special figure variation display processing will be described later.

In step Sa1306, the process for opening / closing execution mode for performing the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the open / close execution mode process, in addition to the round effect in the open / close execution mode, a process for performing an opening effect, an ending effect, a winning effect when a prize is won in the variable winning device 65, and the like is executed.

In step Sa1307, the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. The details of the staging mode switching process will be described later.

In step Sa1308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In other processes, the demo screen display when the start prize does not occur for a predetermined period, the switch to the power saving mode for reducing the power consumption by stopping the image display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc. are performed. Perform the process to do it.

<Processing for pending commands>
The command correspondence process of step Sa1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa1401, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the hold information (big hit information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 344c is provided with the holding area SRa for the first special drawing and the holding area SRb for the second special drawing corresponding to the holding ball storage area 314b on the main control device 162 side. Has been done. Each of the reserved areas SRa and SRb has four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Further, the holding storage area 344c is provided with an execution area SAE corresponding to the execution area AE on the main control device 162 side.

In step Sa1401, based on the hold command, whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure and the number of hold information in the corresponding special figure are determined respectively. It is grasped and the fluctuation pattern information (in the case of a big hit, further big hit information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the hold storage area 344c. For example, when the hold information this time is the second hold information corresponding to the first special figure, the fluctuation pattern information or the like is stored in the second storage area of the hold area SRa for the first special figure.

After the execution of step Sa1401, in step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (start hold storage number SN) is incremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a hold number counter for the first special figure and a hold number counter for the second special figure, and in step Sa1402, the start hold storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1403, the setting process for the hold notice for executing the hold notice effect is executed. Here, the hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

In the present embodiment, depending on the display mode of the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G, the hold notice effect of notifying or suggesting the expectation that the hold image will generate a big hit in the corresponding game times. Is to be done. As the display mode of the hold image, a normal display mode when the hold notice effect is not performed and a specific display mode when the hold notice effect is performed are set, and a plurality of displays are further set in the specific display mode. Aspects are set.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned expectation degree is suggested by the display color (color) of the reserved image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (for example, white) is set as the normal display mode, and the main display color is set as the specific display mode. There are four types of blue display mode HMb, which is blue, green display mode HMc, which is green, red display mode HMd, which is red, and rainbow color display mode HMe, which is rainbow color. .. In FIG. 33A, different hatching is added according to the difference in display color.

In the specific display mode, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, and thereafter, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of green display mode HMc <red display mode HMd <rainbow color display mode HMe. The rainbow-colored display mode HMe suggests a big hit.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests an effect in which the reserved image is performed in the corresponding game times. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that the reach effect (either the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, or the SPSP reach effect) of the order higher than the normal reach effect is performed in the game times corresponding to the reserved image. However, the green display mode HMc suggests that the reach effect of the order higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed.

The above-mentioned hold notice effect using the hold image is a period from the start of display of the hold image to which the effect is to be performed to the end of the display, in other words, the game round of the hold information ends from the generation of the hold information. It is done using at least a part of the period up to. There are multiple execution timings of the hold notice effect during the period (holding period) in which the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb, such as when the hold image is displayed at the start or when the hold image is shifted. Timing is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), a plurality of execution timings of the hold notice effect during the execution of the game round are set as hold change points. Each hold change point is set according to, for example, the start timing (variation start timing) of the game round, the start timing of various reach effects, the development timing of the reach effects, and the like.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), in the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403, when the execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect for the hold information this time and the hold notice effect are executed. The process of setting the display mode of the pending image of is executed. The details of the setting process for the hold notice will be described later.

In step Sa1404, the first execution process of the hold notice for executing the hold notice effect is executed. In the first execution process of the hold notice, the execution control of the hold notice effect is performed based on the setting result of step Sa1403. The details of the first execution process of the hold notice will be described later.

In step Sa1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that the hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information on whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and information indicating which number of the hold information it is. After the execution of step Sa1405, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step Sa1501, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern and the like (look-ahead result) in the holding information this time are grasped. In step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern or the like grasped in step Sa1501.

If it does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, if it is the pending information corresponding to the deviation, the process proceeds to step Sa1503, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the reserved information is the variation pattern 1H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation). Is determined. When a negative judgment is made in step Sa1503 (when the fluctuation pattern is other than the fluctuation pattern 1H) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sa1502 (when the pending information corresponds to the jackpot), the current effect mode is grasped in step Sa1504. do.

Here, the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 35. In the present embodiment, the effect mode A and the effect mode B are set as the effect modes of the game effect executed on the display screen G. The effect mode A and the effect mode B can be identified from the player's point of view. For example, the background images 401 displayed on the back side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the hold display unit 200 are different in both effect modes. It is supposed to be done.

These effect modes can be manually switched by the operation of the player. Specifically, a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36 (FIG. 1) during the valid period of the mode switching. It is possible to switch by. For example, if a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36 in a situation where the effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect mode is switched to the effect mode B, and the effect operation is performed in the situation where the effect mode B is set. When a predetermined operation is performed by the unit 36, the effect mode is switched to the effect mode A.

Further, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned hold notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, and the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in the effect mode A is configured to be higher than that of the effect mode B. There is. The configuration for differentiating the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is not particularly limited, but for example, in any of the effect modes, the hold notice effect is executed via the execution lottery, and then the effect mode B It is conceivable that the winning probability of the above-mentioned execution lottery when the reserved information corresponds to the deviation is made lower than that of the staging mode A.

In this case, in the effect mode B, the proportion of the hold notice effect to be executed corresponding to the pre-reading of the jackpot is higher than that of the effect mode A, so that the jackpot expectation when the hold notice effect is executed is high. Become. That is, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed, and the effect is made to function as an easy-to-enjoy mode. It can function as a high mode.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, in the effect mode A, a hold image imitating a game ball is displayed, whereas in the effect mode B, a hold image imitating a star is displayed. For example, the base image of the hold image may be different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), after grasping the current effect mode in step Sa1504, in step Sa1505, the corresponding hold notice execution lottery table is displayed from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. get. A plurality of hold notice execution lottery tables are set according to the presence or absence of a big hit and the effect mode. For example, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information this time is a big hit is set to have a higher winning probability than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case of being out of order. Further, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode A and corresponding to the case where the current hold information is out of order corresponds to the effect mode B and the hold notice execution corresponding to the case where the present hold information is out of order. The winning probability is set higher than the lottery table.

In step Sa1506, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold notice execution lottery table acquired in step Sa1505 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. I do. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa1506 is a winning result.

If the lottery result is an execution winning, the process proceeds to step Sa1508 to grasp the corresponding number of holdings. In this step, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and it is grasped whether the hold information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and the number of hold of the corresponding special figure is grasped. .. The number of pending information in this case is the number including the current pending information. For example, if the hold information this time is stored in the third area of the first special figure hold area SRa in the hold storage area 344c, the hold information corresponds to the first special figure and the number of holds thereof. Is understood to be 3. When the hold information this time is stored in the first area of the hold area SRa for the first special figure (when it is the first hold information), the hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. When (when the game times are executed), 1 is grasped as the above-mentioned hold number, and when the hold information is not stored in the execution area SAE (when the game times are not executed), 0 is grasped as the above-mentioned hold number. do.

In step Sa1509, the final display mode lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. In the present embodiment, not only the display mode of the hold image is changed only once to perform the hold notice effect, but also the display mode of the hold image may be changed a plurality of times to perform the hold notice effect. It is configured. The final display mode lottery table is a table for drawing the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect.

In the final display mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, a range of selectable final display modes and a selection probability of each display mode are set corresponding to each variation pattern. In FIG. 36, the item of "remarks (effect mode)" indicating the game rotation effect corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience, and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

Further, in the final display mode lottery table, a final display mode lottery table for big hits (FIG. 36 (a)) and a final display mode lottery table for disengagement (FIG. 36 (b)) are set, and each of them is set. In the lottery table, the selection range of the final display mode and the selection probability of each option are different according to each variation pattern.

In the final display mode lottery table for big hits, as the range of the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect, when the hold information this time is the fluctuation pattern 1A (per normal reach), the blue display mode HMb and the rainbow color display mode HMe , Fluctuation pattern 2A (per SP reach A) or variation pattern 3A (per SP reach B) blue display mode HMb and green display mode HMc and rainbow color display mode HMe, variation pattern 4A (per SPSP reach A) or variation In the case of pattern 5A (per SPSP reach B), a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow color display mode HMe are set. Therefore, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the hold notice effect, the hold information is more than the normal reach effect in the corresponding game times (the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect). It is suggested that the reach effect of the rank is performed, and when the image for holding the green display mode HMc is displayed, it is suggested that the reach effect of the rank higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the hold of the red display mode HMd is used. When the image is displayed, it suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed.

Further, even in the final display mode lottery table for disengagement, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the hold notice effect, the reach effect of the order higher than the normal reach effect is performed in the game times corresponding to the hold image. When the hold image of the green display mode HMc is displayed, it is suggested that the reach effect of the order higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the hold image of the red display mode HMd is displayed. In this case, the selection range of the final display mode corresponding to each variation pattern is defined so as to suggest that the SPSP reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the hold notice effect is performed and any of the blue, green, and red hold images is displayed, the player can predict what level of reach effect will be performed. However, it is not possible to determine whether or not there is a big hit.

In the final display mode lottery table for removal, the rainbow color display mode HMe is not set as an option of the final display mode, and the reserved image of the rainbow color display mode HMe is displayed only when it is a big hit. It has become. Therefore, the hold image of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe suggests a big hit, and when the hold image is displayed, the player knows that the big hit will occur at the game times corresponding to the hold image. Can be predicted.

In the final display mode lottery table for big hits, the selection probability of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is suppressed to a small probability (for example, 5%) in any variation pattern. This is because if the selection probability of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is increased, there are frequent opportunities for the player to recognize the jackpot before the game round is executed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game round production may be diminished. This is to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. As for the selection probability in the other options, the higher display mode is more likely to be selected than the lower display mode in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of the variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for out-of-order, it is difficult to select a higher display mode than in the case of the final display mode lottery table for big hits. For example, in the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP reach A effect in the final display mode lottery table for big hits, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas the final display mode lottery for deviation is performed. In the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect in the table, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd remains at 10%.

In each final display mode lottery table for big hits and misses, the selection tendency of the display mode is set as described above, so that even if the type of reach effect performed in the game round is the same, the game The expectation of a big hit is higher when a higher display mode is displayed as a hold image corresponding to the times.

In the present embodiment, a table common to the effect mode A and the effect mode B is used as the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot and the final display mode lottery table for the miss, but different tables are used in each of the effect modes. It may be configured to be set.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1509, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot of the hold information is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern or the like grasped in step Sa1501. In step Sa1510, this hold is based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step Sa1509, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. The final display mode in the notice production will be drawn by lottery.

The lottery counter is acquired when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received, in other words, when hold information subject to lottery processing is generated. This also applies to the counter (random value) used for other lottery processes executed by the effect control device 143.

In step Sa1511, the effect scenario lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. The staging scenario lottery table is a table for drawing a staging scenario for the hold notice effect.

In the effect scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of effect scenarios are set corresponding to the number of holds and the final display mode of the hold notice effect. Specifically, groups from the group of the effect scenario 0 corresponding to the number of hold = 0 to the group of the effect scenario 4 corresponding to the number of hold = 4 are set, and in each group, the final display modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set. A group of production scenarios for each color is set in correspondence with. Then, a lottery random number value of 0 to 99 is assigned as a group of production scenarios for one color. For example, when the number of reservations is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, the staging scenario 0 blue (1) and the staging scenario 0 blue (2) are selected from among them. The one corresponding to the random value is selected.

Each effect scenario defines at what timing and in what display mode the hold image is displayed in the hold notice effect in which the final display mode is determined. When the reserved information corresponding to the first special figure is pre-read, the number of reserved first special figures at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode by lottery. Taking the effect scenario 4 red (1) as an example, in the scenario, the hold image is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga (FIG. 9 (b)) in the blue display mode HMb. Later, when the hold image is moved and displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2, it is changed to the green display mode HMc, and then the hold image is displayed in the execution display area D (for the hold). It is stipulated that the red display mode HMd is changed during the execution of the game times corresponding to the image).

Although not shown in FIG. 37, in the production scenario in which the display mode of the hold image is changed in the execution display area D, the display mode is changed at which timing (which hold change point) in the game round. It is also stipulated. In addition, there is also an effect scenario in which the display mode is changed a plurality of times during the execution of the game round. For example, in the effect scenario 0 green (2), the hold image is displayed at the previous hold change point during the execution of the game round. After changing from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb, it is stipulated that the display mode HMc is further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later pending change point.

In addition, "G4 (ho 4)" to "G1 (ho 1)" in "remarks (effect mode)" of FIG. 37 are displays when the hold image is displayed in each unit hold display area of the hold display unit 200. The aspect is shown. Further, in "D (during game)", the display mode when the hold image is shifted from the first unit hold display area to the execution display area D, and the hold image are displayed in the execution display area D. The display mode in the period is shown. Incidentally, the items in the "Remarks (Direction mode)" column are added for convenience, and are not set in the production scenario lottery table.

Further, as the staging scenario lottery table, a staging scenario lottery table for big hits and a staging scenario lottery table for losing are set. In the present embodiment, a common table is used in the production mode A and the production mode B as the production scenario lottery table for the jackpot and the production scenario lottery table for the miss, but as a configuration in which different tables are set in each of the production modes. May be good. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a production scenario lottery table for big hits.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1511, based on the fluctuation pattern and the like grasped in step Sa1501, the effect scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot of the hold information is acquired. In step Sa1512, the number of holds grasped in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the staging scenario lottery table acquired in step Sa1511, and the lottery counter (random value value) acquired from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. ) And, the production scenario in this hold notice production will be drawn.

In step Sa1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario drawn in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice ends. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed.

In addition, when affirmative judgment is made in step Sa1503 (when the fluctuation pattern of the hold information is fluctuation pattern 1H (complete deviation)) or when a negative judgment is made in step Sa1507 (when it is out of the execution lottery of the hold notice effect). , Step Sa1515, and the display mode of the reserved image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Process for the first execution of the hold notice>
The first execution process of the hold notice of step Sa1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38 (a).

First, in step Sa1601, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is not stored, that is, if the situation is not such that the hold notice effect should be executed, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is stored and the hold notice effect should be executed, the process proceeds to step Sa1602, and the hold image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is displayed in the display mode. Determine if it is the change timing. That is, it is determined whether or not the reserved image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made with reference to the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34). If it is not the timing to change the display mode, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the case of the change timing of the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step Sa1603. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image changes (ranks up). The mode of the change suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39A, a predetermined character image 402 is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display unit 200 at a predetermined timing before the hold image changes. When performing the change suggestion effect according to the generation timing of the hold information, the hold image is first displayed in the normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. After that, an image in which the character performs a predetermined action is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the display mode of the reserved image is changed to a higher display mode. The character image 402 is deleted after changing the display mode of the reserved image.

In step Sa1603, the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. .. In step Sa1604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa1603 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a winning result, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 in step Sa1605. Specifically, a command to the effect that the change suggestion effect should be executed is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

In the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect can be executed only when the display mode of the hold image is changed, but the change suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold image is not changed. It may be a possible configuration. That is, even when the display mode of the reserved image is not changed, the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect may be performed.

As a change suggestion effect in such a case, for example, after displaying a predetermined character image 402 as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the character does not perform a predetermined action or performs an action different from the action. After that, it is conceivable that the character image 402 is erased without changing the display mode of the reserved image, and the display mode before displaying the character image 402 is maintained as it is. However, if such a fake effect occurs frequently, the player's expectation for the change suggestion effect may be lost, so it is advisable to keep the execution frequency low. Specifically, the execution winning probability of the change suggestion effect when the display mode is not changed is lower than that when the display mode is changed, in other words, the display mode of the hold image when the character image 402 is displayed. The frequency with which does not change should be lower than the frequency with which it changes.

After the execution of step Sa1605 or when a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of. Specifically, it is possible to grasp which of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe is used to display the reserved image.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. When this process is performed when the hold command is received (when the hold image is additionally displayed), the initial display mode of the hold image to be additionally displayed is set to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606.

At that time, when the change suggestion effect is not executed, the hold image is set to be displayed in any specific display mode indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, when the change suggestion effect is executed, it is set so as to change to the specific display mode indicated by the effect scenario after displaying in the normal display mode HMa. When the setting process of step Sa1607 is executed, in step Sa1405 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), the command is executed so that the information of the display mode set in step Sa1607 is included in the hold display command to the display control device 350. Set.

In step Sa1608, information indicating the display mode of the reserved image this time is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the display mode storage area 344e, an area is provided corresponding to the hold information (hold image) of each special figure and the hold information during the game round. The display mode of the reserved image can be stored in each area. For example, when the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga, the display mode storage area 344e corresponds to the second area for the first special figure (corresponding to the second hold information). The information of being displayed in the blue display mode HMb is stored in the area). By the way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. It should be noted that the display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the hold storage area 344c. After the execution of step Sa1608, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Processing for shift commands>
The shift command correspondence process of step Sa1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40 (a).

First, in step Sa1701, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect when the hold image is shifted. The process of this step is basically the same as the process for the first execution of the hold notice in step Sa1404 (FIG. 31) (FIG. 38 (a)).

Explaining with reference to FIG. 38 (a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701, the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and the hold notice effect should be executed. If this is the case, in step Sa1602, the shift timing of this time is set for the hold image (hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. It is determined whether or not it is the timing for changing the display mode (display color). This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

When it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step Sa1603, and when the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is performed in step Sa1605. Set to execute the change suggestion effect at. After the execution of step Sa1605 or when a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, information indicating which display mode (display color) to change the display mode of the pending image and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change are included are included. In this way, a command is set to the effect that the display mode of the pending image should be changed at the current shift timing. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the effect scenario at the current shift timing.

In step Sa1608, information on the changed display mode of the reserved image whose display mode is changed is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga is changed to the green display mode HMc when shifting to the first unit hold display area Ga1. , Display mode After erasing the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special drawing (the area corresponding to the second reserved information) in the storage area 344e, the green display information is stored in the same area. do.

Returning to the description of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40), after the process of step Sa1701 is executed, the second execution process of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1702. Since this process is related to the effect mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30), the switching process will be described in detail after the description of the switching process.

In step Sa1703, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a hold number counter for the first special figure and a hold number counter for the second special figure, and in this step, the start hold storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1704, a shift process for moving and displaying the reserved image is executed, and then the process corresponding to the command at the time of this shift is terminated. In the shift process, the hold information stored in the first area of the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the hold information stored in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower area side. Shift. At this time, the information of the display mode stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

Further, in the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled so as to change the display position of the hold image in the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit hold display area. As a state before the control, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b1), a hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga. In that case, as shown in FIG. 40 (b2), the display position of the reserved images is changed to the execution display area D and the first unit hold display area Ga1 by the control. When the display mode of the hold image is set to be changed in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701, the display position is changed and the display mode is changed at the same time.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The special figure variation display process of step Sa1305 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

First, in step Sa1801, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If none of the game rounds is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa1802, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern drawn by the variation display time setting process (FIG. 24) in the main control device 162.

By referring to the information of this fluctuation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which fluctuation display time the special figure game times on the special figure display unit 43 displayed and controlled by the main control device 162 are performed. Further, as already described, since the fluctuation pattern for big hits and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is possible to determine the result of the hit / fail determination from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the special figure change display process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the variation start command is received, the process proceeds to step Sa1803, the variation start process for starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the special figure variation display process is terminated.

In the variation start processing, the variation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the variation pattern related to the current special figure game is specified. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in this special figure game is grasped. In the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, an effect pattern table in which the variation display time is determined in association with each variation pattern is stored. The variation display time defined in the effect pattern table corresponds to the variation display time corresponding to each variation pattern (FIG. 14) in the main control device 162, and one variation in the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162. A common variable display time is assigned to the pattern. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 1A, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 15 sec for both the staging control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the variation display time of the special figure game times this time.

Further, the effect pattern table is associated with the effect pattern for the game rotation effect in association with each variation pattern. As each of these effect patterns, the normal reach, the SP reach A, the SP reach B, the SPSP reach A, the SPSP reach B, the complete deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the SP reach A described in the explanation of the variable display time table are used. Off, SP reach B off, SPSP reach A off, and SPSP reach B off are set. Since the correspondence between the variation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, the description thereof will be omitted. In the variation start process, the effect pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the effect pattern of the special figure game times this time.

Further, in the fluctuation start processing, when the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the special figure game round this time is a big hit, the big hit type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the stop result for the probability variation jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. On the contrary, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the stop result for the jackpot is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the special figure game round this time is wrong, each stop symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is randomly determined. However, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is to perform the reach effect, each stop symbol is determined so that the reach is formed on the effective lines L1 to L5 determined by the lottery. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is set as the stop result of this time.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the stop symbol and information on the effect pattern this time is set as an output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped by the stop result determined by the effect control device 143, or the game is played with the effect pattern determined by the effect control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that the effect is performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1801 (when the game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sa1804, and it is determined whether or not a variation end command has been received from the main control device 162. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed in this special figure game. In this case, in step Sa1805, the variable processing process is executed. In the variable middle processing, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 started by the variable start processing is continued, the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute the process for doing so.

In step Sa1806, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times this time is the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the process for displaying the special figure change is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1807. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect during the execution of the game round of the hold information. The process of this step is basically the same as the process for the first execution of the hold notice in step Sa1404 (FIG. 31) (FIG. 38 (a)).

Explaining with reference to FIG. 38 (a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807, the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and the hold notice effect should be executed. If this is the case, is it the timing to change the display mode of the hold image (hold image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect in step Sa1602? Judge whether or not. This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

When it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step Sa1603, and when the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is performed in step Sa1605. Set to execute the change suggestion effect at. After the execution of step Sa1605 or when a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa1606. As a result, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the effect scenario at a predetermined hold change point during the game. In the following step Sa1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in the area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), after the process of step Sa1807 is executed, the third execution process of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1808. Since this process is related to the effect mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30), the switching process will be described in detail after the description of the switching process. After the execution of step Sa1808, the special figure variation display process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1804 (when the variation end command is received), it means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa1809, and the variable termination process is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 and the effect being executed are terminated (the symbols of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are fixedly stopped).

In step Sa1810, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times this time is the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the process for displaying the special figure change is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether or not the hold notice flag or the return wait flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The details of the return standby flag will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the return wait flag is stored, the flag stored in step Sa1812 is deleted. After the execution of step Sa1812 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa1811 (when neither the hold notice flag nor the return standby flag is stored), the special figure variation display process ends.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed based on whether or not the variation end command is received from the main control device 162. However, when the effect control device 143 starts the variation. Since the fluctuation display time can be grasped from the transmitted fluctuation start command, it may be configured to determine whether or not the fluctuation display time related to the game being executed has elapsed based on the grasped fluctuation display time. In this case, the configuration may be such that the variable end command is not transmitted from the main control device 162.

<Processing for switching the production mode>
The process for switching the effect mode in step Sa1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The effect mode switching process is for switching between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, which have already been described.

First, in step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is in the valid period. In the present embodiment, the period during which the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed or the period during which the open / close execution mode is executed in the special figure game is set as an invalid period during which the effect mode cannot be switched, and other than that. The period of is the valid period for switching the effect mode, including during the execution of the special figure game. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing belongs to the above valid period. If the effect mode switching is not in the valid period, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

If the effect mode switching is in the valid period, the process proceeds to step Sa1902, and the effect operation unit 36 determines whether or not a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the staging mode switching process is terminated as it is.

When the predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step Sa1903, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B. The effect mode may be switched at the timing when the predetermined operation is performed, or at the timing when the next special figure game round is started.

In step Sa1904, the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. In the present embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to the effect mode A and the effect mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the effect mode from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the above-mentioned various types are provided. The mode A flag stored in the flag storage area 344d is deleted, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d.

In step Sa1905, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa1906, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the hold notice flag is not stored, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is stored, that is, when the hold notice effect is being executed or in the standby state thereof, the process proceeds to step Sa1907, and the hold notice flag is cleared. As a result, if the hold notice effect has been executed before the mode is switched, the continuation of the hold notice effect is cancelled. Further, when the hold notice effect is in the waiting state, the execution of the hold notice effect that has been waiting is canceled.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, that is, whether or not the hold image displayed in the specific display mode exists. Specifically, among the reserved images displayed in the reserved display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode (when the hold notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sa1909, and any mode of the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is used. Information indicating whether or not it is displayed in is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, an area is set corresponding to the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and the execution display area D of each special figure, and the display mode of the hold image can be stored in each area. It is possible.

In step Sa1909, the information of the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step Sa1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The information on the display mode may be identification information indicating the display mode or identification information indicating the display color. In short, it suffices as long as the display mode of the hold image can be specified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and any one corresponding to the display mode of the hold image may be used.

By the above processing, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the effect mode, it is possible to grasp which display mode the reserved image was displayed before switching the effect mode. When the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed in the state where the display mode information is stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the return mode is executed. The information of the display mode stored in each area of the area 344f is also shifted to the lower area side in order.

In step Sa1910, a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed. That is, the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. The switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed according to the switching timing of the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is switched at the timing when the above predetermined operation is performed, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and when the effect mode is switched at the start timing of the next special figure game round, the effect mode is switched. The reserved image is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa at the timing.

Further, in the release process of step Sa1910, a process of clearing the information of the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 344e is executed. Therefore, at the time of processing in step Sa1910, the information of the display mode is stored only in the return area 344f. Further, in the release process of step Sa1910, a process of erasing the effect scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the setting process for holding notice (FIG. 34) is also executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched, the acquired hold information, in other words, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect (setting process for the hold notice in FIG. 34) has already been performed. Regarding the pending information, the configuration is such that the execution lottery is restricted again. Specifically, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect will not be performed again, and the same hold information (holding image) will not be executed twice before and after the effect mode is switched. There is.

In step Sa1911, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched and then the original effect mode is switched again, the display mode of the reserved image is returned to the specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the state is waiting for the return process. After the execution of step Sa1911, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1905 (when the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1912 to execute a process of clearing the return standby flag. Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step Sa1905 is the original effect mode as a result of the first effect mode switching being performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed and then the mode switching operation being performed again. It means that the situation has returned to. For example, in a situation where any of the reserved images is displayed in a specific display mode, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and then switched to the effect mode A again. At that time, in the previous mode switching (switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B), the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the hold notice effect is canceled. Therefore, the effect mode A. The reserved image displayed in the specific display mode in the above will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa during the stay in the effect mode B.

After switching to the effect mode B and before switching to the effect mode A, the game round of the hold image (hold information) may end. In this case, since the return standby flag is erased in step Sa1811 and step Sa1812 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), a negative determination is made in step Sa1905.

After the execution of step Sa1912, in step Sa1913, the setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. After that, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated.

<About changing the display mode of the hold image by switching the effect mode>
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched in the situation where the reserved image is displayed in the specific display mode, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. , The hold notice effect is configured to be canceled. In this case, by switching the display state including not only the background image 401 but also the hold display unit 200, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the change of the effect mode.

Further, if the switching of the effect mode is merely a change of the display image, it is difficult for the player to impress the difference between the modes, but in the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the hold notice effect between the modes. It is possible to make the difference in the production mode stand out because the difference is made. However, in a configuration in which the execution frequency of the hold notice effect differs between modes, even if the display mode of the hold image on which the hold notice effect is performed is the same, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the display mode is the effect mode. It may differ depending on the type of. Therefore, if the display mode before mode switching is maintained even after mode switching, the actual expectation of the hold information corresponds to the effect mode before switching, but the expectation corresponding to the effect mode after switching. Since it is displayed as if it suggests, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect may be inconsistent with the actual expectation level. In this respect, by changing the display mode of the reserved image to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to suitably avoid such inconsistency in the degree of expectation.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the hold notice effect according to the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to make the change of the effect mode easier to understand and to avoid the inconsistency of the expectation degree suggested by the hold advancer effect. However, on the other hand, some players may misunderstand that the chances suggested by the hold notice effect have disappeared due to the cancellation of the hold notice effect, which may cause disappointment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a setting process for returning the notice in step Sa1913, a second execution process for the hold notice in step Sa1702, and a third execution process for the hold notice in step Sa1808 are provided, and after switching the effect mode, the effect mode is switched. When the original effect mode is returned by switching again, the display mode of the reserved image is restored. Hereinafter, the processing of each of the above steps will be described in detail.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning to the notice in step Sa1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

First, in step Sa2101, the display status of the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb and the execution display area D is grasped before the specific display mode is canceled and the normal display mode HMa is set. For example, the effect mode is changed from the effect mode A to the effect mode B in a situation where the fourth hold image for the first special figure (the hold image of the fourth unit hold display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb. When the image is switched and then the mode A is switched to the effect mode A again, it is understood that the reserved image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

At that time, if the holding image is shifted to the lower area side due to the progress of digestion of the game times after switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, it is displayed in the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 at the time of mode switching. It is understood that the hold image corresponding to the hold image that has been displayed is displayed in the blue display mode HMb before the release process. For example, when two game rounds have been exhausted after switching to the effect mode B, the hold image displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 is displayed in the blue display mode HMb when the mode is switched. I understand that. This grasp is performed with reference to the return area 344f of the RAM 344.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether or not the game of the hold image (target hold image) displayed in the specific display mode is being executed. That is, after switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, it is determined whether or not the game has been digested and the game has progressed to the game times of the target holding image. If the game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa2103, and the number of pending information (number of pending information) before the target reserved image is grasped. For example, when the target holding image is the third holding information, two images are grasped as the number of holdings before that. It should be noted that the pending information during the game round is not subject to the pending number. In addition, the number of reserved pieces is grasped separately for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In step Sa2104, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces grasped in step Sa2103 is a predetermined number (for example, one) or more. If the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Sa2105, and the lottery process for the return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at what shift timing the target pending image is returned to the original specific display mode.

In the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, a return scenario table is stored in which the timing for restoring the display mode of the hold image is determined according to the number of holds and the original specific display mode. There is. In the return scenario table, for example, at the time of the first shift (shift to the second unit hold display area Ga2) and at the time of the second shift (shift to the second unit hold display area Ga2), the return timing of the display mode corresponds to the case where the number of holds is two. It is possible to select between the first unit hold display area (when shifting to Ga1) and the third shift (when shifting to the execution display area D).

Further, in the return scenario table, when the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, the normal display mode HMa directly returns to the original specific display mode, or the original specific display mode is stepwise. It is also possible to select whether to return to. Therefore, there are cases where the specific display mode before the release is restored by one hold change display, and there are cases where the specific display mode before the release is restored after a plurality of hold change displays.

In step Sa2105, the return timing and the return mode of the display mode in the reserved image are drawn based on the above-mentioned return scenario table and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344.

After the execution of step Sa2105 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2104 (when the number of pending items is less than one), the return scenario setting process is performed in step Sa2106. When the lottery process of the return scenario is performed in step Sa2105, the display mode of the hold image is set to be returned in the lottery return scenario, and when the number of hold images is less than 1, the execution display is displayed. It is set to restore the display mode of the reserved image when shifting to the area D.

After the execution of step Sa2106 or when a positive determination is made in step Sa2102 (when the game round of the target holding image is being executed), the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa2107. The advance notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed. After the execution of step Sa2107, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated.

<Process for the second execution of the hold notice>
The second execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1702 (FIG. 40 (a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as a part of the process corresponding to the shift command, in other words, it is a process executed at the shift timing of the pending image.

First, in step Sa2201, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

When the advance notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa2202, and the return scenario set in step Sa2106 in the setting process for advance notice return is grasped. In step Sa2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario grasped in step Sa2202, it is determined whether or not the shift timing this time is the return timing of the display mode of the target hold image. If it is not the return timing, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the return timing, the process proceeds to step Sa2204, and the display mode of the change destination is grasped based on the setting result of the return scenario. For example, when the display mode before the release of the target hold image is the green display mode HMc and the display mode defined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, the green display mode HMc is used as the change destination display mode. To grasp. Further, when the display mode defined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is a pre-stage to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is grasped as the display mode of the change destination.

In step Sa2205, the display mode of the target holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa2204. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, information indicating a holding image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to be changed to be included are included. Set a command to change the display mode of the pending image at this shift timing. After the execution of step Sa2205, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Process for the third execution of the hold notice>
The process for executing the third execution of the hold notice in step Sa1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. This process is performed as a part of the process for displaying the variation of the special figure, in other words, it is a process performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step Sa2301, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the process for executing the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa2302, and it is determined whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The promotion flag will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa2303 to determine whether or not the current display mode of the target pending image is the normal display mode HMa. The case where the current display mode of the target hold image is the normal display mode HMa is a case where the operation of switching to the original effect mode is performed during the game round of the target hold image.

When the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the process proceeds to step Sa2304, and it is determined whether or not the pending change point remains in the ongoing game round. For example, when the effect mode is changed at the end of the game round of the target hold image, and the hold change point does not remain, the process proceeds to step Sa2314 and the flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. Clear the advance notice return flag. As a result, the return process of the hold notice effect is canceled, and the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa in the game round.

When the hold change point remains, in step Sa2305, the specific display mode before the release in the target hold image is grasped by referring to the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and this is grasped as the display mode of the change destination. do. In step Sa2306, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa2305. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, a command is set to change the display mode of the pending image so as to include information indicating which display mode (display color) to change. do. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before the release at the latest hold change point.

After the execution of step Sa2306 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2303 (when the current display mode in the target pending image is not the normal display mode HMa), the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d in step Sa2307. Determine if it is. When the current display mode of the target hold image (hold image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the hold image is already the specific display mode before the release. The situation has been changed to.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, the promotion process of the hold notice is executed in step Sa2308.

Here, the process for promoting the hold notice in step Sa2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the promotion process, first, in step Sa2401, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the game round (running game round) of the target holding image.

In step Sa2402, the promotion determination of the hold notice effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401 and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In the promotion determination, the display mode of the target hold image (holding image displayed in the execution display area D) may be changed to a higher specific display mode (display mode higher than the display mode before cancellation). It determines whether or not it is possible.

As shown in FIG. 47, the promotion determination table has an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern 5H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, the red display mode is set. Changes up to HMd are allowed. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, the change to the rainbow color display mode HMe is permitted in any of the variation patterns 1A to 5A.

The promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations such that the upper limit display mode is different for each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, for example. In short, it suffices if the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation of the game times (variation pattern) (in other words, to match the jackpot expectation).

In step Sa2402, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401 is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and the current display mode of the target hold image is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether or not the display mode is used. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode, promotion of the display mode is permitted, and if not, promotion is not possible. When the display mode is changed in step Sa2306, it is determined whether or not the display mode is lower than the specified upper limit display mode for the changed display mode, and the result is the result. Judgment of promotion is possible based on.

After the execution of step Sa2402, the determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa2403. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been executed, in other words, for avoiding duplicate execution of the promotion determination.

In step Sa2404, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion determination in step Sa2402 allows promotion of the display mode. If promotion is not allowed, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step Sa2314 (FIG. 45), the notice return flag is cleared, and the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If promotion is allowed, the process proceeds to step Sa2405, and the lottery process of the promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines at which timing (holding change point) the target holding image displayed in the execution display area D is changed to which display mode. Various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343 store promotion scenario lottery tables for drawing promotion scenarios, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, for execution lottery for drawing whether or not to execute promotion effect. In addition to the information, a plurality of types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the hold notice effect. In step Sa2405, based on the promotion scenario lottery table and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery for whether or not to promote the display mode and a scenario for promotion are performed. A lottery will be held.

In step Sa2406, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step Sa2405 promotes the display mode. If it is not promoted, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step Sa2314 (FIG. 45), the notice return flag is cleared, and the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

When promoting, the process proceeds to step Sa2407, and the promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario drawn in step Sa2405 is executed. After the execution of step Sa2407, the process related to the change suggestion effect is executed in steps Sa2408 to Sa2410. Since these processes are the same as those in steps Sa1603 to Sa1605 in the first execution process (FIG. 38 (a)) of the hold notice, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the execution of step Sa2410 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2409, the promotion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step Sa2411, and then the promotion process of the hold notice ends. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted.

Returning to the description of the third execution process of the hold notice (FIG. 45), after the promotion process of the hold notice in step Sa2308 is executed, the third execution process of the hold notice ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2302 (when the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2309 to determine whether or not it is the promotion timing of the display mode. This determination is made based on the setting result of the promotion scenario in step Sa2407. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for executing the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the promotion timing, the process proceeds to step Sa2310, and the display mode (higher display mode) of the change destination in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step Sa2311, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa2310. Specifically, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode is to be changed as an output command to the display control device 350. Set a command to that effect.

In step Sa2312, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step Sa2310 or the display mode set as the change destination in step Sa2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and the change process this time is a process in the middle of the process, it is considered that the display mode is not the final display mode. The step is negatively determined, and the process for executing the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted in step Sa2313. In the following step Sa2314, the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the effect mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 62 in a state where three hold information for the first special figure is acquired and the fourth hold information (holding image HW) is acquired, the main control device is used. In 162, the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) for the acquired hold information is executed. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B deviation) is pre-read.

Further, in the effect control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) is executed based on the pre-reading result in the main control device 162, and the execution lottery for the hold notice effect for the hold image HW and the final display mode are set. Lottery, lottery of production scenarios, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario of displaying in the green display mode HMc at the beginning of the display and changing to the red display mode HMd at the later shift timing is selected as the effect scenario. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the hold image HW set to the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the mode switching operation is performed by the player using the staging operation unit 36, the staging mode is switched from the staging mode A to the staging mode B. At that time, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the display mode of the reserved image HW, which was set to the green display mode HMc in the effect mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the effect control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the reserved image HW before the mode switching in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48B shows a case where the effect mode is switched during the game round in which the hold information of the hold image HW is acquired.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect control device 143 for the advance notice return based on the information stored in the return area 344f. The setting process (step Sa1913) is executed, the original display mode (green display mode HMc) is grasped, the return scenario is drawn, and the like. As a result of the scenario lottery, it is assumed that a scenario that is initially displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the original display mode HMc in the green display mode HMc is selected at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), at the time of switching to the effect mode A, the reserved image HW is displayed in a state where the display mode is the normal display mode HMa. Then, when the selected return scenario changes the display mode of the reserved image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and further changes to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, FIG. As shown in 49 (b), the display mode of the hold image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc at the timing when the hold image HW is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa at the time of switching to the effect mode B, is returned to the display mode before the switch to the effect mode B.

After switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, until the game round of the hold image HW is started, a change suggestion effect suggesting a change (rank up) in the display mode of the hold image (FIG. 39). Execution lottery is not held. Therefore, when changing to the blue display mode HMb or changing to the green display mode HMc, the change suggestion effect is not performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process (step Sa1808) of the hold notice, and the hold image It grasps the fluctuation pattern of HW, grasps the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern, determines promotion to a higher display mode, and the like.

Since the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW is the fluctuation pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (FIG. 47), the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is the upper limit display in the promotion determination. Promotion of the display mode is permitted based on the mode lower than the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50B, the display mode of the hold image HW displayed in the execution display area D at a predetermined hold change point in the game round of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd. That is, it is changed to a mode higher than the original display mode. At that time, if the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect is won, the change suggestion effect is performed and then the red display mode HMd is changed.

The red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed in the game times of the holding image. Here, since the variation pattern of the hold image HW is the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B off effect, the SPSP reach B effect is performed in the game times of the hold image HW, and the hold image HW The suggestion by and the actual game performance are consistent.

After switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the game round of the reserved image HW may end without re-switching to the effect mode A. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the target hold is performed by shifting to the original effect mode. The display mode of the image HW is restored to the original specific display mode.

In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained before the start of the game round is aroused. be able to. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as the specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the expectation of the player. It can be configured. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player can change his / her mood during the game and can suppress the tiredness of the game. In such a configuration, when the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect (the effect in which the hold image is set as a specific display mode), the effect notifies or suggests. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the expected level has disappeared. In this case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the effect mode is reduced, and the significance of providing a plurality of types of effect modes may be impaired. ..

In this respect, in this configuration, when the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the original effect mode is switched again in that state, the target hold image changed to the normal display mode HMa. Since the HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the degree of expectation can be notified again. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the degree of expectation has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the hold notice effect without causing restrictions on the switching of the effect mode. That is, it is possible to preferably achieve both the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when the hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is restored, the target is based on the return area 344f of the RAM 344. The configuration is such that the notification mode of the reserved image HW is set. As a result, when the mode shifts to the original staging mode, the display mode of the reserved image, which is the normal display mode HMa, can be suitably returned to the original specific display mode.

At the time of the above setting, regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed on the target hold image, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, when the effect mode A is changed to the effect mode B and then the effect mode A is changed, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous effect mode A. It is assumed that the display mode is set to a different mode from the display mode in the previous effect mode A. In this case, since the display mode of the target hold image HW in the later effect mode A does not match the display mode in the previous effect mode A, the player can see that the canceled hold notice effect has been restored. Hateful. In particular, in a configuration in which the display mode of the hold image can be changed stepwise, even if the same look-ahead result is obtained, the display mode of the hold image (hold notice effect) at the time of switching differs depending on the switching timing of the effect mode. Therefore, if the display mode in the later effect mode A is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, it is easy to set a mode different from the display mode in the previous effect mode A.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f instead of the result of the hold look-ahead processing, when the transition to the later effect mode A is performed, the previous effect mode A It can be set to the same mode as the display mode actually displayed in. As a result, the display mode in the previous effect mode A and the display mode in the later effect mode B can be suitably matched, and the player recognizes that the display mode (holding notice effect) has been restored. It will be possible to make it easier.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by the subsequent transition to the effect mode A, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode. The configuration is such that the production scenario (return scenario) for this is reset.

When the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode in the later effect mode A, the target hold image HW is switched to the later effect mode A due to the length of the stay period in the immediately preceding effect mode B. It is assumed that the period until the game round of the image HW is completed, that is, the remaining period in which the target reserved image HW is continuously displayed varies. In this regard, in this configuration, since the staging scenario is reset when the target reserved image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the target reserved image HW is returned to the original specific display mode even when the remaining period fluctuates. Can be suitably changed to.

In the above case, the number of holdings before the target holding image HW is grasped, and the effect scenario is reset based on the result.

In this case, the effect scenario can be reset after appropriately grasping the remaining period, and the target reserved image HW is suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the period of stay in the effect mode B. be able to.

In the later effect mode A, the target holding image HW is set to the original specific display mode, and then promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation) in the later effect mode A is limited to the display mode in the earlier effect mode A, and it is possible to suppress the range of the suggestable expectation from being narrowed. .. At that time, if the specific display mode is suddenly set to a higher level, the correspondence with the hold notice effect performed in the previous effect mode A may be difficult to understand, and the effect may be difficult to understand. In this respect, in this configuration, since it is possible to temporarily change from the original specific display mode to a higher display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW has been restored (the canceled hold notice effect has been restored). ), And it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

In the above case, instead of unnecessarily promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW, a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, it is configured to determine whether or not to use the upper mode. This makes it possible to promote the display mode of the target hold image HW while matching it with the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) actually performed in the game turn of the target hold image HW.

By making it possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold image changes to a higher mode, and by shifting to the original effect mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is displayed in the original specific manner. When returning to the mode, the configuration is such that the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted.

Since it is suggested that the change suggestion effect changes to the higher display mode, the expectation for the change to the higher display mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the reserved image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous effect mode A and the normal display mode HMa is changed to the green display mode HMc in the later effect mode A, a change suggestion effect is produced. When this is performed, the player actually returns to the original specific display mode, but the player has a higher display mode based on the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the destination mode A that the player remembers. It is assumed that it is associated with (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe). In this case, since the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target holding image HW is a display mode lower than the mode associated with the player, it may give an unpleasant impression to the player. In this respect, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher display mode, if it is only returned to the display mode in the previous effect mode A, the change suggestion effect is not executed, so that it is actually It is possible to prevent the player from associating an aspect higher than the display aspect of the above, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the effect characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the effect mode, the difference in the effect mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the running hold notice effect is continued), the degree of expectation suggested by the target hold image HW is increased. There is a risk of causing different situations before and after switching the production mode. In this case, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in the degree of expectation by canceling the execution of the hold notice effect when the effect mode is switched, but this time, up to the degree of expectation suggested by the specific display mode. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the game has disappeared. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration for returning the display mode of the target reserved image HW to the original specific display mode by shifting to the original effect mode, etc.) to such a configuration, each of them. The features can be effectively functioned and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, for example, when switching from one of the effect mode A and the effect mode B to the other is performed in the presence of the reserved image set as the specific display mode, before the switching. The display mode of the hold image is stored, and the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, if the original production mode (one production mode) is switched again before the game round of the holding image is completed, the display stored at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other production mode) is performed. Based on the information of the mode, the display mode of the reserved image is restored, and the display mode is changed to the original specific display mode or a higher specific display mode.

The game is played by the player between the time when the first switching is performed and the time when the later switching (re-switching to the original effect mode) is performed, that is, during the period in which the return processing of the display mode is awaited. Therefore, new pending information may occur. In this modification, the handling of the hold notice effect for this new hold information is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. In these figures, the same components as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the hold command is received (when the hold information is generated) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the hold command corresponding process in FIG. 31. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by 1 in step Sa1402, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa2601. Determine if it is stored. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for the return process (process for returning the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode), and is for the return process. It is stored in various flag storage areas 344d during the waiting period. The waiting period for the return process is the period from when one of the effect mode A and the effect mode B is switched to the other and when the original effect mode is switched again (the period of stay in the other effect mode). In addition, after switching to the other effect mode, the game round of the target hold image (the hold image that is the target of the return processing of the display mode) is completed without switching back to the original effect mode. There is a period until it is done.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2601 (when the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1403, and the hold notice setting process (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, the setting for executing the hold notice effect is made for the generated hold information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2601 (when the return waiting flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2602 without executing the setting process for holding notice in step Sa1403, and the holding information corresponding to the generated holding information is held. The display mode of the image is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in this modification, when new hold information is generated during the waiting period of the return process, the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information is restricted.

The hold look-ahead process for the hold information is performed by the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control device 162 as in the case of other hold information. Therefore, in the staging control device 143, although the display mode of the hold image is forcibly set to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the look-ahead result such as the fluctuation pattern is in a state of being acquired by the hold command from the main control device 162. ing.

In step Sa2603, the restricted occurrence information is stored in correspondence with the generated pending information. The information generated during the restriction indicates that the information is on hold information generated during the restricted period. The process of step Sa2603 is performed, for example, by storing the limited generation information together with the hold information such as the fluctuation pattern in the first area to the fourth area (FIG. 32) provided in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344. .. Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed, the restricted occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information. As a result, even when the shift process is performed and the display area of the reserved image is shifted, it is possible to grasp which of the reserved images was generated during the limited period. It should be noted that the restricted generation information may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c after making it possible to recognize which hold information it is.

After the execution of step Sa2603, in step Sa1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa2602, the hold image of the hold information generated during the limited period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2601 (when the time limit is not reached) and step Sa1405 is reached via the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 or the first execution process for the hold notice in step Sa1404. The pending image is displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Processing for switching the production mode>
The staging mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the effect mode switching process in step Sa1903, the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode after switching is set in step Sa1904. In the following step Sa1905, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. In the situation where the switching process of step Sa1903 is executed, the situation where the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is the original effect after the effect mode is switched (destination). It means that the situation has been switched back to the mode. On the contrary, the situation in which the return standby flag is not stored means that the above-mentioned previous switching has been performed (the situation in which the re-switching to the original effect mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (when the previous switching is performed), the process proceeds to step Sa1906, and the processes of steps Sa1906 to Sa1911 are the same as in the first embodiment. To execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is stored (re-switching is performed), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, and the return standby flag in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the restricted state of the hold notice effect is released. Therefore, for the hold information generated after the release, the hold notice effect setting process (step Sa1403) or the like is executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step Sa1913, the setting process for returning to the notice is executed, and in the following step Sa2701, it is determined whether or not the pending information generated during the limited period exists. This determination is performed based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step Sa2603 of the hold correspondence command process (FIG. 51).

If the hold information generated during the time limit does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the hold information generated during the restriction period exists, the second setting process for the hold notice is executed in step Sa2702, and then the effect mode switching process ends.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice of step Sa2702 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

First, in step Sa2801, the pending information generated during the restricted period is grasped. That is, based on the restricted occurrence information, it is specified which of the reserved information existing at that time is the reserved information generated during the restricted period.

After executing the process of step Sa2801, the processes of step Sa2802 and subsequent steps are executed for the generation hold during the grasped limited period. Since most of the processes after step Sa2802 are the same as each process in the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice in step Sa1403 (FIG. 51), the description of the common process is simplified. The different processes will be described in detail.

In step Sa2802 to step Sa2804, the fluctuation pattern in the generation hold during the limited period is grasped by referring to the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. In step Sa2805, the effect mode after switching is grasped. For example, when the re-switching is the switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect mode A is grasped as the effect mode after the switch.

In steps Sa2806 to Sa2808, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step Sa2805 is acquired, and the hold notice execution execution lottery is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa2809 to Step Sa2814, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect is determined, and the process (effect scenario) until the final display mode is displayed is determined. Or something.

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the effect scenario lottery table for drawing the effect scenario are different in each effect mode, the effect mode after switching grasped in step Sa2805 is selected. Acquire the corresponding table and perform a lottery. Although the generation hold during the limited period occurred during the effect mode before switching, the conditions set for the effect mode after switching are used for the execution lottery of the hold notice effect and the lottery of the final display mode. Apply and perform according to the effect mode after switching.

In step Sa2815, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice ends. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 38 (a)) and the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807, the process of changing the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the hold notice effect for the hold information generated before the mode switching is performed in the effect mode after the switch.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The special figure variation display process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the process for displaying the special figure variation in FIG. 41. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This process is provided as a countermeasure when the game round of the target hold image (the hold image to be the target of the return process of the display mode) is completed without re-switching to the original effect mode. It is a thing.

After executing the variable end processing in step Sa1809, in step Sa1810, the holding information (the holding image to be the target of the return processing of the display mode) in which the special figure game round this time triggered the holding notice effect. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. In the case of the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether or not the hold notice flag or the return wait flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If either the hold notice flag or the return wait flag is stored, the flag stored in step Sa1812 is deleted. As a result, the return process is canceled and the restricted state of the hold notice effect is released.

In step Sa2901, it is determined whether or not there is pending information generated during the time limit. If there is pending information generated during the restricted period, the process proceeds to step Sa2902 to grasp which reserved information is the reserved information generated during the restricted period. Each process of step Sa2901 and step Sa2902 is performed based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step Sa2603 of the hold correspondence command process (FIG. 51).

In step Sa2903, the setting process for the hold notice is executed for the occurrence hold during the limited period grasped in step Sa2902. This process is the same as the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice in step Sa1403 (FIG. 51), and the setting process for executing the hold notice effect corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. Become.

That is, if the restricted state is released without re-switching to the original effect mode, the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is executed, the lottery for the final display mode, etc., is changed to the effect mode in which the user is staying at that time. The set conditions are applied. For example, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B as the previous switch, a lottery for executing the hold notice effect is performed by applying the conditions set for the effect mode B. After the execution of step Sa2903 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa2902 (when there is no pending information generated during the restriction period), the special figure variation display process is terminated.

<About the flow of the display mode of the image for holding corresponding to the holding of occurrence during the limited period>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the occurrence hold during the limited period will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

When the fourth hold information of the first special figure is generated in the situation where the effect mode A is set, the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) is performed by the main control device 162, and the hold notice is given by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the hold image HA in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 of the 1st hold display area Ga.

When the mode switching operation is performed by the player at the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the hold image HA is acquired, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the display mode of the reserved image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

Then, it is assumed that two new hold information are generated in the period until the hold image HA is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2 while the effect mode is maintained in the effect mode B. For the newly generated hold information, the setting process for the hold notice is not performed by the effect control device 143, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, since the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated hold information is the normal display mode, as shown in FIG. 55 (c). It is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 in the state of being HMa, respectively.

The hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162 for the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 is performed at the acquisition timing of the hold information like the other hold information. Since the pre-reading result is notified to the staging control device 143 through the hold command, the staging control device 143 does not perform the setting process for the hold notice, but the pre-reading result related to the hold information is acquired. It is in.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect control device 143 displays the hold images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process (step Sa2702) for the hold notice is executed as the target. In the second setting process for the hold notice, the execution lottery of the hold notice effect, the lottery of the final display mode, the lottery of the effect scenario, etc. are performed based on the pre-reading result notified from the main control device 162 at the acquisition timing of the hold information. It is a thing. When performing those lottery, a lottery table corresponding to the effect mode A, which is the effect mode after switching, is used. That is, although the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 is acquired in the situation of the effect mode B, the lottery for the hold notice effect for them is the mode at which the hold notice effect is executed. The lottery conditions set for mode A are applied.

As a result of the above lottery, for example, when the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HB1 and the hold notice effect is executed with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb for the hold image HB2. As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the display mode of the reserved image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the reserved image HB2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb.

Regarding the hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in the effect mode A before shifting to the effect mode B, the setting process for returning the notice by the effect control device 143 (step Sa1913), the second of the hold notice. By performing the execution process (step Sa1702), the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, which is the original display mode.

Further, unlike the case where the switching to the effect mode A is performed as described above, after the state shown in FIG. 55 (c), the game times of the reserved image HA are performed while the effect mode B is maintained. When the game round of the final hold information acquired in the previous effect mode A is completed, the restricted state ends with the end of the game round. In this case, at the end timing of the game round, the second setting process for the hold notice for the hold images HB1 and HB2 is executed. At this time, various lottery such as the execution lottery of the hold notice effect, the lottery of the final display mode, and the lottery of the effect scenario are performed using the lottery table corresponding to the effect mode B. That is, a lottery condition different from that in the case of FIG. 55 (d) is applied.

As a result of the above lottery, for example, when the hold notice effect is executed with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb for the hold image HB1 and the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HB2, FIG. As shown in 55 (e), the display mode of the reserved image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the reserved image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

For the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the restricted state in which the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state. The configuration is set based on the result.

In this modification, when the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted until the original effect mode is switched again. When new hold information is acquired in the restricted state, it is assumed that the change to the specific display mode is not performed even for such hold information, and the player's expectation for the hold information acquired during the restricted state. There is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse.

In this regard, according to this configuration, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to the specific display mode after the end of the restricted state. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation about the pending information acquired in. At that time, since the change to the specific display mode (execution of the hold notice effect) after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state, the hold look-ahead is performed in the same manner as in the non-restricted state. Processing can be performed. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the hold look-ahead process, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. It will be possible.

Regardless of whether or not the hold look-ahead processing for the earned hold information is in the restricted state, the configuration is such that the hold information is acquired at the same time.

In this case, the hold look-ahead process can be performed according to the acquisition timing of the hold information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state. Therefore, the hold look-ahead process is distinguished between the former case and the latter case. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

The setting of the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state (setting of the hold notice effect) is executed at the end of the restricted state.

For example, when the display mode after the restricted state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state, the setting may not be executed during the restricted state. However, when the game times of the holding images HB1 and HB2 for which the display mode is set is executed in the restricted state, the display period of the holding image ends without the setting of the display mode being reflected, and the setting is set. It may be wasted. In this respect, in this configuration, since the display mode is set at the end of the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

When the reserved information is acquired during the restricted state, the restricted occurrence information indicating that the reserved information was acquired during the restricted state is stored in the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp after the restricted state that the reserved information is acquired during the restricted state based on the restricted occurrence information stored in the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if the hold information acquired before the restricted state and the hold information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the end of the restricted state, the held information acquired during the restricted state can be easily used. Can be identified. As a result, when setting the display mode of each reserved image after the restricted state, the reserved information acquired during the restricted state and the reserved information not otherwise are identified, and only the reserved information acquired during the restricted state is identified. It becomes possible to perform processing on the target.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the case of switching from the effect mode (effect mode A) in which the hold notice effect occurs frequently to the low effect mode (effect mode B) and the case of switching from the low effect mode to the high effect mode are distinguished. It is configured to restore the display mode of the reserved image. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the effect mode is switched in a situation where a hold image of a specific display mode exists, the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the original effect mode is restored. When the switching is performed, the display mode of the reserved image is restored, but in this modification, the holding is performed even if the original production mode is not switched again. It is configured to perform restoration processing of the display mode for the image for use. By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in the effect mode A (the execution probability of the hold advance notice effect when the look-ahead result is off) is higher than that of the effect mode B, in other words, the specific display mode of the same display color. On the other hand, the point that the jackpot expectation in the effect mode A is lower than that in the effect mode B is the same as that of the first embodiment.

<Processing for switching the production mode>
The staging mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After the effect mode switching process is executed in step Sa1903, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa1904. The effect mode flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp the effect mode after the switch before the effect mode is switched and the current effect mode after the effect mode is switched.

In step Sa3101, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed or that the hold notice effect is being executed.

If the hold notice flag is not stored, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa3102 to clear the hold notice flag. As a result, if the hold notice effect is executed before the mode is switched, the continuation of the hold notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice effect is in the standby state, the hold notice effect is on standby (). Execution reservation) is canceled.

In step Sa3103, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the reserved images displayed in the reserved display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

When the holding image displayed in the specific display mode exists, the process proceeds to step Sa3104, and it is determined whether or not the mode switching this time is the switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. That is, whether or not the mode is switched from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the low side (in other words, the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is low is changed to the effect mode on the high side. Whether or not it is a switch to the staging mode) is determined. In the case of switching to the effect mode B, in step Sa3105, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step Sa3106, the return determination is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The return determination is to determine whether or not it is possible to return the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode again after switching the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, the return determination table has an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern 5H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, the green display mode is set. Return (change) to HMc is allowed. When the hold notice effect is executed while staying in the effect mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the return determination table is more than that. It is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This also applies to other deviation-corresponding fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation pattern 3H and fluctuation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, the change to the rainbow color display mode HMe is permitted in any of the variation patterns 1A to 5A. The return determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations such that the upper limit display mode is different for each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, for example.

In step Sa3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 is specified with reference to the return determination table, and the current display mode of the target hold image is the display mode below the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether or not it is. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode, the return of the display mode is permitted, and if not, the return is not possible.

In step Sa3107, it is determined whether or not the result of the return determination in step Sa3106 allows the return of the display mode. If the return is not allowed, the process proceeds to step Sa3108, and a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed. That is, the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. Further, in the release process of step Sa3108, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the effect scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 34) are also deleted. To execute. After the execution of step Sa3108, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3107 (when the return of the display mode is allowed), the information on the display mode of each reserved image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 is returned to the RAM 344 in step Sa3109. Store in the area 344f. In step Sa3110, similarly to step Sa3108, a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed.

In step Sa3111, the setting process for returning to the notice is executed, and then the process for switching the effect mode is terminated. The setting process for returning the advance notice in step Sa3111 is the same as the setting process for returning the advance notice (FIG. 43) in step Sa1913 of the effect mode switching process (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment. In the setting process for returning to the notice, after switching to the effect mode B, at what timing the display mode of the reserved image is restored (changed), how to restore (change once, or is it restored), or Perform setting processing such as (whether to restore by stepwise change).

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure change. In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the hold notice in step Sa1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before switching to the effect mode B).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referred to is the one set for the effect mode B (the one that meets the conditions of the hold notice effect in the effect mode B). Therefore, even if the display mode that can be restored is limited to the lower upper limit display mode defined by the return determination table at the time of returning the display mode by switching to the effect mode B, the effect mode is finally set. The display mode of the target pending image can be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for B.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3104 (switching from effect mode B to effect mode A), the processes of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step Sa3109. That is, in the case of switching from the effect mode B on the side where the occurrence frequency of the hold notice effect is low to the effect mode A on the high side, the display mode in the effect mode B is reflected as it is in the effect mode A after the mode is switched. It is configured.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the effect mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the reserved image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, a case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B will be described. As described above, the effect mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is relatively high, and the effect mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is relatively low.

When the third hold information (holding image HW) of the first special figure is generated in the situation where the effect mode A is set, the main control device 162 performs the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) for the generated hold information. Run. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B deviation) is pre-read.

Further, in the effect control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) is executed based on the pre-reading result in the main control device 162, and the execution lottery for the hold notice effect for the hold image HW and the final display mode are set. Lottery, lottery of production scenarios, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario of displaying in the blue display mode HMb at the beginning of the display and changing to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing is selected as the effect scenario. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the reserved image HW set as the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 of the first reserved display area Ga.

After that, when the mode switching operation is performed by the player using the effect operation unit 36 in a state where the display mode of the reserved image HW is set to the blue display mode HMb, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2), the effect is produced. The mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

Further, when switching to the effect mode B, the effect control device 143 determines whether or not to return the display mode of the reserved image HW to the specific display mode (step Sa3106). In the return determination, the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW is specified, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return determination table (FIG. 57), and the hold before switching to the effect mode B is performed. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the image HW is the mode equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H, which is the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to the effect mode B is the blue display mode HMb. The display mode of the reserved image HW before switching to the effect mode B is the mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set in the setting process for the advance notice return (step Sa3111).

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3), the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second. When shifting to the unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the blue display mode HMb shifts to the execution display area D and the game round of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing (step Sa1808) is executed, and promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. The promotion determination in this case is performed by applying the determination condition of the effect mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb lower than that in the effect mode A, the promotion of the hold image HW is disallowed and the hold image HW is for hold. The display mode of the image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Further, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the green display mode HMc as in the case of the effect mode A, promotion is permitted, and a predetermined mode of the reserved image HW is played. At the hold change point, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the effect mode is switched in the situation where the display mode of the reserved image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the effect mode A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the hold image HW of the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the display position of the hold image HW is the first without switching the effect mode. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) after shifting to the 2-unit hold display area Ga2.

In that state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the staging operation unit 36, the staging mode is switched from the staging mode A to the staging mode B as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), and the holding image is displayed. The display mode of the HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

At this time, the effect control device 143 makes a determination for return, but the display mode of the reserved image HW before switching to the effect mode B is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game round of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing is executed, and promotion judgment to a higher display mode is performed. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is permitted, and when the upper limit display mode is set to the green display mode HMc. , Green display mode Promotion to HMc is allowed. Note that FIG. 58 (b3) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the effect mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which the hold notice effect is being executed), the display mode of the target hold image HW in the effect mode after switching is before switching. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode in the effect mode.

In this modification, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player can change his / her mood during the game and can suppress the tiredness of the game. At that time, the effect mode B is set as an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A. In the case of such a configuration, since the effect characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the effect mode, the difference in the effect mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people.

However, on the other hand, when the switching condition from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is satisfied in the situation where the hold image is set to the specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained in the effect mode. When switching is made, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation will change even though there is no change in the display mode. For example, even if the specific display mode of the same green display mode HMc is used, the expectation level in the effect mode B is higher than that of the effect mode A. Therefore, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the green display mode HMc. When the player switches from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, when the player understands the expectation of the green display mode HMc based on the expectation in the effect mode B after the mode is switched, the game actually performed in the game times. There is a risk of associating with a higher degree of expectation than the rendition (reach production, etc.).

In this respect, in this configuration, when the effect mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is set to the specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is the same as the display mode in the effect mode before switching. Determine whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suitably display the reserved image after the transition to the staging mode B.

The display mode of the target hold image HW at the time of transition to the effect mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the effect mode B, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result. It is configured to determine whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode before switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the display mode can be the same as the display mode in the effect mode A by comparing the display mode at the time of transition to the effect mode B with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the effect mode B. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each mode (blue display mode HMb, etc.) has the same mode based on the corresponding expectation in the effect mode B, and the display of the pending image after the transition to the effect mode B is performed. Can be suitably performed.

In the above case, a plurality of upper limit display modes in the effect mode B are set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation pattern for the target reserved image HW is applied and described above. It was configured to make a judgment. As a result, based on the pre-reading result of the target holding image HW, that is, the hit / fail result actually notified in the game times of the target holding image HW and the game times effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times. It is possible to sort out whether or not the same mode is used.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the effect mode B is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A before the mode switching, the normal display mode HMa of the target hold image HW is changed to the same mode. And said.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is the same as that before the mode switching, it is possible to temporarily change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. With such a configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B regardless of whether the mode is the same as before the mode is switched or not. Along with this, the configuration can be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination that the same mode is not used. Further, by setting the configuration to change to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, the hold is set to the normal display mode HMa after the transition to the effect mode B, including the case where it is determined that the same mode is not used. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the image for holding will be changed to a specific display mode, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the image for holding (holding information).

In the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the display mode of the target hold image in the effect mode A after the mode switch is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A before the mode switch without performing the above determination. It was configured as an aspect.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from the side where the expectation for the hold notice effect is high to the side where the expectation is low, it is not determined whether or not the same mode is used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the hold notice effect (maintenance of the specific display mode of the hold image) from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment and each modification, the display mode of the holding image before and after the effect mode switching is targeted, but in this modification, the display mode of the holding image before and after the opening / closing execution mode is targeted. And. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 67. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the variable display time table in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (high probability gaming state) and the variable display time table in the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (time saving gaming state). Is set separately from the variable display time table (FIG. 14) in the case of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the variable display time table of the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the jackpot and the missed games are set respectively. In the variation display time table for big hits, the variation pattern 11A corresponding to the SPSP reach A and the variation pattern 12A corresponding to the SPSP reach B are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 11H corresponding to the complete deviation, the variation pattern 12H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, and the SPSP reach B deviation are supported according to the value of the variation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 13H is set. When the value of the variation type counter CS is in the range of 0 to 79, either complete deviation (variation pattern 1H) or normal reach deviation (variation pattern 2H) corresponds to in the normal gaming state (FIG. 14 (b)). ), In the high probability gaming state, only complete deviation (variation pattern 11H) corresponds (FIG. 59 (b)). That is, even if the variable type counter CS has the same value, different game rotation effects can be performed between the normal game state and the high probability game state.

In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, as shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d), the jackpot and the missed are set respectively. In the variation display time table for jackpot, the variation pattern 21A corresponding to the SP reach A, the variation pattern 22A corresponding to the SP reach B, and the SPSP reach A correspond to the value of the variation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 23A and the fluctuation pattern 24A corresponding to the SPSP reach B are set.

Further, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 21H corresponding to the complete deviation, the variation pattern 22H corresponding to the SP reach A deviation, and the SP reach B deviation are supported according to the value of the variation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 23H, the fluctuation pattern 24H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, and the fluctuation pattern 25H corresponding to the SPSP reach B deviation are set. Even in the variation display time table for the time-saving gaming state, when the variation type counter CS is compared with the same value, the game rotation effect different from the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state can be performed. In the variable display time table for deviation corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of complete deviation is smaller than that of other gaming states, but this is because the reach effect is generated by increasing the frequency of the reach effect. This is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without doing so.

The correspondence between the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. 59 is only an example, and the contents differ depending on the normal gaming state, the highly accurate gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. Other embodiments may be used as long as they are set.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the effect control device 143 receives the hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step Sa1403 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), and is executed in place of the hold command setting process of FIG. 34. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 34, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa1501, the fluctuation pattern information and the like of the current hold information are grasped based on the hold information stored in step Sa1401 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31). In step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern information or the like grasped in step Sa1501.

If it does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, if it is the reserved information corresponding to the deviation, the process proceeds to step Sa3301, and the variation pattern of the reserved information is the variation pattern 1H (the variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the normal gaming state). , It is determined whether or not the variation pattern 11H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the high-probability gaming state) or the variation pattern 21H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the time-saving gaming state). If a negative judgment is made in step Sa3301 (if it is not any of the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, and the fluctuation pattern 21H) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1502 (when the pending information corresponds to the jackpot), the step Sa3302 is performed. Grasp the current game status. Specifically, it grasps whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state.

In step Sa3303, the corresponding hold notice execution lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. A plurality of hold notice execution lottery tables are set according to the presence or absence of a big hit and the game state. For example, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information this time is a big hit is set to have a higher winning probability than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case of being out of order. In addition, in the hold notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the high-probability game state and corresponds to the case where the hold information of this time is out of order, in order to suppress the occurrence of the ghosting effect in the high-probability game state, the normal game state and the time-saving game The winning probability is set lower than that of the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the state and when the hold information of this time is out of order.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the execution probability of the hold notice effect different according to the game state, and the execution probability of the hold notice effect may be the same in the above three states or two of them.

In step Sa1506, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold notice execution lottery table acquired in step Sa3303 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. I do. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an execution winning, the process proceeds to step Sa1508 to grasp the corresponding number of holdings.

In step Sa3304, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. In the final display mode lottery table, the range of the final display mode that can be selected and the selection probability of each display mode are set corresponding to each variation pattern. In this modification, since each variation pattern is set according to the gaming state, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to each gaming state is also set separately.

FIG. 61 shows a table for a big hit and a table for a miss as an example of a final display mode lottery table in a high probability gaming state, respectively. Further, FIG. 62 shows a table for a big hit and a table for a miss as an example of a final display mode lottery table in a time-saving game state.

In step Sa1510, this hold is based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step Sa3301, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. The final display mode in the notice production will be drawn by lottery. In step Sa1511, the effect scenario lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa1512, the number of holds grasped in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the staging scenario lottery table acquired in step Sa1511, and the lottery counter (random value value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. ) And, the production scenario in this hold notice production will be drawn.

In step Sa1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario drawn in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice ends. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed.

When the setting process for the hold notice is performed as described above, based on the setting result of step Sa1513, step Sa1404 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31) and step Sa1701 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40). In the first execution process (FIG. 38) of the hold notice in step Sa1807 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3301 (when the variation pattern of the reserved information is a variation pattern of a completely out-of-pair pair), the process proceeds to step Sa1515, and the display mode of the reserved image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Processing for open / close execution mode>
The processing for the opening / closing execution mode according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30).

First, in step Sa3401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed. If the open / close execution mode is not being executed, whether or not the opening command (step Sa909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main controller 162 in step Sa3402, that is, whether or not it is the start timing of the open / close execution mode. judge. If the opening command has not been received, the open / close execution mode process ends as it is.

If the opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa3403 to execute the opening process. In the opening process, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening effect is executed on the display screen G or the like of the symbol display device 75.

In step Sa3404, it is determined whether or not the number of holds (total number of special 1 hold and special 2 hold) is 0, that is, whether or not there is a hold. If the number of holdings is 0 (when there is no holding), the processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated as it is.

If the number of held items is not 0 and there is a hold, the process proceeds to step Sa3405, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is stored, the hold notice flag is deleted in step Sa3406. As a result, if the hold notice effect is executed before the start of the open / close execution mode, the continuation of the hold notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice effect is in the standby state, the hold notice effect is displayed. Wait (execution reservation) is canceled.

In step Sa3407, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the reserved images displayed in the reserved display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa3408, and information indicating in which mode the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is used for returning the RAM 344. Store in area 344f. In the following step Sa3409, information indicating the game state before the open / close execution mode is stored in the RAM 344. For example, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, the information corresponding to the normal gaming state is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 344. In addition, this information is stored in a storage area different from the flag in order to distinguish it from the state flag indicating the current gaming state.

In step Sa3410, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for a return process for returning the display mode of the hold image to the original specific display mode. In the following step Sa3411, a process of erasing the reserved image from the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is executed. That is, in this modification, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 is configured to be erased with the start of the open / close execution mode. After the execution of step Sa3411, the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sa3405 (when the hold notice flag is not stored) or when a negative determination is made in step Sa3407 (when there is no hold image in a specific display mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3411 for hold. Performs image erasing processing. That is, even when the hold notice effect is not being executed, the hold image of the hold display unit 200 is deleted with the start of the open / close execution mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3401 (in the case of opening / closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3412, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending effect. If it has not elapsed, the process for opening / closing execution mode is executed in step Sa3413, and then the processing for opening / closing execution mode is terminated. In the process for opening / closing execution mode, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined round effect, a winning effect, an ending effect, etc. are executed on the display screen G or the like of the symbol display device 75.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3412 (when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending effect), the process proceeds to step Sa3414, and it is determined whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the return standby flag is not stored, the open / close execution mode process ends as it is.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa3415 to execute a process of clearing the return wait flag. Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the open / close execution mode is performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa3416, and the setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. The details of the process will be described later.

After the execution of step Sa3416, the setting for displaying the reserved image in the normal display mode HMa is made in step Sa3417. That is, when returning the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode, immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode, the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa and the display is resumed. After the execution of step Sa3417, the processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3414 (when the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa3418, and it is determined whether or not the number of holds (total number of special 1 hold and special 2 hold) is 0. do. If the number of holdings is 0 and there is no holding, the processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is not 0 and there are holdings, the holding images for those holdings are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step Sa3417.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning the advance notice in step Sa3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa3501, the game state before the open / close execution mode is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the information stored in step Sa3409 (FIG. 63). In step Sa3502, the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the hold information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step Sa3503, the display mode is restored based on the game state before the opening / closing execution mode grasped in step Sa3501, the jackpot type grasped in step Sa3502, and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. Make a judgment. The return determination is to determine whether or not to return the reserved image, which has been set to the specific display mode in the game state before the open / close execution mode, to the original display mode in the game state after the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return determination table, whether the return of the display mode is allowed according to the game state before the open / close execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the open / close execution mode this time. Whether or not it is decided. Specifically, the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state, and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, or the game state before the open / close execution mode is the high-probability gaming state, and the jackpot type is the probable change jackpot. When the gaming state is common before and after the open / close execution mode as in a certain case, the return of the display mode of the reserved image is allowed. On the other hand, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state and the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, or when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the high probability game state and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot. When the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the game state is different before and after the open / close execution mode, such as when the jackpot type is the time-saving game state, the return of the above display mode is restricted.

However, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the possibility of return is determined by referring to the look-ahead result of the target pending image. Specifically, when the look-ahead result of the target hold image is a result other than the normal jackpot, the return of the above display mode is restricted, while when the look-ahead result of the target hold image is a normal jackpot, the above display mode is restricted. Allows the return of. This is to prevent the player from ending the high-accuracy gaming state without being able to fully enjoy the game in the high-accuracy gaming state.

That is, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the game of the first special figure (left-handed game state) to the second special figure across the open / close execution mode. The game mode is switched to the game (right-handed game state), but at that time, there is usually a big hit in the hold of the first special figure, and when the hold is exhausted, it is possible to shift to the high probability game state. Even though it was possible, the condition will end early. Therefore, when there is such a possibility, the display mode of the reserved image of the first special is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player, and the second operating port 63 (starting port for the second special figure) is used. ) Is encouraged to win a prize promptly.

In this modification, the return of the display mode is restricted when the look-ahead result of the target pending image is a probability variation jackpot, but a configuration that allows this may be used.

Returning to the description of the setting process for returning the advance notice (FIG. 64), after the execution of step Sa3503, it is determined in step Sa3504 whether or not the result of the determination process of step Sa3503 allows the return of the display mode. If the return is not allowed, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated as it is. That is, the display mode of the target holding image after the open / close execution mode remains the normal display mode HMa.

If the return is permitted, in step Sa3505, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode of the target hold image before the open / close execution mode is grasped. After the execution of step Sa3505, the processes of steps Sa3506 to Sa3510 are executed.

These processes are the same as those in steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 of FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target hold image is displayed at any timing according to the number of holds before the target hold image. It sets whether to return to the aspect. That is, in step Sa3506, the number of pending images before the target reserved image is grasped, and if the grasped number of reserved images is 1 or more, the return scenario when the display mode is grasped in step Sa3505 in step Sa3508. Lottery. In step Sa3509, the return scenario data is set so that the lottery return scenario is executed, and in step Sa3510, the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The advance notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure change. In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the hold notice in step Sa1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before the open / close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

<About the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode>
The display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode will be described. Here, in the situation where the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state, the normal jackpot occurs, and when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode, and when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state. An example will be described in which a probability change jackpot occurs and the game shifts to a probability change game state after the open / close execution mode.

First, a case where a game state before the open / close execution mode is a time-saving game state is usually a big hit and the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

When the third hold information of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) is performed by the main control device 162, and the hold advance notice is performed by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the hold image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times in which the hold image HW is acquired, and when the open / close execution mode is entered, the display of all the hold images including the hold image HW is erased as shown in FIG. 66 (b). .. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for returning the advance notice (step Sa3416), and changes the display mode of the reserved image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return is made as to whether or not to return. In the return determination, the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are compared, and it is determined whether or not they match. When a normal jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the open / close execution mode becomes the time-saving game state, so that the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode match. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is drawn.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the open / close execution mode is drawn, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), at the end of the open / close execution mode, the image HW for holding is held. The display of each holding image is resumed in a state where the display mode of is set to the normal display mode HMa.

After that, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa. Will be done. Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit hold display area Gb2 to the first unit hold display area Gb1, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state and the probability change jackpot occurs and the game state shifts to the probability change game state after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

When the third hold information of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) is performed by the main control device 162, and the hold advance notice is performed by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step Sa1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The probability change jackpot result is obtained in the game times when the hold image HW is acquired, and when the open / close execution mode is entered, the display of all the hold images including the hold image HW is erased as shown in FIG. 67 (b). ..

Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for returning the advance notice (step Sa3416) to determine the return. If a probability change jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability game state, so that the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode do not match. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is disallowed and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (c), at the end of the open / close execution mode, the display of each hold image is resumed in a state where the display mode of the hold image HW is the normal display mode HMa. After that, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the hold image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. That is, if the game state before the open / close execution mode is different from the game state after the open / close execution mode, the hold notice effect made before the open / close execution mode is basically canceled, and the same hold is made after the open / close execution mode. The hold notice effect for the image HW is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), when the display position of the reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the reserved image HW is started, the effect control is performed. The device 143 executes the third execution process (step Sa1808) of the hold notice, and determines the promotion to the higher display mode. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode as shown in FIG. 67 (e). Note that FIG. 67 (e) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which a probability variation jackpot occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, and the game state shifts to the high probability gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode.

In this case, the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode do not match. Therefore, if the above example is applied, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening / closing execution mode. .. However, if the low probability game state (left-handed game) aiming to win the first operating port 62 is switched to the high probability game state (right-handed game) aiming to win the second operating port 63, the image for holding is used. Whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the pre-reading result of the pending information corresponding to the HW.

Specifically, when the pre-reading result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is restored after the open / close execution mode. That is, when the reserved information that normally results in a big hit exists in the first special figure, when the game round of the reserved information is executed, the game state can be shifted to the high probability gaming state. Since the state ends early, the display mode is changed to the specific display mode in order to encourage the winning of the second operating port 63.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the reserved image HW may be displayed in the state of the specific display mode from the beginning. It is expected that the player's awareness will be promoted by setting the display mode different from the case where the display mode is restored when the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode match. To. Further, by displaying the information in a specific display mode from the beginning, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to quickly detect the existence of the reserved information which is usually a big hit result in the first special figure, and it becomes easier to respond.

On the other hand, when the pre-reading result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a result other than the normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is not restored after the open / close execution mode as a general rule.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the target hold image HW shifts to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the hold notice effect is executed (the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode). When the above is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode is different from the display mode before the open / close execution mode.

In this modification, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained before the start of the game round is aroused. Can be done. Further, when a plurality of types of game states are set as game states and the open / close execution mode is executed as a result of a big hit, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / fail and the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times differ depending on the game state. May occur.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the game state before and after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is different for the target holding image HW which is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the display after the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Since the mode is different from the display mode before the open / close execution mode, even if the grant determination result, the game rotation effect, etc. due to the difference in the game state change, the target holding image HW gives the player a misunderstanding. This is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably display the holding image in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode.

When the target hold image HW shifts to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the hold notice effect is executed (the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode). The display mode of the target hold image HW after the open / close execution mode is different depending on whether the image HW is the same or not.

As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / fail or the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times depending on the game state. May make a difference. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW, which is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the open / close execution mode, in the game state after the open / close execution mode is displayed before and after the execution of the open / close execution mode. Since the game states are different depending on whether or not they are the same, the display mode can be set based on the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the difference in the game state and the change in the game rotation effect, and the game state after the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to preferably display the image for holding in.

When the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

With the above configuration, after the opening / closing execution mode, the holding image that does not match the actual expected degree is displayed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player. Further, by uniformly setting the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the display mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode, the target hold image HW is subsequently set. It is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the above to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed based on the result.

When the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. While it is possible to absorb the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the change and the fluctuation of the game rotation effect, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, since the target holding image HW which is set to the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode after that, when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. Even so, it can be promoted to a specific display mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified.

In the above case, when the game progresses to the game times of the target holding image HW set in the normal display mode HMa, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target holding image HW is promoted to the specific display mode. The promotion is executed based on the result.

By promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW after the game round of the target hold image HW is started, the information on the pass / fail judgment acquired / transmitted at the start of the game round and the information on the game round production are utilized. You can make a promotion judgment. Since this information corresponds to the game state after the open / close execution mode, the above promotion can be performed in a manner suitable for the game state after the open / close execution mode, which may give the player a misunderstanding such as the degree of expectation. Instead, it is possible to change the display mode of the target holding image HW set in the normal display mode HMa after the open / close execution mode to a specific display mode.

In particular, it is determined whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to the specific display mode based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the execution of the hit / fail determination (start of the game round) in the main control device 162. It is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible by using the same information used for selecting the game time effect in the game time of the target holding image HW. As a result, when the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the target holding image HW is adapted to the game turn effect actually performed in the game turn after the open / close execution mode. The display mode of can be changed to a specific display mode.

Further, with the above configuration, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it corresponds to the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode only for determining whether or not to promote the target hold image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid the addition of a dedicated process for transmitting the variation pattern (information on the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game rotation effect). That is, when the game rotation of the target hold image HW is executed in the game state after the open / close execution mode, the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is displayed by the special symbol display unit 43. In order to execute the game in synchronization with the special figure game times in the above, it is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143. By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening / closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the fluctuation start command. Therefore, not only the promotion determination can be made by using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the staging control device 143 does not need to be equipped with the processing configuration when such a dedicated command is received. , It is possible to suppress the complicated processing configuration.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when the hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are the same. In some cases, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the open / close execution mode, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is set. May be set to a different display mode. In this respect, in this configuration, when the open / close execution mode is executed in the situation where the reserved image set as the specific display mode exists, the information of the display mode at that time is stored, and the opening / closing is based on the stored information. Since the information display mode after the execution mode is set, the display mode after the opening / closing execution mode can be suitably restored to the original mode before the opening / closing execution mode.

By returning to the original mode before the open / close execution mode in this way, the target hold image HW (hold information) that aroused the player's expectation by changing to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode is opened / closed. Even after the mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the same way.

When the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the embodiment, the configuration can be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the open / close execution mode and the game state before the open / close execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target hold image HW changes as the open / close execution mode is executed. The specific display mode can be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the difference in the gaming state. Further, in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode, including the case where the gaming state is different by causing an event that changes to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, the holding mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (holding information).

It is configured to determine whether or not the game state before the open / close execution mode is the same as the game state after the open / close execution mode at the end of the open / close execution mode.

In this case, it is possible to promptly deal with the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of holdings before the target holding image HW is small after the opening / closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be suitably adjusted.

The hold image is hidden while the open / close execution mode is being executed.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed with the end of the open / close execution mode, if the target hold image HW that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game is played. There is a concern that people will get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this configuration, since the hold image is hidden in the open / close execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display itself of the hold image including other hold images is displayed. It is possible to intervene a period that does not occur. As a result, the change in the display mode is suppressed from being conspicuous, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the hold image is hidden, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the open / close execution mode (big hit game effect).

<Modification example 4>
In the third modification of the first embodiment, the holding image is set to a specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode according to the relationship between the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. In this modification, the display mode after the open / close execution mode is determined, but in this modification, the look-ahead process is executed again after the open / close execution mode for the reserved image that was set to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode, and the result is It is configured to determine the display mode of the reserved image based on the above. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described.

<Information acquisition process>
The information acquisition process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). This process is executed when a prize is generated in the operating ports 62 and 63 (executed in step Sa205 of the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 17)), and is performed in the information acquisition process of FIG. It is executed instead. In FIG. 68 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS in the corresponding hold area for the special figure display unit in step Sa304, the hold command setting process is executed in step Sa4101. .. After the execution of step Sa4101, the information acquisition process is terminated. Here, the setting process of the hold command in step Sa4101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68 (b).

First, in step Sa4201, the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the hold ball storage areas Ra and Rb of the hold ball storage area 314b and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 314b. And stores the information in the register of MPU312. In steps Sa4202 to Sa4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step Sa304 (FIG. 68 (a)) based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 ( The value of the jackpot type counter C2 (random number for drawing the jackpot type) and the value of the variation type counter CS (random number for drawing the variation pattern) are grasped. The process of step Sa4201 to step Sa4204 is the same as the process of step Sa1202, step Sa1205, and step Sa1208 of the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment.

In the following step Sa4205, the hold command is set as the output target to the effect control device 143, and then the hold command setting process is terminated. In the hold command, in addition to the information indicating whether the hold information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, the values of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped in the above steps Sa4202 to Sa4204 are input to the hold command. Contains information to indicate.

That is, in the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) performs a pass / fail determination process and a variation pattern lottery process based on the grasped values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS, and the result is obtained. It was configured to be included in the hold command and transmitted to the effect control device 143, but in this modification, it is not the result of the hit / fail determination process or the lottery process of the fluctuation pattern, but the information of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped (hit / fail). Random information used for the determination process and the lottery process of the variation pattern) is included in the hold command and transmitted to the effect control device 143.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the staging control device 143 will be described.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69. This process is executed when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received (executed in step Sa1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), instead of the hold command corresponding process of FIG. 31. It is what is executed. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After incrementing the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1 in step Sa1402, the process proceeds to step Sa4301 to execute the first hold look-ahead process. The first hold look-ahead process is a hold look-ahead process performed by the staging control device 143, and is acquired by the occurrence of a start winning prize based on the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the hold command from the main control device 162. The result of the pass / fail judgment, etc. is pre-read for the reserved information. Here, the first hold look-ahead process of step Sa4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

First, in step Sa4401, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it grasps whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state. In step Sa4402, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information this time is grasped. In step Sa4403, a hit / fail determination table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343.

In this modification, as the hit / fail determination table for the staging control device 143, the same table data as the hit / fail determination table stored in the ROM 313 (win / fail table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored. Further, the jackpot type table for drawing the jackpot type and the variation display time table for drawing the variation pattern are also the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) and the variation display time stored in the ROM 313 of the main control device 162. The same table data as the table (FIGS. 14 and 59) is stored. Therefore, even if the staging control device 143 performs the lottery process separately from the winning / failing lottery and the variation pattern lottery in the main control device 162, the same lottery result can be obtained if the random number values used for the lottery are the same. It is supposed to be.

Since the hit / fail judgment table for the low probability mode (normal game state, time-saving game state) and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode (high probability game state) are set separately in the hit / fail judgment table, step Sa4403 Then, the table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step Sa4401 is acquired.

In step Sa4404, as a look-ahead process for whether or not a jackpot is a big hit, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step Sa4402 and the hit / fail determination table acquired in step Sa4403, and the hit / fail result is grasped. .. In step Sa4405, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing result grasped in step Sa4404 is a big hit winning. If the jackpot is won, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed in step Sa4406, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information this time is grasped.

In step Sa4407, as a look-ahead process for the jackpot type, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery is performed. Grasp the result of. At this time, if the holding information is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special figure, and if the holding information is based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the first 2 Refer to the type table for special figures.

In step Sa4408, the jackpot information as the information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step Sa4404 and the type information as the information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step Sa4407 are stored. These information are stored in the corresponding area in the holding storage area 344c (FIG. 32) of the RAM 344.

In this modification, the process of step Sa4406 and step Sa4407 may be omitted because the pre-reading result of the jackpot type is not reflected in the hold notice effect.

After the execution of step Sa4408 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa4405 (when the jackpot is not won), the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed in step Sa4409, and the value of the variable type counter CS in the hold information this time is calculated. grasp. In step Sa4410, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343 based on the game state grasped in step Sa4401 and the result of the winning / failing lottery grasped in step Sa4404. For example, when the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and the grasping result of step Sa4404 is the deviation result, the deviation variation display time table (FIG. 59 (d)) for the time-saving gaming state is acquired.

In step Sa4411, as the look-ahead processing of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern lottery processing is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step Sa4409 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step Sa4410, and the result is grasped. .. In step Sa4412, the information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the reserved storage area 344c. After the execution of step Sa4412, the first hold look-ahead process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 69), after the first hold look-ahead process is executed in step Sa4301, the hold notice setting process is performed in step Sa1403 using the process result of step Sa4301. The hold notice setting process is a setting process for executing the hold notice effect.

<Processing for open / close execution mode>
The processing for the opening / closing execution mode according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the process for opening / closing execution mode of FIG. 63. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After clearing the hold notice flag in step Sa3406, it is determined in step Sa3407 whether or not the hold image displayed in the specific display mode exists. That is, at the start timing of the open / close execution mode, among the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb, the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. It is determined whether or not the one displayed in any of the modes exists.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa3408, and information indicating in which mode the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is used for returning the RAM 344. Store in area 344f. After the execution of step Sa3408, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa3410 without performing the process of step Sa3409 (FIG. 63). That is, in the above modified example 4, the process of storing the game state before the open / close execution mode was executed in step Sa3409, but in this modified example, the process is not executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 (when it is determined that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344), a process of erasing the return standby flag is executed in step Sa3415.

Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the open / close execution mode is performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, in step Sa4501, the second hold look-ahead process for performing the hold look-ahead again is executed. In the following step Sa4502, a setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. The details of the second hold look-ahead process of step Sa4501 and the setting process for returning the advance notice in step Sa4502 will be described later.

After the execution of step Sa4502, the process of displaying the reserved image in the normal display mode HMa is executed in step Sa3417, and then the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated. That is, even in this modification, the reserved image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode.

<Second hold look-ahead processing>
The second hold look-ahead process of step Sa4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

First, in step Sa4601, the game state after the open / close execution mode is grasped. This determination is made with reference to the jackpot type for this jackpot that triggered the open / close execution mode. For example, if the jackpot this time is the result of the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation game state is grasped as the game state after the open / close execution mode, and if it is the normal jackpot result, the time-saving gaming state is grasped as the game state after the open / close execution mode. do.

In step Sa4602, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each holding information stored in the storage area 344c is grasped. It should be noted that this process may be performed on all the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c, or the hold information to be the return process (displayed in a specific display mode before the open / close execution mode). It may be performed only for the holding information of the holding image).

In step Sa4603, the winning / failing determination table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step Sa4601 is acquired. In step Sa4604, as a look-ahead process for whether or not a jackpot is a big hit, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step Sa4602 and the winning / failing determination table acquired in step Sa4603, and the winning / failing result is grasped. .. The process of step Sa4604 is performed on the hold information for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped in step Sa4602. This also applies to the processing after step Sa4605.

Here, the processes of steps Sa4603 and Sa4604 are the same as those of steps Sa4403 and Sa4404 of the first hold look-ahead process (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (when the hold information is acquired). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the opening / closing execution mode, for example, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-accuracy gaming state, step Sa4603 Since the winning / failing determination table acquired in is different, a lottery result different from the first hold look-ahead process may be obtained. For example, when the probability variation jackpot result is won under the normal gaming state, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the reserved information is "17", the opening / closing execution corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In the first hold look-ahead process before the mode is performed, the missed result is read ahead, but in the second hold look-ahead process assuming the gaming state after the open / close execution mode, the hit result is read ahead (FIG. 12).

In step Sa4605, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing result grasped in step Sa4604 is a big hit winning. If the jackpot is won, in step Sa4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped with reference to the holding storage area 344c. In step Sa4607, as a look-ahead process for the jackpot type, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step Sa4606 and the type table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery is performed. Grasp the result of.

In step Sa4608, the jackpot information as the information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step Sa4604 and the type information as the information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step Sa4607 are stored in the corresponding storage area of the holding storage area 344c. do.

In step Sa4609, the value of the variable type counter CS is grasped with reference to the reserved storage area 344c. In step Sa4610, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343 based on the game state grasped in step Sa4601 and the result of the winning / failing lottery grasped in step Sa4604. For example, when the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is the high-accuracy gaming state and the grasping result of step Sa4604 is the deviation result, the deviation display time table for the high-accuracy gaming state (FIG. 59 (b)). To get.

In step Sa4611, as the look-ahead processing of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern lottery processing is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step Sa4609 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step Sa4610, and the result is grasped. .. The process of step Sa4611 is the same as that of step Sa4411 of the first hold look-ahead process performed at the time of starting winning (when the hold information is acquired), but when the gaming state changes before and after the open / close execution mode, step Sa4610 Since the variable display time table acquired in is different, a lottery result different from the first hold look-ahead process may be obtained.

In step Sa4612, the information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the holding storage area 344c, and then the second holding look-ahead process is terminated.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning the advance notice in step Sa4502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step Sa4701, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding information corresponding to the target holding image (the holding image displayed in the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode) is grasped. The fluctuation pattern grasped in this case is the fluctuation pattern grasped by the second hold look-ahead process.

In step Sa4702, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is any of the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, and the fluctuation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete deviations (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if any of them, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated as it is.

If the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is neither the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H nor the fluctuation pattern 21H, the process proceeds to step Sa4703 and the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 (the fluctuation pattern pre-read in the second hold look-ahead process). Understand the upper limit display mode corresponding to. The upper limit display mode table is stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper limit display mode table defines the upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern 12H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation in the high probability gaming state. , The red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step Sa4703, the upper limit display mode is referred to, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is specified.

In step Sa4704, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode of the target hold image before the open / close execution mode is grasped. In step Sa4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not to return the display mode of the target hold image to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode in the game after the open / close execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode grasped in step Sa4703 is compared with the display mode before the open / close execution mode grasped in step Sa4704, and the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the same as or lower than the upper limit display mode. In some cases, the determination result is that the return is allowed, and if the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that the return is not allowed.

In step Sa4706, it is determined whether or not the result of the return determination in step Sa4705 allows the return. If the judgment result does not allow the return, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated as it is.

If the determination result allows the return, the processes of steps Sa4707 to Sa4711 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 of FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target hold image is displayed at any timing according to the number of holds before the target hold image. It sets whether to return to the aspect. That is, in step Sa4707, the number of reserved images before the target reserved image is grasped, and if the grasped number of reserved images is 1 or more, the lottery process of the return scenario is executed in step Sa4709. In step Sa4710, the return scenario data is set so that the lottery return scenario is executed.

Since the second hold look-ahead process (step Sa4501) is executed at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is possible to start displaying the hold image in a specific display mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this modification, the normal display mode HMa is uniformly set immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode (step Sa3417). That is, even when the target holding image is set to the specific display mode after the opening / closing execution mode, it is once displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode after the fact. With such a configuration, there is a high possibility that the payout of the game ball continues immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the player responds by discharging the game ball such as the lower plate 34. In such a case, it is expected that the attention to the reserved image will decrease. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such a timing, it is possible to suppress the display of the specific display mode without the player's knowledge.

After the execution of step Sa4710, the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step Sa4711. The advance notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed.

After the execution of step Sa4711, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, in step Sa3417, the hold image is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for all the holds existing at the end of the open / close execution mode including the target hold image. .. That is, even when the return process is performed, immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode, the target hold image is displayed in the state of the normal display mode HMa.

Then, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the hold notice in step Sa1808 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). 3 In the execution process (FIG. 45), the display mode of the target holding image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before the open / close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode will be described. First, a case where the pre-reading result of the hit / fail determination does not change before and after the open / close execution mode, but the pre-reading result of the fluctuation pattern changes will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in a high probability gaming state, the main control device 162 performs information acquisition processing ( FIG. 68 (a)) is executed. As a result, it is assumed that 25 is acquired as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 80 is acquired as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, the staging control device 143 executes the first hold look-ahead process (step Sa4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first hold look-ahead process, the look-ahead process is executed using the game state at that time, that is, the hit / fail determination table for the high-accuracy game state and the variable display time table. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 80 is the variation pattern 12H (FIG. 59 (b)), the first hold The result of the look-ahead processing is out of alignment and has a variation pattern of 12H. The fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation of SPSP reach A.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the result of the first hold look-ahead process, and the execution lottery for the hold notice effect for the hold image HW and the lottery for the final display mode. , Lottery of production scenarios, etc. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (FIG. 61 (b)), where the final display is the result of the various lottery. It is assumed that the red display mode HMd is drawn as an embodiment, and the production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The game round in which the hold image HW is acquired usually results in a big hit, and when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the display of all the hold images including the hold image HW is erased as in the above modification 4. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second hold look-ahead process (step Sa4501) based on the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c. When a normal jackpot result is obtained, the game state after the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state. do. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 80 is the variation pattern 23H (FIG. 59 (d)), the second hold The result of the look-ahead processing is off and the fluctuation pattern 23H. The variation pattern 23H is not an SPSP reach A deviation, but a variation pattern corresponding to an SP reach B deviation that is lower than the reach effect.

Further, the staging control device 143 executes the setting process for returning the advance notice (step Sa4502) based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process, and returns the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return is made as to whether or not to make it. In the return determination, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (FIG. 74), and the display mode of the hold image HW before the open / close execution mode is changed. , It is determined whether or not the upper limit display mode that has been grasped is the following mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 23H pre-read by the second hold pre-reading process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the open / close execution mode, corresponds to the fluctuation pattern. The upper limit display mode is as follows. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second. When shifting to the unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even when the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-reading process. The display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc after the opening / closing execution mode ends because the upper limit display mode is as follows.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a variation pattern pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process. It is a higher aspect than the upper limit display aspect corresponding to. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, whether or not to return to the specific display mode differs depending on the display mode of the reserved image HW when the open / close execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is disallowed, the reserved image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the open / close execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 75 (c)).

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game round of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing (step Sa1808) is executed, and promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the pre-reading result of the hit / fail determination changes before and after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in the high probability gaming state, the main control device 162 performs the information acquisition process. Run. As a result, it is assumed that 17 is acquired as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 45 is acquired as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, the staging control device 143 executes the first hold look-ahead process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high probability gaming state is the hit result (FIG. 12), and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 45 is the variation pattern 12A (FIG. 59 (a). )), The result of the first hold look-ahead processing is a hit and a variation pattern 12A. The variation pattern 12A is a variation pattern corresponding to each SPSP reach B.

Further, the staging control device 143 executes the setting process for the hold notice based on the result of the first hold look-ahead process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe (FIG. 61 (a)). As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is drawn as the final display mode, and the production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The game times in which the hold image HW is acquired usually results in a big hit, and when the open / close execution mode is entered, the display of all hold images including the hold image HW is erased. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second hold look-ahead process based on the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c. In the second hold look-ahead process, the look-ahead process is executed using the hit / miss determination table for the time-saving game state and the variable display time table. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 45 is the variation pattern 22H (FIG. 59 (d)), the second hold The result of the look-ahead processing is off and the variation pattern 22H. The fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to per reach, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to reach deviation (SP reach A deviation).

Further, in the effect control device 143, whether or not to execute the setting process for the advance notice return based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process and return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return of. Since the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 22H pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the open / close execution mode, is the upper limit display corresponding to the variation pattern. Aspects The following aspects are used. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second as shown in FIG. 76 (b). When shifting to the unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even when the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-reading process. The display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc after the opening / closing execution mode ends because the upper limit display mode is as follows.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow color display mode HMe when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the second hold look-ahead process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern pre-read by. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, even when the hit / fail changes before and after the open / close execution mode, whether or not to return to the specific display mode differs depending on the display mode of the reserved image HW when the open / close execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is disallowed, the reserved image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the open / close execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 76 (c)).

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game round of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing is executed, and promotion judgment to a higher display mode is performed. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Depending on the value of the change type counter CS of the hold image HW, even if the result of the first hold look-ahead process in the game state before the open / close execution mode is a hit and the change pattern is equal to or higher than the reach effect, the open / close execution mode ends. The result of the second hold look-ahead processing at the time may change to a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation and the complete deviation (for example, as described above, the normal jackpot result is obtained in the high-probability gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information of the hold image HW is 17 and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode is not restored in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the target hold image HW shifts to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the hold notice effect is executed (the hold advance notice effect is executed), the hold look-ahead process (second hold look-ahead process) is performed again after the open / close execution mode. Was executed, and based on the result, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode was set.

In this modification, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained before the start of the game round is aroused. Can be done. Further, when a plurality of types of game states are set as game states and the open / close execution mode is executed as a result of a big hit, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / fail and the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times differ depending on the game state. May occur.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode during the execution of the hold notice effect, the look-ahead process is executed again after the open / close execution mode for the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the target hold image HW (holding image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect) is set. For this reason, it is possible to adjust the display mode after the open / close execution mode so that the display mode after the open / close execution mode is suitable for the gaming state after the open / close execution mode for the target hold image HW for which the hold notice effect was performed before the open / close execution mode. It is possible to preferably display the hold image after the open / close execution mode.

When the hold look-ahead process is performed again after the open / close execution mode, the look-ahead is performed by applying the hit / fail judgment condition and the effect selection condition corresponding to the game state after the open / close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the target holding image HW is matched with the hit / fail result actually notified in the game times of the target holding image HW performed after the open / close execution mode and the game times effect actually performed in the game times. Can be adjusted.

The display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process again after the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW before the open / close execution mode. It was configured to be.

For example, if the display mode of the hold image changes frequently with the transition to the open / close execution mode, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this respect, in this configuration, not only the read-ahead result but also the display mode before the open / close execution mode is taken into consideration to set the display mode after the open / close execution mode. In light of the look-ahead result, if there is no problem even if the same display mode is used after the open / close execution mode, the display mode before the open / close execution mode can be inherited. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive change in the display mode of the hold image with the open / close execution mode as a boundary, and it is possible to display the hold image after the open / close execution mode in a natural manner.

A plurality of upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each game state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the read-ahead process again after the open / close execution mode and before the open / close execution mode. Based on the result of the comparison with the display mode of the above, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is set. More specifically, when the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the upper limit display mode or the following derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the open / close execution mode. The configuration is the same as the previous display mode.

In this modification, as a specific display mode (notification mode in the hold notice effect) of the hold image, a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. In such a configuration in which the degree of expectation is set stepwise and a large number of display modes are provided, the range of the degree of expectation corresponding to one display mode is narrowed, so that the display mode is opened / closed before the open / close execution mode. When the hold image is displayed after the execution mode, the expected degree suggested before and after the open / close execution mode tends to differ. In this respect, with this configuration, even in a situation where a large number of display modes are set, it is possible to preferably display the hold image after the open / close execution mode by matching the expectations.

When the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode derived from the variation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It was configured to be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode after the opening / closing execution mode from exceeding the corresponding expected degree in the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to suitably display the holding image after the opening / closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, whether or not to promote the display mode to the specific display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW is determined. Judgment was made, and the promotion was executed based on the result.

When the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. While it is possible to absorb the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the change and the fluctuation of the game rotation effect, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the target holding image HW set as the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode as the game progresses to the game times of the target holding image HW. Therefore, even when the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified. ..

In the above case, the determination as to whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to the specific display mode is performed based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the execution of the hit / fail determination (start of the game round) in the main control device 162. And said.

In this case, since it is determined whether or not promotion is possible using the same information used for selecting the game rotation effect in the game times of the target hold image HW, the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game after the open / close execution mode are used. When the state is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game turn effect actually performed in the game round after the open / close execution mode.

Further, with the above configuration, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it corresponds to the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode only for determining whether or not to promote the target hold image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid the addition of a dedicated process for transmitting the variation pattern (information on the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game rotation effect). That is, when the game rotation of the target hold image HW is executed in the game state after the open / close execution mode, the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is displayed by the special symbol display unit 43. In order to execute the game in synchronization with the special figure game times in the above, it is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143. By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening / closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the fluctuation start command. Therefore, not only the promotion determination can be made by using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the staging control device 143 does not need to be equipped with the processing configuration when such a dedicated command is received. , It is possible to suppress the complicated processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode, it is possible to temporarily change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. It was configured.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the same mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is usually changed from the specific display mode as the open / close execution mode is executed. The display mode can be changed to HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination that the mode is not restored to the same mode. Further, in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode, the normal display mode HMa and the normal display mode HMa, including the case where it is determined that the same mode is not restored by causing an event that changes to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the reserved image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (holding information).

The hold image is hidden while the open / close execution mode is being executed.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed with the end of the open / close execution mode, if the target hold image HW that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game is played. There is a concern that people will get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this configuration, since the hold image is hidden in the open / close execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display itself of the hold image including other hold images is displayed. It is possible to intervene a period that does not occur. As a result, the change in the display mode is suppressed from being conspicuous, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the hold image is hidden, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the open / close execution mode (big hit game effect).

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the display mode of the hold image before the occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode of the hold image at the time of returning from the power failure state are targeted. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment and each modification, when the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and the launch control device 191 detects the occurrence of a power failure state, a power failure occurs in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. A flag (information on the occurrence of a power failure state) is set, and power for power failure is supplied to the RAM 314 from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and the emission control device 191. That is, when a power failure state occurs, the game times of the special figure and the normal drawing in the main display unit 81 that were in progress at the time of the power failure state, or the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 when the power failure state occurs. Power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the stored hold information and the like can be held, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this modification, in addition, the data stored in the RAM 344 is backed up in the staging control device 143 as well.

However, since the staging control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 mounted on the staging control device 143 has a larger capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and is large in scale. .. Therefore, if all the data stored in the RAM 344 of the staging control device 143 is to be backed up as it is, the power consumption under the power failure state becomes large. As a result, the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 is consumed in a short period of time, the data retention period (backup period) is shortened, and the backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage amount is required, resulting in an increase in cost. There is a concern about inviting.

Therefore, in this modification, instead of backing up the entire data stored in the RAM 344, as a part of the backup, information related to the hold image such as the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c is backed up. It is configured as follows. The electrical configuration for that purpose will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

In addition to the RAM 344, the effect control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium dedicated to backup. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and the information about the reserved image can be stored. The backup RAM 345 may be one chip with the MPU 342 like the RAM 344, or may be a chip separately from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

The RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 are supplied with power for power failure from the backup power supply unit 316. In this modification, when a power failure occurs, information about the reserved image among the data stored in the RAM 344 is stored (copied) in the backup RAM 345, and power is supplied to the RAM 344 at the time of the power failure. Is for supplying the power required to read out the information about the reserved image stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (write process to the backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power to the RAM 344 at the time of power interruption is stopped.

On the other hand, to the backup RAM 345, the power supply at the time of power interruption is continued even after the writing process of the information regarding the reserved image is completed. In this way, when a power failure occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to the storage medium at the time of power failure. , The power consumption for data retention can be suppressed to a low level. As a result, it is possible to prevent the data retention period from being shortened and the backup power supply unit 316 having a large storage capacity from being required.

Although not shown, the power supply and emission control device 191 or the staging control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) for switching the supply state of the power when the power is cut off to the RAM 344. The switching unit supplies power from the backup power supply unit 316 to the RAM 344 while at least reading information about the reserved image from the RAM 344 and writing it to the backup RAM 345, and writing information about the reserved image to the backup RAM 345 is performed. After the end, it operates so as to stop the supply of power to the RAM 344 at the time of power interruption.

The staging control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal as in the main control device 162, and a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and the emission control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. That is, in this modification, when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315, both the main control device 162 and the staging control device 143 execute the power failure processing.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the staging control device 143 will be described. The processing of the MPU 342 is roughly classified into a main processing activated when the power is turned on, a normal processing for effect control, and an NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. Of these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in the main controller 162, and thus will be described with reference to FIG.

<NMI interrupt processing>
As shown in FIG. 15, in the NMI interrupt process, first, in step Sa11, the data of the register used in the MPU 342 is saved in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or the backup RAM 345. In step Sa12, the power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa13, the saved data is returned to the register used in MPU342 again, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. If the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the register used by the MPU 342, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The main processing is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is executed when an external power supply is supplied.

In step Sa5101, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed, and in step Sa5102, access to the RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step Sa5103, the used area of RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa5104, the initialization process of RAM 344 is executed. After that, the main process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the normal process described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

First, in step Sa5201, the power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process performs power-on notification corresponding to the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

If a power failure occurs when the game is not being executed as the state before the power is turned on, a message such as "The power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 75 as the power on notification. It is done in G. This message display is continued for a predetermined period, and then a predetermined demo image is displayed.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the game and the continuation is resumed after the power is turned on (after power is restored), a message such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed as a power on notification. Is done on the display screen G. At that time, the main display unit 81 is in a state where the continuous game rounds are executed, but the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and the variation display due to them is not performed. Such a fluctuation display is performed from the start timing of the next game round (game round started after the power is turned on) after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). The above message display is deleted when the subsequent game rounds are completed (when the next game round is started).

In addition, the sound output from the speaker unit 29 is performed during the power-on notification, regardless of whether the power-off state occurs during the game round or when the power-off state occurs during the game round. It is not done and the silent state is maintained. The sound output is performed from the start timing of the game rounds (if the subsequent game rounds are performed at the time of power restoration, the next game round) that is started after the power is turned on. With such a configuration, when the hall power to which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on and the pachinko machines 10 are started up at the same time when preparing for business in the game hall, each pachinko machine is used. It is possible to suppress the sound being output from 10 all at once and becoming noisy.

In step Sa5202, a process for returning the hold notice for displaying the hold image in the display mode before the power failure is executed. The details of the process will be described later. The processes of step Sa5201 and step Sa5202 are executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After the execution of step Sa5202, the external signal output process is executed in step Sa5203. In the external signal output processing, the display control device 350 transmits the command set in the previous normal processing, and the control signal for driving and controlling the various lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 is transmitted. In step Sa5204, a counter update process for updating the counter value provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is executed.

In step Sa5205, a command reception process for receiving a command from the main control unit 162 is executed. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344 as described above. In step Sa5206, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step Sa5207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power failure flag is not set, that is, if a power failure state has not occurred, the process proceeds to step Sa5208, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the current normal process. It is determined whether or not (2 msec in this modification) has elapsed.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step Sa5203 and the processes after step Sa5203 are executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process is waited until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the values of the various counters may be updated by using the remaining time, as in the normal processing (FIG. 20) in the main control device 162.

Further, when a positive determination is made in step Sa5207 (when the power failure flag is set), it means that a power failure state has occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa5209 to create holding image information indicating in which display mode each holding image was displayed before the occurrence of the power failure state (immediately before the occurrence). In this step, referring to the effect scenario data for the hold notice effect stored in the RAM 344, if there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode, or if such a hold image exists. , Which mode is displayed, etc. is grasped, and the image information for holding is created based on the grasped result.

In step Sa5210, information about the reserved image is stored in the backup RAM 345. At that time, in addition to the holding image information created in step Sa5209, the information stored in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is also stored in the backup RAM 345, and the holding image is displayed when the power is restored. It is stored and retained as information for. The information stored in the hold storage area 344c includes the hold information (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, variable type counter) stored in each area set for the first special figure and the second special figure. In addition to each value of CS, etc.), information indicating the number of pending items is included.

The storage process of the reserved image information created in step Sa5209 and the storage process of the information stored in the reserved storage area 344c do not necessarily have to be executed in the same step, and one of the storage processes is executed. After that, the other storage process may be executed.

In step Sa5211, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup RAM 345. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value of information about the reserved image stored in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa5212, access to the RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

<Process for returning the hold notice>
The process for returning the hold notice in step Sa5202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa5301, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. When the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 is exhausted and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is lost. In this case, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the power failure flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa5302 to calculate the RAM determination value. In the following step Sa5303, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step Sa5302 is compared with the RAM determination value (step Sa5211) saved when the power failure state occurs, and it is determined whether or not they match.

If they do not match, the RAM determination value is regarded as abnormal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is. The validity of the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 can also be determined by whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the backup RAM 345 are correctly stored.

On the other hand, when the two match, it is assumed that the RAM determination value is normal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa5304, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referred to to grasp the number of holdings when the power failure state occurs.

In step Sa5305, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces grasped in step Sa5304 is 0. If the number of holdings is 0, that is, if a power failure occurs in a situation where there is no holding, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the number of reserved items is not 0, the process proceeds to step Sa5306 to execute the display mode setting process. This process is for setting the display mode of the hold image to be displayed after the power is restored. Here, the setting process of the display mode of step Sa5306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa5401, the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referred to, and the display mode of each holding image before the occurrence of the power failure state (immediately before the occurrence) is grasped. In step Sa5402, it is determined whether or not the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode exists based on the grasping result of step Sa5401. If the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the process proceeds to step Sa5403, and the display mode of all the reserved images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa5404, and the display mode of the hold image (target hold image) is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the red display mode HMd). It is determined whether or not it is. When the display mode of the target reserved image is a mode lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step Sa5405, and the display mode of the hold image is displayed before the power failure. Set to a specific display mode. In step Sa5406, the display mode of the hold image other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

When the display mode of the target reserved image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe), the process proceeds to step Sa5407, and the display mode of the hold image is lower than the predetermined display mode. Is set to the display mode (for example, the green display mode HMc). That is, when the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target hold image at the time of power recovery is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure.

In step Sa5408, the display mode of the hold image other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa5409, the return notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the process for returning the hold notice (FIG. 80), after executing the process of setting the display mode of step Sa5306, each hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step Sa5306 in step Sa5307. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to be so. In step Sa5308, the hold information and the like stored in the backup RAM 345 are stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step Sa5309, the power failure flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is cleared, and then the process for restoring the hold notice is terminated.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The special figure variation display process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 82. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the process for displaying the special figure variation in FIG. 41. In FIG. 82, the same steps as in FIG. 41 are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in FIG. 82, for convenience, the description of the first execution process and the like of the hold notice is omitted.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1804 and the fluctuation display is in progress, the fluctuation processing is executed in step Sa1805. In step Sa5501, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times this time is the game times of the hold image (target hold image) displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure. If it is not the game time of the target pending image, the processing for displaying the special figure variation is terminated as it is.

In the case of the game times of the target reserved image, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is performed in step Sa5502, and then the special figure variation display process is terminated. The fourth execution process of the hold notice is for promoting the display mode of the hold image to a higher mode in the game round of the target hold image.

<Process for 4th execution of hold notice>
The fourth execution process of the hold notice of step Sa5502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa5601, it is determined whether or not the return notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The return notice flag indicates that, at the time of power recovery, a process of changing the display mode of the reserved image, which is a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure, to a higher mode should be executed. It is for the MPU 342 to grasp. If the return notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the return notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa5602, and it is determined whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted, and is the same as the promotion flag according to the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, it is determined in step Sa5603 whether or not the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the determined flag is stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa5604, and it is determined whether or not the pending change points remain in the ongoing game round. If there are no pending change points remaining, the process proceeds to step Sa5611 to clear the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then ends the fourth execution process of the hold notice. do.

If the hold change point remains, the process proceeds to step Sa5605 to execute the hold notice promotion process, and then ends the hold notice fourth execution process. Here, the process for promotion of the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In the promotion process, first, in step Sa5701, the current display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. The current display mode is the display mode set in step Sa5407 of the display mode setting process (FIG. 81).

In step Sa5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the game round (running game round) of the target holding image.

In step Sa5703, the promotion determination of the hold notice effect is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa5701, the current display mode grasped in step Sa5702, and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. conduct. The promotion determination determines whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D to a specific display mode higher than the current state.

Similar to the promotion determination table (FIG. 47) according to the first embodiment, the promotion determination table has an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. In step Sa5703, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is a display mode lower than the specified upper limit display mode. As a result, if it is a lower display mode, promotion of the display mode is allowed, and if not, promotion is not possible.

After the execution of step Sa5703, the determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step Sa5704. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been executed.

In step Sa5705, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion determination in step Sa5703 allows promotion of the display mode. If promotion is not allowed, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step Sa5611 (FIG. 83), the return notice flag is cleared, and the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If promotion is allowed, the process proceeds to step Sa5706, and the lottery process of the promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines at which timing (holding change point) the target holding image displayed in the execution display area D is changed to which display mode. The lottery for the promotion scenario is acquired from the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 and each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, as in step Sa2405 (FIG. 46) according to the first embodiment. It is performed based on the counter (random value) for the lottery.

In step Sa5707, the promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario drawn in step Sa5706 is executed. In step Sa5708, the promotion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the promotion process of the hold notice is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process (FIG. 83) of the hold notice, if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa5602 (when the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa5606, and whether or not it is the promotion timing of the display mode. Is determined. This determination is made based on the setting result of the promotion scenario in step Sa5707. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for executing the fourth execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the promotion timing, the process proceeds to step Sa5607, and the display mode (higher display mode) of the change destination in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step Sa5608, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step Sa5607. Specifically, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode is to be changed as an output command to the display control device 350. Set a command to that effect.

In step Sa5609, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step Sa5607 or the display mode set as the change destination in step Sa5608 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and the change process this time is a process in the middle of the process, it is considered that the display mode is not the final display mode. The step is negatively determined, and the process for executing the fourth execution of the hold notice is terminated.

In the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted in step Sa5610. In the following step Sa5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Display mode of images on hold before and after power failure>
The display mode of the hold image before the power failure and after the power recovery will be described. Here, first, a case where a holding image set to the green display mode HMc exists before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is held. It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in the green display mode HMc. If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the holding images including the holding image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the effect control device 143 stores information about the reserved image in the backup RAM 345. Since power for data retention at the time of power failure is supplied to the backup RAM 345 from the power supply and the emission control device 191, information and the like related to the holding image stored in the backup RAM 345 are held even during the power failure state. ..

After that, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps Sa2004 to step Sa2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored and held in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power failure state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

At the time of power recovery, the effect control device 143 executes the power-on notification process (step Sa5201) for executing the power-on notification. As a result, a character display 461 such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed on the display screen G.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes a process for returning the hold notice (step Sa5202) for returning the display of the hold image. In the process for returning the hold notice, the number of hold images before the occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode of each hold image are grasped and grasped based on the information about the hold image stored and held in the backup RAM 345. It is determined whether or not there is an image for holding that has been displayed in a specific display mode. If there is a reserved image displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is a predetermined display mode (for example, a red display mode HMd) or higher, and the image is restored based on the result. Set the display mode at the time of electricity.

Here, since the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state is the green display mode HMc, which is a mode lower than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the reserved image HW is the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state. Set to do. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85B, each holding image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power failure state occurs.

Since the information regarding the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the character display 461 as a power-on notification and each of the holding images restored based on the information about the holding image stored in the backup RAM 345 are displayed in a variable manner when the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. It is displayed on the background 462 for power recovery, which is different from the background. The background for power recovery 462 is, for example, a background for monochromatic display in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

After that, when the restarted continuous game rounds are completed, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), each holding image is shifted to the lower unit holding display area. As the next game round is started, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed on the display screen G, and the screen is restored.

Next, a case where a holding image set to the red display mode HMd exists before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, three pieces of hold information of the first special figure are separately present and displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3. It is assumed that the reserved image HW is displayed in the red display mode HMd. If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power cut state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power cut state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43. Further, the staging control device 143 executes a process for returning the hold notice, and determines whether or not the specific display mode of the hold image HW before the occurrence of the power interruption state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the holding image HW before the occurrence of the power interruption state is the red display mode HMd, which is more than the predetermined display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the holding image HW at the time of power restoration is before the power failure. It is set to the green display mode HMc lower than the display mode of. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86B, the display of each holding image is restored in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when the start timing of the game round of the hold image HW comes, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. .. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote to a display mode higher than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

That is, when the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode is temporarily restored to a display mode lower than the display mode before the power failure, and the variable start command transmitted at the start of the game round is used. Based on this, the display mode of the reserved image HW is reset. As a result, when the promotion to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode) is determined, the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is the green display mode as shown in FIG. 86 (c). The red display mode HMd is changed from HMc. Since the game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times of the reserved image HW is determined based on the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command, promotion is determined on the premise of the variation pattern. The display mode of the reserved image HW is consistent with the above-mentioned game rotation effect.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which a hold notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power is cut off. The display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the previous target hold image HW, and the hold notice effect is re-executed.

In this modification, since the hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as the specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the expectation of the player. It can be configured. Under such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the hold notice effect and then the power is restored, the hold notice effect that was performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. As a result, the hold notice effect can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to prevent the hold notice effect from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, it is possible to suitably restore the hold notice effect that was performed before the power failure.

By storing the information about the hold image in the backup RAM 345 when the power cut state occurs, the information corresponding to the display mode of the hold image can be held even after the power cut state occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of the power interruption state and the control related to the reserved image is stopped, the information held in the backup RAM 345 after the power is restored can be stored. By referring to it, it is possible to grasp the display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure. As a result, when the hold notice effect is re-executed after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be suitably restored to the display mode before the power failure.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power restoration is restricted to the predetermined mode or less. And said.

For example, if the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b changes due to the influence of the power failure, the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the power cut and the result of the game round after the power is restored are correct or not. Inconsistency occurs between the judgment result and the selection result of the game rotation effect. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the hold notice effect before the power failure, and if it is re-executed as it is after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the hit / fail judgment) in the game times and the game times There is a concern that the game rotation effect to be performed will not match the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect, and will give an unpleasant impression to the player.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of the specific display mode performed at the time of the power failure is a predetermined mode or more and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the hold notice effect is limited to the lower display mode. Re-execute. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the expectation degree that does not match the notification result in the game round is suggested by the hold notice effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, the promotion is executed.

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode of the predetermined mode or less, the promotion to the higher display mode is achieved by performing the game round of the target hold image HW. Therefore, it is avoided that the suggested expectation remains low.

In the above case, the determination of whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed as the trigger of the game round and the selection result of the fluctuation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW by using the result after the power restoration as the determination material for the hit / fail determination and the selection of the game rotation effect. As a result, the above promotion can be performed while matching with the notification result or the like actually performed in the game round after the power is restored.

In the power recovery process executed when the power is restored from the power failure state, the setting process (return process of the hold notice) for re-executing the hold notice effect is executed.

In this case, the hold notice effect can be promptly re-executed when the power cutoff state is resolved and the power is restored. As a result, when a power failure state occurs in the middle of the game, and there is a period during which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, the hold notice effect is performed prior to the restoration of the symbol variation display. Can be re-executed.

<Modification 6>
In the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided in the staging control device 143, but in this modified example, it is not provided, and the staging control device 143 has a backup function. not. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The staging control device 143 according to the present modification has the same electrical configuration as the staging control device 143 according to the first embodiment, and is not provided with the backup RAM 345. Further, it does not have a function of backing up the data stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, if a power failure occurs in a situation where a hold exists (a situation in which a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information or the like held by the staging control device 143 is displayed. Disappear.

In this modification, the signal line for transmitting the power failure signal output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the effect control device 143, and the power failure signal is not input to the effect control device 143. It is configured as follows.

Further, in this modification, in the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) of the main control device 162, the process result (look-ahead result of the variation pattern lottery or the like) is stored in the hold ball storage area 314b (FIG. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in each area set in the hold ball storage area 314b, in addition to the hold information (values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS), the hold information is held. The look-ahead result is stored.

The information regarding the result of the look-ahead process stored in the holding ball storage area 314b is not erased and continues to be stored in the RAM 314 even after the information is transmitted to the effect control device 143. The purpose of such a configuration is to make it possible to grasp the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the occurrence of the power interruption state when the power is restored after the power interruption state occurs.

That is, in a normal pachinko machine, after the hold look-ahead process is executed by the main control device 162 and the result is transmitted to the staging control device 143 as a hold command or the like, the read-ahead result is sent to the control process on the main control device 162 side. It is not necessary to leave the information on the main control device 162 side because it is not used for the purpose. Therefore, after transmission to the staging control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information regarding the look-ahead result is stored and erase the information by overwriting the look-ahead result or the like for the subsequent pending information. Is.

On the other hand, in this modification, even after the information regarding the look-ahead result is transmitted to the staging control device 143, the information is stored in the RAM 314. When a power failure occurs, power for power failure is supplied to the RAM 314 from the power supply and the emission control device 191, and the information in the RAM 314 is held without being erased. Therefore, by configuring the configuration as in this modification, it is possible to retain the information regarding the look-ahead result when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored after the power failure, before the power failure occurs. It becomes possible to grasp the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed in.

The information regarding the look-ahead result stored in the RAM 314 is not permanently stored, but is erased as the reserved information is erased. That is, the information regarding the look-ahead result in the RAM 314 is deleted according to the game round of the hold information that is the target of the hold look-ahead process.

By the way, the storage area of the information related to the look-ahead result is set as the hold ball storage area 314b, so that it is possible to grasp which hold information the information related to the look-ahead result corresponds to and to store other information so as not to be overwritten carelessly. This is for convenience in allocating areas. Therefore, the storage area for the information does not necessarily have to be the reserved ball storage area 314b, and may be another storage area in the RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described.

<Main processing>
The main process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87 (a). This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main process of FIG. In FIG. 87 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 19, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2003 (when the RAM erase switch is not pressed), it is determined in step Sa2004 whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. When the power failure flag is stored, that is, when the power is restored while the data of the RAM 314 is stored and held after the power failure state occurs, the RAM determination value is calculated in step Sa2005.

In step Sa2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal, and if it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step Sa2007. In step Sa2008, a power recovery command is output.

In step Sa6101, a hold command at the time of power recovery is set based on the information stored and held in the hold ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, and is output to the effect control device 143. The power recovery hold command includes information indicating the number of holds when a power cut state occurs, information indicating the result of hold look-ahead performed before the power cut state occurs, and the like. After the execution of step Sa6101, the process of step Sa2009 (clearing the power failure flag) is executed.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the staging control device 143 will be described.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87 (b). This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the normal process according to this modification, the backup process of the hold information when the power failure state occurs is not provided.

Specifically, in the normal process of FIG. 79 according to the above modification 5, it is confirmed in step Sa5207 whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup RAM 345, and the presence or absence of the power failure state is determined, and the power failure flag is set. When it was stored (when a power failure state occurred), the processes of steps Sa5209 to Sa5212 were executed, but these processes are provided in the normal process of FIG. 87 (b) according to this modification. not. Further, in the normal process of FIG. 79 according to the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the process for returning the hold notice is executed in step Sa5202, but this modified example In the normal process of FIG. 87 (b) according to FIG. 87, such a process is not provided, and after the power-on notification process of step Sa5201 is executed, the external output process of step Sa5203 is executed.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. This process is executed in step Sa5206 of the normal process (FIG. 87 (b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 30. In FIG. 88, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 30, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa6201, it is determined whether or not a power recovery hold command from the main control device 162 has been received. The power recovery hold command is output when the power is restored from the power cut state (step Sa6101 in FIG. 87 (a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of holds when the power cut state occurs. Also, information indicating the result of hold look-ahead performed before the occurrence of the power failure state is included.

If the power recovery hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa6202, and the number of holds when a power failure state occurs is grasped based on the power recovery hold command from the main control device 162. In step Sa6203, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces grasped in step Sa6202 is 0. If the number of held images is not 0, the process proceeds to step Sa6204 to execute a display mode setting process for setting the display mode of the held image after power recovery. Here, the setting process of the display mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa6301, the fluctuation pattern of each hold information is grasped based on the hold command at the time of power recovery from the main control device 162. This fluctuation pattern is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) of the main control device 162 before the occurrence of the power failure state. Since the hold command at the time of power recovery includes information on the fluctuation patterns for the number of hold pieces grasped in step Sa6202, in this step, all the fluctuation patterns are grasped.

In addition, when sending the hold command at the time of power recovery including the information of the fluctuation pattern for the number of holds, it is assumed that the amount of data will be large or the information of the fluctuation pattern cannot be stored. The information may be transmitted in multiple times. Specifically, first, the hold command at the time of power recovery may be transmitted in a form that does not include the fluctuation pattern information, and then the fluctuation pattern information of each hold information may be sequentially transmitted.

In step Sa6302, it is determined whether or not the jackpot pending information exists based on the grasping result of step Sa6301. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa6301 includes the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and whether there is hold information in which the jackpot is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state. Judge whether or not.

If there is a jackpot hold information, the process proceeds to step Sa6303, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow color display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when the jackpot is pre-read, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step Sa6304, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the holding image (target holding image). The return notice flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process (promotion process) for changing the display mode of the hold image in the game of the target hold image should be executed. The return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, or the corresponding area (corresponding area in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 so as to be shifted as a set with the hold information of the target hold image. It may be stored in the area corresponding to the target hold image).

After the execution of step Sa6304 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa6302 (when there is no jackpot hold information), there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect in the variation pattern grasped in step Sa6301 in step Sa6305. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation pattern 5H, the fluctuation pattern 6H, the fluctuation pattern 12H, the fluctuation pattern 13H, the fluctuation pattern 24H, and the fluctuation pattern 25H exists. This step is to determine whether or not the pending information, which is the result of the pre-reading before the power failure, includes the information corresponding to the reach effect in which the rank of the jackpot expectation is higher than the predetermined value. ..

If there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect, the process proceeds to step Sa6303, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information for which the variation pattern is pre-read is set as the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and is, for example, a blue display mode HMb. In step Sa6307, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the reserved image.

After the execution of step Sa6307 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa6305 (when there is no fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect), in step Sa6308, whether or not there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped in step Sa6301. To judge. If the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, some of the information indicating the look-ahead result may be damaged due to the occurrence of a power failure state, or some data may be damaged due to the influence of noise when the hold command for power recovery is transmitted. It is possible that there is a problem.

If there is hold information for which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the process proceeds to step Sa6309, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa6310, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the reserved image.

After the execution of step Sa6310 or when a negative determination is made in step Sa6308 (when there is no hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), the display mode is set by the remaining hold images (step Sa6302 to step Sa6310) in step Sa6311. The display mode of the reserved image) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process (FIG. 88), after executing the setting process of the display mode in step Sa6204, the hold image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G in step Sa6205. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to be displayed. After the execution of step Sa6205, the process proceeds to step Sa1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps Sa1301 to Sa1308 are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa6201 (when the hold command at the time of power recovery is not received), the processing of steps Sa6202 to Sa6205 is skipped and the process proceeds to step Sa1301. If a negative determination is made in step Sa6203 (when the number of reserved pieces is 0), the processing of step Sa6204 and step Sa6205 is skipped and the process proceeds to step Sa1301.

By the above processing, when the power is restored after the power failure occurs, the hold image of the hold information for which the jackpot result has been pre-read is displayed in the first specific display mode, and the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is achieved. The hold image of the hold information for which the corresponding deviation result has been pre-read is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target hold image is promoted by performing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in step Sa5502 in the specific variation display process (FIG. 82). That is, the display mode of the target hold image is reset based on the fluctuation start command transmitted after the power is restored. Since the fourth execution process of the hold notice is the same as that of the above modification 5, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Display mode of images on hold before and after power failure>
The display mode of the hold image before the power failure and after the power recovery will be described. Here, first, the case where the jackpot result is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is held. It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in the red display mode HMd. The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a jackpot result, and the look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to other hold images is a miss result (complete miss).

If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the holding images including the holding image HW are not displayed.

At this time, since the power supply and the emission control device 191 supply power to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 at the time of power interruption for data retention, the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power interruption state. Will be done. The data stored in the RAM 314 includes the processing result of the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) performed on the hold information of each hold image before the occurrence of the power failure state.

After that, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration processing (step Sa2004 to step Sa2010) based on the data stored and held in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power failure state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

Further, at the time of power recovery, in the main control device 162, among the data stored in the RAM 314, the information indicating the number of reserved pieces, the information on whether each hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, The result information (variation pattern) of the hold look-ahead process for each hold information is read out and transmitted to the staging control device 143 as a hold command at the time of power recovery (step Sa6101).

The staging control device 143 executes a process for restoring the display of the reserved image based on the various information transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). In such processing, the display mode of the reserved image HW in which the jackpot result is pre-read is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other reserved image is set to the normal display mode HMa. .. At this time, if there is hold information for which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa. The image display is restored. At the time of power recovery, the effect control device 143 executes the power-on notification process (step Sa5201) for executing the power-on notification, so that the display screen G has a character such as "The screen will be restored soon". Display 461 is displayed. Therefore, each holding image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the character display 461.

After that, when the start timing of the game round of the hold image HW comes, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. .. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote to a display mode higher than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

That is, the holding image HW of the holding information whose jackpot result is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state is temporarily limited to the display mode (first specific display mode) below the predetermined display mode, and the game round is started. The display mode of the pending image HW is reset based on the variable start command transmitted from time to time. As a result, when promotion to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe) is determined, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the reserved image HW is displayed in the execution display area D. The display mode is changed to a higher mode (for example, a red display mode HMd).

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern grasped from the fluctuation start command transmitted at the start of the game round of the reserved image HW does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot is not notified in the game round. Is not permitted to be promoted to a higher display mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, a case where the SP reach loss result and the SPSP reach loss result are pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the first unit hold display area Ga1 is held. It is assumed that the image HW1 for holding is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, and the image HW for holding in the third unit hold display area Ga3 is displayed in the green display mode HMc.

The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW1 is the variation pattern 3H (SP reach A out), and the look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW2 is the variation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B out). The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image of the second unit hold display area Ga2 is the fluctuation pattern 1H (completely off).

If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. After that, when the power cut state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power cut state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

Further, the staging control device 143 executes a process for restoring the display of the hold image based on the power recovery hold command transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). At this time, for the reserved image HW1 in which the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3H) corresponding to the SP reach deviation is pre-read, the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the SPSP reach deviation higher than that is supported. With respect to the reserved image HW2 in which the variation pattern (variation pattern 6H) is pre-read, the display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91B, each holding image is in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW1 is the normal display mode HMa and the display mode of the holding image HW2 is the blue display mode HMb. Is restored. That is, the hold image of the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach effect lower than the predetermined order is displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether or not it was displayed in the specific display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state. , The hold image of the hold information corresponding to the reach effect of the predetermined order or higher is displayed by limiting it to the display mode (second specific display mode) of the predetermined or lower.

The point that the promotion determination to the higher display mode is performed when the game round of the reserved image HW2 is executed is the same as the case where the jackpot result described with reference to FIG. 90 is pre-read. , The description is omitted.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which a hold notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power is cut off. Based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored is set, and the hold notice effect is re-executed.

In this modification, since the hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as the specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the expectation of the player. It can be configured. Under such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the hold notice effect and then the power is restored, the hold notice effect that was performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. As a result, the hold notice effect can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to prevent the hold notice effect from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the occurrence of the abnormality, it becomes possible to preferably re-execute the hold notice effect after the power is restored.

By storing the pre-reading result, the fluctuation pattern, and the like by the hold pre-reading process in the hold ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, the information corresponding to the pre-reading result can be held even after the power failure state occurs.

In the above configuration, since the information corresponding to the look-ahead result is retained without being lost when a power failure occurs, the display mode of the target holding image HW is based on the information held in the RAM 314 after the power is restored. Can be determined, and it becomes possible to preferably re-execute the hold notice effect after the power is restored.

When the hold notice effect is executed after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less.

For example, if the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b changes due to the influence of the power failure, the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the power cut and the result of the game round after the power is restored are correct or not. Inconsistency occurs between the judgment result and the selection result of the game rotation effect. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the hold notice effect before the power failure, and if it is re-executed as it is after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the hit / fail judgment) in the game times and the game times There is a concern that the game rotation effect to be performed will not match the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect, and will give an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of the specific display mode performed at the time of the power failure is a predetermined mode or more and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the hold notice effect is limited to the lower display mode. Re-execute. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the expectation degree that does not match the notification result in the game round is suggested by the hold notice effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, the promotion is executed.

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode of the predetermined mode or less, the promotion to the higher display mode is achieved by performing the game round of the target hold image HW. Therefore, it is avoided that the suggested expectation remains low.

In the above case, the determination of whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed as the trigger of the game round and the selection result of the fluctuation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW by using the result after the power restoration as the determination material for the hit / fail determination and the selection of the game rotation effect. As a result, the above promotion can be performed while matching with the notification result or the like actually performed in the game round after the power is restored.

When the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure cannot be specified after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure for some of the hold images cannot be specified and the display of the hold image itself is stopped, the player can be appropriately notified of the number of holds. There is a concern that it will disappear. In addition, when the hold advance notice effect is re-executed on the hold image for which the result of the hold look-ahead process can be specified (the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode), the result of the hold look-ahead process cannot be specified. Due to the lack of display of the image, the order of the reserved image set as the specific display mode and the game times may be out of order, which may lead to a result suggesting the degree of expectation so as to correspond to another game time. .. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold image that can specify the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure and the hold image that cannot be specified are distinguished, and for the latter, the display mode is redisplayed as the normal display mode HMa. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the number of holds and to appropriately perform the hold notice effect on other hold images.

When the power is restored from the power failure state, the main control device 162 outputs the power recovery hold command to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 receives the power recovery hold command, and the hold notice effect is re-released. It is configured to execute the setting process (setting process of display mode) for execution.

In this case, the hold notice effect can be promptly re-executed when the power cutoff state is resolved and the power is restored. As a result, when a power failure state occurs in the middle of the game, and there is a period during which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, the hold notice effect is performed prior to the restoration of the symbol variation display. Can be re-executed.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the switching of the effect mode is restricted when the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the effect mode is configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this modification, the effect mode is automatically switched without the operation of the effect operation unit 36. It is configured in. It should be noted that the staging mode has a staging mode A and a staging mode B, and these have different frequency of occurrence of the hold notice staging, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed and functions as a mode in which the effect is easy to enjoy, and in the effect mode B, although the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, it is a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Processing for switching the production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step Sa7101, it is determined whether or not it is the lottery timing for switching the effect mode. In this modification, a period in which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state and a state in which an effect performed across a plurality of game times such as a continuous effect is not performed) is set as an effective period for switching the effect mode. During the switching valid period, the effect mode switching lottery is configured at a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the game round) in each game round. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the switching lottery. If it is not the lottery timing for switching the effect mode, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If it is the lottery timing for switching the effect mode, the process proceeds to step Sa7102, and the first mode switching lottery for executing the effect mode switching is executed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to switch the effect mode. It should be noted that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of the staging mode in which the player is staying, or the winning probability may vary depending on the staging mode in which the player is staying.

In step Sa7103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa7102 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa7104, and the mode switching determination process is executed. The mode switching determination process determines whether or not switching of the effect mode is permitted. Here, the mode switching determination process of step Sa7104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa7201, the current number of reserved items is grasped with reference to the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344. In step Sa7202, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces grasped in step Sa7201 is 0. If the number of holdings is 0, it is determined in step Sa7203 that the effect mode switching is permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is grasped in step Sa7204. In the following step Sa7205, the hold display is displayed in the specific display mode (either the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe) based on the grasping result of step Sa7204. Determine if the image exists. If there is no reserved image in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed.

When the holding image of the specific display mode exists, it is determined in step Sa7206 whether or not the mode switching this time is the switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. That is, whether or not the mode is switched from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the low side (in other words, the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is low is changed to the effect mode on the high side. Whether or not it is a switch to the staging mode) is determined.

In the case of switching to the effect mode B, the process proceeds to step Sa7207, and it is determined whether or not the look-ahead result for the hold information of the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is the jackpot result. If the look-ahead result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step Sa7208 that the effect mode switching is not allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated. In general, the probability of losing is much higher than the probability of winning (big hit probability) in the winning / failing judgment, and most of the results of the hold look-ahead are losing results. Therefore, most of the judgment results in step Sa7207 are negative judgments. The effect mode switching is not allowed. That is, in the case of switching to the effect mode B, in the situation where the reserved image of the specific display mode exists, the switch of the effect mode is basically not allowed and is restricted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7207 (when the look-ahead result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sa7209, and a second mode switching lottery for re-drawing the mode switching is executed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to switch the effect mode, similarly to the first mode switching lottery table. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table.

In step Sa7210, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa7209 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the process proceeds to step Sa7208, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is not allowed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed. That is, in some cases where the look-ahead result is a jackpot result, switching of the effect mode is exceptionally permitted even in a situation where the reserved image of the specific display mode is displayed.

As described above, when the jackpot look-ahead hold does not exist in the situation where the hold image of the specific display mode exists, the effect mode switching is not allowed, and the jackpot look-ahead hold exists. However, if the lottery for switching the second mode is not performed, the switching of the effect mode is not allowed. That is, since it is rare that the effect mode is allowed to be switched in the situation where the reserved image of the specific display mode exists, the player recognizes that the rule is broken and the jackpot is confirmed.

When a negative determination is made in step Sa7206 (when switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A), that is, when switching from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is low to the effect mode on the high side. (In other words, when switching from the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the low side), the hold image displayed in the specific display mode in step Sa7211. It is determined whether or not the display mode is equal to or higher than the predetermined mode (for example, the green display mode HMc).

When the display mode is a mode lower than the predetermined mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed. That is, in the case of switching to the effect mode A, even if the reserved image of the specific display mode is displayed, the switch of the effect mode is permitted as long as the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode. .. In this case, the effect mode is switched while the specific display mode of the reserved image is maintained. When the form of the reserved image changes depending on the effect mode, the display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching while the form is changed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sa7211 (when the display mode is equal to or higher than the predetermined mode), the pre-reading result of the reserved information is the jackpot result for the reserved image whose display mode is equal to or higher than the predetermined mode in step Sa7207. Judge whether or not. After that, the processes of steps Sa7208 to Sa7210 are executed, and the switching of the effect mode is allowed on condition that the second mode switching lottery is won.

Returning to the description of the staging mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching determination process in step Sa7104, is the result of the determination process in step Sa7104 permitting mode switching in step Sa7105? Judge whether or not. If the result does not allow mode switching, the staging mode switching process is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current staging mode.

If the result allows mode switching, the process proceeds to step Sa7106, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B. The effect mode may be switched at the start timing of the game round, or may be performed during the game round.

In step Sa7107, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

In this modification, the second execution process of the hold notice of step Sa1702 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) and the third execution process of step Sa1808 in the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). The processing etc. associated with them is not executed.

<Restrictions on switching the production mode>
A mode of limiting the switching of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 94. First, a case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a).

When it is time to switch the effect mode, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold but the hold image of the specific display mode does not exist, the change of the effect mode is allowed.

When there is a hold image in a specific display mode, switching of the effect mode is basically not allowed. That is, from the effect mode A (the effect mode in which the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively low) to the effect mode B (the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively low) in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is relatively low. When switching to a higher effect mode), switching of the effect mode is restricted on condition that a holding image of a specific display mode exists.

However, even if there is a reserved image in a specific display mode, if there is an image in which the jackpot result is pre-read, switching of the effect mode is exceptionally permitted. In this case, as already explained, the big hit is confirmed due to the production contradiction. In the case where there is hold information in which the jackpot result is pre-read, if the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the switching of the effect mode is permitted assuming that the hold image of the specific display mode does not exist.

Next, a case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

When it is time to switch the effect mode, if there is no hold, or if there is no hold image in the specific display mode even if there is a hold, the same as when switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, as in the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. Switching of the production mode is allowed.

If there is a reserved image in a specific display mode, whether or not mode switching is allowed depends on the display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the effect mode is permitted. That is, from the production mode B in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is relatively low (the effect mode in which the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively high) to the effect mode A (the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively high). When switching to the lower production mode), the switching restriction is relaxed as compared with the opposite case. In this case, the display mode for the reserved image is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the reserved image is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the effect mode is not allowed unless there is a pre-read result of the jackpot. That is, when the player is notified of a certain degree of expectation by the hold notice effect, the switching of the effect mode is restricted.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the hold notice effect is being executed with the display mode of the hold image as the specific display mode, the switching of the effect mode is restricted.

In this modification, since the hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player can change his / her mood during the game and can suppress the tiredness of the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the change in the effect mode distracts the attention to the hold notice effect, or conversely, the hold notice effect is used. As a result of concentration, there is a concern that the production mode may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the switching of the effect mode is restricted when the hold notice effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode from overlapping. This makes it possible for the player to easily pay attention to each of the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice effect during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect. According to this configuration, such adjustment is possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the effect characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the effect mode, the difference in the effect mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the hold notice effect is being executed, the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect may be different before and after the change of the effect mode. In this case, in the effect mode after switching, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the hold notice effect and the result of the hit / fail determination actually notified may be inconsistent, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying this modification (a configuration that restricts the switching of the effect mode when the hold notice effect is being executed) to such a configuration, the above-mentioned discrepancy is avoided and an unpleasant impression is given to the player. Can be suitably suppressed.

The effect mode B is an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A, and the switch to the effect mode B is restricted when the hold advance notice effect is executed in the effect mode A.

When the ease of executing the hold notice effect in the effect mode B is lower than that of the effect mode A, switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B while the hold advance notice effect is being executed increases the apparent expectation. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold notice effect is easy to be executed (the expectation degree corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low), and the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed from the effect mode A (the expectation degree corresponding to the specific notification is relative). When switching to the effect mode B, if the hold notice effect is being executed, the execution of the switch is restricted, so that it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. become.

When the hold notice effect is being executed in the effect mode A, the switch to the effect mode B is basically restricted, and the exception is when the hold advance notice effect and the hold look-ahead result that triggered the effect are jackpot results. The configuration allows switching to the effect mode B.

In this case, even though the production mode is not originally switched, the switching causes the rule to be broken from the player's point of view, and a big hit can be suggested. That is, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the effect mode as one of the expected degree suggestion effects.

If the switching condition to the effect mode A is satisfied when the hold notice effect is being executed in the effect mode B, whether to restrict the switch to the effect mode A depending on the type of the specific display mode when the switch condition is satisfied. It was configured to make a difference.

When the hold notice effect is being executed, if the effect mode switching is uniformly restricted, the effect mode switching may be excessively restricted or the hold advance notice effect may be executed less frequently. , There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of production modes and the significance of installing the execution function of the hold notice production will be diminished. In this respect, in this configuration, in the case of switching from the effect mode B having a high expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect to the effect mode A having a low expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect, the restriction of mode switching is relaxed and the switching is performed. Switching is permitted on condition that the specific display mode when the condition is satisfied is the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect mode and the execution of the hold notice effect from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to appropriately secure those opportunities.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the switching guidance notification is performed during the switching valid period of the production mode, and when the player operates the production operation unit 36 in the situation where the notification is performed, the production mode is switched from the next game round. It is configured in. Here, an example of such mode switching will be described.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the switching guide image 451 as the switching guide notification is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 during the predetermined game times during the switching valid period of the effect mode. The switching guide image 451 is displayed over a predetermined period (for example, a period until the game round is completed).

In FIG. 95 (a), as a display example of the switching guide image 451, a character display such as "When the effect button is pressed, the effect mode is switched" is displayed as a telop above the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Is shown. The switching guidance notification is not limited to this, and may be such that a window in which the above character display is performed is displayed, or a predetermined light emitting unit corresponding to the switching guidance is made to emit light. .. Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, and voice guidance using the speaker unit 29 may be used.

In such a state, when the player performs a predetermined operation by the staging operation unit 36, the switching standby notification is performed. The switching standby notification notifies that the switching of the effect mode is in the standby state. The specific mode of the switching standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), a character such as "preparing for mode change" is displayed on the display screen G during switching standby. It is conceivable to display the image 452.

When the game round in which the switching standby image 452 is displayed ends and the game round shifts to the next game round, the display of the switching standby image 452 is erased and the effect mode is switched as shown in FIG. 95 (c). ..

Further, if the effecting operation unit 36 is not operated by the player during the display period of the switching guide image 451 of FIG. 95 (a), the effect mode is not switched and the current state is even if the game shifts to the next game. The production mode of is maintained.

It should be noted that the staging mode has a staging mode A and a staging mode B, and these have different frequency of occurrence of the hold notice staging, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed and functions as a mode in which the effect is easy to enjoy, and in the effect mode B, although the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, it is a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Processing for switching the production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 96. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step Sa8101, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is in the valid period. Also in this modified example, similarly to the above-mentioned modified example 7, a period of a predetermined state (for example, a normal gaming state and a state in which an effect performed across a plurality of game times such as a continuous effect is not performed) is set. It is set as a valid period for switching the effect mode. If the effect mode switching is not valid, the effect mode switching process is terminated in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If the effect mode is in the switching valid period, the process proceeds to step Sa8102, and it is determined whether or not the switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for mode switching, in other words, that the effect mode is switched after that.

When the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, when the mode switching standby state is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa8103, and it is determined whether or not the guidance display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The guidance notification flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, that is, if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8104, and it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification. The execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. The lottery timing of the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, but in this modification, the start timing of the game round is set to the above lottery timing. If it is not the lottery timing, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is.

If it is the lottery timing, the process proceeds to step Sa8105, and an execution lottery for switching guidance notification is performed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guide lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step Sa8106, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step Sa8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the effect mode switching process is terminated so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guide image 451 as the switching guide notification. Specifically, a command to the effect that the switching guide image 451 should be displayed is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step Sa8108, the guidance notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sa8103 (when the guidance notification flag is stored), that is, when switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8109 and the effect operation unit 36 switches the effect mode. It is determined whether or not the predetermined operation of is performed. When the predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step Sa8110, and the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted.

In step Sa8111, the switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. As a result, the state shifts to the standby state for mode switching. In step Sa8112, the display control device 350 is controlled in order to display the switching standby image 452 as the switching standby notification. Specifically, as a transmission command to the display control device 350, a command to the effect that the switching standby image 452 should be displayed is set. As a result, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. After the execution of step Sa8112, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa8109 (when a predetermined operation is not performed), the process proceeds to step Sa8113 to determine whether or not the display period of the switching guide image 451 (notification period of switching guidance notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the effect mode switching process is terminated in order to continue the display of the switching guide image 451.

If the display period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sa8114, and the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the acceptance period for the effect mode switching operation ends. Further, in step Sa8114, the display control device 350 is controlled so as to erase the switching guide image 451. After the execution of step Sa8114, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa8102 (when the switching standby flag is stored), that is, in the mode switching standby state, the process proceeds to step Sa8115 to determine whether or not it is the mode switching execution timing. .. The switching timing of the effect mode is not particularly limited as long as it is the timing after the transition to the standby state, but in this modification, the start timing of the next game round performed after the end of the game round in which the switching operation is performed is performed. Is set to the above switching timing. If it is not the switching timing, the staging mode switching process is terminated in order to continue the standby state for mode switching.

If it is the switching timing, the process proceeds to step Sa8116, and the switching standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the standby state for mode switching ends. In step Sa8117, a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B.

In step Sa8118, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In step Sa8119, the second setting process of the hold notice is executed, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated. The second setting process of the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the wait period for mode switching. The details of the setting process will be described later.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received (executed in step Sa1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), instead of the hold command corresponding process of FIG. 31. It is what is executed. In FIG. 97, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, after incrementing the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step Sa8201 and the switching standby flag is set to the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Is stored. If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if it is not in the mode switching standby state, the process proceeds to step Sa1403, and the setting process for holding notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, the setting for executing the hold notice effect is made for the generated hold information.

When the switching standby flag is stored (in the standby state for mode switching), the process proceeds to step Sa8202, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in this modification, when new hold information is generated during the waiting period for mode switching, the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information is restricted.

The look-ahead for the hold information is performed by the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control device 162 as in the case of other hold information. Therefore, the staging control device 143 does not execute the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403, and forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa, but mainly controls the look-ahead result such as the fluctuation pattern. It is in the state acquired by the hold command from the device 162.

In step Sa8203, the waiting occurrence information indicating that the holding information is generated during the waiting period is stored in correspondence with the generated holding information. This processing is performed, for example, by storing the waiting generation information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed, the waiting occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the hold information (variation pattern information, etc.). As a result, even when the shift process is performed and the display area of the reserved image is shifted, it is possible to grasp which of the reserved images was generated during the waiting period. The waiting generation information may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 as long as it can recognize which hold information is to be targeted.

After the execution of step Sa8203, in step Sa1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa8202, the hold image of the hold information generated during the waiting period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice of step Sa8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second setting process for the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching.

First, in step Sa8301, the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is grasped. That is, based on the waiting occurrence information, it is specified which of the pending information existing at that time is the pending information generated during the waiting period.

After executing the process of step Sa8301, the processes of step Sa8302 and subsequent steps are executed for the generation hold during the grasped waiting period. Since most of the processes after step Sa8302 are the same as each process in the setting process for hold notice (FIG. 34), the description of the common process will be simplified and the different processes will be described in detail. ..

In step Sa8302 to step Sa8304, the fluctuation pattern in the generation hold during the waiting period is grasped with reference to the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. In step Sa8305, the effect mode after switching is grasped. For example, when the mode switching this time is the switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the effect mode B is grasped as the effect mode after the switch.

In steps Sa8306 to Sa8308, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step Sa8305 is acquired, and the hold notice execution execution lottery is performed. When the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa8309 to Sa8314, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect is determined, and the effect scenario is determined. At that time, if a different table is set in each production mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario, it is grasped in step Sa8305. A table corresponding to the effect mode after switching is acquired and a lottery is performed.

As described above, in this modification, the hold information generated during the mode switching wait period is set to the hold notice effect (display mode setting process based on the look-ahead result) when the wait state is released. At that time, although the generation hold during the waiting period occurred during the effect mode before switching, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect and the lottery for the final display mode are set for the effect mode after switching. The above conditions are applied to correspond to the effect mode after switching.

In step Sa8315, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice ends. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 38 (a)) and the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807, the process of changing the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the mode switching wait period is performed after the effect mode is switched.

<About the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 99. Here, a case where the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B will be described as an example.

If the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is won during the switching valid period of the mode switching, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as shown in FIG. 95 (a). When the player performs a mode switching operation by the staging operation unit 36 in that state, the mode shifts to a standby state for mode switching (a state in which it is known that mode switching will be performed later), and is shown in FIG. 99 (a). As shown above, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. The standby state for mode switching ends when the mode switching timing (start timing of the next game round) is reached.

Assuming that two new hold information are generated during the wait period, the main controller 162 executes the hold look-ahead process (step Sa305) in the same manner as the hold information generated in the situation not during the wait period, and holds each of them. Look ahead to fluctuation patterns of information. Further, the staging control device 143 does not execute the setting process (step Sa1403) for the hold notice for each of the hold information, and the display mode of the hold images HW1 and HW2 corresponding to them is changed to the normal display mode HMa. Set.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99B, the holding images HW1 and HW2 having the normal display mode HMa in the second unit holding display area Ga2 and the third unit holding display area Ga3 of the first holding display area Ga Is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the reserved images HW1 and HW2 is set to the normal display mode HMa is continued until at least the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing comes with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B as shown in FIG. 99 (c). At this time, the staging control device 143 executes the second setting process (step Sa8119) for holding notice for the holding information (holding images HW1, HW2) generated during the waiting period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice, various lottery for executing the hold notice effect (execution lottery for the hold notice effect, final display) based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed when the hold information is acquired. Lottery of modes, lottery of production scenarios, etc.). At that time, the lottery table set for the effect mode B, which is the effect mode after switching, is used for those lottery.

As a result of the second setting process for the hold notice, it is assumed that the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HW1 and the result of changing the hold image HW2 to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing is drawn. As shown in FIG. 99 (d), when the reserved image HW2 is shifted from the second unit reserved display area Ga2 to the first unit reserved display area Ga1, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. Will be changed to. That is, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information generated during the mode switching standby period is executed after the mode switching.

It should be noted that the switching guidance image 451 (FIG. 95 (a)) may be displayed in a situation where the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is won during the execution of the holding notice effect and the holding notice effect is being executed. In this case, the hold notice effect is not subject to the execution restriction, and the state shifts to the standby state while the hold notice effect is continued.

Further, when the hold information is generated between the time when the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the time when the switching operation is performed (until the transition to the standby state), and the hold information is used as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect. There is also. That is, there is a case where the hold image of the hold information acquired after the display of the switching guide image 451 shifts to the standby state in the state of the specific display mode. In this case as well, the hold notice effect is not subject to the execution restriction, and the state shifts to the standby state while the hold notice effect is continued.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In a configuration in which the effect mode switching condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the standby state, and then the effect mode is switched when the switching timing is reached, the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode during the standby state. The configuration is such that the execution of the notice effect is restricted.

In this modification, since the hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. It can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player can change his / her mood during the game and can suppress the tiredness of the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the change in the effect mode distracts the attention to the hold notice effect, or conversely, the hold notice effect is used. As a result of concentration, there is a concern that the production mode may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to this configuration, in the state where it is known that the effect mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, so that the effect mode is set during the execution of the hold notice effect. Switching can be suppressed. This makes it possible for the player to easily pay attention to each of the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice effect during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect. According to this configuration, such adjustment is possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The configuration is such that the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the hold information acquired during the standby state.

With the above configuration, the range of the special state to be restricted by the hold notice effect is widened, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice effect from being excessively restricted. In particular, if the hold information acquired between the display of the switching guide image 451 and the transition to the standby state is subject to the execution restriction of the hold notice effect, it is uncertain whether the effect mode is actually switched. Execution of the hold notice effect will be restricted up to the hold information acquired in. In this case, if the player does not execute the switching operation and the effect mode is not switched, as a result, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the hold information that did not need to be restricted. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress such useless restrictions.

Regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead process, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly limit the execution of the hold advance notice effect regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead process. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the switching of the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect. Further, since the execution restriction of the hold advance notice effect is not affected by the result of the hold look-ahead process, the hold look-ahead process proceeds in the same manner as in the non-wait state even in the standby state (during the limit period of the hold advance notice effect). be able to. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the hold look-ahead process, it is possible to limit the execution of the hold advance notice effect during the standby state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the effect characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the effect mode, the difference in the effect mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the hold notice effect is being executed, the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect may be different before and after the change of the effect mode. In this case, in the effect mode after switching, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the hold notice effect and the result of the hit / fail determination actually notified may be inconsistent, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying this modification (a configuration that limits the execution of the hold notice effect when the standby state is being prepared for switching the effect mode) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above discrepancy can be avoided. It is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

The effect mode B is an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A, and the switch to the effect mode B is restricted when the hold advance notice effect is executed in the effect mode A.

When the ease of executing the hold notice effect in the effect mode B is lower than that of the effect mode A, switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B while the hold advance notice effect is being executed increases the apparent expectation. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold notice effect is easy to be executed (the expectation degree corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low), and the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed from the effect mode A (the expectation degree corresponding to the specific notification is relative). When switching to the effect mode B, if the switch to the mode is being prepared, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual state.

The hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after the effect mode is switched. As a result, the execution of the hold notice effect remains restricted for the hold information acquired during the standby state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation degree from being unable to be suggested.

In the above case, the hold advance notice effect after the mode switching is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process (hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired) performed during the standby state. In this case, it is possible to execute the hold advance notice effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without executing the hold look-ahead process again after the effect mode is switched. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the hold look-ahead processing of the main control device 162, and it is possible to suppress the configuration from becoming complicated.

After switching the hold information acquired during the standby state, the execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect after the effect mode is switched, and then the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) of the execution lottery are switched. The configuration is such that the conditions set corresponding to the production mode are applied.

In the above configuration, when drawing a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect after switching the effect mode, the lottery condition when the target hold information is acquired (lottery set corresponding to the effect mode before the change). The lottery condition set corresponding to the effect mode after switching is applied instead of the condition). As a result, even if the hold information is acquired during the standby state (before the change of the effect mode), the hold notice effect can be performed corresponding to the effect mode after the change.

When the hold information is acquired during the standby state, the waiting occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the standby state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, based on the waiting occurrence information stored in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be grasped after the waiting state that the holding information is acquired during the waiting state. Therefore, even if the hold information acquired before the standby state and the hold information acquired during the standby state are mixed after the end of the standby state, the hold information acquired during the standby state can be easily used. Can be identified. As a result, when the hold notice effect is executed after the mode is switched, the hold information acquired during the standby state and the hold information that is not are identified, and only the hold information acquired during the standby state is processed. Will be able to do.

<Other variants>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described first embodiment and the description of each modification, and may be carried out as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the first embodiment or each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined for the first embodiment or each modification. It may be applied. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the first embodiment and each modification. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In the first embodiment and each modification, the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is stored up to four pieces, but may be less than four pieces. (It may be one), and it may be five or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (may be 1) or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of each operating port 62, 63 may be different.

(2) In the first embodiment and each modification, the reserved information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is distinguished, but it may not be distinguished. Further, the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is prioritized over the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and is subject to the winning / failing judgment, but the relationship is reversed. There may be a configuration in which the winning or failing judgment is made in the order of winning.

(3) In the first embodiment and each modification, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but the left route flows down. It may be configured so that only the game ball to be passed or won a prize, or it may be configured so that it can be passed or won a prize from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to improve the sharpness of the game, only the game ball flowing down one of the right route and the left route can win a prize in the first operating port 62, and only the game ball flowing down the other of the right route and the left route is a through gate. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it can pass through 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize.

(4) In the first embodiment and each modification, by displaying the hold image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the hold notification that the player can recognize the hold number is notified. However, the image for holding may be displayed on a display unit different from the symbol display device 75, or the holding lamp unit (light emitting unit) provided in a number corresponding to the upper limit storage number may be made to emit light. The number of hold lamps may be notified by the number of hold lamps. In the case of causing the hold lamp unit to emit light, the hold advance notice effect is performed by setting the light emission mode (for example, the light emission color) to a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process. be able to.

(5) In the first embodiment and each modification, the result of the hit / fail determination becomes the big hit result, so that the game shifts to the big hit game (open / close execution mode). As described above, the result of the winning / failing determination is the small hit result, and the V winning opening (V winning opening) in the small hit game (the game state in which the variable winning device having the V winning opening or the V winning opening and the out opening is opened and closed). When the game ball passes through the sensor) (when the result of the grant determination is a predetermined result and the predetermined game result is obtained), the game may be shifted to the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present invention, "a privilege can be given to a player based on the result of grant correspondence" and "a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of grant correspondence" is shifted. It can be understood that "to let" etc. include the case where the result of the winning / failing determination becomes the small hit result and the game shifts to the big hit game through the V winning as described above.

(6) In the first embodiment and each modification, as the specific notification, the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode is executed, but the hold notice effect using the hold image is used. Instead, of each first embodiment and each modification for the game rotation effect (so-called continuous notice effect or look-ahead zone effect) executed over a plurality of game times based on the result of the hold look-ahead process. The configuration may be applied.

(7) In the first embodiment and each modification, the effect of straddling the game times is executed as the specific notification, but the specific notification does not necessarily have to straddle the game times, and the specific notification does not necessarily straddle the game times. It may be done inside. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched over a plurality of times during the game round. In this case, the effect performed in the one game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the hold look-ahead process, but is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed at the start of the game round. It may be.

(8) In the first embodiment and each modification, the symbols that are variablely displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the left-right direction, but the symbols are arranged side by side on the left, middle, and right. Is displayed, and these symbols may be displayed in a variable manner so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. That is, the arrangement direction and scroll direction of the symbols are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of columns in the symbol row) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(9) In the first embodiment and each modification, the execution display area D is provided to notify the player so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times, but the execution display area D is provided. It may be configured not to provide.

(10) In the first embodiment and each modification, when the hold notice effect is executed, the effect scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D, but the target hold image HW May be configured to set the effect scenario for the period before is displayed in the execution display area D (the period during which the game times of the target pending image HW are pending).

(11) In the first embodiment and each modification, when the hold notice effect is executed, the setting is performed step by step, such as determining the final display mode of the hold image and then setting the effect scenario. Although it is configured, it may be configured to set the final display mode and the effect scenario in one process. For example, the configuration may be such that both the final display mode and the effect scenario are determined by the table of 1.

(12) In the first embodiment and each modification, the variation pattern information is transmitted when the result of the hold look-ahead process executed by the main control device 162 is notified to the effect control device 143. In order to suppress the increase in the data capacity of the transmission command, predetermined information with a smaller amount of data than the fluctuation pattern (identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation, etc.) ) May be transmitted. This also applies to the power recovery hold command and the like in the modification 5 of the first embodiment.

(13) In the first embodiment and each modification, the game rotation effect (effect pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game rotation effect is based on the values of the variation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1. It may be configured to determine. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the hold look-ahead process, and the staging control device 143 uses the hold command (information indicating the value of the variation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1) from the main control device 162. It is preferable to execute the hold look-ahead process (the process of pre-reading the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game rotation effect).

(14) In the first embodiment and each modification, the mode of the hold notice effect (display mode of the hold image) is set based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process, but the effect control device 143. In, the effect pattern (game times effect) is pre-read based on the information of the variation pattern (variation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process) transmitted from the main control device 162, and the mode of the hold advance notice effect is determined based on the result. It may be configured to be set. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, a plurality of types of effect patterns (game rotation effect) correspond to one variation pattern.

(15) In the first embodiment, the modified examples 1 to 3 and the modified examples 5 to 8 of the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process is performed by the main control device 162. It may be configured to be performed by the effect control device 143 or the display control device 350. When the hold look-ahead process is executed by the staging control device 143, the information corresponding to the value (acquired random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS is mainly controlled as in the modification 4 of the first embodiment. It is preferable to transmit from the device 162 to the staging control device 143, and the staging control device 143 pre-reads the result of the hit / miss determination, the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Further, in the above-described modification 4, at least one of the first hold look-ahead process and the second hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162.

(16) In the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, and then the display mode is higher. However, it may be promoted to a higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode. Further, there may be both a case where the display mode is restored to the original specific display mode and then promoted to the higher display mode, and a case where the display mode is promoted to the higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode. good.

(17) In the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the first embodiment, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the target hold image HW is used. Although the display mode of the image HW may be gradually restored, the configuration may be such that the stepwise restoration mode does not occur. That is, it may be configured to uniformly return to the original specific display mode by one change of the display mode.

(18) In the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the first embodiment, the return scenario is set including the display period in the execution display area D. The return scenario may be set only for the display period of the hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb (not including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the promotion process of the target holding image HW may not be executed.

(20) In the first embodiment and the first to fourth modified embodiments, the target reserved image HW is displayed in the first reserved display area Ga or the second reserved display area Gb. It was configured to return to the original specific display mode during the period (holding period), and then to be promoted to a higher display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW, but it is not necessarily the game times of the target hold image HW. It is not necessary to wait for promotion until, and the promotion may be performed during the above-mentioned holding period. When the promotion process is performed before the game round is started, the hold look-ahead process performed for the target hold image HW (hold information) is performed instead of the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the change. See the results.

(21) In the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the first embodiment, when the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the game times, at the start of the change. Although the configuration is such that the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is referred to, the above promotion may be performed based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed on the target hold image HW (hold information).

(22) In the first embodiment and the first modification and the second modification, the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but as in the modification 7, the effect mode is switched. In addition, the effect mode may be automatically switched without the player's operation.

(23) In the first embodiment and the first modification and the second modification, the effect mode is switched during the game rotation, but the opening / closing execution mode (big hit game) is used. The production mode may be switched. For example, for a configuration in which a plurality of effect modes are set as effect modes for a highly accurate gaming state, and the player can select which effect mode to play in the open / close execution mode immediately before that. , The configuration according to the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 2 of the first embodiment may be applied.

For example, when the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied, the configuration can be as follows. In the effect mode A during the high probability game state, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set as the specific display mode, and the game times of the hold information before the target hold image HW become a probability change jackpot and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Then, when the effect mode B different from the effect mode A is selected during the open / close execution mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is normally displayed in the effect mode B (high probability gaming state) after the open / close execution mode. Aspect HMa is set. Then, in the game round of the hold information before the target hold image HW, the probability change jackpot is reached again and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, and when the effect mode A is selected during the open / close execution mode, after the open / close execution mode. In the effect mode A (high probability gaming state), the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the original specific display mode.

In the above configuration, the effect mode is not limited to the case where the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), and the effect mode may be automatically switched regardless of the player's operation.

(24) In the first embodiment and the first to second embodiments, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B. However, in these effect modes, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be the same.

(25) In the first embodiment and the first modification and the second modification, the configuration is provided with two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states. However, it may be configured to have three or more types of effect modes. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold advance notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which an effect mode in which the ease of execution of the hold notice effect is the same and an effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. Also, similar to the switching between different effect modes, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. That is, the configuration may be such that switching between effect modes having the same ease of execution and switching between different effect modes are not distinguished.

Further, in the switching between the production modes having the same ease of execution, unlike the switching between different production modes, the normal display mode HMa is not changed even if the production mode is switched, and the specific display before the mode switching is performed. The configuration may be such that the aspect is maintained. That is, switching between the effect modes having the same ease of execution and switching between different effect modes may be distinguished, and the handling of the hold notice effect may be different between the two.

(26) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed. In the effect mode B, the hold notice effect may not be executed. That is, it is understood that the "effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed" of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the hold notice effect is low but also the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed. Can be done.

(27) In the first embodiment and the first modification and the second modification of the first embodiment, the effect mode is changed by differentiating the execution probability of the hold notice effect when the hold information corresponds to the deviation. The configuration is such that the ease of execution of the hold notice effect in A and the effect mode B is different, but the execution probability of the hold notice effect is different when the hold information corresponds to a big hit, or when the hold notice effect corresponds to a deviation or hit. By making both execution probabilities different in the case of corresponding to, the configuration may be such that the ease of execution of the hold notice effect in those effect modes is different.

(28) In the first embodiment and the first modification and the second modification, when the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the hold displayed in the execution display area D is displayed. Although the configuration is such that the image for use is also changed to the normal display mode HMa, the hold display area D is displayed in the execution display area D by distinguishing the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb from the execution display area D. The image may be configured not to be changed to the normal display mode HMa.

(29) In the first embodiment and the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, the change suggestion effect is performed when the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. Although the configuration is such that the execution is restricted, the configuration may be such that a dedicated effect (different from the change suggestion effect) corresponding to the restoration is executed. With such a configuration, the game is a case where the display mode of the hold image is changed to a purely higher display mode and a case where the hold image is returned to the original specific display mode by the return process. It can be easily identified by a person.

(30) In the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is changed to the effect mode B while the hold notice effect is being executed, and then the effect mode A is changed again (the original hold notice effect is being executed). The display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode when the target mode is returned to the effect mode. However, for example, in a configuration provided with the effect modes A to C as the effect mode, the effect mode A In the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, the display mode is switched to the effect mode B, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the effect mode is set before the game round of the target hold image HW ends. When switching to C (an effect mode different from the effect mode A), the original specific display mode may be restored.

In the above case, the ease of executing the hold notice effect is the same in the effect mode A and the effect mode C, or the effect mode C is more likely to execute the hold advance notice effect than the effect mode A (expectation for the hold advance notice effect). Is low) It is preferable to use the effect mode. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the effect mode C may be configured in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A. At that time, the effect mode C may be an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is easier to be executed than the effect mode B, or may be an effect mode in which it is difficult to execute, or the effect mode B and the hold notice effect are executed. The production mode may be the same in terms of ease of use. Further, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C may have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, there is a case where the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and a case where the effect mode B is switched to the effect mode A during the execution of the hold notice effect. In both cases, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, but in the latter case, that is, from the effect mode having a high expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect to the effect mode with a low expectation. When switching, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment described above, the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and then the effect is performed before the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is completed. When the mode A is switched, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, but the hold information is produced before the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is started. When the mode A is switched to, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be restored to the original specific display mode. That is, when the mode A is switched to the effect mode A after the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is started, the display mode of the target hold image HW may not be returned to the original specific display mode. ..

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect and new hold information is generated while staying in the effect mode B, the effect is produced. In mode B, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information is not executed, but by performing a lottery for executing the hold notice effect under the conditions set corresponding to the effect mode B and winning the lottery. It may be configured to execute the hold notice effect.

However, while the hold image, which was the specific display mode in the effect mode A before switching to the effect mode B, is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching to the effect mode B, the hold information generated in the effect mode B. When the hold notice effect is performed, the player's anxiety that the hold image (hold information), which is normally displayed as HMa, may have disappeared to the jackpot or the degree of expectation is further aggravated. There are concerns. Further, if the mode A is switched to the effect mode A again during the execution of the hold notice effect started in the effect mode B, there is a problem of how to handle the hold advance notice effect, and there is a concern that the processing becomes complicated as a whole. ..

In that sense, as in the first embodiment, the target holding image HW which is in the state of staying in the effect mode B (in other words, the target holding image HW which is the specific display mode in the previous effect mode A). It is preferable to limit the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information newly generated in the state of waiting for the return process for returning the display mode to the original display mode). When the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B while the hold notice effect is not being executed, the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the newly generated hold information in the effect mode B is not restricted. You may.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of hold information including the current hold information is grasped in step Sa1508, but the hold number is grasped for the hold information before the current hold information. May be good.

(35) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the target holding images HB1 and HB2 (holding images of the holding information generated in the restricted state) in the restricted state are set as the normal display mode HMa, but are usually used. The display mode may be configured to have a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from both the display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the hold notice effect is in the restricted state, in other words, the player may change to the specific display mode when the restricted state ends. It will be possible to inform.

(36) In the first modification of the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, that is, when the state shifts to the restricted state of the hold notice effect, the restriction is made. It may be configured to perform notification (for example, a predetermined display for teaching that the restricted state is in effect) that corresponds to the state and is different from the reserved image.

(37) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the display of the reserved image may not be executed during the restricted state. More specifically, not only the hold image HA set as the specific display mode in the effect mode A and the hold images HB1 and HB2 of the hold information generated in the effect mode B, but all the hold images including other hold images. It may be configured so that the display is not executed.

At that time, in order to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the number of holdings, the number of holdings may be notified by another display such as a numerical display (notification of the number of holdings different from the image for holding). However, if the display is suddenly switched to the above-mentioned separate display, it will be difficult for the player to understand. When the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B, it is preferable to delete only the display of the reserved image in the effect mode B. In this case, it is preferable not to change the display location of the separate display in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the separate display.

(38) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the mode of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information generated during the limit state is set at the end of the limit period (step Sa2702). It may be set during the time limit period or after the time limit period ends.

(39) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process is executed when the hold information is acquired during the restricted state, and the hold look-ahead process performed during the restricted state after the end of the restricted state. The display mode of the target pending images HB1 and HB2 is set based on the result of The display mode of the target holding images HB1 and HB2 after the state may be set. At this time, the hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162 or the staging control device 143. Further, the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired during the restricted state may not be executed, or may be configured to be executed.

(40) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the effect mode B is the same as that of the effect mode A. However, when the notification mode of the reserved image is distinguished between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, it is not always necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the player has the same display mode. It may be configured to be changed to a display mode that can be recognized as being present. For example, in the effect mode A, the blue display mode HMb <green display mode HMc <red display mode HMd <rainbow color display mode HMe is ranked in this order, while in the effect mode B, the yellow display mode <brown display mode <brown display mode. <Purple display mode <In a configuration in which the display mode is ranked in the order of the rainbow color display mode, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B in the state where the display mode is the green display mode HMc. In the effect mode B, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be a brown display mode.

In addition, in a game machine that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the hold image to a predetermined character image, if the configuration is set so that the character's costume, pose, facial expression, etc. differ depending on the staging mode, the target hold. When the effect image HW is changed to a character image such as a costume corresponding to the effect mode A (a state in which the hold notice effect is being executed) and the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B, the target is in the effect mode B. The reserved image HW may be restored to the same character image as in the effect mode A, and the costume or the like may correspond to the effect mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that the display mode of the target holding image HW in the effect mode B is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the effect mode B. That is, it suffices as long as it can be recognized by the player as a higher display mode. In the above example, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the brown display mode and then promoted to the purple display mode.

In the first embodiment and the first modification thereof, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be returned to the original specific display mode when the original effect mode A is returned. When the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are the same in the modification 3 of the embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening / closing execution mode is the same as before the opening / closing execution mode. The specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode in the configuration having the same specific display mode and the modification 4 of the first embodiment has a variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. Corresponding upper limit display mode In the case of the following modes, the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode is the same specific display mode as before the open / close execution mode, in the modified example 5 of the first embodiment. The player recognizes that the display mode of the target hold image HW is the same even in the configuration in which the display mode of the target hold image HW is the same as the display mode at the time of power failure after the power is restored. It can be said that it is a specific example of returning to a display mode capable of being possible.

(41) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the target hold image HW is once normally displayed. Although it has been changed to the aspect HMa, it may be configured not to be changed to the normal display aspect HMa. That is, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank is displayed in the effect mode B (when the affirmative judgment is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target holding image HW is not set to the normal display mode HMa (when the display mode is affirmative). The display mode may be the same (without executing the process of step Sa3110).

(42) In the second modification of the first embodiment, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank is not displayed in the effect mode B (when a negative determination is made in step Sa3107), the target pending image is obtained. Although the display mode of the HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, it may be set to the specific display mode within a range not exceeding the actual expected degree. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before switching the effect mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the display mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode. (A display mode lower than the specific display mode before switching the effect mode) may be configured to have a specific display mode.

(43) In the modified examples 3 to 4 of the first embodiment, the game states include three types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state. For example, the normal gaming state. It may be configured to have a gaming state other than the three types, such as having two types of gaming states of a high probability gaming state. That is, it suffices if it has a plurality of types of gaming states.

(44) In the modification 3 to the modification 4 of the first embodiment, the display of the hold image is not executed during the open / close execution mode, but the hold image may be displayed. .. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image in the open / close execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or may be the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Further, it may be configured to have a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may be one that does not correspond to the jackpot expectation or the like of each reserved information (those that do not suggest the expectation or the like).

(45) In the modification 3 to the modification 4 of the first embodiment, the display of the hold image is restarted during the ending period, but the display of the hold image is displayed before the start of the ending period. It may be configured to be restarted, or it may be configured to restart the display of the hold image after the end of the ending period (for example, when the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the modification 3 to the modification 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. However, it may be configured to be displayed as a specific display target without using the normal display mode HMa. That is, the display of the hold image may be restarted in a state where the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode.

(47) In the modified examples 3 to 4 of the first embodiment, the game state (variable pattern table) is set via the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed as the applicable configuration. Although the configuration to be changed is illustrated, it is also possible to apply to the configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed through the small hit game (opening / closing execution mode in which one round game is executed). It should be noted that the change of the fluctuation pattern table is not limited to the trigger that the result of the winning / failing determination becomes the winning result or the opening / closing execution mode (the game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened / closed) is executed, for example. It may be performed based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition such as the number of game times in which the result of the hit / fail determination is out of the question has reached a predetermined number of times is satisfied.

(48) In the modified examples 3 to 4 of the first embodiment, even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variable type counter CS are the same, the results obtained by the lottery are different. Although the example in which the gaming state is changed triggered by the execution mode, the above difference may occur triggered by an event other than the opening / closing execution mode. As such an event, for example, it is conceivable that the number of game times in which the result of the winning / failing determination is different has reached a predetermined number of times, or that some kind of lottery has been won. In other words, what is the trigger is arbitrary, and the point is that it may be in a state where the above difference occurs due to the occurrence of some event. Further, the above difference is not limited to the one caused by the change of the gaming state, and may be caused by, for example, the change of the staging state without the change of the jackpot probability or the like.

(49) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is stored when the open / close execution mode is started, but the storage timing of the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to be stored in the winning game times that triggers the opening / closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the hold image is gradually promoted in the hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold image may change during the execution of the winning game, so that the display mode is changed. It is preferable to store the display mode after the fixed state, in other words, the state in which the change of the display mode is restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store the game when the open / close execution mode is started (when the winning game round ends) as in the above-mentioned modification 3.

(50) In the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, the return determination and the setting of the return process (step Sa3416) are executed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the end of the open / close execution mode. .. Further, it may be performed after the start of the open / close execution mode and before the start of the ending period.

When each of the above processes is performed in the open / close execution mode, it is preferable to perform each process during a period in which the variable winning device 65 is closed, such as an opening period, an ending period, and a round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is in the open state in the open / close execution mode, the processing load becomes relatively high, for example, it is necessary to perform processing for performing a winning effect based on the occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 65. It is assumed that there is. If the return determination and the return process are set using such a period, there is a concern that a higher load may be caused. In this respect, it is possible to reduce the processing load by configuring each of the above processes by using the period in which the variable winning device 65 is closed.

(51) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process is performed when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the highly accurate gaming state. When the result of is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored. However, regardless of whether the result is a normal jackpot result or a probabilistic jackpot result, the jackpot result is obtained by the hold look-ahead process. May be configured to restore the display mode of the target pending image HW when is pre-read.

(52) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the acquisition random number itself such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143. In order to suppress the increase in the data capacity of the transmission command, predetermined information (identifier corresponding to the random number, etc.) having a smaller amount of data than the acquired random numbers may be transmitted.

(53) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the second hold look-ahead process is performed at the end of the open / close execution mode, but it may be configured to be performed after the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, it may be configured to be performed during the execution of the open / close execution mode or before the start of the open / close execution mode (the period from the start of the winning game round to the start of the open / close execution mode).

(54) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern is pre-read in the first hold look-ahead process and the second hold look-ahead process, but the effect pattern (game round effect) is pre-read. May be good. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, a plurality of types of effect patterns (game rotation effect) correspond to one variation pattern.

(55) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the upper limit display mode table, but the upper limit display mode is set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. It may be configured to be used.

(56) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, even if the winning / failing result for the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 fluctuates between the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. Although the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the specific display mode after the opening / closing execution mode, the display mode may not be the specific display mode. Specifically, when the result of the first hold look-ahead process is a big hit and the result of the second hold look-ahead process is an off result, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode after the open / close execution mode. It may be configured not to.

(57) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode and the upper limit corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. The display mode was compared with the display mode, and the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode was set based on the result, but the above comparison was not performed (in the display mode before the open / close execution mode). Regardless of), the display mode may be set based on the result of the second hold look-ahead processing.

(58) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the upper limit of the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. When the display mode is higher than the display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, but the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, but the actual expectation level is not exceeded. It may be set to a specific display mode. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. , The display mode (display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode) that is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode may be configured as the specific display mode.

(59) In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, the second hold look-ahead process is executed regardless of the difference between the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. If each of the above game states is the same, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the open / close execution mode is set based on the display mode before the open / close execution mode without executing the second hold look-ahead process. May be good. Specifically, the display mode after the open / close execution mode may be set to the same display mode as the display mode before the open / close execution mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the display mode before the open / close execution mode, or the display mode may be changed from the beginning to the display mode before the open / close execution mode.

(60) In the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, the electric power failure abnormality is exemplified as a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality and a vibration sensor abnormality may be used. good. At that time, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to the one in which the progress of the game is stopped, and may be the one in which the progress of the game is continued.

(61) In the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the reserved image HW is set to the specific display mode. However, in the initial stage at the time of power restoration, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode before the power failure are performed. The configuration may be changed to a specific display mode set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process.

Further, in the initial stage at the time of power recovery, the display mode of the target holding image HW is different from that of the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode (a display mode dedicated to power recovery, for example, a purple display mode). After that, the display mode may be changed to the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state or the specific display mode set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure. At that time, the reserved image set as the predetermined display mode may be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

(62) In the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the screen state of the symbol display device 75 is restored to the standby screen (“Soon the screen is restored”. The display of the hold image is restarted in the situation where the character display 461 such as "I will" is displayed), but the hold image is not displayed in the return standby screen state and the screen returns. The display of the reserved image may be resumed when (returning the symbol variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) (or when the screen is restored). In such a case, the display of the hold image is restarted in the state where the display number of the hold image is updated (the state in which each hold image is shifted to the lower side and the hold number is reduced by one).

Further, the display timing of the hold image may be different depending on whether the power interruption abnormality occurs during the non-execution of the game round or during the execution of the game round. Specifically, if a power failure occurs during the non-execution of the game, the power is turned on (a screen displaying characters such as "power turned on"). If the display of the image for use is resumed and an abnormal power failure occurs during the execution of the game, the image for hold is not displayed in the return standby screen state, and the display of the image for hold is resumed in accordance with the screen return. It may be configured to be. In other words, if a power failure occurs during non-execution of the game round, the hold image is displayed at an earlier timing (timing when the elapsed time from the start of power supply is shorter) than when it occurs during the execution of the game round. May be configured to be restarted.

(63) In the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, the case where the power failure occurs during the execution or non-execution of the game round is illustrated, but the electric power is generated during the execution of the open / close execution mode. It can also be applied when a disconnection abnormality occurs. At that time, the display of the target hold image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the return standby screen state, or the hold image may be displayed during the period when the continuous open / close execution mode is performed after the power is restored. The display may be non-executed, and the display of the target hold image may be resumed at the start timing of the first game round after the open / close execution mode. Further, the display of the hold image may not be executed during the period in which the return standby screen state is set, and the display of the hold image may be resumed in accordance with the screen return.

(64) In the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, the power failure monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191. However, the configuration is also provided in the main control device 162 and the staging control device 143. good. In this case, in the modification 5, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, or may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143 to monitor the power failure. A power failure signal from unit 315 or a power failure command (command indicating the occurrence of a power failure state) from one control device may be transmitted to the other control device.

(65) In the modification 5 to the modification 6 of the first embodiment, the setting process of the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored (the process for returning the hold notice in step Sa5202 and the display in step Sa6204). The mode setting process) is executed at the time of power recovery, but it may be executed after power recovery. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing in the period until the game round of the target holding image HW is started after the power is restored.

(66) In the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the information indicating the display mode of the target holding image HW is backed up, and the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure is grasped based on the information after the power is restored. The display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery is set, and in the modification 6 of the first embodiment, the information indicating the look-ahead result is backed up, and after the power is restored, before the power failure occurs based on the information. The display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery was set by grasping the look-ahead result, but the look-ahead process is executed again after power recovery, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery is based on the result. May be set. At that time, the look-ahead process after the power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or the staging control device 143.

In the above case, in a situation where a plurality of holding images are displayed, change location information that can be grasped as to which holding image is set as a specific display mode is stored, and a power failure state occurs. It is advisable to have a configuration in which the change location information is backed up (memory retention). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp which holding image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power failure occurs after the power is restored. The change location information may be stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or may be stored in the RAM 344 or the backup RAM 345 of the staging control device 143 and backed up by the staging control device 143. May be good.

In the above case, it is advisable to execute the look-ahead process after the power is restored for the holding image (holding information) that was grasped to have been set to the specific display mode before the power failure. In this case, even the reserved image that was not set as the specific display mode before the power interruption is changed to the specific display mode by the look-ahead process after the power is restored, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Further, compared to the case where the pre-reading process is performed again for all the pending information existing after the power is restored, the number of times the pre-reading process is executed can be suppressed to a small number, and the processing load at the time of the power recovery can be reduced. ..

Here, grasping which holding image was displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure can be rephrased as grasping which holding image was not displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure. However, the display mode may be set to the normal display mode for the reserved image that is grasped as not being displayed in the specific display mode by the grasp. In this case, the display mode of the hold image that was not the target of the pre-reading process after power recovery may be set to the normal display mode, or all the hold images may be set to the normal display mode after power recovery. With respect to the reserved image that is grasped as not being displayed in the specific display mode after performing the look-ahead processing, the display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. ..

Further, in the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the pre-reading result after power recovery, the display mode is set to a certain level or less as in the modified example 5 and the modified example 6 of the first embodiment. The configuration may be limited to a specific display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb).

It should be noted that the pre-reading process after the power recovery may be performed at the time of the power recovery, or if it is before the game round of the holding image (holding information), which was the specific display mode before the power failure, is started. It may be performed after the power is restored.

Further, with respect to the reserved image that is grasped to have been set to the specific display mode before the power failure without executing the look-ahead process after the power is restored, the display mode is set to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, a blue display mode). It may be configured to be set to HMb).

(67) In the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and hold) the information related to the reserved image, but the information is stored in the RAM 344 without providing the backup RAM 345. It may be configured to back up all information. Further, it may be configured to back up a part of the information (information about the reserved image) stored in the RAM 344 without providing the backup RAM 345.

(68) In the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is transmitted to the main control device 162 and the staging control device 143, but is transmitted only to the main control device 162. It may be configured. In such a configuration, when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control device 162, the main control device 162 transmits a power failure command to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 receives the power failure command. It is preferable to use this as an opportunity to execute the power failure processing (processing of steps Sa11 to Sa13, etc.).

(69) In the modification 5 of the first embodiment, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (in step Sa5404). In the case of affirmative determination), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery is limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode, but the display mode of the target hold image HW is the normal display mode HMa. (The specific display mode may be canceled).

(70) In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure. Although the promotion process of the target holding image HW is executed in the game round (step Sa5409, step Sa5601), the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored is set to the specific display mode before the power failure. In this case, it may be configured to execute the promotion process in the game times of the target holding image HW. Further, regardless of the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored, the promotion process may be executed in the game times.

(71) In the modification 6 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold pre-reading process before the power failure (when affirmative determination is made in step Sa6302), the target is held after the power is restored. Although the display mode of the image HW is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode may be easily set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored is lower than the normal display mode HMa or the first specific display mode. The configuration may be set so that the probability of being set to the first specific display mode is higher than the probability of being set to those display modes.

In addition, the same setting process for hold notice as before the power failure is performed based on the grasped hold look-ahead result (result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure) without setting restrictions such as the first specific display mode. It may be configured to execute and perform the execution lottery of the hold notice effect and the lottery process of the display mode of the hold image.

The same applies to the case where a disappointing result with a high degree of expectation is pre-read (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa6305).

(72) In the modified example 6 of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored depends on whether the hold look-ahead process before the power failure is a big hit result or a miss result. However, a configuration that does not make such a distinction may be used. Specifically, regardless of whether it is correct or not, the upper limit display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode.

(73) In the modification 6 of the first embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure cannot be grasped (when a negative determination is made in step Sa6308), the hold information corresponds to the hold information. Although the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa and displayed, the hold image may not be displayed as an error. At that time, the holding image corresponding to the holding information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all the holding images including other holding images may not be displayed.

(74) In the modification 6 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold pre-reading process before the power failure (when affirmative determination is made in step Sa6302), the target is held after the power is restored. The display mode of the image HW is set to the first specific display mode, but the display mode may be set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, if a specific display mode is set in which the expectation is higher after the power is restored based on the fact that the jackpot result was pre-read before the power failure, the hold look-ahead result and the result of the hit / fail judgment in the game round are due to the influence of the power failure. If there is an inconsistency with, it is assumed that the effect on the player will be large. In this regard, the display mode of the hold image after power recovery is set to the normal display mode HMa for the time being, and the display mode is changed based on the fluctuation start command transmitted at the start of the game round, so that after power recovery. It becomes possible to safely set the display mode of the reserved image in. This also applies to the case where a deviation result with a high degree of expectation is pre-read (when an affirmative judgment is made in step Sa6305).

(75) In the modified example 6 of the first embodiment, the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold pre-reading process before the power failure, or the variation pattern corresponding to the reach-out effect of the SPSP reach-out or more is pre-read. It is configured to execute the promotion process in the game times of the target pending image HW (step Sa6304, step Sa6307), but when it is another look-ahead result (SP reach out-of-reach out-of-reach effect, etc.) ) Also, it may be configured to execute the promotion process in the game times of the target holding image HW. Further, regardless of the look-ahead result, the promotion process may be executed in the game times.

(76) In the modification 6 of the first embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure but also the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power failure. The corresponding information may also be backed up, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery may be set based on both of these information. For example, a plurality of types of upper limit (upper limit display mode) of the specific display mode after power recovery are set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the specific display mode (backed up specific display mode) of the target reserved image HW before the power failure is performed. ) Is the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (backed up hold look-ahead result) pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure. It may be configured to be set in the same mode as the specific display mode before the power failure.

(77) In the modified example 6 of the first embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure, but the staging control device 143. It may be configured to be backed up by the display control device 350. When backing up by the effect control device 143, the main control device 162 is equipped with a backup function such as by providing a backup RAM in the effect control device 143 as in the modification 5 of the first embodiment. Information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process transmitted from is stored in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143, and when a power failure occurs, the information is written in the backup RAM, or the above information stored in the RAM 344 is stored. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it is held even during a power failure. In such a configuration, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the hold look-ahead performed before the power cut is performed based on the information held in the staging control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process). The result of processing can be grasped.

In the above case, the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. By the way, when the configuration is such that both the main control device 162 and the staging control device 143 back up the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process, it is based on the comparison result of each information backed up by both control devices 162 and 143. Further may be provided with a configuration for determining the normality of the information. Specifically, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process backed up by the main control device 162 is transmitted to the staging control device 143, and the staging control device 143 transmits the information. , The information backed up by itself (information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process) is compared with the information transmitted from the main control device 162. As a result, if both information correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is normal, the information is recognized as valid, and it is used for setting (returning) the hold notice effect after the power is restored. do. On the contrary, if both information do not correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is not normal, and the information is regarded as invalid and the hold notice effect is restored (setting of the hold notice effect using the information). ) Is not executed.

Here, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the effect control device 143 is not only when the values of both information match, but also the form of the information at the time of storage (for example, the value). ) Are different between the two control devices 162 and 143, and although the information itself does not match in comparison, it is conceivable that the contents of the information are substantially the same.

The comparison of information is not limited to the staging control device 143, but may be performed by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the comparison is performed by the main control device 162, the information backed up by the staging control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162 when the power interruption state is resolved and the power is restored.

Further, the information for determining normality by comparing (verifying) the results backed up by each of the main control device 162 and the staging control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the result of the hold look-ahead process, and for example, the result of the hold look-ahead determination is determined. It may be other information, such as information about the result or the number of holds. By the way, if the information about the number of holds backed up by the main control device 162 and the information about the number of holds backed up by the effect control device 143 do not correspond, the error notification may be executed as an abnormality, and the error notification may be executed. Alternatively or in addition, the configuration may be such that the number of holds is notified based on the information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to the information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the modified examples 7 to 8 of the first embodiment, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the hold notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B. The mode may be configured such that the ease of execution of the hold notice effect is the same.

(79) In the modification 7 to the modification 8 of the first embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, but the hold notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B. May not be executed. That is, it is understood that the "effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed" of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the hold notice effect is low but also the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed. Can be done.

(80) In the modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the effect mode is automatically switched regardless of the player's operation, but the effect mode can be switched by the player's operation (manual). good. In this case, it is preferable that the effect mode switching operation is invalidated during the execution of the hold notice effect.

(81) In the modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states, but the present invention includes three or more types of effect modes. It may be configured. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold advance notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which an effect mode in which the ease of execution of the hold notice effect is the same and an effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. However, similar to the switching between different production modes, the setting may be such that the switching of the effect modes is restricted during the execution of the hold notice effect, or in the case of the switch between the effect modes having the same ease of execution. It may be configured to allow switching of the effect mode even during the execution of the hold notice effect.

(82) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, when the switching lottery timing is reached (when affirmative determination is made in step Sa7101), the effect mode switching lottery (first mode switching lottery in step Sa7102) is executed. However, if the lottery is won, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the effect mode switching process is not executed. However, when the switching lottery timing is reached. (When affirmative judgment is made in step Sa7101) It is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the mode switching is not executed without performing the effect mode switching lottery. good.

(83) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, not only the switching from the effect mode A in which the hold notice effect is easy to be executed to the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, but also the effect mode B to the effect mode B. Regarding the switching to A, the configuration is such that the switching of the effect mode is restricted during the execution of the hold notice effect, but the switch from the effect mode B to the effect mode A is allowed even during the execution of the hold notice effect. It may be configured.

(84) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW on which the hold notice effect is executed is the predetermined display mode in the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A. (Green display mode HMc) It is determined whether or not the display mode is the above, and based on the result, whether or not to allow the switching of the effect mode is determined, but the effect mode A is changed to the effect mode B. As in the case of switching, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW, the setting may be such that the switching of the effect mode is restricted if the hold notice effect is being executed.

(85) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B, the hold notice effect is being executed regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW. For example, the configuration is such that the switching of the staging mode is restricted, but as in the case of switching from the staging mode B to the staging mode A, whether or not the staging mode is allowed to be switched based on the display mode of the target reserved image HW. It may be configured to distribute.

In the above case, the predetermined display mode that serves as a criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of the staging mode may be a display mode having the same rank as the case of switching from the staging mode B to the staging mode A, or the staging mode. The display mode may be different from that in the case of switching from B to the effect mode A. When the display mode is different, it is preferable to use a display mode higher than that in the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A.

(86) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, when the switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A is permitted during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the target hold image HW is specifically displayed. Although the effect mode can be switched while being maintained in the mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. In this case, the configuration may be such that the target holding image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the game round is started or ended, or the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 2 thereof. As such, the configuration may be changed to a specific display mode before the game round of the target holding image HW is started or ended.

(87) In the modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the switching of the effect mode is restricted based on the result of the hold look-ahead process. For example, when a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a result of deviation beyond the SPSP reach effect) is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process, the switching of the effect mode may be restricted until the game round of the hold information is completed. ..

For example, when a jackpot result or a deviated result with a high degree of expectation such as SPSP reach effect is pre-read, a fanning effect (holding) such as a notice effect that arouses the expectation of the player even before the game round of the reserved information is started. It is assumed that an effect different from the hold notice effect using the image for use) will be performed. If the effect mode is switched during the execution of the fanning effect, the player may find it difficult to understand the fanning effect. At this time, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, if the configuration is such that the switching of the effect mode is restricted based on the result of the hold look-ahead process that triggers the hold advance notice effect, the fanning effect is produced. It is possible to suitably suppress the switching of the effect mode on the way. Further, since the effect mode switching can be restricted before the hold notice effect is executed, even if the effect mode switching timing and the hold notice effect start timing overlap, the effect mode switching and the hold notice effect are executed. Can be suppressed from being performed at the same time.

(88) In the modification 7 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the hold notice effect (when the effect mode switching timing is reached and the first mode switching lottery is won). In the configuration, when the pre-reading result of the hold image (hold information) on which the hold notice effect is executed is a jackpot result, the effect mode can be switched. The configuration may allow switching of the effect mode when the result (for example, a result of deviation beyond the SPSP reach effect) is pre-read. That is, although the effect mode cannot be switched in principle during the execution of the hold notice effect, when the effect mode is switched, it is suggested that the expectation of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is high. be able to.

It should be noted that the configuration that allows the effect mode switching as an exception as described above is not indispensable, and in the modification 7 of the first embodiment, the hold advance notice effect is executed without referring to the result of the hold look-ahead process. It may be configured to determine whether or not the effect mode is allowed to be switched based on whether or not it is inside and the type of the specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the setting is such that the switching of the effect mode is permitted on condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode switching is performed without going through such a lottery. May be configured to allow. That is, if the effect mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the hold notice effect and the pre-reading result of the hold information is a big hit result, the effect mode switching may be permitted without fail.

(90) In the modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but the effect mode is automatically switched without the player's operation. good. In such a configuration, for example, switching of the effect mode is preset based on the pre-reading of a predetermined result by the hold look-ahead process, and then automatic switching of the effect mode is performed when the switching execution condition is satisfied. Things can be considered. As the switching execution condition, for example, it is conceivable that the game round of the reserved information in which the predetermined result is pre-read is started, or the game round before the predetermined round is started.

(91) In the modification 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states, but the present invention includes three or more types of effect modes. It may be configured. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of executing the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold advance notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which an effect mode in which the ease of execution of the hold notice effect is the same and an effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. However, as in the case of switching between different effect modes, the execution of the hold notice effect may be restricted while the effect mode is in the standby state, or the switch between the effect modes having the same ease of execution may be performed. In the case of, the configuration may allow the execution of the hold notice effect even in the standby state of switching the effect mode.

(92) In the modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted when the effect mode switching is in the standby state, but a specific display mode of a predetermined value or more is displayed. It may be configured to limit the execution of the hold notice effect. For example, in the standby state of switching the effect mode, the execution of the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is the blue display mode HMb is permitted, while the display mode of the hold image is the green display mode HMc or higher. It may be configured so that the hold notice effect as the display mode is not executed.

(93) In the modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched in the standby state regardless of the effect mode of the switch destination. The restriction mode may be different depending on the effect mode of. For example, in the case of switching from the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed to the effect mode A in which the hold notice effect is easily executed, the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in the standby state of the effect mode switching. In the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the execution of the hold notice effect is allowed even in the standby state of the effect mode switch, or the specific display higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb) is displayed. Although the execution of the hold notice effect as the mode is restricted, the execution of the hold notice effect as the specific display mode below the predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the modification 8 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the effect mode is switched is set when the standby state ends, but after the standby state ends. It may be configured to be set at a predetermined timing in the period until the game round of the target holding image HW starts or ends (after the effect mode is switched). When setting during the game round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process of the target hold image HW, or the game round of the target hold image HW. The display mode may be set based on the variable start command transmitted at the start.

(95) In the modification 8 of the first embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is not restricted for the hold information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451. However, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted. It may be configured to be used. That is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted not only during the standby state but also before the transition to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed during the execution of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the period from the display of the switch guide image 451 until the effect mode is switched. It is conceivable that the display mode of the target image for holding is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. As the specific change timing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the display timing of the switching guide image 451, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the effect mode, and the like are assumed.

(96) In the modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is not restricted for the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before the transition to the standby state. It may be configured to limit the execution of the hold notice effect.

In this case, based on the fact that the switching guide image 451 is displayed (shifting to the switching guide state), the execution restriction of the hold notice effect may be started prior to the transition to the standby state. That is, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state after the display of the switching guide image 451 may not be executed before the transition to the standby state or in the standby state.

Further, although the hold notice effect is temporarily executed before the transition to the standby state, the execution of the hold notice effect may be canceled when the transition to the standby state occurs. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state is executed before the transition to the standby state, the hold notice effect is executed. The display mode of the holding image to be the target may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. As a specific change timing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the effect mode, and the like can be considered.

(97) In the modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process is executed when the hold information is acquired during the wait state, and the hold look-ahead process performed during the wait state after the end of the wait state. The display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of, but the hold look-ahead process for the hold information acquired during the wait state is executed after the wait state, and after the wait state based on the result. It may be configured to set the display mode of the target holding image HW in the above. At this time, the hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162 or the staging control device 143. Further, the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired during the wait state may be non-executed or may be configured to be executed.

(98) In the modification 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration according to the modification 7 of the first embodiment is applied, and the transition to the switching guidance state is restricted during the execution of the hold notice effect. May be. Specifically, during the execution of the hold notice effect, the lottery is not performed even at the execution timing of the switching guidance lottery, or even if the lottery is won, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed and the guidance notification flag is displayed. It may be configured not to perform the set, or it may be configured not to determine whether or not it is the execution timing of the switching guide lottery.

(99) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above-described embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<Second embodiment>
Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Since the basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 312 of main control device 162>
An electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting for displaying the special drawing display unit 43, a setting for displaying the normal drawing display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, FIG. 100. As shown in, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI used for the above and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in each special figure display unit AS and BS in the special figure display unit 43 are used. Further, it is decided to use the random number counter C3 per figure used for the lottery as to whether or not the common electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is in the support state (open state).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is stored in the acquired information when a prize is won in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The hold ball storage area 314b includes a hold area RE including a first special figure hold area Ra and a second special figure hold area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored in any area as hold information (special information).

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43, and is executed at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 2999, reach the maximum value (that is, 2999), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for a winning / failing lottery to draw a lottery whether or not it is a jackpot, and the value of the random number to be a jackpot winning is set in the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 101, as the hit / miss table, a hit / miss table for the low probability mode and a hit / miss table for the high probability mode are set. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes in the winning / failing lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Is provided. In the winning / failing lottery, when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, a total of 10 random numbers "0" to "9" are set as the values of random numbers that are big hits. That is, the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, a total of 50 random numbers "0" to "49" are set as the values of random numbers that are big hits. That is, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60.

In each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit. The jackpot winning probability in each probability mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. That is, if the winning probability of the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for sorting the types when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 102, as the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure and a jackpot type table for the second special figure are set. If the jackpot is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special figure is referred to, and if the jackpot is based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the first 2 The jackpot type table for special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variation jackpot result A, 4R probability variation jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R are selectable jackpot types. Normally, the jackpot result B is set. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed. Here, in the round game, the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable winning control is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once for one round game.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability mode ends and the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode.

Further, in the 4R probability variation jackpot result A, the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the second upper limit number (for example, 1100 times) which is larger than the first upper limit number. When the second upper limit is reached, the high frequency support mode ends and the support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode.

That is, when the jackpot type is the 4R probability variation jackpot result A, the high probability mode and the high frequency support state (high probability game state) until the number of executions of the special figure game after the open / close execution mode reaches the first upper limit. , Probability variation game state), and after reaching the first upper limit number of times, the state is in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (time saving game state) until the second upper limit number is reached. After reaching the second upper limit number of times, the state shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support state (normal game state).

Here, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described. In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 is relatively high when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. The driving mode of the polyethylene accessory 63a is controlled so as to be high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the normal-figure winning / failing lottery using the random number counter C3 per fu-figure is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened is also larger in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the second operating port 63 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 62 is higher than that of the second operating port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 62. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 63 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, after equalizing the winning probabilities of the winning / failing lottery in both modes, the normal power in the high-frequency support mode is used. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the opening time of one time may be given preferential treatment over the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient if the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and one of the conditions of the winning / failing lottery, the number of opening times, and the opening time is arbitrary. By differentiating the combination conditions, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). Further, in the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high-frequency support mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit. That is, when the jackpot type is the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, the game is in a high probability game state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the open / close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after the first upper limit is reached. Shifts to the normal game state.

The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). That is, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the game is in a time-saving game state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the third upper limit, and after the third upper limit is reached. It shifts to the normal game state.

The 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit number (for example, 100 times) which is smaller than the third upper limit number. That is, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result B, the game is in a time-saving game state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the open / close execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit, and after the fourth upper limit is reached. It shifts to the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, "0" to "1" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result A, "2" to "49" correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B, and "50" to " "51" corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result A, and "52" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result A is 2%, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result B is 48%, the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result A is 2%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result B. Is set to 48%.

As shown in FIG. 102 (b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variation jackpot result A and 10R probability variation jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results results in 10 round games being executed.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). Further, in the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the second upper limit number (for example, 1100 times). That is, when the jackpot type becomes the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, the game is in a high probability game state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the open / close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and then the second upper limit is reached. Until then, it will be in a short game state.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). Further, in the 10R probability variation jackpot result B, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). That is, when the jackpot type becomes the 10R probability variation jackpot result B, the game is in a high probability game state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the open / close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after the first upper limit is reached. Shifts to the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, "0" to "19" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, and "20" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being distributed to the 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 80%.

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, the normal jackpot result is not set as the selectable jackpot type. That is, if a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the probability variation jackpot result is selected with a 100% probability after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .. Therefore, when a big hit is made in a high-probability gaming state or a short-time gaming state in which a prize can be won in the second operating port 63, the game always shifts to the high-probability gaming state. In addition, if the jackpot is won in the winning or losing lottery of the second special figure, the number of round games performed in the open / close execution mode is larger than that in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning or losing lottery of the first special figure, and more games are played. You can expect to get a ball. Therefore, the game in which the game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 will be awarded, and the second operating port 63 will be played accordingly. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning prizes, increases.

Here, in the present embodiment, apart from the time-saving game state that shifts when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the cumulative number of special figure game times (missing game times) in which the winning / failing lottery result is a result of being out of order ( There is provided a time-saving gaming state in which the transition is made when the so-called number of times of hamari becomes a predetermined number of ceilings (for example, 1000 times) (FIG. 102 (c)). In the following, in order to distinguish between the time-saving game state that shifts when the jackpot is triggered and the time-saving game state that shifts when the number of ceilings is reached, the former is referred to as the first time-saving game state, and the latter is referred to as the second time-saving game. Sometimes it's a state.

In the counting of the number of missed games, if the jackpot result is obtained before reaching the number of ceilings, the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings is reset to the initial value (for example, 1000 times), and the number of misses up to that point is discarded. In addition, the out-of-game times during the high-accuracy game state are excluded from the counting. Therefore, in order to shift to the second short-time game state, it is necessary that the number of off-game rounds after the open / close execution mode ends reaches the number of ceilings, and the shift to the high-accuracy game state after the open / close execution mode. If this is the case, it is necessary that the number of out-of-game games after the high-probability game state ends reaches the number of ceilings.

Since the opportunity to shift to the second time-shortened game state is an off result, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed without going through the open / close execution mode. That is, it is possible to play the special figure game in the second short-time game state immediately after the special figure game in which the number of off-game times reaches the ceiling number is completed. The second time-shortened game state is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the second time-shortened game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number (for example, 900 times). After the end of the second short game state, the game shifts to the normal game state.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS when the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. Used. The stop result is determined with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of the stop result (the big hit pattern displayed in the stop display on each special figure display unit AS, BS) in the case of a big hit are set in correspondence with the value of the big hit type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the data of the plurality of stop results. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used for both the determination of the stop result and the determination of the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS and the jackpot determined at the time of the jackpot are used. It has a correlation with the type.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating opening 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the variation display time with respect to the variation type counter CS is stored as the variation display time table in the variation display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. The details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The random number counter C3 per normal figure is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The random number counter C3 per normal figure is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 64.

The random number counter C3 per normal figure is used for the normal figure winning / failing lottery (support lottery) for drawing whether or not it is a normal figure hit (support winning), and if the support winning result is obtained, the normal number is used. The character opening / closing game in which the character 63a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then closed is performed at least once.

The value of the random number for winning the support is set in the support lottery table stored in the winning / failing table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 103, as the support lottery table, a support lottery table for the low frequency support mode and a support lottery table for the high frequency support mode are set. In the support lottery, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode is referred to, and when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode, a total of one "7" is set as the value of the random number for which the support is won. That is, the support winning probability in the low frequency support mode is set to 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode, a total of 99 pieces of "0" to "98" are set. That is, the support winning probability in the high frequency support mode is set to 99/100, and most of the support lottery each time is the support winning result.

In each support mode, the lottery result is out of the ordinary except for the value of the random number that wins the support. The support winning probability in each support mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. That is, if the probability of winning the support is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that win the support are arbitrary. Further, the support lottery table in each support mode may be shared, and the support winning probability may be the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed for advancing the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162 will be described. In MPU 312, in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, main processing activated when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 312.

In step Sb101, reading processing of various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the first operating port 62, the winning detection flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and the winning in the second operating port 63 is won. If it is determined that the flag has occurred, the winning detection flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sb102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the normal figure per random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the normal figure per random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb104, a winning process for thru accompanying a winning to the thru gate 64 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. The value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step Sb103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c on condition that the number of reserved characters stored is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Sb105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 is executed, and then the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Prize processing for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port of step Sb105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 62 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 62a for the first operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sb202.

In step Sb203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62. In step Sb204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first special figure hold area Ra is read, and the start hold storage number RaN held and stored in the first special figure hold area Ra is set (hereinafter). , First start hold storage number RaN). After that, in step Sb205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb201 (when a prize has not been generated in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step Sb206, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second operating port 63. Is determined by the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63, a prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sb207.

In step Sb208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63. In step Sb209, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second special figure hold area Rb is read, and the start hold storage number RbN held and stored in the second special figure hold area Rb is set (hereinafter). , Second start hold storage number RbN). After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step Sb205, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb206 (when no prize has been awarded to the second operating port 63), the main prize processing is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in step Sb202 or step Sb207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step Sb205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb301, it is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb204 or step Sb209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage numbers of the special drawing hold areas Ra and Rb corresponding in step Sb302 are started. Add 1 to N. In step Sb303, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is added by 1.

In step Sb304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding free storage area of the reserved area for the special figure display unit, that is, in step Sb302. 1 Store in the storage area corresponding to the added number of reserved storages.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is set in the hold area Ra for the first special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure added by 1 in step Sb302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are set to the hold area Rb for the second special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure added by 1 in step Sb302.

In step Sb305, the display update process is executed for the special figure hold number display unit AM of the main display unit 81. In the special figure hold number display unit AM, it is possible to display the hold number for the first special figure and the hold number for the second special figure separately. In the display update process of step Sb305, when the current entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the number of reserved numbers for the first special figure is updated, and the current entry destination (winning destination) is updated. When is the second operating port 63, the display of the number of reservations for the second special drawing is updated.

In step Sb306, a hold command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the start prize is the first special figure or the second special figure, information indicating the number of holds, and the like. After the execution of step Sb306, the information acquisition process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps Sb401 to Sb408 is executed as a periodic processing of a 4msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps Sb409 to Sb411 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step Sb401. In the external signal output process of step Sb401, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. If an effect command such as a variation start command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 143.

In step Sb402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb403, the special figure game time control process for controlling the game in each special figure game time is executed. In the special figure game time control process, a jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display unit 43, and the like are performed. In step Sb404, the game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the special figure game times control process in step Sb403 and the game state transition process in step Sb404 will be described later.

In step Sb405, the Fuzu game round control process for controlling the game in the Fuzu game round is executed. In the normal map game time control process, a support lottery (practical map success / failure lottery), display control of the normal map display unit 44, and the like are performed. In step Sb406, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the general electric accessory 63a provided in the second actuating port 63 is executed. The details of the normal game round control process in step Sb405 and the electric service support process in step Sb406 will be described later.

In step Sb407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 191. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sb408, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power failure flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when the power failure state occurs, and is for the MPU 312 to grasp the occurrence of the power failure state.

When the power failure flag is not stored (when the power failure state has not occurred), whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step Sb409, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the current normal process ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. If a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step Sb410. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb409 (when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time), the processing is returned to step Sb401, and the processing after step Sb401 is executed.

In this way, after executing the process of step Sb408, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variable type counter CS are repeatedly updated by using the remaining period until the execution timing of the next normal process arrives. Here, since the execution time of each process of steps Sb401 to Sb408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb408 (when the power failure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb412, and the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sb413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sb 414, a power failure command is set as a transmission target to the staging control device 143. By transmitting the power failure command, the occurrence of the power failure state is notified to the effect control device 143.

In step Sb415, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step Sb416, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Even after the power supply is completely cut off, the power supply and the power for holding the data storage of the RAM 314 are supplied from the power supply and the emission control device 191. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power supply is cut off remains as it is. It is retained for a period of time (eg, 1 or 2 days).

<Special figure game times control process>
The game rotation control process of step Sb403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108.

First, in step Sb501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The open / close execution mode flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the open / close execution mode is being executed.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step Sb502 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the final display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The confirmation display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the confirmation display is being performed by the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not in the final display, it is determined in step Sb503 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The variable display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the variable display is being performed by the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS.

When the special figure display unit 43 is not in the variable display, it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuating port 62 and the second actuating port 63. Therefore, when the common hold number CRN is "0", the hold information to be executed does not exist, so that the special figure game time control process is terminated as it is.

When the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data for setting the data stored in the first special figure hold area Ra or the second special figure hold area Rb for variable display in step Sb505. After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 43 in step Sb506, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process of step Sb505 and the fluctuation start process of step Sb506 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operation port 62) of steps Sb602 to Sb608 is executed, and the second start hold storage number RbN becomes. If it is not "0", the data setting process for the second special figure (second operating port 63) of steps Sb609 to Sb615 is executed.

As described above, where the data setting process is performed when the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold storage number RaN and the second start hold storage number. It means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", that is, the second special figure. It is configured to execute the process related to the hold information for the first special figure on condition that the hold information for the first special figure does not exist. Therefore, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first special figure and the hold area Rb for the second special figure, the second special figure stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure is stored. The hold information for the figure (second operating port 63) is preferentially processed.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, in step Sb602, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first special figure is subtracted by 1. In step Sb603, the common hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. In step Sb604, the data stored in the first area of the first special drawing reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb605, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area Ra is executed. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to the lower area.

In step Sb606, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the holding information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step Sb607.

After the execution of step Sb607 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb606 (when the second special figure flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sb608, and the effect control device 143 is informed that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first special figure, that is, to the first operation port 62. A shift command including information that it is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sb608 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, in step Sb609, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second special figure hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. In step Sb610, the common hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. In step Sb611, the data stored in the first area of the second special drawing reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb612, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area Rb is executed. In step Sb613, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step Sb614.

After the execution of step Sb614 or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb613 (when the second special figure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb615, and the control device on the sub side indicates that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. A shift command (shift generation information), which is information for being recognized by the effect control device 143, is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second special figure, that is, corresponds to the second operation port 63. A shift command including information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sb615 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110.

First, in step Sb701, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The high-probability flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high-probability mode, and is set when shifting to the high-probability mode.

When the mode is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step Sb702 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 101 (a)). Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode (for example, "0" to "9"). Is determined. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step Sb703 with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 101 (b)). Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the high probability mode (for example, "0" to "49"). Is determined.

After the execution of step Sb702 or step Sb703, in step Sb704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sb702 or step Sb703 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in step Sb705, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step Sb706, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the first special figure (FIG. 102 (a)). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE falls within any of the numerical ranges of 4R probability variation jackpot result A, 4R probability variation jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. Determine if it belongs.

On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step Sb707, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 102 (b)). Specifically, it is determined which numerical range of the 10R probability variation jackpot result A and the 10R probability variation jackpot result B the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to.

After the execution of step Sb706 or step Sb707, in step Sb708, the type flags indicating the jackpot types selected by the lottery of step Sb706 or step Sb707 are stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is the 4R probability variation jackpot result A, the 4R probability variation jackpot A flag is stored.

In step Sb709, the stop result for the jackpot is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result of the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb704 (if the jackpot is not won), the process proceeds to step Sb710, and a stop result for disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, only one type of stop result for disengagement is provided, and the stop result is set in step Sb710.

After the execution of step Sb709 or step Sb710, in step Sb711, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS. To execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111.

First, in step Sb801, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it is grasped which of the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or high based on the result. Identify whether it is a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state. The high frequency support flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If both the high-probability flag and the high-frequency support mode are set, it is identified as a high-probability gaming state, and if only the high-probability support mode is set, it is identified as a time-saving gaming state, and the high probability is high. If neither the flag nor the high frequency support mode is set, it is specified as a normal game state.

In step Sb802, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step Sb803, and a big hit variable display time table is acquired as a table for drawing a variable display time (variable pattern). At this time, based on the grasping result of step Sb801, the variable display time table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired.

Here, the variable display time table will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for a normal gaming state, a variable display time table for a high-accuracy gaming state, and a variable display time table for a time-saving gaming state are set. Further, in the variable display time table corresponding to each game state, one for big hit and one for miss are set.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the information of the variation pattern are set in association with each other. In addition, in FIGS. 112 and 113, information on the fluctuation display time is described together with the fluctuation pattern in order to facilitate understanding, but the information on the fluctuation display time is variable display as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. It is stored in ROM 313 separately from the time table.

As shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the jackpot variation display time table corresponding to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern 1A (15 sec), the variation pattern 2A (60 sec), and the variation pattern 3A (variation pattern 3A) are selectable variation patterns. 120 sec) is set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the variation of the pattern on the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. The display is done.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating the variation pattern is transmitted to the staging control device 143 as a variation start command. The staging control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received fluctuation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the fluctuation display time corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern. As a result, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

Further, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game rotation effect such as a reach effect performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the variation pattern 1A corresponds to the normal reach per effect, the variation pattern 2A corresponds to the SP reach (super reach) per effect, and the variation pattern 3A corresponds to the SPSP reach per effect. That is, the effect control device 143 controls the display control device 350 so that when the variation pattern is grasped from the received variation start command, the game rotation effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach hit effects, after the reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hit symbols. Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (big hit). In the gaming machine in which the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player when the result) is reached, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This is a display state for the player to think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be possible is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, the symbol of the symbol row other than the final stop row is hit on the effective line in the display screen G in the state where the symbol of the final stop row is variablely displayed. The reach line is formed by displaying the stop display in a manner constituting the symbol combination of.

In the normal reach hit effect, after the above reach display is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols. The SP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the normal reach effect, and a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears after the formation of the reach line is performed, and after the predetermined effect, the symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot symbol combination. be. The SPSP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the SP reach effect, and after the development effect developed from the SP reach effect is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols.

The items in the "Remarks (Production mode)" column in FIG. 112 (a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 112 (b), in the deviation display time table corresponding to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern 1H, the variation pattern 2H (15 sec), and the variation pattern 3H (60 sec) are selected as selectable variation patterns. , Fluctuation pattern 4H (120 sec) is set. The point that the fluctuation display time is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is the same as the fluctuation display time table for big hits, but the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1H is the first special figure or the first special figure at that time. It varies depending on the number of reserved figures in the second special figure. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 2 or less, the fluctuation display time is 8 sec, and when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 3 or more. Is configured so that the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

The variation pattern 1H corresponds to the complete out-of-reach effect on the symbol display device 75, the variation pattern 2H corresponds to the normal reach out-of-effect effect, the variation pattern 3H corresponds to the SP reach out-of-effect effect, and the variation pattern 4H corresponds to the SPSP reach out-of-effect effect. are doing.

In the complete off effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the off symbols without the reach display being performed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects, after the reach display is performed, each symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a combination of symbols out of reach (the symbol of the final stop row that is stopped and displayed on the reach line is the reach symbol. It is stopped and displayed in a state where it becomes a symbol other than the symbol that forms a big hit by the combination). The SP reach-off effect corresponds to the SP reach-hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach-per-effect is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols that are out of reach. In addition, the SPSP reach out-of-reach effect also corresponds to the SPSP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to the fluctuation pattern. It corresponds to 3A. On the other hand, in the variation display time table for deviation, "0" to "64" of the variation type counter CS correspond to the variation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to the variation pattern 2H, and "85" to "85". "94" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "99" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 4H.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 is the jackpot result, the variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the wrong result. Is the most difficult to select the variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the most easy to execute when it is a big hit, and it is the most difficult to execute when it is off, so it functions as the highest reach effect with the highest expectation of a big hit. ..

Fluctuation patterns other than the variation pattern 3A and the variation pattern 4H are also more likely to be selected when the jackpot is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the upper reach effect, and are less likely to be selected when the variation pattern is out of order. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the jackpot variation display time table corresponding to the high-probability gaming state, the variation patterns 11A (60 sec) corresponding to the SP reach are supported as selectable variation patterns, and the SPSP reach is supported. The fluctuation pattern 12A (120 sec) is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), in the deviation display time table corresponding to the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern 11H corresponding to the complete deviation and the variation corresponding to the SP reach deviation are selectable variation patterns. A pattern 12H (60 sec) and a variation pattern 13H (120 sec) corresponding to the SPSP reach deviation are set. In the variation display time table for deviation in the high-probability gaming state, the range of the variation type counter CS corresponding to the complete deviation is wider than the variation display time table for deviation in the normal gaming state, and the reach effect is less likely to occur. , You can proceed with the game speedily.

Regarding the variation display time of the variation pattern 11H corresponding to the complete deviation, the function of shortening the variation display time is activated earlier than the variation display time table for deviation in the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is configured to be 8 sec when the number of hold is 1 or less, and 4 sec when the number of hold is 2 or more.

As shown in FIG. 113 (c), in the jackpot variation display time table corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern 21A (15 sec) corresponding to the normal reach hit and the variation corresponding to the SP reach hit are selectable variation patterns. A pattern 22A (60 sec) and a variation pattern 23 A (120 sec) corresponding to the SPSP reach are set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), in the deviation display time table corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern 21H corresponding to the complete deviation and the variation pattern 22H corresponding to the normal reach deviation are selectable variation patterns. (15 sec), a variation pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to the SP reach loss, and a variation pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to the SP SP reach loss are set. In the variation display time table for deviation of the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of complete deviation is smaller than that of the variation display time table for deviation in the normal gaming state. This is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without the production occurring. The fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern 21H corresponding to the complete deviation is 8 sec when the number of holdings is 1 or less, and the number of holdings is 2 as in the variation display time table for deviation in the high probability gaming state. In the case of the above, it is configured to be 4 sec.

The fluctuation display time tables shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 are merely examples, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to the description of the variation display time setting process (FIG. 111), in step Sb803, for example, when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the jackpot variation display time of the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 112 (a). Get the table.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb802 (when it is not a big hit), in step Sb804, an out-of-order variation display time table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired as a table for drawing the variation display time. For example, when the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the variation display time table for deviation of the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 113 (d) is acquired.

After the execution of step Sb803 or step Sb804, in step Sb805, the lottery process of the variation display time (variation pattern) is executed using the variation display time table acquired in step Sb803 or step Sb804. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is specified from the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step Sb806, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified in step Sb805 is set as the variation display time in the special figure game round this time. In this step, the value of the fluctuation display time corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, when the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as a corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104) is started. After the execution of step Sb806, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 110), after executing the variation display time setting process in step Sb711, the variation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb712. In the following step Sb713, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set as transmission targets to the staging control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information on the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, each variation pattern is set for each gaming state, and each variation pattern is set depending on whether it is a big hit or a miss. Therefore, in the effect control device 143, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, it is possible to grasp not only the information on the fluctuation display time but also the presence / absence of a big hit and the current gaming state. In addition, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. The type command is set only when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step Sb713 are transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. To. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 143.

In step Sb714, the variable display of the special figure display unit 43 is started. At that time, referring to the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, when the second special figure flag is stored, it is assumed that this game time corresponds to the second special figure, and the pattern of the second special figure display unit BS. Is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is not stored, the pattern of the first special figure display unit AS is variablely displayed, assuming that the game times this time correspond to the first special figure. After the execution of step Sb714, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 108), after the execution of step Sb506, the special figure game time control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step Sb501 (during the open / close execution mode), the special figure game time control process is terminated without executing the processes after step Sb502. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the variable display is not performed on the special figure display unit 43 even if the hold information exists.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display), the process proceeds to step Sb507, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current special figure game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 is "0".

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step Sb508. In the variable display processing, the special figure display unit is displayed and controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display unit related to this game round. )do. After the execution of step Sb508, the special figure game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sb509, and the variation display flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e are cleared. In the following step Sb510, the high probability mode update / end process is executed. In the high-probability mode update / termination process, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in the high-probability mode and to terminate the high-probability mode. In step Sb511, the high-frequency support mode update / termination process is executed. In the high-frequency support mode update / termination process, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode and to terminate the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb512, the second time-saving game state transition process for controlling the transition to the second time-shortening game state (FIG. 102 (c)) is executed. In step Sb513, a definite display start process for starting the definite display on the special figure display unit 43 is executed, and then the special figure game round control process is terminated. Details of each process in steps Sb510 to Sb513 will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb502 (when the special figure display unit 43 is in the final display), the process proceeds to step Sb514 to perform the final display end process for ending the final display on the special map display unit 43. Run. After the execution of step Sb514, the special figure game round control process is terminated. The details of the process for ending the final display in step Sb514 will be described later.

<Game state transition process>
The game state transition process of step Sb404 (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114.

First, in step Sb901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step Sb902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special figure game round is finished (whether it is the timing when the final display on the special figure display unit 43 is finished). .. If it is not the end timing of the special figure game round, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the special figure game, in step Sb903, is the game result of this special figure game corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, that is, whether the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit? Determine if not. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by referring to whether or not the type flag (step Sb708 in FIG. 110) is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of this special figure game does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb903 (when the game result of the special figure game this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb904 and the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the start process, the open / close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. In addition, an opening period for waiting for the start of the first round is set while the variable winning device 65 is closed. Further, when the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag are set in the various flag storage areas 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sb905, a round display start process for notifying the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is executed. In this step, the current jackpot type is grasped based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. The display of the number of rounds on the round display unit is continued until the open / close execution mode ends.

In step Sb906, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not a 10R probability variation jackpot result, that is, either a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sb907. do. On the other hand, when the jackpot type this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC1 in step Sb908.

After the execution of step Sb907 or step Sb908, in step Sb909, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

In step Sb910, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb901 (in the open / close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb911, and it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the opening period has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step Sb912.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115.

First, in step Sb1001, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 65d. When the large winning opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step Sb1002 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0" in step Sb1003. It is determined whether or not it is. This process determines whether or not the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

When the value of the timer area T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sb1004, and the timer area T1 is set to "15000" as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. To set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104) is started. In step Sb1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10 pieces) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step Sb1006, the drive unit 65d is set to the drive state in order to open the large winning opening 65a. In step Sb1007, an opening command for notifying the staging control device 143 that the opening of the large winning opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1102 (when the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb1103 (when the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the winning opening opening / closing process is performed as it is. To finish.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1001 (when the large winning opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step Sb1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T1 is "0". This process determines whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in step Sb1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sb1009, and it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large winning opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter area PC1 is subtracted by 1 in step Sb1010, and then it is determined in step Sb1011 whether or not the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0". do. If the value of the winning counter area PC1 is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1008 (when the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb1011 (when the value of the winning counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sb1012. , The drive unit 65d is switched to the non-drive state, and the large winning opening 65a is closed. In step Sb1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1, and in step Sb1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step Sb1015, and the period for waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable winning device 65 closed. As a value corresponding to (2 sec), "1000" is set in the timer area T1.

In step Sb1016, a closing command for notifying the staging control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round game has ended) is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1014 (when the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), that is, when the final round of the open / close execution mode is completed, the process proceeds to step Sb1017 and the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending period is set for waiting for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open / close execution mode ends) while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. In step Sb1018, an ending command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 114), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step Sb912, it is determined in step Sb913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the open / close execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sb914, and it is determined whether or not the ending has ended (whether or not the ending period has elapsed). If the ending is not completed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, when the ending is completed, the process proceeds to step Sb915, and the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb1101, the type flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb1102. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the first upper limit number of times is set in the probability variation counter area KC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The probability variation counter area KC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high probability mode (the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high probability mode), and the special figure game times in the high probability mode. Is subtracted by 1 each time.

In step Sb1104, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, and when the first support flag is set, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. ..

In step Sb1105, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the 4R probability variation jackpot result A or the 10R probability variation jackpot result A. If it is the 4R probability variation jackpot result A or the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step Sb1106, and a value (for example, 1100) corresponding to the second upper limit is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. .. On the other hand, if it is not the 4R probability variation jackpot result A or the 10R probability variation jackpot result A, that is, if it is the 4R probability variation jackpot result B or the 10R probability variation jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1107, and the first upper limit number of times is reached in the support counter area SC. Set the corresponding value (eg 100). The support counter area SC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode (the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high frequency support mode), and is special in the situation of the high frequency support mode. The figure is subtracted by 1 each time the game is played.

After the execution of step Sb1106 or step Sb1107, in step Sb1108, a high-probability game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends. The high-probability game state start command set in step Sb1108 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the high probability game state start command, the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) is notified to the effect control device 143.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1101 (when the jackpot result this time is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, and the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. As a result, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode in the state where the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode, and the mode shifts to the first short-time gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

In step Sb1110, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the 4R normal jackpot result A. If the 4R normal jackpot result A is obtained, the process proceeds to step Sb1111 and a value (for example, 1000) corresponding to the third upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. On the other hand, if it is not the 4R normal jackpot result A, that is, if it is the 4R normal jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1112, and a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the fourth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC.

After the execution of step Sb1111 or step Sb1112, in step Sb1113, the first time-saving game state start command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends. The first time-saving game state start command set in step Sb1113 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the first time-shortened game state start command, the start of the first time-shortened game state is notified to the effect control device 143.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 114), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of step Sb915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sb916. In this process, the round display unit is controlled so that the round display unit in the special figure display unit 43 is turned off.

In step Sb917, the end processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, a process of erasing the type flag and the open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

Next, the high-probability mode update / end process of step Sb510 in FIG. 108, the high-frequency support mode update / end process of step Sb511, and the second time-saving gaming state transition process of step Sb512 will be described. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed, in other words, are executed when the definite display on the special figure display unit 43 is started.

<Process for updating / ending high probability mode>
The high-probability mode update / end process of step Sb510 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117.

First, in step Sb1201, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. When the high probability flag is set, that is, when the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb1202, and the value of the probability variation counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter area KC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter area KC is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter area KC is "0", that is, when the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high probability mode becomes 0, in step Sb1204, the above-mentioned various flag storage areas 314e Clear the high probability flag set in. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode.

At that time, when the value of the support counter area SC is 0, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode and shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If the value of the support counter area SC is not 0, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode, and the game shifts to the first short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

In step Sb1205, a high-probability game state end command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the high-probability mode update / end process is terminated. The high-probability gaming state end command set in step Sb1204 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the high-probability game state end command, the effect control device 143 is notified of the end of the high-probability game state.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb1201 (when the high probability flag is not set), that is, when the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the high probability mode is updated / ended without executing the processing after step Sb1202. End the processing. Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb1203 (when the value of the probability variation counter area KC is not "0"), the high probability mode is updated / terminated without executing the processing after step Sb1204 in order to continue the high probability mode. End the process.

<Process for updating / terminating high-frequency support mode>
The high-frequency support mode update / termination process of step Sb511 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118.

First, in step Sb1301, it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. When these flags are set, it means that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and it is one of the high-probability gaming state, the first time-shortening game state, and the second time-shortening gaming state.

In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb1302, and the value of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1303, it is determined whether or not the value of the support counter area SC is “0”. When the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, when the number of times the game is executed in the high frequency support has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb1304, and the various flag storage areas 314e are set. Clear the set support flag. As a result, the high-probability gaming state, the first time-shortening gaming state, or the second time-saving gaming state ends.

In step Sb1305, a corresponding game state end command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. At this time, when the probabilistic game state or the first time-shortening game state ends, the first time-shortening game state end command is set, and when the second time-shortening game state ends, the second time-shortening game state end command is set. ..

The set game state end command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). When the effect control device 143 receives the first time-saving game state end command together with the high-probability game state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the effect control device 143 shifts to the normal game state with the end of the high-probability game state. To figure out that. Further, when only the first time-shortened game state end command is received, it is grasped that the first time-shortened game state ends, and when the second time-shortened game state end command is received, the second time-shortened game state ends. To figure out that.

After the execution of step Sb1305, the high-frequency support mode update / termination process is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb1301 (when neither support flag is set), that is, in the normal gaming state, the high-frequency support mode update / end is performed without executing the processing after step Sb1302. End the process. If a negative determination is made in step Sb1303 (when the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), the high-frequency support mode is updated without executing the processing after step Sb1304 in order to continue the high-frequency support mode. End the end processing.

<Process for transition to the second time-saving game state>
The process for shifting to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb512 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119.

First, in step Sb1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a big hit result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb1402, and a value (for example, 1000) corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the off count counter area HC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The number-of-off counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings. After the execution of step Sb1402, the second time-saving game state transition process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1401 (when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a wrong result), the process proceeds to step Sb1403, and it is determined whether or not the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. .. The second support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state.

If the second support flag is not set, that is, if the current gaming state is not the second gaming state, it is determined in step Sb1404 whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb1405, and the value of the deviation count counter area HC is updated. Specifically, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb1407, and the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. As a result, the game shifts to the second short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

Here, the high-frequency support mode update / termination process in step Sb511 includes a process of subtracting the remaining number of times of the high-frequency support mode and a process of terminating the high-frequency support mode based on the result. However (FIG. 118), in the present embodiment, it is assumed that these processes are performed and then the process for shifting to the second time-saving game state in step Sb512 is performed. Therefore, when the value of the number-of-off counter area HC becomes "0" in the final game round of the first time-shortened game state, in other words, the game round in which the end of the first time-shortened game state is determined and the second time-shortened game state are determined. When the game times in which the transition to the game state is determined are the same as the game times, the game state shifts to the second time-saving game state after the first time-shortening game state is completed in the game times.

If the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure game is a big hit result before the value of the loss count counter area HC reaches "0", the process of step Sb1402 is executed, so that the loss count counter is executed. The area HC value is reset to the value corresponding to the number of ceilings. Therefore, after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, the game is started in a state where the remaining number of out-of-game games until the transition to the second time-shortened game state is set to the number of ceilings.

In step Sb1408, a value (for example, 900) corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1409, a second time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. The set second time-saving game state start command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the second time-shortened game state start command, the start of the second time-shortened game state is notified to the effect control device 143.

In step Sb1410, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, that is, whether or not the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings are the game times of the second special figure. do. The case where the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings is the game times of the second special figure is the case where the number of ceilings is reached in the final game times (1000th special figure game times) in the first short-time game state. Means that. On the other hand, the case where the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings is the game times of the first special figure means that the number of ceilings has been reached in the special figure game times in the normal gaming state.

If the second special figure flag is not set (when the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings are the game times of the first special figure), the process proceeds to step Sb1411, and the normal figure game times are being displayed in a variable manner. Judge whether or not. If the normal figure game times are being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step Sb1412, and it is determined whether or not the support lottery result in the normal figure game times is a support winning result (a normal figure hit result).

If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1413, and the winning / failing result of the normal drawing game times that is being displayed in a variable manner is changed to a wrong result. In the following step Sb1414, the stop result for the disengagement result is set as the stop result of the normal game game.

After the execution of step Sb1414 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb1412 (when the result of winning or failing the normal figure game times being displayed is a wrong result), the change display of the normal figure game times is forcibly terminated in step Sb1415. .. That is, the normal drawing display unit 44 is controlled so that the fluctuation display is terminated even before the variation display time has elapsed. After that, the stop result corresponding to the disengagement result is confirmed and displayed on the normal drawing display unit 44 in a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec). After the execution of step Sb1415, the second time-saving game state transition process is terminated.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1410 (when the second special figure flag is set), it is assumed that the forced termination of the normal drawing game is not performed, and the second time is shortened without executing the processes of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415. End the game state transition process.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1403 (in the second time-saving gaming state) or in a positive judgment in step Sb1404 (in the high-probability mode), it is assumed that the process related to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. The second time-saving game state transition process is terminated without executing the processes after step Sb1405. Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb1406 (when the value of the number of missed counter area HC is not "0"), the second time is shortened without executing the processing after step Sb1407 in order to maintain the gaming state at that time. End the game state transition process.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb1411, that is, when the variation display of the normal map game times is not performed (including the case where the final display of the normal map game times is performed), the processing after step Sb1412 is executed. The process for shifting to the second time-saving game state is completed without any problem.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the final display in step Sb513 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120 (a).

First, in step Sb1501, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the second special figure flag is not set, that is, if the special figure game time this time is the game time of the first special figure, in step Sb1502, the special figure game time this time is out of reach of the ceiling. Determine if it is a time. That is, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game corresponds to the immediately preceding game from the viewpoint of the special figure game that is first performed after the transition to the second time-shortened game state.

If an affirmative decision is made in step Sb1501 (when the second special figure flag is set) or a negative decision is made in step Sb1502 (when it is not an out-of-ceiling game), the process proceeds to step Sb1503, and this special figure game The normal fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time in the times.

The normal fixed display time does not necessarily have to be one type, for example, the first time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the low frequency support mode (normal game state) and the high frequency support mode (probability change game state, first). A plurality of types having different lengths may be provided, such as a second time (for example, 0.3 sec) for a one-time short game state and a second short-time game state.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1502 (in the case of an out-of-ceiling game round), the process proceeds to step Sb1504, and the fixed display time in the special figure game round this time is a specific fixed display time different from the normal fixed display time (for example, 0). 8.8 sec) is set. This specific fixed display time is longer than the normal fixed display time. When the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are provided as the normal fixed display time, the normal fixed display time is longer than the normal fixed display time for the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, if the normal figure game time is being displayed in a variable manner at the confirmation display start timing in the off-ceiling game time (the game time of the first special figure), the variable display is forcibly terminated and the normal display is performed. Figure The off result is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game. The specific confirmed display time is longer than the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) of the normal drawing game times at that time.

Therefore, if there is a next pending Fuzu game at the end of the final display of the Fuzu game, the next Fuzu game will be the final display of the special game when the ceiling is reached. Starts earlier than it ends. In this case, since the internal game state has already shifted to the second time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the next normal game game is performed in a mode corresponding to the second time-saving game state. .. That is, when the number of detachments reaches the number of ceilings, the normal figure game starts the game in a mode corresponding to the second time-saving game state prior to the special figure game.

After the execution of step Sb1503 or step Sb1504, the confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 in step Sb1505. The confirmation display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the confirmation display of the special figure game times is being executed.

In step Sb1506, the confirmation display start process is executed. In the confirmation display start process, the special figure display unit 43 is controlled so that the variablely displayed pattern is stopped and displayed at the stop result set in step Sb709 (FIG. 110) or step Sb710.

In step Sb1507, a variable end command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the confirmation display start process is terminated. The variation end command set in step Sb1507 is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). The staging control device 143 transmits the received variable end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the variable end command, the display control device 350 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Process for ending confirmation display>
The process for ending the final display in step Sb514 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120 (b).

First, in step Sb1601, it is determined whether or not the confirmed display time set in step Sb1503 or step Sb1504 has elapsed. If the confirmed display time has not elapsed, the process for ending the confirmed display is terminated as it is in order to continue the stop display of the stop result on the special figure display unit 43.

When the confirmed display time has elapsed, in step Sb1602, the confirmed display flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e are cleared, and then the process for ending the confirmed display is terminated. When the confirmation display flag is cleared in this way, a negative determination is made in step Sb502 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 108) in the next processing time. Therefore, if there is the next special figure game time (held information in which the game time has not been executed) that is on hold, the variable display related to the next special figure game time is started. On the other hand, if the next special game times (unprocessed pending information) that are pending do not exist, the stop result that was confirmed and displayed is displayed until a new start prize is generated and the pending information is acquired. continue.

<Public game game times control process>
The normal game round control process of step Sb405 (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121.

First, in step Sb1701, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening / closing game using the universal accessory 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening / closing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The bonus opening / closing flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the bonus opening / closing game is being executed, and is set when the bonus opening / closing game is executed.

If the character opening / closing game is in progress, the normal game game time control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the accessory opening / closing game is not in progress, in step Sb1702, it is determined in the normal drawing display unit 44 whether or not the normal drawing game is being executed. In this case, the normal map game times is a concept including a variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 44 and a stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern on the normal map display unit 44, and the above variable display is performed in step Sb1702. Or, it is determined whether or not any of the stop displays is being executed.

In the special figure game times on the special figure display unit 43, the execution of the variable display is restricted when the open / close execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but in the normal figure game times, the open / close execution mode is in progress. Even so, variable display is allowed. Further, in the Fuzu game, the execution of the variable display is restricted when the character opening / closing game using the Fuden accessory 63a is in progress, but in the special figure game, the variable display is performed even during the character opening / closing game. Is acceptable.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1702 (when the normal figure game round is not being executed), the process proceeds to step Sb1703, and it is determined whether or not the normal figure reserved memory number FN is "0". If the FN for the number of reserved memory of the normal figure is "0", the normal figure game time control process is terminated as it is.

If the number of FNs on hold in the normal map is not "0", the normal figure data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area Rc for electric service for variable display is executed in step Sb1704. In the normal figure data setting process, the normal figure hold storage number FN is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service hold area Rc is moved to the normal figure execution area. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electric service holding area Rc is executed, and further, the effect control device 143 is made to recognize that the data of the holding area on the normal drawing side has been shifted. Set the normal map shift command, which is the information for.

In step Sb1705, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game turn control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122.

First, in step Sb1801, it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, refer to the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 103 (a)) in step Sb1802. Support lottery (judgment of whether or not the table is correct) will be held. On the other hand, when any of the support flags is set, that is, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode in step Sb1803 (FIG. 103 (b)). Refer to and perform a support lottery. As already explained, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher support winning probability than the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode, and the support winning result is likely to be obtained.

By the way, in the normal figure game times executed during the confirmation display of the special figure game times when the ceiling is reached, the support lottery is performed with reference to the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the support lottery in this case tends to be the support winning result, and in the situation where the support winning probability is set to 95/100 as in this embodiment, the support winning result is very high. ..

After the execution of step Sb1802 or step Sb1803, in step Sb1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is the support winning result (result per drawing). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1805, and the stop result for hitting a normal figure is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. If it is not a support winning result, that is, if it is an out-of-normal result, the process proceeds to step Sb1806, and the stop result table for out-of-normal drawing is referred to with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. To set.

After the execution of step Sb1805 or step Sb1806, the normal map fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step Sb1807. In the setting process, the variable display time of the current normal map game times on the normal map display unit 44 is set. At that time, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a relatively long variable display time is set, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, a relatively short variable display time is set.

Specifically, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the result of the support lottery is an out-of-the-box result, for example, 30 sec is set as the variable display time, and the low frequency support mode is used. If there is, for example, 0.5 sec is set as the variable display time. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode and the result is out of the ordinary, for example, 0.5 sec is set as the variable display time, and in the case of the high frequency support mode and the support winning result, for example, the variable display time is set. Set 0.5 sec.

By the way, the normal figure game times executed during the confirmation display of the special figure game times when reaching the ceiling is started in the state of internally shifting to the second time saving game state, so the variable display for the high frequency support mode. Time applies. That is, the normal drawing game times are performed with a short variable display time.

It should be noted that each of the above variable display times is only an example, and for example, a plurality of types of time such as 0.5 sec and 1 sec can be selected as the variable display time when the support winning result is obtained in the high frequency support mode. It may have other configurations such as.

In step Sb1808, a normal map fluctuation start command is set as a transmission target to the staging control device 143. The normal map fluctuation start command includes information on the normal map fluctuation pattern (information indicating the normal map success / failure result and the fluctuation display time). The set normal map fluctuation start command is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

In step Sb1809, the process of starting the variation display of the pattern is executed in the display unit 44 for the normal map, and then the process of starting the variation of the pattern is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal drawing game round control process (FIG. 121), if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb1702 (when the normal drawing game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sb1706 and the variable display time set in step Sb1807. Determine if it has passed. If the variation display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sb1707 and the variation display process is executed. In the variable display processing, the display control of the normal map 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that the display segments 44 are turned on and off in a predetermined order. .. After that, the normal game round control process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1706 (when the variable display time has elapsed), the normal figure confirmation display process is executed in step Sb1708, and then the normal figure game round control process is terminated. In the normal drawing confirmation display process, the normal figure display unit 44 is controlled so that the pattern is stopped and displayed at the stop result set in step Sb1805 or step Sb1806. At that time, the fixed display time is set to a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, in the processing for confirming the normal map, the normal map fluctuation end command is set as the transmission target to the staging control device 143. The normal map fluctuation end command includes information on the confirmed display time of the current normal map game times.

<Processing for electric service support>
The electric service support process of step Sb406 (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123.

First, in step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening / closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening / closing flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

If the character opening / closing game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step Sb1902, and it is determined whether or not the timing is the end of the normal drawing game. If it is not the end timing of the normal game, the processing for electric service support is terminated as it is.

If it is the end timing of the Fuzu game round, the process proceeds to step Sb1903, and it is determined whether or not the result of the support lottery in the current Fuzu game round is the support winning result. If it is not the support winning result, the processing for electric service support is terminated as it is.

If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1904, and it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. When neither of the support flags is set, that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, "1" is set in the open count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step Sb1905. set. The opening count counter area RC2 is for counting the number of times the general electric accessory 63a is opened in the accessory opening / closing game, and is subtracted by 1 each time the general electric accessory 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state. ..

When the first support flag or the second support flag is set, that is, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, "2" is set in the open count counter area RC2 in step Sb1906. That is, in the accessory opening / closing game in the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the utility accessory 63a is opened is set to 1, and in the accessory opening / closing game in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the universal accessory 63a is opened is twice. Is set to.

In step Sb1907, the flag for opening / closing the accessory is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. In the following step Sb1908, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric service support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory open signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1901 (when the accessory opening / closing game is in progress), the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step Sb1909. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124.

First, in step Sb2101, it is determined whether or not the general electric accessory 63a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 63b. When the general electric accessory 63a is not being opened, it is determined in step Sb2102 whether or not the value of the open count counter area RC2 is “0”.

If the value of the open count counter area RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sb2103, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T2 provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0". In this process, when the universal accessory 63a is opened a plurality of times in the accessory opening / closing game, it is determined whether or not the waiting period between each opening has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sb2104, and it is determined whether or not the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. When neither of the support flags is set, that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the timer area T2 in step Sb2105. When any of the support flags is set, that is, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer area T2 in step Sb2106. The value set in step Sb2105 or step Sb2106 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in the accessory opening / closing game.

After the execution of step Sb2105 or step Sb2106, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b in step Sb2107. This value corresponds to the upper limit winning number (6 pieces) for the general electric accessory 63a (second operating port 63) in the accessory opening / closing game.

In step Sb2108, the drive unit 63b is put into a drive state in order to open the utility accessory 63a. In step Sb2109, an accessory release command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. The set accessory release command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). As a result, the effect control device 143 is notified of the switching from the closed state to the open state of the universal electric accessory 63a.

After the execution of step Sb2109, the accessory opening / closing process is terminated. Further, when a positive judgment is made in step Sb2102 (when the value of the open count counter area RC2 is "0") or when a negative judgment is made in step Sb2103 (when the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the electric power is installed. Assuming that the accessory 63a is not released, the accessory opening / closing process is terminated without executing the processes after step Sb2104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2101 (when the utility accessory 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb2110, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T2 is "0". This process determines whether or not the upper limit opening time of the utility accessory 63a set in step Sb2105 or step Sb1206 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is not "0", that is, if the upper limit opening time of the universal electric accessory 63a has not elapsed, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63 in step Sb2111. To judge. If a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter area PC2 is subtracted by 1 in step Sb2112. In step Sb2113, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0", that is, whether or not the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit winning number.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb2111 (when a prize has not occurred in the second operating port 63) or when a negative judgment is made in step Sb2113 (when the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the utility service In order to continue the open state of the object 63a, the accessory opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2110 (when the value of the timer area T2 is "0" and the upper limit opening time of the general electric accessory 63a has elapsed) or when affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2113 (winning counter area PC2). When the value is "0" and the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit winning number), in step Sb2114, the drive unit 63b is in a non-driving state in order to close the general electric accessory 63a. And.

In step Sb2115, the accessory closing command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 143. The set accessory closing command is transmitted to the staging control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). As a result, the effect control device 143 is notified of the switching from the open state to the closed state of the universal electric accessory 63a.

In step Sb2116, the update process of the open count counter area RC2 is executed. In the update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referred to, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (when the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 does not reach the upper limit winning number), it is opened. The value of the counter area RC2 is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (when the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit winning number), "0" is set to the value of the open count counter area RC2. do.

In step Sb2117, it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter area RC2 is “0”. When the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the accessory opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, when the remaining opening of the utility accessory 63a exists, "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer area T2 in step Sb2118. Is set, and then the accessory opening / closing process is completed. The value set in step Sb2118 corresponds to the waiting time for waiting for the next opening with the general electric accessory 63a in the closed state.

Returning to the description of the electric service support process (FIG. 123), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step Sb1909, it is determined in step Sb1910 whether or not the value of the open count counter area RC2 is "0". do. If the value of the open count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", that is, when the accessory opening / closing game is completed, the accessory opening / closing flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared in step Sb1911. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

<About the electrical configuration of the staging control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the staging control device 143 and the display control device 350 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 125.

The MPU 342 is mounted on the staging control board 341 provided in the staging control device 143. The MPU 342 is a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A certain RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game turn control commands such as change start commands, type commands, and change end commands, and open / close execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands are available. Receive various commands.

As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 342, and the display control device 350 is connected to the output side.

Further, an effect operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. The staging operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the operation of the staging operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the staging operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the operation mode of what kind of operation has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377, respectively, are mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes the command received from the effect control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 372 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 372. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP375 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 377.

<About various processes executed by the staging control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the staging control device 143 will be described.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 126. The effect setting process is a process started by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not the ending command (step Sb1018 in FIG. 115) from the main control device 162 is received. The ending command is transmitted when the ending is started in the open / close execution mode, which is performed when the result of the hit / miss determination in the special figure game is a big hit.

Various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in the command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the staging control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command. Therefore, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be satisfactorily executed.

In the determination of step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not the ending command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. When the ending command is stored (when the ending command is received), in step Sb2302, a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high-probability gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state is set. The first transition effect setting process is executed. The details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After the execution of step Sb2302 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (when the ending command has not been received), in step Sb2303, the second time-saving game state start command from the main control device 162 (step Sb1409 in FIG. 119). Is received or not. The second time-saving game state start command is transmitted at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state when the number of out-of-game games in the special figure game reaches the ceiling number.

When the second time-shortened game state start command is received, in step Sb2304, the second transition effect setting process for setting the transition effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-shortened game state is executed. The details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After the execution of step Sb2304 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2303 (when the second time-saving game state start command has not been received), whether or not any of the game state end commands has been received in step Sb2305. judge. Specifically, whether or not any of the high-probability game state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the first time-shortened game state end command, or the second time-shortened game state end command (step Sb1305 in FIG. 118) has been received. Is determined.

When any of these commands is received, in step Sb2306, the end for setting the end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time reduction game state, or the second time reduction game state. Execute the effect setting process. The details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

After the execution of step Sb2306 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (when neither game state end command has been received), in step Sb2307, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Executes the special figure fluctuation display processing for displaying fluctuations and the like. The details of the special figure variation display processing will be described later.

In step Sb2308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In other processes, the demo screen display when the start prize does not occur for a predetermined period, the switch to the power saving mode for reducing the power consumption by stopping the image display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc. are performed. Perform the process to do it.

<Production setting process for the first transition>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sb2302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127. This process is executed when the ending command from the main control device 162 is received, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the ending start timing of the open / close execution mode.

First, in step Sb2401, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the transition to the high-accuracy gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode in which the ending command is transmitted corresponds to the jackpot result that causes the transition to the high-probability gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command transmitted from the main control device 162.

If there is only a jackpot type that always shifts to either the high-probability gaming state or the first short-time gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode as in the present embodiment, the process of step Sb2401 may be omitted. It is possible.

In the situation where the transition to the high-probability gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state occurs, the start effect corresponding to each gaming state is set in step Sb2402. For example, if a transition to a high-probability gaming state occurs, a start-up effect for the high-probability gaming state is set as the start-up effect. In the start effect for the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the title image 471 corresponding to the high-probability gaming state such as "lucky time" is displayed. The remaining number of times image 472 is displayed. The remaining number of times image 472 is for notifying the remaining number of times of the special figure game that can stay in the highly accurate game state.

In the start effect for the time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times is 100 in the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), it corresponds to the time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times is 100, for example, "chance time". The title image 473 and the remaining number of times image 472 are displayed. In this case, the remaining number of times image 472 informs the remaining number of times of the special figure game that can stay in the first time-saving game state.

In the start effect for the time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times is 1000 in the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 128 (c), the title corresponding to the higher time-saving game state such as "super chance time" is shown. The image 474 and the remaining number of times image 472 are displayed.

Further, in the start effect for each time-saving game state, the missed number image 475 that informs the number of missed game times for which the result of the special figure hit / miss determination is the missed result is displayed. The display of the loss number image 475 is continued in the first time-shortening game state, and the display number is updated at each end of the loss number game. Therefore, by viewing the image 475 by the player, it is possible to know the progress in the process of reaching the ceiling (FIG. 128 (d)). Specifically, it is possible to grasp the current number of out-of-game games, and a player who knows the number of ceilings can grasp the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings.

Note that FIG. 128 (d) shows the time-saving and medium-time effects performed during the stay in the first time-saving gaming state. The time-saving medium-time effect is performed after the start effect of FIGS. 128 (b) and 128 (c) is completed until the first time-saving game state is completed. In this time-saving and medium-time effect, for example, the background image and the like are different from the normal time effect in the normal game state, and the configuration is such that it can be distinguished from the normal time effect.

By the way, the missed number image 475 is not erased even after the first short game state ends, and is continuously displayed even after the transition to the normal game state. It should be noted that the disengagement number image 475 may be temporarily erased at the end of the first time-shortened gaming state, and may be displayed again at the start of the normal gaming state or after the transition to the normal gaming state.

In step Sb2402, the various start effects are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the start effects may be displayed in the entire ending period, or may be displayed in a part of the ending period.

In step Sb2403, a predetermined value is set in the remaining number of times counter area provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344. The remaining number counter area is for the MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special figure game times that can stay in the high-probability game state or the first short-time game state, and the special figure game times are executed in each of these game states. It is subtracted by 1 for each run. In this step, when the game state to be transferred is a high-probability gaming state, the values corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) and the second upper limit number of times (for example, 1100 times) are set as the predetermined values, respectively. In the case of the first short game state, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) or the fourth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times of each gaming state separately from the main control device 162, but each effect control device 143 is based on the update result of the main control device 162. It may be configured to grasp the remaining number of times of the game state. For example, the update result of the probability variation counter area KC (step Sb1202 in FIG. 117) and the update result of the support counter area SC (step Sb1302 in FIG. 118) are notified from the main control device 162 to the staging control device 143 by transmitting a predetermined command. The staging control device 143 may be configured to analyze the command and grasp each of the above update results. At that time, the existing command such as the variable end command (step Sb1506 in FIG. 120A) may include the information of each update result as the predetermined command, or a dedicated command for notifying the update result. The above-mentioned predetermined command may be configured by.

In step Sb2404, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to start. At that time, it may be set so that the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is started in each start effect (effect performed by using the ending period) set in step Sb2402, or it is high after the start effect is completed. It may be set so that the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is started after shifting to the certain game state or the like.

In step Sb2405, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The remaining number display flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the remaining number image 472 is being displayed.

In step Sb2406, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is the highly accurate gaming state. If the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is not the high-accuracy gaming state, that is, if it is the first time-shortening gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and the display of the number-of-offs image 475 is set to start. At that time, it may be set so that the display of the number of missed images 475 is started in each start effect set in step Sb2402, or the number of misses after shifting to the first time-saving gaming state after the start effect is completed. The display of the image 475 may be set to start. The initial value of the number of deviations image 475 when the display is started by step Sb2406 is 0.

Further, even when a negative determination is made in step Sb2401 (when the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step Sb2407 and the display setting of the number of times of disengagement image 475 is performed.

After the execution of step Sb2407, in step Sb2408, the flag for displaying the number of deviations is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. The loss count display flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the loss count image 475 is being displayed.

After the execution of step Sb2408, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. Further, when an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2406 (when the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-accuracy gaming state), it is assumed that the number of times of disengagement image 475 is not displayed, and the process of step Sb2407 and step Sb2408 is not executed. 1 End the transition effect setting process.

<Production setting process for the second transition>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sb2304 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. This process is executed when the second time-saving game state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed when the second time-saving game state is started. ..

First, in step Sb2501, the value of the off count counter area provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is cleared. The loss count counter area counts the special figure game times of the loss result, and is referred to when displaying the loss count image 475.

In step Sb2502, a process of erasing the deviation count image 475 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is executed, and in step Sb2503, the deviation count display flag set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 is set. clear.

In step Sb2504, it is determined whether or not the first short-time game state ends in the special figure game this time. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times in which the second time reduction game state start command is received is the final special figure game times in the first time reduction game state. In this step, the above determination is made by determining whether or not the first time-saving game state end command has been received in the same game times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of the first time saving game state (third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times)) and the second time saving game state to be transferred when the 4R normal jackpot result A is obtained. The number of ceilings (for example, 1000 times) that triggers the transition is set to the same number. In such a configuration, when the number of digestion games in the first time-saving game state reaches the upper limit without winning the jackpot, the number of misses also reaches the ceiling number at the same time, and the first time-saving game state ends. The corresponding 1st time-saving game state end command and the 2nd time-saving game state start command corresponding to the number of misses reaching the ceiling number are transmitted in the same special figure game times. The same applies to the case where the 4R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained and the state shifts to the high probability gaming state, and after the end of the high probability gaming state, the state shifts to the first time saving game state (the first time saving game state with 1000 remaining times). An event occurs. In step Sb2504, it is determined whether or not these cases are applicable.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2504 (when the first time-shortening gaming state does not end in this special figure game), that is, when shifting from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb2505, and the first step is performed. 2 Set the start effect corresponding to the short game state. In the start effect for the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the title image corresponding to the higher time-saving game state such as "super chance time" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. 474 and the remaining number of times image 472 are displayed.

The start effect for the second time-shortened game state may be executed in the special figure game times when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, or may be executed after shifting to the second time-shortened game state. In the former case, it is preferable to execute the above-mentioned start effect after stopping and displaying each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the combination of the results of the special figure game when the number of ceilings is reached. At that time, the start effect may be executed by using a part or all of the fixed display time, or the variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (a part or all of the fixed display time). ) And may be executed.

When the above start effect is executed by using a part of the confirmed display time, it starts in the latter half of the confirmed display time except when the start effect is executed straddling the variable display time and the confirmed display time. It is good to perform the production. Specifically, it is preferable to execute the start effect after starting the definite display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is possible to notify the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and then to notify the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. Both of these can be preferred for the player to grasp.

In step Sb2506, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is set in the remaining number of times counter area provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344. The fifth upper limit number of times is the number of special figure game times that can stay in the second time-saving game state, for example, 900 times.

In step Sb2507, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to start. At that time, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be started in the start effect for the second time-saving game state, or after the start effect is completed, the second It may be set so that the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is started after shifting to the two-time shortened game state.

In step Sb2508, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2504 (when the first time-shortening gaming state ends in this special figure game), that is, when shifting from the first time-shortening gaming state to the second time-shortening gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb2509. Set to execute the additional effect of the remaining number of times. Here, the additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 (b) and 130 (c).

In performing the above-mentioned addition effect, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), in the final game round in the first time-saving game state, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are removed from the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 and stopped by the combination of the results. Display. The stop display in this case does not take a special stop form, but stops each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in order as in the other special figure game times in the first time-saving game state as a notification of the disconnection result. It is to be displayed.

After the symbols Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), in the special symbol game times in which the symbols Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, for example, "+900 times !!" An additional image 476 composed of characters is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state has been added. This additional image may be displayed by using a part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed as a variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and a fixed display time (a part or all of the fixed display time). May be displayed across. At that time, the added image 476 may be displayed after erasing the stopped-displayed images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased and the front side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed. The image 476 may be displayed so as to be arranged on the image.

After the execution of step Sb2509, in step Sb2510, the value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is added to the value of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, in the game after shifting to the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130 (d), the remaining number of times image 472 reflecting the fifth upper limit number of times is displayed. After the execution of step Sb2510, the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

<End effect setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sb2306 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. This process is executed when the end command of each game state of the high-probability game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state is received, in other words, each of these game states ends. It is what is done in case.

In step Sb2601, it is determined whether or not the end of the current gaming state is the end of the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first time-saving game state end command from the main control device 162 is received.

If the end of the current gaming state is the end of the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb2602, and it is determined whether or not the number of detachments has reached the number of ceilings. That is, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb2602 (when the number of deviations has not reached the number of ceilings and the transition to the second time saving game state does not occur) or when a negative judgment is made in step Sb2601 (high probability gaming state or second time saving gaming state). In the case of the end), in step Sb2603, the end effect corresponding to the game state of the end target is set. For example, when the end of the high probability gaming state is set, the end effect for the high probability gaming state is set to be executed.

In step Sb2604, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is cleared (initialized), and in step Sb2605, the remaining number image 472 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. do.

In step Sb2606, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated. Further, if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2602 (when the number of deviations has reached the number of ceilings and the game shifts to the second time-shortening gaming state), the processing after step Sb2603 is performed in order to continue updating and displaying the remaining number of times. Ends the end effect setting process without executing it.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The process for displaying the special figure variation in step Sb2307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 132.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If none of the game rounds is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 has been received.

The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern drawn by the variation display time setting process (FIG. 111) in the main control device 162. By referring to the information of this fluctuation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which fluctuation display time the special figure game times on the special figure display unit 43 displayed and controlled by the main control device 162 are performed. Further, as already described, since the fluctuation pattern for big hits and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is possible to determine the result of the hit / fail determination from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the special figure change display process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the variation start command is received, the process proceeds to step Sb2703, and the variation start process for starting the effect for the game round is executed.

In the variation start processing, the variation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the variation pattern related to the current special figure game is specified. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in this special figure game is grasped. In the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, an effect pattern table in which the variation display time is determined in association with each variation pattern is stored. The variation display time defined in the effect pattern table corresponds to the variation display time corresponding to each variation pattern (FIGS. 112 and 113) in the main control device 162. A common variation display time is assigned to one variation pattern. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 1A, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 15 sec for both the staging control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the variation display time of the special figure game times this time.

Further, the effect pattern table is associated with the effect pattern for the game rotation effect in association with each variation pattern. As each of these effect patterns, the normal reach, the SP reach, the SPSP reach, the complete deviation, the normal reach deviation, the SP reach deviation, and the SPSP reach deviation described in the explanation of the variable display time table are set. Since the correspondence between the variation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 112, the description thereof will be omitted. In the variation start process, the effect pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the effect pattern of the special figure game times this time.

Further, in the fluctuation start processing, when the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the special figure game round this time is a big hit, the big hit type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the stop result for the probability variation jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. On the contrary, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the stop result for the jackpot is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the special figure game round this time is wrong, each stop symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is randomly determined. However, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is to perform the reach effect, each stop symbol is determined so that the reach is formed on the effective lines L1 to L5 determined by the lottery. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established on at least one effective line L1 to L5 is set as the stop result of this time.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the stop symbol and information on the effect pattern this time is set as an output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped by the stop result determined by the effect control device 143, or the game is played with the effect pattern determined by the effect control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that the effect is performed.

After the execution of step Sb2703, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704, and then the process for displaying the special figure variation is terminated. Here, the process for updating the remaining number of times display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133 (a).

First, in step Sb2801, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, that is, whether or not the remaining number of times image 472 is being displayed. Since the remaining number of times display flag is set when the game is in the high-probability game state, the first time-shortened game state, or the second time-shortened game state, the determination process in step Sb2801 is that the current game state is each of those game states. It can also be said to determine whether or not it is either.

If the remaining count display flag is not set, the process for updating the remaining count display is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times display flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb2802, and the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated. Specifically, the value of the remaining number of times counter area is subtracted by 1. In the following step Sb2803, the display content of the remaining number of times image 472 is updated with reference to the update result of step Sb2802. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 472 is subtracted by 1. After the execution of step Sb2803, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 132), if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2701 (when the special figure game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sb2705, and the change end command is issued from the main control device 162. Determine if it is being received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed in this special figure game. In this case, in step Sb2706, the variable intermediate processing is executed. In the variable middle processing, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 started by the variable start processing is continued, the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute the process for doing so.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2705 (when a variable end command has been received), the process proceeds to step Sb2707 and the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 and the effect being executed are terminated. Further, in step Sb2707, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are controlled to be fixedly stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control device 162.

In step Sb2708, the process for updating the number of missed times display is executed, and then the process for displaying the special figure variation is terminated. Here, the process for updating the display of the number of deviations will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133 (b).

First, in step Sb2901, it is determined whether or not the deviation count display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, that is, whether or not the deviation count image 475 is being displayed. Since the missed number display flag is set when the normal gaming state or the first short-time gaming state is set, the determination process of step Sb2901 determines whether or not the current gaming state is one of those gaming states. It can be said that it is a judgment.

If the number of missed times display flag is set, it is determined in step Sb2902 whether or not the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a missed result. If it is a deviation result, the process proceeds to step Sb2903, and the value in the deviation count counter area is updated. Specifically, the value in the counter area for the number of deviations is added by 1. In the following step Sb2904, the display content of the missed number image 475 is updated with reference to the update result of step Sb2903. As a result, the number of deviations notified by the image 475 is incremented by 1.

The update process of the deviation count counter in step Sb2903 is executed at the start timing of the confirmation display, but in step Sb2904, the deviation count image 475 is set to be updated after the confirmation display time has elapsed. In this case, the update timing of the disengagement number image 475 may be the end timing of the confirmation display or the timing after the next special figure game round is started.

After the execution of step Sb2904, the process for updating the number of missed times display is terminated. In addition, when a negative judgment is made in step Sb2901 (when the number of missed times display flag is not set) or when a negative judgment is made in step Sb2902 (when the winning / failing result of this special figure game is a big hit result), step Sb2903 The process for updating the number of missed times display is terminated without executing the subsequent processing.

<About the flow of transition to the second short game state>
The flow of the transition to the second short game state will be described. Here, it is determined that the number of misses has reached the number of ceilings (for example, 1000 times) after shifting to the first time-saving game state of the third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) triggered by the 4R normal jackpot result A. A case of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state as an opportunity will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends at the timing t1, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. As a result, the mode shifts to the first time-saving gaming state, which is the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b)).

Further, at the timing t1, the third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in the main control device 162 (FIG. 134 (c)). The value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1 each time a special figure game (out-of-game game) in which the result of the hit / fail judgment is out of order is performed in the first short-time game state, and the value becomes "0". As a result, the first time-saving game state ends (FIGS. 108 and 118). That is, the value of the support counter area SC corresponds to the remaining number of special figure game times in which the first time-saving game state can be played.

In the staging control device 143, the remaining number of times is counted by the remaining number of times counter area provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (FIG. 133 (a)). The remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128 (d)) based on the value of the remaining number of times counter area is displayed on the symbol display device 75, whereby the remaining number of times of the first time saving game state is notified.

If a big hit result is obtained in the middle of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends with the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the values of the support counter area SC and the remaining number of times counter area are changed. It will be cleared.

At the start timing of the confirmation display of the special figure game times, which is the 4R normal jackpot result A, the value corresponding to the number of ceilings (for example, 1000 times) in the counter area HC of the number of times the counter area 314d is out of the main control device 162. Is set (FIG. 134 (d)). The value of the number-of-off counter area HC is subtracted by 1 each time the off-game round is performed after the end of the open / close execution mode (FIGS. 108 and 119). As a result, the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings is counted.

In the staging control device 143, the number of out-of-game games is counted by the out-of-numbers counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b (FIG. 133 (b)). The value of the number-of-off counter area of the effect control device 143 is incremented by 1 each time the out-of-game round is performed. That is, the value of the deviation count counter area of the staging control device 143 corresponds to the number of deviations up to that point after the jackpot result is obtained (after the opening / closing execution mode is performed). The symbol display device 75 displays a loss count image 475 based on the value of the loss count counter area (FIG. 128 (d)), whereby the cumulative number of miss game times is notified.

The update of the deviation count counter area HC by the main control device 162 is performed when the confirmation display is started in the special figure game times that the deviation result is obtained by the hit / fail judgment, and the deviation count is displayed by the image 475. The update is performed after waiting for the confirmed display time of the special figure game times to elapse. However, this configuration is not indispensable, and the image 475 may be updated before the fixed display time elapses. That is, the number of deviations may be updated at the start of the confirmation display or in the middle of the confirmation display.

By the way, the re-lottery effect (after temporarily displaying the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 temporarily, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with a symbol combination different from that at the time of the previous stop display. In the pachinko machine equipped with the execution function of the effect of displaying), the player expects the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to re-variate even after the variation display ends and the confirmation display starts, and the symbol display device 75 is used. It is assumed that you are paying attention. In order to maintain the feeling of expectation in such a configuration, it is preferable to update the image 475 after the definite display time has elapsed, rather than updating the deviated number image 475 at any timing during the definite display.

At timing t2, when the number of missed games in the first time-shortened game state reaches the third upper limit and the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0", the first support flag is cleared and the first time-shortened game state is changed. Finish (FIGS. 134 (b), (c)). Further, in the present embodiment, since the third upper limit number of times and the ceiling number of times are set to the same value, the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" and at the same time, the value of the disconnection number counter area HC also becomes "0". .. In response to this, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the mode shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (FIG. 134 (e)).

At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is reset to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second short game state. Further, in the symbol display device 75, the addition effect (FIGS. 130 (b) to (d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added.

Here, in the present embodiment, the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed after the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated (FIGS. 108, 118, 119). The advantages of such a configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration in which the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated after the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed is used as a comparative example, and is different from the configuration according to the present embodiment. Explain the difference. Further, in order to make it easier to compare the two, it is assumed that restrictions are imposed on both the comparative example and the configuration according to the present embodiment to regulate the overlapping implementation of the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

As described above, in the case where the cumulative number of missed game times is the number of ceilings in the final game times of the first time-saving game state triggered by the big hit, in the configuration of the comparative example, the transition judgment of the second time-saving game state is first performed. By doing so, it is internally recognized that the game should shift to the second short game state. However, since the player is still in the first time-saving game state at that time, the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted, and as a result, the ceiling reach is invalidated.

In order to avoid such invalidation of reaching the ceiling, the number of ceilings is set to be larger than the third upper limit, and the cumulative value of the number of missed times is the ceiling in the special figure game times after the final game times in the first time-saving game state. It is conceivable to make it the number of times. If you want to immediately shift to the second time-saving game state after the end of the first time-saving game state, set the number of ceilings to 1001 or set the third upper limit to 999, and the next special figure of the above final game time. The cumulative value of the number of misses in the game may reach the number of ceilings.

However, in this case, a period of staying in the normal gaming state intervenes between the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. For example, if the update of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state and the transition determination of the second time-saving game state are performed at the start timing of the confirmed display in the special figure game times, the start timing of the confirmed display of the previous special figure game times. Until the first time-shortened game state ends and the second time-shortened game state is entered at the start timing of the confirmation display of the later special figure game times, that is, the period during which the variable display is performed in the later special figure game times. Will shift to the normal gaming state.

At that time, if the fluctuation display in the normal game time may be started in the normal game state, the fluctuation display time in the normal game time is set to a long time for the normal game state, and the fluctuation display time is set to a long time. As for the probability of winning / failing, the low winning probability for the normal gaming state is applied. In this case, if the hit / fail judgment of the Fuzu game round is wrong, the Fuden accessory 63a is set to the open state after the Fuzu game round of the long variable display time is completed. The support winning result (result per normal figure) will be obtained in the figure game round, and it will be after the normal figure game round is completed. For this reason, even if the confirmation display of the special figure game times is started later and the game shifts to the second short-time game state, it takes a long time until the general electric accessory 63a is opened, and the frequency is high. There is a concern that there will be a delay before players can actually receive the benefits of support mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated first, the arrival of the third upper limit number is first recognized in the final game times in the first time-saving game state, and the first time reduction is performed. The game state ends, and then the transition to the second time-saving game state based on reaching the number of ceilings is recognized. Therefore, in the same special figure game, the switching from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state is performed, the ceiling arrival is not invalidated, and the intervention of the period of staying in the normal game state is also involved. Does not occur. In other words, when the cumulative value of the number of misses is the number of ceilings in the final game round of the first short game state triggered by a hit, the transition from the first short game state to the second short game state can be smoothly performed. It will be possible.

Next, a case of shifting from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 136. Here, the variation display of the special figure game times when the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t3 in FIG. 136, and the variation display of the normal figure game times is performed at the timing t3 which is the intermediate timing. It shall be started.

When the special figure game times (the special figure game times of the first special figure) in which the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings in the normal game state is started, the fluctuation display is performed at the timing t1 to the timing t3. When the variable display time elapses at the timing t3, the confirmation display of the special figure game times is started. In this case, the fixed display time is set to be longer than the normal fixed display time (for example, 0.8 sec) (FIG. 120 (a)).

Further, at the timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the arrival at the number of ceilings, and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed (FIGS. 136 (a) and 136 (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state.

In the symbol display device 75, a start effect (FIG. 130 (a)) corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is executed. This start effect is executed, for example, in the special figure game times when the number of ceilings is reached. At that time, the start effect may be executed at a part or all of the fixed display time, or the variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (a part or all of the fixed display time) may be set. The start effect may be executed straddling.

On the other hand, when the normal game round is started at the timing t2, which is the intermediate timing of the fluctuation display in the special figure game round, the game state at this point is the normal game state, so that the normal game round is used. The variable display time is usually set to the variable display time for the gaming state (for example, 30 sec).

At the timing t3, the definite display in the special figure game times of reaching the ceiling is started, and when the transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed, the variable display of the above-mentioned normal figure game times is forcibly terminated (FIG. 136 (c)). ). As a result, the variation display ends earlier than the variation display time set at the timing t2 elapses. In the above case, if the support judgment result in the normal figure game is the support winning result (the normal figure hit result), the judgment result is rewritten to the out-of-order result. Therefore, after the forced termination, a definite display is performed with the stop result corresponding to the disengagement result.

If the support determination result is out of the question, the result is maintained, and a definite display is performed with the stop result set at the start of the normal game game. In addition, if the Fuzu game times are being confirmed and displayed at timing t3, or if the character opening / closing game by the Fuden accessory 63a is being executed, the forced termination is not executed and those states continue. Will be done.

After that, when the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) elapses at the timing t4, since the rewriting to the deviation result is performed as described above, the character opening / closing game by the general electric character 63a is not executed, and immediately the next The Fuzu game round is started. Since the gaming state at this time is the second time-shortened gaming state, the variation display in the game times is performed with a short variation display time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the second time-shortened gaming state. Further, the support determination in this case is performed under a high winning probability for the second short game state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the above support determination is the support winning result.

Here, the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game times in which the variation display is forcibly terminated based on the arrival at the ceiling is larger than the definite display time (for example, 0.8 sec) of the special figure game times in which the ceiling is reached. It's getting shorter. For this reason, the game times in the second short-time game state are carried out earlier than the special figure game times in the normal figure game times (FIG. 136 (c)).

After the variation display time of the above-mentioned normal game game elapses at the timing t6, the definite display is performed over the set definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec). The total time (for example, 1 sec) of the variable display time (for example, 0.5 sec) and the confirmed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game times is the confirmed display time (for example, 0) of the special figure game times that reached the ceiling. It is longer than 0.8 sec). Therefore, the confirmation display of the special figure game times ends in the middle of the confirmation display of the normal figure game times (timing t5).

At that time, if the reserved information of the first special figure exists, the next special figure game round (game round of the first special figure) is started. In this case, the special figure game times are the game times performed under the second short-time game state. By the way, at this point, since the character opening / closing game by the general electric character 63a has not been executed yet, the second operating port 63 is not won and the game times of the second special figure are not executed.

When the confirmed display time of the above-mentioned normal figure game times elapses at the timing t7, the accessory opening / closing game is executed. As a result, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 63.

With the above configuration, the start timing of the character opening / closing game after shifting to the second time-saving game state is accelerated compared to the case where the forced termination of the normal game times or the rewriting to the out-of-order result is not performed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the start of the period in which the second operating port 63 can be won, and to obtain the reserved information of the second special drawing earlier.

For example, if the acquisition timing of the reserved information of the second special figure is delayed, the game of the first special figure is more likely to be performed in the second time-saving game state. Since the type determination in the case of a big hit result in the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure is given preferential treatment over the case of the first special figure (FIGS. 102 (a) and (b)), the game of the first special figure. The more it is done, the more disadvantageous it is for the player. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which the variable display time in the game times of the first special figure is shortened under the second time-shortened game state, the number of game times of the first special figure performed after shifting to the second time-shortened game state. There is a concern that the number will increase easily.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the start of the period in which the reserved information of the second special figure can be generated can be accelerated, the game of the first special figure after the transition to the second short-time game state is made. It is possible to prevent the number of times from increasing. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the game in the second time-saving game state in a preferred manner for the player.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed in the normal game state, and under the configuration in which the through gate 64 is not won under the left-handed game, the normal game state is changed to the second time-saving game state. Basically, the event that the normal game round is being executed does not occur at the time of transition to. However, if the player who recognizes the arrival at the ceiling hastily switches to the right-handed game, the transition to the second time-saving game state can be performed while the normal game game is being executed. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of deviations up to that point is notified by the image 475, the player tends to be aware of the transition from a relatively early stage to the second time-saving gaming state, and such an operation error is likely to occur. Is expected. In such a case, the longer the variable display time for the normal gaming state in the normal game round, the later the timing at which the game round of the second special figure can be played is delayed, and this configuration functions effectively.

In addition, when the firing intensity of the game ball is too strong and the game ball flows to the right route and unintentionally passes through the through gate 64, or when the first time-shortening game state is completed, the second time-saving game is completed. Even if the special figure game times in the normal game state are intervened once or several times before the transition to the state, the second time-saving game state is entered while the normal game times are being executed. The transition will be possible. This configuration is also effective in such cases.

In addition, in a configuration in which a gaming ball can win a prize in the through gate 64 in a left-handed game (in other words, a configuration in which a prize in the through gate 64 can normally occur in a normal gaming state), the second from the normal gaming state. This configuration is also effective for such pachinko machines, because it can naturally occur that the normal game times are being executed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state.

As described above, when shifting from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state, the forced termination of the normal game times and the rewriting to the off result are executed, but the first time-shortened game state is changed to the second time-shortened game state. Do not perform such processing during migration. At the time of transition from the first short-time game state to the second short-time game state, the normal game times have already been performed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode before the transition, and in such a situation, it is common. This is because if the variable display of the figure game times is terminated in the middle or rewritten to the off result, the start timing of the accessory opening / closing game may be delayed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the special figure game times of 1, the transition determination of the second time-saving game state is performed after the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is updated.

According to this configuration, when the cumulative number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the final game times of the first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is terminated and then the second time-shortened game state is entered. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the restriction of the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state due to the first time-shortening gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state. Not only that, since the end of the 1st time-shortened game state and the transition to the 2nd time-shortened game state can be performed in the same game time, the special figure game time in the normal game state can be performed without intervening. It is possible to realize a seamless transition from the one-time saving game state to the second time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to make the state equivalent to the addition of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the joy of the player.

In addition, it can be seen that this embodiment is configured so that the transition determination of the second time-shortening game state is performed after the end determination of the first time-shortening game state is performed in the special figure game round of 1. can. In this case as well, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

As the first time-saving game state, a predetermined first time-saving game state in which the upper limit is set to the same number of times as the number of ceilings (time-saving game state corresponding to 4R probability variation jackpot result A, time-saving game corresponding to 4R normal jackpot result A). The configuration includes the state).

In this case, if the predetermined first time-shortening game state is implemented as the first time-shortening game state, the number of times of the off-game times naturally reaches the ceiling number in the final game time, and the first time-shortening game state is changed to the second time-saving game state. It is possible to shift to the game state. That is, even if the first time-saving game state ends without being able to allocate the jackpot result, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is added by the transition to the second time-saving game state triggered by reaching the number of ceilings. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the chance of winning the jackpot result in the short-time game state is significantly increased as compared with the case where such a remaining number of times is not added. As a result, not only can the enjoyment of expecting that a predetermined time-saving game state be selected as the time-saving game state be given, but also the attractiveness (appeal power to the player) of the predetermined time-saving game state can be enhanced, and the motivation for playing can be enhanced. It becomes possible to arouse it suitably.

In the situation where the transition to the second short-time game state is performed, the normal figure game round can be terminated when the normal figure game round is being executed.

For example, if a prize is awarded to the through gate 64 immediately before the transition to the second short-time game state, the normal game times and the character opening / closing game triggered by the prize are performed in a disadvantageous manner corresponding to the normal game state. become. At that time, for example, if the transition is made after passing through the open / close execution mode as in the conventional time-saving game state, the normal figure game times and the like generated in such a situation should be terminated in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence from reaching the second short-time gaming state. However, in the case of the second time-saving game state that shifts without going through the open / close execution mode, it is not possible to secure a period for absorbing the normal game times, etc. that started before the shift, so the normal game state is supported. There is a concern that the disadvantageous form of the normal game times, etc. will continue even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. In this respect, when the normal game state is being executed in the situation where the transition to the second short-time game state is performed, the normal game state can be terminated by ending the normal game time, which is a disadvantageous aspect corresponding to the normal game state. Figure It is possible to prevent the game times and the like from continuing even after shifting to the second time-saving game state. As a result, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the second short-time gaming state.

If the result of the support lottery for the Fuzu game that was the target of the end is the support winning result (the result per Fuzu), the result will be changed to the wrong result.

According to this configuration, after the end of the Fuzu game, the next Fuzu game can be started without going through the accessory opening / closing game. By that amount, it is possible to advance the start timing of the normal figure game times and the character opening / closing game in an advantageous mode corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the player can enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving game state more quickly. Is possible.

In the situation where the transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed, if the normal figure game time is being executed and the normal figure game time is being executed, the execution of the end process is restricted. bottom.

For example, if the confirmation display is forcibly terminated while the confirmation display is being executed, the notification period of the stop result (notification result of the support lottery) is shortened. As a result, the visibility of the stop result is lowered, and there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to grasp the result of the support lottery. In this regard, by limiting the execution of forced termination when the confirmation display is in progress, it is possible to secure an appropriate notification period and suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the stop result.

In addition, the following effects can be achieved in a configuration in which the result of the support lottery is changed to an out-of-order result. For example, when the support lottery result of the Fuzu game times in which the confirmation display is being executed is the support winning result in the situation where the transition to the second time reduction game state is performed, the transition to the second time reduction game state is supported. When the confirmation display is forcibly terminated and the result is rewritten, first, the confirmation display corresponding to the support winning result that was performed before the transition to the second time reduction game state is performed, and then the second time reduction game. The confirmation display will end due to the forced termination accompanying the transition to the state. That is, although the rewriting to the deviation result is performed internally, the confirmation display itself ends without being reflected in the stop result, so the stop result corresponding to the deviation result after the change is not displayed and before the change. Support Only the stop result corresponding to the winning result will be displayed. In this case, even though the support winning result is notified, the character opening / closing game is not performed, which may cause the player to feel distrust and reduce the trust in the pachinko machine or the game hall. In this regard, by limiting the execution of forced termination when the confirmation display is in progress, it is possible to suppress the inconsistency between the notified result and the changed support lottery result, and by extension, the support is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the accessory opening / closing game is not performed in the situation where the result is notified.

When the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings, the configuration is such that the player shifts to the second time-shortening game state at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game times in which the arrival is established.

When the confirmation display ends in the special figure game times when the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings, the first special figure game times after shifting to the second time-saving game state as the next special figure game times are started. At that time, in this configuration, the transition to the second time-shortening game state is performed at the start timing of the confirmation display of the special figure game times when the number of detachments reaches the ceiling number, so that the first time after the transition to the second time-shortening game state is performed. A grace period until the special figure game round is performed (the game state has shifted to the second short game state, but the special figure game round after the transition to the second time short game state is still performed. It is possible to secure a period of time when it is not in use. If the next Fuzu game is started in the grace period when the Fuzu game is terminated in response to the transition to the second time-shortened game state, after the transition to the second time-shortened game state, special It is possible to start the grace period game before the figure game. As a result, the start timing of the accessory opening / closing game by the general electric accessory 63a is advanced, and a situation in which a prize is likely to be given to the second operating port 63 after the transition to the second time-saving gaming state can occur at an early stage. It will be possible.

The above grace period is configured to be longer than the final display time of the Fuzu game times that is the target of the end processing.

According to this configuration, since the final display of the normal figure game times whose variable display is ended by the end process ends in the middle of the above grace period, the next normal figure game times are started before the grace period ends. Will be possible. Since the next Fuzu game is performed under the second time-shortened game state, the first Fuzu game after shifting to the second time-shortened game state is the first after shifting to the second time-shortened game state. It can be started prior to the special figure game times of. As a result, it is possible to advance the start timing of the accessory opening / closing game after the transition to the second time-saving game state, and to create a situation in which a prize is likely to occur in the second operating port 63 at an early stage.

The configuration is such that the end processing of the normal game times corresponding to the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed for the case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state).

In this configuration, the end processing of the Fuzu game is executed in response to the switching from the situation where the Fuzu game is performed or the character opening / closing game is performed in the advantageous mode to the situation where the game is performed in an advantageous manner. It becomes possible to appropriately exert each effect.

When the condition for shifting to the time-saving game state is satisfied in the situation where the time-saving game state is established (when the number of ceilings, which is the condition for shifting to the second time-saving game state, is reached in the final game round of the first time-saving game state). ) Is configured to limit the execution of the above termination process.

If the transition condition to the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the situation of the time-saving gaming state, the normal game times and the character opening / closing game are already executed in the mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state even before the transition condition is satisfied. There is. Therefore, if the above termination process is performed in such a situation, the Fuzu game round is forcibly terminated in the middle of the end process, and then the next Fuzu game round is performed without performing the character opening / closing game. After the start and the end of the normal game, the character opening / closing game will be performed. That is, there is a possibility that the start timing of the accessory opening / closing game will be delayed as compared with the case where the normal drawing game is continued as it is without the forced termination. Therefore, by properly using the presence or absence of the above-mentioned end processing depending on whether the normal gaming state is changed to the time-saving gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is changed to the time-saving gaming state, the accessory can be opened / closed regardless of the transition. It is possible to realize a quick start of the game.

The fixed display time of the special figure game in which the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state (reaching the number of ceilings of the number of misses) is satisfied is set as the specific fixed display time, and other special figure games in which the above transition condition is not satisfied. The configuration is set to be longer than the fixed display time of the times (normal fixed display time).

In order to enable the player to smoothly start the game in the time-saving game state, the transition to the time-saving game state is made before the first special figure game round after the transition to the time-saving game state is started. It is preferable to inform the player. In this case, in the case of transitioning via the open / close execution mode as in the conventional time-saving game state, the transition to the specific game state can be supported by using the period of the open / close execution mode (for example, the ending period). Although it is possible to notify, in the case of the time-saving game state in which the transition is made without going through the open / close execution mode as in the second time-saving game state according to the present embodiment, the special figure game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. After the end of the game, the first special figure game after the transition to the second time-shortening game state is performed immediately, so that it becomes difficult to secure the execution period of such notification. In this regard, by lengthening the fixed display time of the special figure game times in which the condition for shifting to the second time reduction game state is satisfied, the first special figure game times after the transition to the second time reduction game state is started. The timing can be delayed, and it is possible to suitably secure the execution period of the notification notifying the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state.

In addition, the configuration that lengthens the fixed display time of the special figure game times for which the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state is satisfied has a longer grace period than the fixed display time of the normal figure game times that is the target of the end processing. There is also an advantage in making it. When constructing such a relationship, it is conceivable to make the finalized display time of the Fuzu game times, which is the target of the end processing, shorter than the normal fixed display time. However, in this case, since the display time of the stop result is shortened, the visibility is lowered, and there is a concern that the player cannot properly grasp the result of the support lottery. In this regard, by lengthening the fixed display time of the special figure game times, it is possible to avoid an unreasonable shortening of the fixed display time in the normal figure game times, and the above relationship is built without impairing the visibility of the stop result. It will be possible to do.

For the case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), the configuration is such that the fixed display time of the special figure game times in which the transition condition is satisfied is lengthened.

According to this configuration, it is possible to secure a preparation period for the player to switch to the time-saving game state by the long fixed display time in the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. In particular, in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is recommended in the normal game state, while the right-handed game is recommended in the short-time game state. An operation to switch the strength is required. According to this configuration, it is possible to suitably secure the time for such an operation of switching the firing intensity.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 138. In these figures, the same components as those of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, when the number of ceilings is reached in the game times of the first special figure and the game shifts to the second short-time game state, the normal figure game times precedes the special figure game times. However, in this modification, the accessory opening / closing game in the mode corresponding to the second time-saving game state is configured to be performed prior to the special figure game.

<Regarding the specific confirmation display time>
In this modification, the length of the specific confirmation display time set when the number of ceilings is reached in the game times of the first special figure is longer than that in the case of the second embodiment. Specifically, the specific confirmed display time is the confirmed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the Fuzu game times that are forcibly terminated, and the variable display period (for example, 0) of the Fuzu game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state. It is set to a time longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) of the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal drawing game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state (.5 sec). ..

<About the flow of transition to the second short game state>
A case of shifting from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 137. Here, the variation display of the special figure game times when the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and the variation display of the normal figure game times is started at the timing t2 which is the intermediate timing. It shall be.

When the special figure game times (the special figure game times of the first special figure) in which the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings in the normal game state is started, the fluctuation display is performed at the timing t1 to the timing t3. When the variable display time elapses at the timing t3, the confirmation display of the special figure game times is started. In this case, the specific confirmed display time (for example, 4 sec) is set as the confirmed display time.

Further, at the timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the arrival at the number of ceilings, and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed (FIGS. 137 (a) and 137 (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the normal game round is started at the timing t2, which is the intermediate timing of the fluctuation display in the special figure game round, the game state at this point is the normal game state, so that the normal game round is used. The variable display time is usually set to the variable display time for the gaming state (for example, 30 sec).

At the timing t3, the definite display in the special figure game times of reaching the ceiling is started, and when the transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed, the variable display of the above-mentioned normal figure game times is forcibly terminated (FIG. 137 (c)). ). As a result, the variation display ends earlier than the variation display time set at the timing t2 elapses. In the above case, if the support judgment result in the normal figure game is the support winning result (the normal figure hit result), the judgment result is rewritten to the out-of-order result. Therefore, after the forced termination, a definite display is performed with the stop result corresponding to the disengagement result.

After that, when the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) elapses at the timing t4, since the rewriting to the deviation result is performed as described above, the character opening / closing game by the general electric character 63a is not executed, and immediately the next The Fuzu game round is started. Since the gaming state at this time is the second time-shortened gaming state, the variation display in the game times is performed with a short variation display time (for example, 0.5 sec) for the second time-shortened gaming state. Further, the support determination in this case is performed under a high winning probability for the second short game state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the above support determination is the support winning result.

After the variation display time of the above-mentioned normal game game elapses at the timing t5, the definite display is performed over the set definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec). Then, when the fixed display time elapses at the timing t6, the accessory opening / closing game by the general electric accessory 63a is executed (FIG. 137 (d)). As a result, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 63.

Here, the period (specific confirmed display time) in which the confirmed display of the special figure game times started from the timing t3 is continued is the confirmed display time of the normal figure game times from the timing t3 to the timing t4 and the timing from the timing t4. It is longer than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) of the variable display time of the normal map game times up to t5 and the final display time of the normal map game times from timing t5 to timing t6. Therefore, the accessory opening / closing game is started in the middle of the confirmation display of the special figure game times.

When the specific confirmed display time elapses at the timing t7, the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time-shortened game state is executed. As described above, in this modification, since the accessory opening / closing game is started prior to the first special figure game, the second operating port 63 is in the period before the first special figure game is started. It is possible to secure a period for generating a prize and acquiring the pending information of the second special figure. Therefore, the reserved information of the second special figure can be present at the time when the first special figure game round after the transition to the second short-time game state is started. As a result, as the first special figure game, it is possible to carry out the second special figure game, which is given preferential treatment over the first special figure.

In the above case, in order to promote the acquisition of the reserved information of the second special figure in the period T from the timing t6 to the timing t7, it is preferable to perform a predetermined notification for urging the second operating port 63 to win a prize. The specific mode of the predetermined notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 138, a right-handed notification image 477a and, for example, "Aim for electric chew!" On the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. It is preferable to display the target guide image 477b including the character display such as. The right-handed notification image 477a is for promoting the launch of the game ball to the right route in the game area PE, and the target guide image 477b is for guiding the target for which the game ball should be won.

The above-mentioned predetermined notification may be performed after the timing t3 at which the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is performed, but at that time, the confirmation display of the special figure game times in which the transition condition to the second time-shortened gaming state is satisfied is completed. It is preferable to perform the operation at a predetermined timing before the timing t7. This predetermined timing may be any timing before the timing t6 when the accessory opening / closing game is started, or any timing in the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 (elapsed timing of the specific confirmation display time). May be. Considering the operation period for the player to adjust the firing intensity, it is preferable that the above notification is performed before the opening / closing game of the accessory is started (before the universal accessory 63a is opened), and the timing is It is preferable that the timing in the period from t3 to the timing t6 is set as a predetermined timing.

In addition, at the timing t7 when the first special figure game round is started after the transition to the second short game state, not only the hold information of the second special figure but also the hold information of the first special figure may exist. be. In this regard, in this modification, when the reserved information of both the first special figure and the second special figure is present, the game round of the second special figure is preferentially performed (FIG. 109), so that is the case. However, it is possible to carry out the second special figure game as the first special figure game.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

To end the definite display in the first normal game round after shifting to the second short game state before the first special figure game round after shifting to the second short game state is started. Was made possible.

In this case, if the support lottery result of the first Fuzu game round after shifting to the second time-shortened game state is the support winning result, the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time-shortened game state is Before the start, the accessory opening / closing game can be started to open the universal accessory 63a. As a result, before the first special figure game round after the transition to the second short game state is started, a prize is generated in the second operating port 63 and the reserved information of the second special figure is stored. This makes it possible to carry out the second special figure game as the first special figure game.

At the same time as the start of the confirmation display of the special figure game times in which the transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, and at least the above-mentioned confirmation display of the special figure game times is sent to the predetermined notification prompting the second operating port 63 to win a prize. It was configured to be executed before the end.

By shifting to the second time-saving game state at the start of the confirmation display of the special figure game times in which the transition condition is satisfied, after the transition to the second time-saving game state until the first special figure game times are performed. It is possible to secure a grace period (a period in which the game state has shifted to the second time-shortened game state, but the special figure game times have not yet been performed since the transition to the second time-shortened game state). can. In a configuration in which it is possible to start the accessory opening / closing game before the first special figure game round after shifting to the second time-shortened game state is started, a prize is given to the second operating port 63 during the above grace period. By performing the prompting notification, it becomes possible for the player to easily store the reserved information of the second special figure before the start of the first special figure game round.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 140. In these figures, the same components as those of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, it is configured to shift to the second time-saving game state when the number of detachments reaches the ceiling number in the middle of the first time-saving game state. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for that purpose will be described.

<About the second short game state>
The second time-saving gaming state of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 139. Also in this modified example, apart from the first time-saving game state that shifts when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the second time-shortening game state that shifts when the number of off-game times reaches the ceiling number It is provided.

The number of ceilings in the second time-saving game state of this modification is set to be less than the third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) in the first time-saving game state (for example, 800 times). Therefore, in the case where the 4R normal jackpot result A is obtained and the opening / closing execution mode is terminated and the game shifts to the first time-shortened game state, the cumulative number of missed game times is increased when the missed game times are repeated in the first time-shortened game state. The number of ceilings will be reached before the number of ends of the first time-saving game state is reached. As for the continuation period in the case of shifting to the second time-shortening gaming state, the number of special figure game times after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state is predetermined as in the first embodiment. It is up to 5 times (for example, 900 times).

<Process for transition to the second time-saving game state>
The second time-saving gaming state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sb512 of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 108) in the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the second time-saving game state transition process of FIG. 119. .. In FIG. 140, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 119, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1404 (when the high probability flag is not set), the value of the number-of-off count counter area HC of the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb1405. Specifically, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of special-figure game times as a result of the loss reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb3101, and the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are occupied. 1 Determine whether or not the support flag is set. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that it is in the first short game state.

When the first support flag is set, that is, when the game is in the first short game state, the process proceeds to step Sb3102, and the first support flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. In the following step Sb1407, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the second short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is started. That is, in this modification, when the value of the number-of-time counter area HC becomes "0" in the middle of the first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state is set. Is forcibly activated.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb3101 (when the first support flag is not set), that is, when the game is not in the first time-shortening gaming state, the second support flag is set in step Sb1407 without executing the process of step Sb3102. set.

After the execution of step Sb1407, in step Sb1408, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. Even when shifting to the second time-shortening gaming state in the middle of the first time-shortening gaming state, the same value as when shifting from the normal gaming state (a situation that is not the first time-shortening gaming state) to the second time-shortening gaming state is set. do. That is, when the state is shifted to the second time-shortened gaming state in the middle of the first time-shortened gaming state, the second is the remaining number of times of the subsequent high-frequency support mode regardless of the remaining number of times of the first time-saving gaming state at that time. Rewrite to the 5th upper limit number of times in the time-saving game state.

In step Sb1409, a second time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. The set second time-saving game state start command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1410, and it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

<About the flow to the second short game state>
The flow of the transition to the second short game state will be described. Here, it is determined that the number of misses has reached the number of ceilings (for example, 800 times) after shifting to the first time-saving game state of the third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) triggered by the 4R normal jackpot result A. A case of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state as an opportunity will be described.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. As a result, the state shifts to the first time-saving gaming state, which is a state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. At this time, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314.

Then, the cumulative number of out-of-game games in the first short-time game state is 800, and when the number of ceilings is reached, the first support flag is cleared at the special figure game times that reach the ceiling, and the above-mentioned various flags are stored. The second support flag is set in the area 314e. At this time, the number of execution games in the first time-saving game state has not reached the third upper limit number, and there is a remaining number of 200 times, but the switching from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is made. Is done. Then, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC.

In the symbol display device 75, as in the first embodiment, the addition effect (FIGS. 130 (b) to (d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is added. However, the number of additions notified by the addition effect is the number of times (for example, 700 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state from the fifth upper limit number of times. That is, as the duration of the high frequency support mode, the remaining number of 200 times is internally canceled and 900 times are newly set, but from the player's point of view, it seems that 700 times have increased. Will be done.

Here, in this modification, the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed after the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated (FIGS. 108, 118, 140). The advantages of such a configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration in which the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated after the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed is used as a comparative example, and is different from the configuration related to this modification. To explain. Further, in order to make it easier to compare the two, it is assumed that the transition from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state is permitted in the comparative example as well.

In the configuration of the comparative example, when the cumulative number of times of the off-games is the number of ceilings in the middle of the first time-shortening game state, the transition determination of the second time-shortening game state is first performed, so that the first time-shortening game state is changed to the first. Switching to the 2 hour short game state is performed. After that, since the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is updated in the same special figure game times, the second time-saving game is not actually executed even though the special figure game times in the second time-saving game state are not executed. The remaining number of times in the game state is subtracted by 1. Therefore, the number of special figure game times that can be played under the second short-time game state is 899 times, which is one less.

On the other hand, in this modification, since the transition determination of the second time-saving game state is performed after the update of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is completed, the switching from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is performed. After that, the remaining number of times in the second time-shortening game state is not subtracted in the special figure game. That is, since the remaining number of times of the second time-saving game state is subtracted after the next special figure game time (special figure game time executed after the transition to the second time-saving game state) is started, the second time-saving game state The number of special figure game times that can be played under is 900 times. That is, it is possible to suitably secure the number of special figure game times that can be played under the second short game state.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the first time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-shortening game state is permitted, and after the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is updated in the special figure game times of 1. It is configured so that the transition determination of the second short game state is performed.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress that the remaining number of updates is executed in the special figure game round immediately after the transition to the second time saving game state in the special figure game round. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

<Modification 3>
Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the second embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the normal loss result and the special loss result are included as the result of the loss in the winning / failing lottery of the special figure game, and when the result of the above winning / failing lottery becomes the special loss result, the open / close execution mode is set. It is configured to shift to the third short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without shifting. It should be noted that the normal deviation result is the same as the deviation result according to the second embodiment. Further, in this modification, the function of the second time saving game state is not installed.

<Winning / failing table for special game games>
In this modification, a winning / failing table for the first special drawing and a winning / failing table for the second special figure are provided as the winning / failing table used for the winning / failing lottery in the special drawing game. The winning / failing table for the first special drawing is referred to in the winning / failing lottery based on the start winning prize to the first operating port 62 (starting port of the first special drawing), and the winning / failing table for the second special drawing is. , The second operating port 63 (starting port of the second special figure) is referred to in the winning / failing lottery based on the starting winning prize. Since the hit / fail table for the first special drawing is the same as the hit / miss table (FIG. 101) according to the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The pass / fail table for the second special figure is stored in the pass / fail table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 142, as the pass / fail table for the second special figure, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are provided. In the winning / failing lottery, when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, a total of 10 "0" to "9" are set as the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1), which is low. The jackpot winning probability in the probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 300 random numbers "10" to "309" are set as the values of random numbers that result in special deviation. That is, the probability of a special deviation result in the low probability mode is set to 1/10. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2690/3000.

In the hit / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special figure, a special deviation result is not set as a lottery result. That is, the special deviation result is a result that can be won only when the right-handed game is performed in a situation where the second operating port 63 can be won.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the values of the random numbers to be big hits, and the big hit winning probability in the high probability mode is It is set to 1/60. In the winning / failing table for the high probability mode, a special deviation result is not set as a lottery result, and all the values other than the random value for the jackpot are assigned to the normal deviation result. The probability of an out-of-normal result in the high probability mode is set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 143 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 143 (b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 143 (a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high-probability gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in 10 round games being performed.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (for example, 100 times). Further, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Further, in this modification, a type table for special deviation is provided as another type table. The type table for special deviation is a type table that is referred to when the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a special deviation result, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the special deviation type table, a special deviation result A and a special deviation result B are set as selectable special deviation types. The special deviation result A is a special deviation result that shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A, and the special deviation result B is a special deviation result that shifts to the third time-saving gaming state B.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the third time-saving game state A is a gaming state in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the execution of the special figure game times after shifting to the third time-saving game state A. It is continued until the number of times reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number (for example, 900 times). The third time-shortened game state B is also a game state of the low probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the third time-shortened game state B is the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the third time-shortened game state B. It is continued until the sixth upper limit number (for example, 100 times), which is less than the fifth upper limit number, is reached. That is, the third time-saving game state A is more advantageous to the player than the third time-saving game state B.

Since the special disengagement results A and B are both disengagement results, the open / close execution mode is not executed. That is, when these results are obtained, the game shifts to the third time-saving game states A and B without going through the open / close execution mode.

In the special deviation type table, "0" to "9" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the special deviation result A, and "10" to "99" correspond to the special deviation result B. That is, the probability of being distributed to the special deviation result A is set to 10%, and the probability of being distributed to the special deviation result B is set to 90%.

The random number value (big hit type counter C2) used for the lottery of the special out-of-order type is used to determine the stop result of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS when the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes the special out-of-order result. Is also used. The stop result is determined with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of the stop result (special off-picture pattern stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS) are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the data of the plurality of stop results. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used for both the determination of the stop result and the determination of the special deviation type, the special deviation pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS and the determination at the time of the special deviation are determined. It has a correlation with the special outlier type to be performed.

In this modification, the special hit type counter C2 is used to draw a special out-of-type, but a special counter value (random number for lottery) corresponding to the special out-of-order result is prepared and the special out-of-type is used. May be drawn.

Further, a special off type may be drawn by substituting an existing counter value other than the jackpot type counter C2 such as the variable type counter CS. At that time, since it is assumed that the number of types of special deviation results will be smaller than the number of types such as fluctuation patterns, the above lottery will be performed using a part (partial bit value) of the fluctuation type counter CS or the like. May be good.

<Special figure game times control process>
The special figure game rotation control process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 145. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (FIG. 107) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the special figure game time control process of FIG. 108. In FIG. 145, the same steps as in FIG. 108 are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display unit 43 is not in variable display), it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is not "0", that is, if the hold information of either the first special figure or the second special figure exists, the process proceeds to step Sb505 and the data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area Ra or the second special figure hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb3201, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure display unit 43 is executed. Here, the fluctuation start processing of step Sb3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 146. In FIG. 146, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those of the variation start process of FIG. 110, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3301, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the special figure game time of this time is the special figure game time of the second special figure.

When the second special figure flag is not set, that is, when the special figure game round this time is the special figure game round of the first special figure, the pass / fail table for the first special figure (FIG. 101) is performed in step Sb3302. ) To make a pass / fail judgment. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 101 (a)) is referred to, and if the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the hit / miss table for the high probability mode ( FIG. 101 (b)).

When the second special figure flag is set, that is, when the special figure game times this time is the special figure game times of the second special figure, the pass / fail table for the second special figure in step Sb3303 (FIG. 142). ) To make a pass / fail judgment. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 142 (a)) is referred to, and if the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the hit / miss table for the high probability mode ( See FIG. 142 (b)).

After the execution of step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, in step Sb3304, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step Sb3305, and the jackpot type is drawn by referring to the corresponding jackpot type table (FIG. 143).

In step Sb3306, the type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is the 4R probability variation jackpot result, the 4R probability variation jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result of the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot is not won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special deviation result. If it is a special deviation result, the special deviation type is drawn by referring to the special deviation type table (FIG. 144 (a)) in step Sb3309.

In step Sb3310, a special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The special missed flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the result of this special figure winning / failing lottery is a special missed result. As the special deviation flag, a plurality of types of flags corresponding to the type of special deviation are prepared, and in step Sb3310, the special deviation flag corresponding to the type selected in step Sb3309 is set. For example, if the selected special deviation type is the special deviation result A, the special deviation flag A is set.

In step Sb3311, the stop result for special deviation is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result of the current game round.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb3308 (when it is not a special deviation result), it means that the result of this winning / failing lottery is a normal deviation result. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb3312, and a stop result for normal disengagement is set. In this modification, only one type of stop result for disengagement is provided, and the stop result is set in step Sb3312.

After the execution of step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, in step Sb3313, the variable display time for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS. Executes the setting process of. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is drawn by using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table. Here, the variation display time table according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

As the variation display time table in this modification, at least the variation display time table for special deviation in the second special figure and the variation display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure are set. Further, in each of these variable display time tables, one for the first time-shortening gaming state and one for the normal gaming state in the reserved portion after the first time-saving gaming state are set. The reserved portion here refers to the special figure game times executed in the normal game state after the end of the first time-shortened game state, based on the hold information of the second special figure existing at the end of the first time-shortened game state. It is equivalent. Since the maximum number of holdings of the second special figure is 4, the special drawing game times for the holding are executed up to 4 times.

The variable display time table (for the 1st time-shortened game state) for the special figure in the 2nd special figure is when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the 2nd special figure becomes the special missed result in the situation where the 1st time-shortened game state is set. It is referred to in. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 147 (a), depending on the number of executions of the special figure game times after the transition to the first time-saving game state (in other words, after the open / close execution mode is performed). It is configured so that the selection mode of the variation pattern is different. Specifically, if a special deviation result is obtained in a situation where the number of executions of the special figure game is from the first to the 99th after the transition to the first time-shortening game state, the fluctuation pattern Z1 (for example, 8 sec or 4 sec) ) Is selected, and the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the first time-shortened game state is the 100th time, that is, when the final game time in the first time-shortened game state results in a special deviation result. The variation pattern Z2 (for example, 15 sec) is configured to be selected.

The variation pattern Z1 corresponds to a completely out-of-reach effect, and the variation pattern Z2 corresponds to a special reach out-of-effect effect. That is, when the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern Z1 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely off effect as a game rotation effect, and the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern Z2 is produced. When transmitted to the control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach out-of-reach effect as a game rotation effect. In the complete off effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the off symbols without the reach display being performed. In addition, the special reach out-of-reach effect will be described in detail later.

The variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortening game state) is when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure becomes the normal deviation result in the situation of the first time-shortening gaming state. It is referred to in. As shown in FIG. 147 (b), this variation display time table is also configured so that the variation pattern selection mode differs depending on the number of executions of the special figure game times after the transition to the first time-shortening game state.

Of these, the case where the normal deviation result is obtained in the situation where the number of executions of the special figure game after the transition to the first time-shortened game state is the first to 99th is described in the second embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of FIG. 113 (d), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the result is normally out of the final game in the first time-shortened game state, the fluctuation pattern Z3 (8 sec or 4 sec) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. There is. The fluctuation pattern Z3 corresponds to a completely out-of-order effect.

The variable display time table (normal game state for the reserved portion) for the special figure in the second special figure is referred to when the special deviation result is obtained in the special figure game times for the reserved portion. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), the fluctuation pattern Z4 (15 sec) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern Z4 corresponds to the special reach out-of-reach effect.

The variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (normal game state for the reserved portion) is referred to when the normal deviation result is obtained in the special figure game times for the reserved portion. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 147 (d), the fluctuation pattern Z5 (8 sec) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern Z5 corresponds to a completely out-of-order effect.

Since each variable display time table is configured as described above, a reach effect is executed when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a big hit result or a special missed result in the final game round to the reserved game round. If the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a normal result, the execution of the reach effect is restricted. Therefore, if the reach effect is executed from the final game round to the reserved game round, the jackpot result or the special missed result will be confirmed, and the player will be asked before all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped. It is possible to predict that the result is not usually out of order. That is, in these game times, the player strongly expects the reach effect to occur, and it becomes possible to greatly increase the degree of attention to the behavior of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Each of these variable display time tables is stored in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. The items in the "Remarks (Production mode)" column in FIG. 147 are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

In addition, a variable display time table for a normal gaming state (other than the reserved portion) and a variable display time table for a highly accurate gaming state are also provided, and these are shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 described in the second embodiment. Since it is the same as the case, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the variable display time table for the third time-saving gaming state is the same as the variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (c) and 113 (d). In addition, since the right-handed game is performed in the third short-time game state, a special out-of-order result may be obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the special figure game. The time table (for the time-saving game state) is referred to, and the variable display time is drawn without distinguishing it from the normal off result.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start process (FIG. 146), in the variation display time setting process of step Sb3313, the current game state, the result of the winning / failing lottery, the number of executions of the special figure game times, etc. are grasped, and the grasped result is dealt with. The variable display time (variable pattern) is drawn by referring to the variable display time table. Then, the lottery variable display time is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 314 as the variable display time in the special figure game round this time.

In the following step Sb712, the variable display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The variation display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the variation display of the special figure game times is in progress. After the execution of step Sb712, the processes after step Sb713 are executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game time control process (FIG. 145), if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb507 (when the variation display time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step Sb509 and the flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Clear the variable display flag. In step Sb510, the high-probability mode update / end process for updating the remaining number of times of the high-probability mode and ending the high-probability mode is executed.

In step Sb511, the high-frequency support mode update / termination process for updating the remaining number of times of the high-frequency support mode and terminating the high-frequency support mode is executed. In step Sb3202, the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state (FIG. 144 (b)) is executed. In step Sb3203, a definite display start process for starting the definite display on the special figure display unit 43 is executed, and then the special figure game round control process is terminated.

<Process for transition to the third time-saving game state>
The process for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 148. This process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update / end process in step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 344. If the special off flag is set, that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is the special off result, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, and whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Judge whether or not. The high probability flag indicates that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state.

When the high probability flag is not set, that is, when the game is not in the high probability gaming state, it is determined in step Sb3403 whether or not the first support flag or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. The first support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, and the third support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state.

If neither the first support flag nor the third support flag is set, that is, if it is neither the first time-shortening gaming state nor the third time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb3404, and the various flag storage areas 314e are set. Set the third support flag. As a result, the game shifts to the third short game state.

In step Sb3405, it is determined whether or not the type of the special deviation result this time is the special deviation result A. This determination is made by grasping the type of the special off flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the special deviation result A is obtained, the process proceeds to step Sb3406, and a value (for example, 900) corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving gaming state A.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3405 (if it is not the special deviation result A), that is, if the type of the special deviation result is the special deviation result B, the process proceeds to step Sb3407, and the support counter area SC corresponds to the sixth upper limit number of times. Set the value to be used (for example, 100). As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving gaming state B.

After the execution of step Sb3406 or step Sb3407, in step Sb3408, a third time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. At that time, when shifting to the third time-shortened game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state A is set, and when shifting to the third time-shortened game state B, it corresponds to the third time-shortened game state B. Set the start command. Each of these start commands contains information indicating the maximum number of times.

The set third time-saving game state start command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107). By transmitting the third time-shortened game state start command, the start of the third time-shortened game state is notified to the staging control device 143. After the execution of step Sb3408, the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is terminated.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step Sb3402 (when the high probability flag is set) or when the affirmative judgment is made in step Sb3403 (when either the first support flag or the third support flag is set), step. The process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes of Sb3404 to Sb3408. That is, if a special deviation result occurs in a situation of a high-probability gaming state, a 1st time-shortening game state, or a 3rd time-shortening gaming state, the transition to the 3rd time-saving gaming state is restricted, and this special figure game time. The special off result in is invalidated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3401 (when the special deviation flag is not set), in order to continue the game state at that time, the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is performed without executing the process after step Sb3402. finish.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the final display in step Sb3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 149. In FIG. 149, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for the confirmation display start process in FIG. 120 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3501, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the special deviation flag is set, that is, if the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery this time is the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step Sb3502 and the process of clearing the special deviation flag is executed. In the following step Sb3503, the normal definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set as the definite display time in the special figure game round this time.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3501 (when the special figure winning / failing flag is not set), that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is not a special drawing result, in step Sb3504, the result of this special figure winning / failing lottery. Is a jackpot result or not. If it is a big hit result, the process proceeds to step Sb3503, and the normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time in the special figure game this time.

If it is not a big hit result, that is, if the result of this special figure winning / failing lottery is a normal result, in step Sb3505, this special figure game is the final game (100th) in the first short game state. It is determined whether or not it is a game time). If it is not the final game round, the process proceeds to step Sb3503, and the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time in the special figure game round this time.

On the other hand, if it is the final game round, the process proceeds to step Sb3506, and it is determined whether or not the normal game round is in the variable display. In this case, the normal game times are those in which the variable display is started before the start of the final game in the final game in the first time-shortened game state, and the support lottery is performed under the first time-shortened game state. Was performed (the winning or losing was drawn with a high probability of winning).

If the normal figure game times are displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step Sb3507, and it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure game times in the variable display is the support winning result (result of the normal figure hit). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb3508, and the winning / failing result of the normal drawing game times that is being displayed in a variable manner is changed to a wrong result. In the following step Sb3509, the stop result for the disengagement result is set as the stop result of the normal game game.

After the execution of step Sb3509 or when a negative judgment is made in step Sb3507 (when the result of winning or failing the normal figure game times being displayed is a wrong result), the change display of the normal figure game times is forcibly terminated in step Sb3510. .. After that, the stop result corresponding to the disengagement result is confirmed and displayed on the normal drawing display unit 44 in a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec).

After the execution of step Sb3510, in step Sb3511, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time in the special figure game this time. This specific confirmation display time is the execution period (opening time 2 sec + interval period 0.2 sec + opening time 2 sec = 4.2 sec) of the accessory opening / closing game in the first time-shortened game state (high frequency support mode) shown in FIG. 103 (c). ), More specifically, it is a period longer than 4.7 sec, which is the total period of the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game times and the execution period of the above-mentioned character opening / closing game. To. In this modification, for example, 5 sec is set as the specific confirmed display time. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of character opening / closing games having different opening times, opening times, etc. are provided as the character opening / closing game in the first short-time game state, a time longer than the longest time among them is specified and confirmed. Set as the display time.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3506 (when the normal figure game times are not being displayed in a variable manner), the process proceeds to step Sb3511 without executing the processes of steps Sb3507 to Sb3510, and the final display time in the special figure game times this time. The above specific confirmation display time is set as.

After the execution of step Sb3511 or step Sb3503, the confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 in step Sb1504. In step Sb1505, the special figure display unit 43 is controlled so that the confirmation display is started, and in step Sb1506, a variable end command is set as a transmission target to the staging control device 143.

In step Sb3512, an external signal setting process for outputting a game round execution signal for notifying the execution of the special figure game round (more specifically, that the variation display has ended) to the management control device on the game hall side is performed. conduct. The game round execution signal is used to grasp the number of executions of the special figure game on the game hall side and to display the number of executions of the special figure game after the big hit on the data counter of the game island or the like. In the external signal setting process, the game round execution signal is set to be on for a predetermined period of time.

Further, in the external signal setting process of step Sb3512, the setting process for outputting the lottery result signal for notifying the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery to the management control device on the game hall side is performed. Specifically, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit result, the lottery result signal corresponding to the big hit is output, and if the result is a normal loss result, the lottery result signal corresponding to the normal loss is output. If the result is a deviation, the lottery result signal corresponding to the special deviation is set to be output.

The plurality of lottery result signals may be assigned signal wiring (output terminal of external output terminal 213) for each signal, or one signal wiring is shared and each lottery result signal is output. It may be a thing. In the latter case, it is advisable to make the signal mode (output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the ON state) of the lottery result signal transmitted through one signal wiring different for each result of the winning / failing lottery. .. In this case, the management control device on the game hall side that has received the lottery result signal can grasp the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the difference in the signal mode.

Here, in this modification, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result, the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state occurs after that, and the transition does not occur (transition to the third time-shortened gaming state). In any of these cases, the lottery result signal corresponding to the special deviation is output in the external signal setting process of step Sb3512. To set.

If the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state does not occur, it may be treated as a normal deviation result and a lottery result signal in a mode corresponding to the normal deviation may be output. From the viewpoint of matching with the subsequent gaming state (a state that does not shift to the third time-saving gaming state), a signal corresponding to the normal deviation is output rather than a signal corresponding to the special deviation as in this modification. It can be said that it makes more sense.

However, in the configuration that outputs the lottery result signal corresponding to the normal deviation, the actual number of times that the special deviation result is obtained in the game cannot be grasped on the game hall side, and the winning of the special deviation result changes almost according to the design probability. There is a concern that it will be difficult to identify whether or not it is. In particular, the number of special deviation results notified to the game hall side is thinned out and becomes less than the actual number, so for example, even if an act that illegally increases the probability of special deviation results is performed, the discovery is made. May be delayed.

In this regard, regardless of whether or not the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs, if the result of the winning / failing lottery results in a special deviation result, an external signal for special deviation is output, resulting in a special deviation result. The actual number of times can be appropriately grasped by the game hall side, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the staging control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is executed in place of the staging setting process of FIG. 126. In FIG. 150, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 126, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not the ending command from the main control device 162 is received. When the ending command is received, in step Sb2302, the first transition effect setting process for setting the transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high accuracy gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state is executed.

After the execution of step Sb2302 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (when the ending command has not been received), it is determined in step Sb2305 whether or not any of the game state end commands has been received. When the game state end command is received, in step Sb2306, the end effect setting for setting the end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time reduction game state, or the third time reduction game state. Execute the process.

After the execution of step Sb2306 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (when neither game state end command has been received), in step Sb3601, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 Executes the special figure fluctuation display processing for displaying fluctuations and the like. In step Sb2308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The process for displaying the special figure variation in step Sb3601 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 151. In FIG. 151, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for the special figure variation display process of FIG. 132, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed. If the game round is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 has been received.

If the variation start command is received, the process proceeds to step Sb3701 to execute the variation start process for starting the effect for the game round. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 152.

First, in step Sb3801, it is determined whether or not the special figure game round this time is the final game round in the first short-time game state. If it is the final game round, the process proceeds to step Sb3802, and the chance notification is set to be performed in this special figure game round. In the chance notification, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the chance notification image 478 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In the chance notification image 478, for example, a telop image with a character display such as "chance if reach is reached" is displayed above the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. The chance notification is started at the final game round in the first time-shortened game state, and continues until the reserved special figure game round of the second special figure after the first time-shortened game state is finished.

The chance notification may be such that a window in which the above characters are displayed is displayed, or a predetermined light emitting unit corresponding to the chance notification is made to emit light. Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, and voice guidance using the speaker unit 29 may be used.

After the execution of step Sb3802 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb3801 (when it is not the final game round in the first time-shortening game state), in step Sb3803, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and this special feature. Figure Understand fluctuation patterns related to game times. In step Sb3804, it is determined whether or not the grasped fluctuation pattern is either the fluctuation pattern Z2 or the fluctuation pattern Z4. The variation pattern Z2 is selected when a special deviation result is obtained in the final game round of the first time-shortening gaming state (FIG. 147 (b)), and the variation pattern Z4 is a special feature in the reserved normal gaming state. It is selected when a special deviation result is obtained in the figure game round (FIG. 147 (c)).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is either the fluctuation pattern Z2 or the fluctuation pattern Z4, the process proceeds to step Sb3805, and the special reach out-of-reach effect is set to be executed as the game turn effect in the special figure game round this time. .. Here, the special reach out-of-reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (d).

In the special reach out-of-reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed by the combination of reach on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G to reach. Display. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stop row) is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. A special symbol 479 with a character such as "LUCKY" is placed at the position and displayed at low speed. FIG. 153 (c) shows an example in which the special symbol 479 is arranged at the position of the "4" symbol which is the next symbol with respect to the "3" symbol which is a combination of big hits.

Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (d), the special symbol 479 which is displaying the low-speed fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the special deviation result is notified. That is, in this modification, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the special symbol 479 of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the reach line. It is a corresponding symbol combination.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 152), when a negative determination is made in step Sb3804 (when neither the variation pattern Z2 nor the variation pattern Z4), the variation pattern grasped in step Sb3806 is the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not it is Z1, the fluctuation pattern Z3, or the fluctuation pattern Z5. The variation pattern Z1 is selected when a special deviation result is obtained in the first to 99th special figure game times in the first time-shortening game state (FIG. 147 (a)), and the variation pattern Z3 is the first. It is selected when the result is out of the normal range in the final game round in the one-time short game state (FIG. 147 (b)). Further, the variation pattern Z5 is selected when the result is out of the normal in the special figure game times in the normal game state of the reserved portion (FIG. 147 (d)).

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is any of the fluctuation pattern Z1, the fluctuation pattern Z3, or the fluctuation pattern Z5, in step Sb3807, the completely off effect is executed as the effect for the game round in the special figure game round. Set to. Here, not only when the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Z3 or the fluctuation pattern Z5, but also when the fluctuation pattern Z1 is used, that is, when the lottery result in the special figure game is a special deviation result. The execution of the complete deviation effect is set, but this corresponds to the invalidation even if a special deviation result occurs during the first short game state.

That is, in the first to 99th special figure game times in the first time-saving game state, even if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 75 is displayed. Is stopped and displayed with a combination that is completely off. As a result, the player is notified as a mere deviation result, and it is impossible or difficult to identify that the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result.

At that time, as for the stop result on the special figure display unit 43, the stop result corresponding to the special off result is displayed (FIG. 146). Since the symbol display device 75 is notified of a result different from the actual result of the winning / failing lottery, it is assumed that it will be difficult for the employees of the game hall to grasp the result even if the fraud is performed. By making the display mode on the display unit 43 not reflect the invalidation, it is possible to grasp the actual lottery result by visually recognizing the special figure display unit 43, and it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts. ..

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3806 (neither of the fluctuation pattern Z1, the fluctuation pattern Z3, or the fluctuation pattern Z5), the process proceeds to step Sb3808, and the game rotation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sb3803 is executed. To set. For example, when the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 23A (FIG. 113 (c)), the SPSP reach per effect is set to be executed.

After the execution of step Sb3805, step Sb3807 or step Sb3808, in step Sb3809, a stop result command and a pattern command are transmitted as output targets to the display control device 350. The stop result command is a command for designating the stop results of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, and the pattern command is an effect pattern command for designating the game turn effect to be executed. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the designated stop result, or the game rotation effect is performed in the specified effect pattern. Control 75. After the execution of step Sb3809, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 151), after executing the variation start process in step Sb3701, the remaining number display update process is executed in step Sb2704. In the process for updating the remaining number of times display, the remaining number of times such as the first time saving game state is updated, and the display content of the remaining number of times image 472 is updated.

<About the flow to the 3rd time saving game state>
The flow of transition to the third time-saving gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. Here, it is assumed that after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times is 100 times.

At timing t1, if the result of the lottery is not normal in, for example, the third special figure game after shifting to the first time-shortened game state, the third support flag remains off. However, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state does not occur (FIG. 154 (d)). As shown in FIG. 155, in the special figure game round, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete disengagement effect, and the player is notified of the normal disengagement result.

At timing t2, if, for example, the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result in the 10th special figure game after shifting to the 1st time saving game state, it means that the 1st time saving game state is in progress. Based on this, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the special deviation result is invalidated (timing t3). As shown in FIG. 155, in the special figure game round, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely off effect. In this case, the completely out-of-order effect is the same as in the case where the result of the winning / failing lottery is a normal out-of-order result, and the effect time (variable display time) is also the same. Therefore, as long as the symbol display device 75 is viewed, it cannot be distinguished from the normal deviation result, and it is difficult for the player to understand that the special deviation result is obtained.

In this modified example, since the winning probability of the special loss result is set to be relatively light (1/10), the special loss result is won multiple times in the process of playing the first time-saving gaming state. It is assumed (timing t4). In this case as well, the winning of the special out-of-game result is not reflected in the switching of the gaming state, and the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is invalidated (timing t5). In addition, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete deviation effect, and a game rotation effect is performed so that it is not clearly indicated that a special deviation result has been obtained.

At timing t6, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special wrong result in the final game round (100th special figure game round) in the first time-shortened game state, the third support flag is turned on and the third support flag is turned on. It shifts to the 3 o'clock short game state (timing t7). That is, in this modification, the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state is performed after the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated (FIG. 145, FIG. 148), and the final gaming number in the first time-saving gaming state. This is because, after the first time-saving game state is completed by updating the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined based on the winning of the special out-of-time result.

That is, in this modification, even if the special deviation result is assigned in the special figure game times (1st to 99th special figure game times) other than the final game times in the 1st time reduction game state, the 1st time reduction game state is in progress. While the transition to the third time-saving game state is not performed due to the existence, when the special out-of-game result is assigned in the final game round, the winning of the special out-of-time result is reflected in the switching of the game state, and the third time-saving game is played. The configuration is such that a transition to the state occurs. For this reason, the final game round is a game round that is more advantageous to the player than the other special figure game rounds in the first short-time game state, so to speak, it is a game round in a chance state.

When the state shifts to the third time-shortened gaming state as described above, the remaining number of times in the state set to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode increases by the remaining number of times in the third time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, when the type of the special deviation result is the special deviation result A, the remaining number of times increases by 900 times, and when the type of the special deviation result becomes the special deviation result B, the remaining number of times increases by 100 times (FIG. 144).

Here, in this modification, the end of the first time-saving game state when the number of execution game times reaches the upper limit and the transition to the third time-saving game state based on the winning of the special out-of-game result are the same games. It is done in the times. That is, since it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state without letting the player experience the end of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times can be added (added) substantially at the end of the first time-saving game state. It can be in the state of occurrence. The transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is performed at the start timing of the final display at the final game round (strictly, immediately before the start of the final display).

In the above case, in the special figure game, as shown in FIG. 155, the symbol display device 75 executes the special out-of-reach effect. As a result, the player is notified of the special deviation result. Further, after the execution of the special out-of-reach effect, the additional effect (FIG. 130 (c)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added. This additional effect may be performed by using a part or all of the fixed display time of the final game times, or the variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (a part of the fixed display time). Or it may be performed across all), or it may be performed in the next special figure game.

If the result of the winning / failing lottery in the final game round is out of the normal result, the first time-saving game state ends, but the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur. That is, the state of the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode ends, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 155, in the special figure game round, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely off effect.

By the way, in this modified example, since it has the hold function of the second special figure that can store up to four hold information, the result is usually out of order in the final game round of the first short game state, which is low. When the state of the probability mode and the high frequency support mode ends, if the hold information of the second special figure exists, the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the hold information can be executed. can. Since these game times are performed under the normal game state, if the special deviation result occurs, the transition to the third time-shortening game state occurs as in the final game time in the first time-shortening game state.

That is, not only the final game times in the first time-shortened game state, but also the reserved game times after the end of the first time-shortened game state are chance game times. When a special deviation result is obtained in the reserved special figure game times, as shown in FIG. 155, the special deviation reach effect is executed by the symbol display device 75, and the special deviation result is notified. In addition, when a normal deviation result is obtained in the special figure game times of the reserved portion, the symbol display device 75 executes the complete removal effect.

<About the flow of the Fuzu game in the final game>
The flow of the normal game round in the final game round in the first time-shortened game state will be described with reference to FIG. 156. Here, it is assumed that the result of the winning / failing lottery in the final game round is a normal result. First, a case where the normal game times are being displayed in a variable manner at the start timing of the final display in the final game times will be described with reference to FIG. 156 (a).

After the variable display of the normal game times is started at the timing t1, and before the variable display time elapses, the final display start timing in the final game times of the first time-shortened game state is reached at the timing t2. The variable display of the game times is forcibly terminated (FIGS. 156 (a1), (a4), 149). The normal game times that were the target of this forced termination were those in which the winning / failing lottery was performed under the first time-saving game state, and the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode (FIG. 103 (b)) was applied. It is a thing. If the support lottery result of this normal game game is the support winning result, it is changed to the off result in accordance with the above-mentioned forced termination (FIG. 149).

When the variation display of the normal drawing game times is forcibly terminated at the timing t2, the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the normal drawing display unit 44 for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) (timing t3). ). Further, at the timing t2, the definite display of the final game times (special figure game times) is also started, but the definite display time in this case is a specific definite display time (for example, 6 sec) longer than the normal definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec). ) Is set (FIG. 149).

At this time, the final display time of the final game round is longer than the final display time of the forcedly terminated Fuzu game round. In addition, since the result of the winning / failing lottery is regarded as a result of the forced termination of the Fuzu game, the character opening / closing game by the Fuden accessory 63a is not executed after that, and the forced termination of the Fuzu game is confirmed. Immediately after the display is finished, the next Fuzu game round is started. Therefore, the next normal game round is started before the timing t4 when the final display time of the final game round elapses (timing t3).

Since the first short-time game state ends at the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game time, the next normal game time is performed under the normal game state. Therefore, in this normal game game, the winning / failing lottery is easily performed by the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 103 (a)), and the result is likely to be missed, and the variable display time is also for the low frequency support mode. A longer variable display time (for example, 30 sec) is set.

Therefore, not only at the timing t4 when the next special figure game round (the second special figure game round of the reserved portion) is started, but also for a while after that, the general electric accessory 63a is maintained in the closed state. It becomes impossible or difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 63. As a result, even if the game times of the second special figure for the reserved portion are executed and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of the second special figure, it is possible to suppress the replenishment of new reserved information.

Next, a case where the character opening / closing game is being executed at the start timing of the confirmation display in the final game times (when the fluctuation display of the normal game times is not being performed) will be described with reference to FIG. 156 (b). ..

After the bonus opening / closing game by the Fuden bonus 63a is started, before the execution period (for example, 4.2 sec) elapses, it is said that the confirmation display start timing is reached in the final game round of the first short game state. (Timing t11). At this time, since the variable display of the normal figure game times is not being performed, the forced termination is not executed, and the continuation of the character opening / closing game is executed after that.

As described above, the confirmation display of the final game round starting from the timing t11 is performed with a specific confirmation display time (for example, 6 sec) longer than the normal confirmation display time. Since this specific confirmation display time is longer than the execution period of the character opening / closing game, the character opening / closing game ends before the timing t13 at which the final display of the final game times ends (timing t12). ). That is, even if the character opening / closing game is performed at the start timing of the final display of the final game, it is absorbed within the final display time of the final game, and the next special game (the second special figure of the reserved portion) is absorbed. At the timing t13 when the game round) is started, the character opening / closing game is finished.

When the above-mentioned accessory opening / closing game is completed at the timing t12, the next normal game round is started, and this normal game round is performed under the normal game state. For this reason, a deviation result is likely to occur, and a longer variable display time (for example, 30 sec) for the low frequency support mode is set for the variable display time.

Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 156 (a), not only at the timing t13 when the next special figure game round (the second special figure game round of the reserved portion) is started, but also for a while after that, the Fuden The accessory 63a is maintained in the closed state, and it becomes impossible or difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 63. As a result, even if the game times of the second special figure for the reserved portion are executed and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of the second special figure, it is possible to suppress the replenishment of new reserved information.

In addition, it is possible that the Fuzu game times are being confirmed and displayed at the start timing of the confirmed display in the final game times. At that time, the support lottery result of the Fuzu game times is the support winning result, and even if the character opening / closing game is executed after that, the fixed display time of the Fuzu game times and the execution period of the character opening / closing game Since the specific confirmation display time of the final game round is longer than the total period (for example, 4.7 sec), before the next special figure game round (the second special figure game round of the reserved portion) is started. It is possible to end the character opening / closing game.

As described above, in this modification, since the replenishment of the reserved information after the final game round is completed is suppressed, the number of game rounds (game rounds in the second special figure) that can be executed after the first time-shortened game state is suppressed. Can be limited to the number of times (4 times) corresponding to the upper limit number of holds. As already explained, the game times of the second special figure of the reserved portion have the advantage that the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs when the special out-of-game result is won, as in the final game times of the first time-saving game state. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

Further, for example, when the replenishment of the reserved information after the end of the first time-saving game state is allowed, it is easy to accurately predict how many reserved information will be replenished in the actual game at the design stage of the pachinko machine. It is assumed that it is not. As a result, there is a concern that the time and effort for probabilistic design will increase and the burden of design work will increase. Since the number of times) can be fixed, there is an advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Due to a special out-of-game result in the final game round of the 1st time-shortening game state, the game shifts to the 3rd time-shortening game state after the end of the 1st time-shortening game state, while in other special game times in the 1st time-shortening game state. Even if the result is a special deviation, the configuration is such that the transition to the third short game state does not occur.

According to this configuration, by allocating the special deviation result in the final game round of the first time-shortened game state, the transition from the first time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is made, and the remaining number of times of the time-shortened game state is increased. Can be in the same state as. For this reason, the period during which the player can play the time-saving game state is extended, and the chance of winning the jackpot result in the time-saving game state can be increased. As a result, it is possible to add a game that aims not only to draw a jackpot result in the first short-time game state but also to draw a special out-of-order result in the final game round, expanding the range of enjoyment and making it more interesting. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, even if a special deviation result occurs in another special figure game in the first time-shortened game state, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted. Therefore, in order to realize the transition to the third time-shortened game state, Not only the special deviation result is assigned, but also the timing is required. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the difficulty level of shifting to the third time-saving game state, and to appropriately bring out the joy and sense of accomplishment of the player when it can be realized. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the superiority of the final game round to the first short-time game state as a chance game round, and it is also possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game round.

When a special deviation result is obtained in the final game round of the first short game state, the end of the first short game state and the transition to the third short game state are performed in the final game round.

According to this configuration, it is possible to switch from the first time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without intervening the special figure game times in the normal game state. As a result, it becomes possible to make the state similar to the addition of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state.

In that case, since the symbol display device 75 executes the additional effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to feel that the remaining number of times has been added.

The configuration is such that the transition to the third short game state is performed without going through the open / close execution mode.

According to the above configuration, since it is not necessary to win the jackpot result for the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state, the probability that the transition is performed can be set independently of the jackpot winning probability. This makes it possible to freely set the transition probability to the third time-shortened gaming state without depending on the jackpot winning probability. Further, by shifting to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to prevent the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state from being largely separated. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to feel a sense of unity regarding the time-saving gaming state of both, and it becomes possible to easily give the impression that the time-saving gaming state is extended.

At that time, since the winning probability of the special loss result is made higher than the jackpot winning probability, it is possible to give the player the impression that it is easy to shift to the third time-shortening gaming state. This makes it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation even at the stage when the final game round of the first short game state is approaching, and an element to enjoy the game as a way to live just before the end of the first short game state. It will be possible to expand.

The condition for transitioning to the 3rd short game state is that the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery will be a special off result.

According to this configuration, both the game of whether or not the result of the special figure winning or losing lottery is a big hit result and the game of whether or not the condition for shifting to the third time-saving game state is satisfied as a special out-of-order result. Can be executed in the special figure game times of 1. As a result, the final game times that are allowed to shift to the third time-saving game state can function as chance game times (game times that are more advantageous than other special figure game times) in which both of these games can be played. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of expectation and attention to the game.

When a special out-of-order result is obtained, an external signal for notifying the result is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and then the special out-of-order game is performed in a special game time other than the final game in the first short game state. Even when a result is obtained (when a special out-of-order result is obtained in a situation where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted), the above-mentioned external signal for notifying that the special out-of-time result is obtained is output. And said.

In this configuration, since the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state has been established in the management control device of the gaming hall. In this case, in a situation where the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is restricted, it is conceivable that the external signal is not output even if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becomes a special deviation result. Considering that the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur after that, it can be said that it makes more sense not to output an external signal than to output an external signal.

However, in such a configuration, it becomes impossible for the game hall side to grasp the actual number of times the special loss result is obtained in the game, and for example, even if an act of illegally increasing the winning probability of the special loss result is performed. There is a risk that the discovery will be delayed. In this respect, in this configuration, even when the transition to the third time-shortening game state is restricted, the above-mentioned external signal is intentionally output, so that the game hall side appropriately grasps the actual number of times that the special deviation result is obtained. be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the detection when the winning probability of the special deviation result is illegally increased, and it is possible to enhance the fraud deterrent effect.

The output mode of the lottery result signal for notifying the jackpot result and the normal deviation result is different, and the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output.

According to this configuration, it is possible to output an external signal corresponding to the special disconnection result by using the existing terminal for notifying the jackpot result etc. and the existing wiring, so compared to the case of outputting the dedicated signal, the pachinko machine The number of output terminals and the like in 10 can be suppressed to a small number. In addition, if the management control device on the game hall side also has an input terminal, etc. for receiving notification about the jackpot result, etc., it should be used to receive an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result. Can be done. Even if it becomes necessary to add a function for identifying (recognizing) the difference in output mode for the lottery result signal, it is possible to keep the introduction cost low because it can be handled by a small change only in the control program. Become.

In addition, when outputting the lottery result signal corresponding to the special deviation, a common lottery result signal may be output in the case where the transition to the third time saving game state occurs and the case where the transition does not occur, and they may be output. A separate lottery result signal may be output for different cases. In the latter configuration, the management control device on the game hall side not only has a special out-of-order result, but also whether or not it is in a state where it should shift to the third time-saving game state. It can be grasped from the signal. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the pachinko machine 10 is not abnormal with respect to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the third time-saving gaming state even though the result is a special deviation.

When the lottery result signal is output separately for the case where the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state occurs and the case where the transition does not occur, the signal output when the transition occurs and the signal output when the transition does not occur Each signal wiring (output terminal of the external output terminal 213) may be assigned to the above and the signal wiring of 1 may be shared. When the signal wiring is shared, the signal mode of the lottery result signal corresponding to the special deviation (output level, output period, output timing, etc. when the transition is on) depending on whether the transition occurs or not. It is good to make different.

Further, in order to reduce the number of required signal wirings (output terminals of the external output terminal 213), the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output by using the game round execution signal output for each game round. May be good. That is, the signal mode of the game round execution signal may be different depending on the result of the winning / failing lottery.

Specifically, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a jackpot result, a game round execution signal in a mode corresponding to the jackpot is output, and if it is a normal missed result, a game round execution in a mode corresponding to the normal missed is executed. When a signal is output and the result is a special deviation, the game round execution signal in the mode corresponding to the special deviation is set to be output. In this case, the dedicated signal as the lottery result signal is not output.

With such a configuration, the signal terminal for the lottery result signal and the signal wiring can be omitted to simplify the configuration, and the management control device on the game hall side also avoids the addition of an input terminal. be able to. In addition, since the lottery result signal can be output at the same time as the game round execution signal, the number of signal outputs from the pachinko machine can be reduced, and the processing required for signal transfer in both the pachinko machine and the management control device on the game hall side. It becomes possible to reduce the load.

In the above case, the game round execution signal of the same aspect may be output for the case where the result is a big hit result and the case where the result is a normal deviation result. Even in such a case, the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is output after the fact, so that the management control device on the game hall side can grasp that it is a big hit result.

As a configuration in which the signal mode of the game round execution signal is different for each win / fail lottery, it is conceivable that the output level, output period, output timing, etc. in the ON state are different. Among them, from the viewpoint of ease of realization and introduction, those having different output periods in the on state are preferable. For example, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit result, a game round execution signal with an on period of 0.3 sec is output, and if the result is normally out of order, the on period is 0.5 sec (or 0.3 sec). A game round execution signal is output, and if the result is a special deviation, a game round execution signal with an on period of 0.8 sec is output.

When outputting the game round execution signal corresponding to the special deviation, similarly to the above, the game round execution signal of the same embodiment is output depending on whether the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs or the transition does not occur. Alternatively, the game round execution signal of a different aspect may be output.

If a function is provided to output an external signal (game round start signal) for notifying the start of the game round to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in each game round, the game is replaced with or in addition to the game round execution signal. It may be configured to output an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result by using the rotation start signal. That is, the signal mode of the game round start signal may be different depending on the result of the winning / failing lottery.

In addition to the game round execution signal and the game round start signal, if there is an external signal that is externally output in each game round, the signal may be used to output an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result. good.

<Modification example 4>
In the above modification 3, if a special deviation result occurs during the first time saving game state, the transition to the third time saving gaming state is restricted, but in this modification, the transition is allowed. ing. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the second embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Winning / failing table for special game games>
The hit / miss table for the first special figure (for low probability mode), the hit / miss table for the second special figure (for low probability mode), and the hit / miss table for the first special figure and the second special figure according to this modification. (For high probability mode) will be described with reference to FIG. 157. Each of these hit / miss tables is stored in the hit / miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The winning / failing table for the first special figure (for the low probability mode) is referred to when the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is performed in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the hit / fail table for the first special figure (for the low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) is "0" to "9". A total of 10 are set, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Further, a total of 10 random numbers "10" to "19" are set as the values of the random numbers that result in the special deviation, and the probability of the special deviation result in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The winning / failing table for the second special figure (for the low probability mode) is referred to when the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is performed in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the hit / fail table for the second special figure (for the low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157 (b), the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) is "0" to "9". A total of 10 are set, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 30 random numbers "10" to "39" are set as the values of random numbers that result in special deviation. That is, the probability of a special deviation result in the low probability mode is set to 1/100, which is different from the probability of the first special figure. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The winning / failing table for the first special drawing and the second special drawing (for the high probability mode) is a winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. It is referenced when doing so. In the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special figure and the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 157 (c), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are used as jackpot random numbers. Is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In the hit / miss table for the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure (for high probability mode), the special deviation result is not set as the lottery result, and all the values other than the random value for the big hit are assigned to the normal deviation result. Has been done. The probability of an out-of-order result is usually set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game times according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 158.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 158 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 158 (b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 158 (a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high-probability gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in 10 round games being performed.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (for example, 100 times). Further, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (for example, 1000 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this modification, the type table for special deviation is not set. That is, in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing, there is only one type of special deviation result. However, there is a case where a special loss result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the first special figure and a case where a special losing result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure. It is configured so that the mode of the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), if a special loss result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the first special figure, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state A, and in the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure. If the result is a special deviation, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state B. The third time-shortened game state A is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the third time-shortened game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number (for example, 100 times). The third time-shortened game state B is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the third time-shortened game state B reaches the sixth upper limit number (for example, 10 times) which is smaller than the fifth upper limit number. .. Since the special deviation result is one of the deviation results, the open / close execution mode is not executed. That is, when a special deviation result is obtained, the game shifts to the third time-saving game states A and B without going through the open / close execution mode.

<Process for transition to the third time-saving game state>
The third time-saving gaming state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 159. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special figure game times control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state in FIG. 148. .. In FIG. 159, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 148, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. The third time-saving game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update / end process in step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the special off flag is set, that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is the special off result, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, and whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Is determined.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb4101 whether or not the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The third support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that it is in the third short game state. When the third support flag is not set, that is, when the game is not in the third time-shortened gaming state, it is determined in step Sb4102 whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that it is in the first short game state.

When the first support flag is set, that is, in the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb4103, and the first support flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state ends.

After the execution of step Sb4103 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4102 (when the first support flag is not set and the game is not in the first time-saving gaming state), the third support is provided in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb4104. Set the flag. As a result, the game shifts to the third short game state.

In step Sb4105, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not set, that is, if the special deviation result of this time is the special deviation result of the first special figure, the third time-saving gaming state A (FIG. 158 (c)) should be entered. , In step Sb4106, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314.

In step Sb4107, the process for ending the normal drawing is executed. This process is the same as the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the second time-saving gaming state transition process of FIG. 119. At that time, in the special figure game, a specific confirmed display time longer than the normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time (FIG. 149), but the specific confirmed display time is the same as in the second embodiment. , The time (for example, 0.8 sec) longer than the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the forcibly terminated Fuzu game times may be set, or the forcibly terminated Fuzu game times as in the above modification 2. The fixed display time of, the fluctuation display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state, and the fixed display time of the normal figure game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state (for example, 0. The time may be longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) with 5 sec).

When an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb4105 (when the second special figure flag is set), that is, when the special deviation result of this time is the special deviation result of the second special figure, the third time saving game state B (FIG. In order to shift to 158 (c)), in step Sb4108, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times) is set in the support counter area SC.

Here, in this modification, even in the situation where the first support flag is set, the third support flag is set, and when a special deviation result occurs in the middle of the first time reduction game state, the third time reduction game state is entered. Migration is allowed. Further, since the first time-saving game state is a game state in which it is possible or easy to win a prize in the second operating port 63 corresponding to the second special figure, the special deviation result assigned during the first time-saving game state is the first. 2 It will be a special deviation result of the special figure. Therefore, the third time-shortened game state that shifts in the middle of the first time-shortened game state is the third time-shortened game state B in which the remaining number of times is set to the sixth upper limit number (for example, 10 times).

In this way, it is possible to shift to the third time-shortened game state B in the situation where the remaining number of times of the first time-shortened game state remains. At that time, in the above step Sb4108, the value of the support counter area SC. Is rewritten to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state B, regardless of the value at that time (the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state). Therefore, regardless of which of the special figure game times in the first time-shortened game state shifts to the third time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times thereafter is changed to the sixth upper limit number of times.

Since the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times) is smaller than the first upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times), which is the remaining number of times initially set in the first time reduction game state, the first time reduction game state. Unless the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B is made when the remaining number of times is less than the sixth upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state will decrease. That is, the more the winning of the special loss result is avoided, the longer the time-saving gaming state can be continued, and the more advantageous the gaming can be advanced. That is, the former is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the latter when comparing the case where the special deviation result is not obtained in the first time-saving game state.

In this modified example, since the special deviation result is also set in the first special figure, the special deviation result may be obtained in the middle of the normal game state. In this case, the game shifts to the third short game state A, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. That is, when a special deviation result is obtained in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player than when the special deviation result is not obtained.

After the execution of step Sb4107 or step Sb4108, in step Sb3408, the third time-saving game state start command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the third time-saving game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step Sb4101 (when the third support flag is set), the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb4102 to Sb3408. That is, even if a special deviation result occurs in the third time-shortened game state, the re-transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, and the remaining number of times at that time is maintained.

<Variable display time table of special figure game times>
The special figure game times control process and the variation start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 3 (FIGS. 145 and 146), but as described above, in this modified example, the first time-saving game is performed. It is configured so that the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is reduced when a special out-of-order result is obtained in the state, and a variable display time table is set accordingly. Hereinafter, the variation display time table according to this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161.

As the variable display time table in this modification, at least the variable display time table for special deviation in the first special figure (for normal gaming state) and the variable display time table for big hit in the second special figure (first). The variable display time table for the time-saving game state (for the time-saving game state), the variable display time table for the normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-saving game state), and the variable display time table for the special deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-saving game state). ), The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special figure (for the third time-saving game state B), and the variable display time table for the normal deviation in the second special figure (for the third time-saving game state B). A variable display time table (for the third time-saving game state B) for special deviation in the second special figure is set.

The variable display time table for special deviation in the first special figure (for the normal gaming state) is referred to when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the first special drawing becomes the special deviation result in the situation of the normal gaming state. It is a thing. In this variation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the variation pattern Y1 (for example, 15 sec) is configured to be selected. The fluctuation pattern Y1 corresponds to the special reach out-of-reach effect. That is, when the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern Y1 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach out effect as the game rotation effect. The special reach out-of-reach effect is for notifying the special out-of-reach result, and is the same as the special reach out-of-reach effect (FIGS. 153 (b) to (d)) according to the above-mentioned modification 3.

The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special figure (for the first time-shortened game state) is referred to when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure becomes the jackpot result in the situation of the first time-shortened gaming state. Is to be done. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is “0” to “79”, one of the fluctuation pattern 21A to the fluctuation pattern 23A is selected and the fluctuation is made. The fluctuation pattern Y2 (for example, 60 sec) is selected when the value of the type counter CS is “80” to “99”. The variation patterns 21A to 23A are the same as the variation patterns 21A to 23A in FIG. 113 (c). The variation pattern Y2 corresponds to the specific effect A as the effect for game rotation. The details of the specific effect A will be described later.

The variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortening game state) is when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure becomes the normal deviation result in the situation of the first time-shortening gaming state. It is referred to in. In this fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is “0” to “79”, one of the fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H is selected and the fluctuation is made. The fluctuation pattern Y3 (for example, 60 sec) is selected when the value of the type counter CS is “80” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H in FIG. 113 (d). The variation pattern Y3 corresponds to the specific effect B as the effect for game rotation. The details of the specific effect B will be described later.

The variable display time table (for the 1st time-shortened game state) for the special figure in the 2nd special figure is when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the 2nd special figure becomes the special missed result in the situation where the 1st time-shortened game state is set. It is referred to in. In this variation display time table, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the variation pattern Y4 (for example, 60 sec) is configured to be selected. The variation pattern Y4 corresponds to the specific effect C as the game turn effect. The details of the specific effect C will be described later.

The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special figure (for the third time-shortened game state B) is the case where the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure is the jackpot result in the situation where the third time-shortened gaming state B is set. It is referred to in. In this variation display time table, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the variation pattern Y5 (for example, 60 sec) is selected as the variation pattern. The variation pattern Y5 corresponds to the specific effect D as the game turn effect. The details of the specific effect D will be described later.

In the variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the third time-shortening game state B), the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure is the normal deviation result in the situation of the third time-shortening game state B. It is referred to when In this variation display time table, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the variation pattern is obtained when the normal deviation result is obtained in the first to ninth special figure game times after the transition to the third time-shortened game state B. It is configured so that Y6 (for example, 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and the variation pattern Y7 (for example, 60 sec) is selected when a normal deviation result is obtained in the final game round (10th time) of the third time-shortened game state B. There is. The variation pattern Y6 corresponds to a completely out-of-order effect, and the variation pattern Y7 corresponds to a specific effect E as a game rotation effect. The details of the specific effect E will be described later.

In the variable display time table for special figure 2 (for the third time-saving game state B), the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure is the special loss result in the situation of the third time-saving game state B. It is referred to when In this variation display time table, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the variation pattern is obtained when a special deviation result is obtained in the first to ninth special figure game times after the transition to the third time-shortened game state B. It is configured so that Y8 (for example, 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and the variation pattern Y9 (for example, 60 sec) is selected when a normal deviation result is obtained in the final game round (10th time) of the third time-shortened game state B. There is. The variation pattern Y8 corresponds to a completely out-of-order effect, and the variation pattern Y9 corresponds to a specific effect E as a game rotation effect.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the staging control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is executed in place of the staging setting process of FIG. 126. In FIG. 162, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 126, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not the ending command from the main control device 162 is received. When the ending command is received, in step Sb4201, the first transition effect setting process for setting the transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high-accuracy gaming state or the first time-shortening gaming state is executed.

After the execution of step Sb4201 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2301 (when the ending command has not been received), whether or not the third time saving game state start command from the main control device 162 has been received in step Sb4202. Is determined. When the third time-shortened game state start command is received, in step Sb4203, the third transition effect setting process for setting the transition effect corresponding to the transition to the third time-shortened game state is executed.

After the execution of step Sb4203 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4202 (when the third time-saving game state command has not been received), it is determined in step Sb2305 whether or not any of the game state end commands has been received. do. When the game state end command is received, in step Sb2306, the end effect setting for setting the end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time reduction game state, or the third time reduction game state. Execute the process.

After the execution of step Sb2306 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2305 (when neither game state end command has been received), in step Sb4204, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Executes the special figure fluctuation display processing for displaying fluctuations and the like. In step Sb2308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated.

<Production setting process for the first transition>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sb4201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 163 (a).

First, in step Sb4301, it is determined whether or not there is a situation in which the transition to the high probability gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode in which the ending command is transmitted corresponds to the jackpot result that causes the transition to the high probability gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command transmitted from the main control device 162.

When the transition to the high probability gaming state occurs, the effect setting process for the high probability gaming state is executed in step Sb4302. In this process, for example, after the start effect for the high probability gaming state as in FIG. 128 (a) is executed, the game rotation effect corresponding to the high probability gaming state is set to be executed. .. The game rotation effect for the high-probability gaming state has a different aspect from the game rotation effect for the normal gaming state, and for example, the background image displayed on the back side of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is usually used. The display color and display content are set differently from those for the game state.

In step Sb4303, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the remaining number of times counter area of the RAM 344. In step Sb4304, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128 (a) and the like) is set to start. In step Sb4305, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the first transition effect setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4301 (when there is no situation in which the transition to the high-probability gaming state occurs), the process proceeds to step Sb4306, and it is determined whether or not the transition to the first time-shortening gaming state occurs. That is, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode in which the ending command is transmitted corresponds to the jackpot result that causes the transition to the first time-saving gaming state.

In the situation where the transition to the first time-shortened game state occurs, the effect setting process for the first time-shortened game state is executed in step Sb4307. In this process, for example, after the start effect for the first time-saving game state similar to FIG. 128 (b) is executed, the game rotation effect corresponding to the state of the first time-saving game state is executed. Set. The game rotation effect for the first short-time gaming state has a different aspect from the game rotation effect for the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state, and is, for example, on the back side of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The displayed background image is set to a display color and display content different from those for the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state.

In addition, in the start effect for the first time-shortening game state and the game rounding effect according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the chance time (first time-shortening game state) is used instead of the remaining number of times image 472. The state notification image 450 that notifies that the inside is inside is displayed. That is, in the case of the first short game state, the remaining number of times is not specified.

After the execution of step Sb4307 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4306 (when the situation is not such that the transition to the first time-saving gaming state occurs), the first transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting process for the third transition>
The third transition effect setting process of step Sb4203 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 164 (a).

First, in step Sb4401, the effect setting process for the third time-saving game state is executed. In this process, after the start effect for the third time-shortened game state is executed, the game rounding effect corresponding to the state of the third time-shortened game state is set to be executed. The game rotation effect for the third time-shortening gaming state has a different aspect from the game rotation effect for the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy gaming state, and the first time-shortening gaming state.

In step Sb4402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set in the remaining number of times counter area of RAM 344. Specifically, in the case of transition to the third time-shortened game state A, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) is set, and in the case of transition to the third time-shortened game state B, the sixth. Set the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times).

In step Sb4403, it is set to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472 (FIG. 128 (a) and the like). When shifting to the third time-saving gaming state in the middle of the first time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), the remaining number of times image from the state notification image 450 in accordance with the transition to the third time-saving gaming state. Make changes to 472. That is, the state in which the remaining number of times is not specified is switched to the state in which the remaining number is specified.

In step Sb4404, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the third transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuations>
The process for displaying the special figure variation in step Sb4204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 165, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for the special figure variation display process of FIG. 132, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed. If the game round is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 has been received.

If the variation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sb4501 and the symbol display device 75 executes the variation start process for starting the game rotation effect. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 166 (a).

First, in step Sb4601, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure game round this time is grasped. In step Sb4602, it is set so that the game rotation effect corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern is executed. The correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the game rotation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (b).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y1, the special reach out-of-reach effect is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y1 is set when a special deviation result is obtained in the first special figure (when a special deviation result is obtained during the normal gaming state). Further, the special reach off effect is the same as the special reach off effect (FIGS. 153 (b) to (d)) according to the above-mentioned modification 3.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y2, the specific effect A is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y2 is set in a part of the case where a big hit result is obtained during the first short game state. The specific effect A is an effect of notifying the jackpot result. For example, after the reach is displayed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, it is predetermined whether or not the warrior character can defeat the enemy character. It is configured so that a battle effect is performed (FIG. 167 (a)). In the specific effect A, the ending in which the warrior character wins in the battle effect is displayed, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of jackpots.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y3, the specific effect B is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y3 is set in a part of the case where a normal deviation result is obtained during the first short game state. The specific effect B is an effect of notifying the disengagement result, and is an effect related to the specific effect A. In the specific effect B, the ending of the warrior character and the enemy character being drawn is displayed in the above battle effect after the reach is displayed (FIG. 167 (b)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of out of reach. To.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y4, the specific effect C is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y4 is set when a special deviation result is obtained during the first short game state. The specific effect C is an effect of notifying the transition to the third time-saving game state, and is related to the specific effects A and B. In the specific effect C, the ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the above battle effect after the reach display is displayed (FIG. 167 (c)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of out of reach.

If the fluctuation pattern Y5 is grasped, the specific effect D is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y5 is set when a big hit result is obtained during the third short game state. The specific effect D is an effect of notifying the jackpot result. For example, after the reach is displayed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the warrior character challenges the enemy character defeated in the specific effect C again. It is configured so that a revenge battle effect is performed (FIG. 167 (d)). In the specific effect D, the ending in which the warrior character wins in the revenge battle effect is displayed, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of jackpots.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y7 or the fluctuation pattern Y9, the specific effect E is set to be executed. The variation pattern Y7 is set when a normal deviation result is obtained in the final game round (10th special figure game round) in the third time-shortening game state, and the fluctuation pattern Y9 is set in the third time-shortening game state. It is set when a special out-of-game result is obtained in the final game. The specific effect E is an effect of notifying the result of the deviation and the end of the third time-saving game state, and is related to the specific effect D. In the specific effect E, the ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the revenge battle effect after the reach display is displayed (FIG. 167 (d)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of out of reach.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern Y6 or the fluctuation pattern Y8, it is set so that the complete deviation effect is executed. The variation pattern Y6 is set when a normal deviation result is obtained in a game round (1st to 9th special figure game rounds) other than the final game round in the 3rd time short game state, and the fluctuation pattern Y8 is set. , It is set when a special deviation result is obtained in a game round other than the final game round in the third short game state.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 166 (a)), after the execution of step Sb4602, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted as transmission targets to the display control device 350 in step Sb4603. The pattern command is an effect pattern command that specifies an effect for game rounds to be executed. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the designated stop result, or the game rotation effect is performed in the specified effect pattern. Control 75. After the execution of step Sb4603, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 165), after executing the variation start process of step Sb4501, in step Sb4502, whether the current gaming state is the high-accuracy gaming state or the third short-time gaming state. Judge whether or not. In the case of the high-probability gaming state or the third time-shortening gaming state, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704. In the process for updating the remaining number of times display, the remaining number of times such as the first time saving game state is updated, and the display content of the remaining number of times image 472 is updated. After the execution of step Sb2704 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb4502 (when it is not in the high-probability gaming state or the third time-shortening gaming state), the special figure variation display processing is terminated.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 168. First, the flow from the normal gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (a).

In the normal game state, the game is left-handed, and the game is mainly performed by the winning / failing lottery of the first special figure triggered by the winning of the first operating port 62. If the result of the lottery for winning or losing the first special figure becomes a special result in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A, and the support mode is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, it is possible or easy to win a prize in the second operating port 63, and it is possible to play while not reducing the number of balls held so much, and it is possible to receive a type lottery in which the jackpot type is given preferential treatment. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to an advantageous gaming state for the player due to the special deviation result.

The upper limit number of times (fifth upper limit number of times) of the third time short game state A is set to 100 times. Here, in this modification, since the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state is performed after the update of the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is completed, the following after switching to the third time-saving gaming state is performed. The remaining number of times can be subtracted after the special figure game times. Therefore, after shifting to the third time-saving gaming state A, it is possible to suitably secure 100 times as the number of special figure gaming times in which the gaming state can be played.

As described above, it is advantageous for the player if a special off result is obtained in the normal game state, so in the normal game state, it is possible to play while aiming not only for a big hit but also for a special off result. Become.

Next, the flow of the gaming state from the first time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b).

In the first short-time game state, the game is a right-handed game, and the game is mainly performed by a winning / losing lottery of the second special figure triggered by winning a prize in the second operating port 63. If the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure becomes a big hit result in the first short game state, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In this case, in the symbol display device 75, the jackpot result is notified through the specific effect A, and the effect that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the combination of the jackpot is executed together with the battle effect of the end in which the warrior character wins the enemy character. To.

If the result of the lottery for winning or losing the second special figure is a special result in the first time-shortened game state, the process shifts from the first time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state B. As a result, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the sixth upper limit number (for example, 10 times) which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving gaming state B. Since the sixth upper limit number of times is much smaller than the first upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) which is the upper limit number of times of the first time saving gaming state, the remaining number of times of the time saving gaming state is reduced. That is, at the beginning of the transition to the first time-saving game state, up to 1000 games are allowed in the time-saving game state, but if a special deviation result is assigned in the middle of the game, the number is reduced to the remaining 10 times. For this reason, it is disadvantageous for the player if a special deviation result is obtained in the first short game state.

Further, at the time of transition to the third time-saving game state B, the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving game state is set as the remaining number of times of the subsequent time-saving game state regardless of the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state at that time. To. Then, no matter how many times the special figure game is played after the transition to the first time-saving game state, the result of the lottery for winning or losing the second special figure will be 10 times remaining in the time-saving game state. Therefore, the longer the special deviation result is obtained at a later stage after the transition to the first time-saving gaming state, the longer the duration of the time-saving gaming state can be extended. For this reason, as a player, it is possible to play with the expectation that the special deviation result will not be drawn at all, or even if it is pulled, the timing will be as late as possible.

When a special deviation result is obtained in the first short game state, the symbol display device 75 notifies the special deviation result through the specific effect C, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed together with the battle effect of the end that the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character. An effect that is stopped and displayed is executed by a combination of out of reach. Further, after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the transition effect to the revenge battle effect mode in which the game with the defeated enemy character is re-challenged is executed.

If the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure is a normal result in the first time-saving game state, the game state does not shift and the first time-saving game state is maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the specific effect B in addition to the complete off effect and various reach off effects.

In the specific effect B, along with the battle effect of the ending in which the warrior character and the enemy character are drawn, the effect that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of out of reach is executed. This specific effect B is configured so that it cannot be distinguished from the specific effect A or the specific effect B until the ending is displayed, or it is expected that it may be a big hit result in the middle of the process. Along with the feeling, it fuels the feeling of excitement that the number of remaining times of the short-time game state may be reduced as a result of special deviation.

In addition, while the ending of the specific effect C executed in the case of a special deviation result is defeated, the ending of the specific effect B executed in the case of a normal deviation result is a draw, and the former is more disadvantageous than the latter. This is because, in this modified example, it is more disadvantageous for the player that the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result than the normal deviation result.

If the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure becomes a big hit result in the third short game state B, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In this case, in the symbol display device 75, the jackpot result is notified through the specific effect D, and the effect that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the combination of the jackpot is executed together with the revenge battle effect of the ending in which the warrior character wins the enemy character. Will be done.

It should be noted that the revenge battle effect in the third time-saving game state B is not demoted to the normal game state, and although it is a small number of the remaining 10 times, it corresponds to the fact that the time-saving game state is still continuing. It is a thing. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the impression that a chance is left, reduce disappointment, and inspire.

If the result of the lottery for winning or losing the second special figure is a normal or special wrong result in the 1st to 9th special figure game times in the 3rd time short game state B, the game state does not change and the third The time-saving game state is maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 performs a complete off effect.

If the result of the lottery for winning or losing the second special figure is a normal or special loss result in the final game round (10th special figure game round) in the third time short game state, the third time short game state ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the disengagement result and the end of the third time saving game state through the specific effect E. In the specific effect E, along with the revenge battle effect in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character, the effect that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination of out of reach is executed.

In addition, after those effects, in the special figure game times, the total number of special figure game times executed in the time-saving game state (total number of special figure game times executed through the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) is calculated. The number of notifications The notification effect is executed. By visually recognizing the effect, the player can grasp the achievements in the time-saving game state this time.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the situation where it is in the 1st time-saving game state, if a special out-of-time result is obtained, the 1st time-saving game state is changed without shifting to the 3rd time-shortening game state after the configuration allows the transition to the 3rd time-shortening game state. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to shift to the third short game state than to continue.

According to this configuration, when the game shifts to the first time-saving game state via the open / close execution mode, the thrill that may be demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on the subsequent game development can be tasted, and the jackpot result can be obtained. You can add more fun than just aiming to win. However, while it is possible to provide such a thrill, if the player's disappointment when demoted to a disadvantageous state is too severe, there is a concern that the subsequent game motivation will be diminished, which will be counterproductive. In this regard, in this configuration, the transition to the third time-saving game state, in which the number of remaining times is small, is demoted to a disadvantageous state, so even if such demotion occurs, there is a chance to draw a big hit in the time-saving game state. Can be left. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment of the player as compared with the case of shifting to the normal gaming state. In particular, if the type judgment in the case of a big hit result in the winning / failing lottery of the 2nd special figure is given preferential treatment than in the case of the 1st special figure, even if it is demoted to a disadvantageous state, it will be in the 2nd special figure. Since the game period of the above is secured, the above-mentioned effect can be satisfactorily exhibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the above-mentioned thrill can be enjoyed while suppressing the motivation for the game to be significantly impaired.

If a special out-of-time result occurs in the situation of the 1st time-saving game state, the upper limit of the 3rd time-saving game state is uniformly set as the remaining number of times of the 1st time-saving game state regardless of the remaining number of times of the 1st time-saving game state at that time. The configuration is such that the number of times is set.

According to this configuration, the later the timing at which the special deviation result occurs in the first time-saving game state, the greater the total number of times the time-saving game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to enhance the fun of avoiding winning a special out-of-order result when advancing the game in the first short-time game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the case of the first short game state, the remaining number of times is not specified.

For example, if the configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is clearly indicated, the player can grasp how many times the remaining number of times was before the special loss result, so that the special loss result is obtained and the time-saving game state is obtained. When the upper limit number of times of the third short game state is set as the remaining number of times, the player can easily identify how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this respect, by not clearly indicating the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, it is possible for the player to be unable or difficult to grasp the remaining number of times before the special deviation result occurs. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify the decrease in the number of remaining times when the third time-shortened game state is entered, and even if the decrease is large, the player is greatly discouraged and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the above case, the remaining number of times is clearly indicated when the game shifts to the third short game state. As a result, the player can easily grasp the transition to the third time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

In this modified example, only one type of the first time-shortened game state is used, but the remaining number of times of the first time-shortened game state is not specified, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of times before the special deviation result is obtained. In the above, it is preferable to provide a plurality of types of first time-saving gaming states having different upper limit times. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp or predict the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving gaming state, and the above effect can be more preferably exhibited. At that time, it is possible to further enhance the above-mentioned effect by further making the configuration in which the player cannot or is difficult to discriminate each of the first time-saving gaming states.

Regarding the deviation result, a special deviation result and a normal deviation result are provided, and the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becomes a special deviation result, so that the demotion to a disadvantageous state (transition to the third short-time game state) occurs.

According to this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to demote to a disadvantageous state in each game. As a result, the thrills that may cause the above demotion can be tasted in each game, and the games that enjoy such thrills can be strengthened.

Even in the normal gaming state, winning of the special out-of-game result may occur, and if the special out-of-game result is obtained, the special out-of-game result is obtained during the normal gaming state by setting the configuration to shift to the third time-shortening gaming state. In this case, it is configured to be advantageous to the player, unlike the case where the special deviation result is obtained during the first short game state.

According to this configuration, even if the winning result is the same special deviation result, the advantages and disadvantages are reversed depending on the game state when the winning is established, so that unexpectedness can be imparted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the special deviation result from being fixed to a game that only avoids its establishment, and it is possible to diversify the game.

At that time, the upper limit of the number of times of the third time-saving gaming state that shifts when the special out-of-game result is obtained in the normal gaming state, and the upper limit of the third time-saving gaming state that shifts when the special out-of-game result is obtained in the first time-saving gaming state. More than the number of times. As a result, the superiority of the third time-saving gaming state that shifts from the normal gaming state can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to enhance the fun of aiming to win the special out-of-game result in the normal gaming state.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, it is configured to determine which of the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is prioritized when a special deviation result is obtained during the first time-saving game state. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177.

<Winning / failing table for special game games>
The hit / miss table for the first special figure (for low probability mode), the hit / miss table for the second special figure (for low probability mode), and the hit / miss table for the first special figure and the second special figure according to this modification. (For high probability mode) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. Each of these hit / miss tables is stored in the hit / miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The winning / failing table for the first special figure (for the low probability mode) is referred to when the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is performed in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the hit / fail table for the first special figure (for the low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 169 (a), the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) is "0" to "9". A total of 10 are set, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2990/3000. In the hit / fail table for the first special figure (for the low probability mode), the special deviation result is not set as the lottery result.

The winning / failing table for the second special figure (for the low probability mode) is referred to when the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is performed in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the hit / fail table for the second special figure (for the low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) is set to "0" to "9". A total of 10 are set, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Further, a total of 30 random numbers "10" to "39" are set as the values of the random numbers that result in the special deviation, and the probability of the special deviation result in the low probability mode is set to 1/100. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The winning / failing table for the first special drawing and the second special drawing (for the high probability mode) is a winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Some are referenced when doing. In the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special figure and the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are used as jackpot random numbers. Is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In the hit / miss table for the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure (for high probability mode), the special deviation result is not set as the lottery result, and all the values other than the random value for the big hit are assigned to the normal deviation result. Has been done. The probability of an out-of-order result is usually set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game times according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 170 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 170 (b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result, a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a 4R normal jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high-probability gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered.

The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the first short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 70 times). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

The 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches the third upper limit number (for example, 100 times), which is larger than the second upper limit number. When the third upper limit is reached, the first time-saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "69" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result A, and " "90" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 170 (b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result, a 10R normal jackpot result A, and a 10R normal jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in 10 round games being performed.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

The 10R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number (for example, 70 times).

The 10R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches the sixth upper limit number (for example, 100 times), which is larger than the fifth upper limit number.

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "69" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result A, and " "90" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result B. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being distributed to the 10R normal jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being distributed to the 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

In this modification, the type table for special deviation is not set. That is, there is only one type of special deviation result in the second special figure. If the result is a special deviation, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without going through the open / close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 170 (c), in the third time-saving game state in this modification, the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the third time-saving game state is the second upper limit number (for example, 70 times). ), The third upper limit number (for example, 100 times), the fifth upper limit number (for example, 70 times), and the seventh upper limit number (for example, 50 times), which is less than the sixth upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

<Process for transition to the third time-saving game state>
The process for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special figure game times control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state in FIG. 148. .. In FIG. 171, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 148, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Also in this modification, the third time-saving game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update / end process of step Sb511 is executed.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the special off flag is set, that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is the special off result, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, and whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Judge whether or not.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb4801 whether or not the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The third support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that it is in the third short game state.

When the third support flag is not set, that is, when the game is not in the third time-shortened gaming state, it is determined in step Sb4802 whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that it is in the first short game state.

When the first support flag is set, that is, when the game is in the first time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of times in the third time-saving game state in which the player proceeds to step Sb4803 and shifts to the winning of the special loss result is the first. It is determined whether or not it is more than the current remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. Specifically, with reference to the value of the support counter area SC of the RAM 314, the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state during the stay is grasped, and the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state is grasped from the grasped remaining number of times. It is determined whether or not (7th upper limit number of times) is larger. In this modification, the 7th upper limit number of times in the 3rd time shortened game state is set to 50 times. If the value of the support counter area SC is 50 or less, this step is affirmed, and if it is larger than 50, this step is performed. Is negatively judged.

When the upper limit of the number of times of the third time-shortened game state is larger than the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state is applied in preference to the current first time-shortened game state, from step Sb4804 to The process of step Sb3408 is executed.

In step Sb4804, the first support flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state ends. In the following step Sb4805, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. As a result, the game shifts to the third short game state.

In step Sb4806, a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314. At that time, regardless of the value of the support counter area SC at that time (the remaining number of times in the first short game state), the value is rewritten to the value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state during the first time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support state). The remaining number of times is the 7th upper limit number.

In step Sb3408, a third time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. As a result, the effect control device 143 is notified of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4803 (when the upper limit of the number of times of the third time saving game state is less than the current remaining number of times in the first time saving game state), the current first time saving game state is prioritized over the third time saving game state. And apply. Specifically, the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is terminated without performing the processes of steps Sb4804 to Sb3408.

As described above, in this modification, when the special deviation result is obtained, the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving game state is compared with the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state on the side with the larger number of times is prioritized. It is configured in. For example, if the configuration is such that the player always shifts to the third time-shortened game state, in a situation where the upper limit of the third time-shortened game state is smaller than the remaining number of times of the first time-shortened game state, the time-saving game is caused by shifting to the third time-shortened game state. The number of remaining states will be substantially reduced. That is, it is a transition to a disadvantageous state for the player, but according to this modification, it is possible to suppress the transition to such a disadvantageous state.

In this modified example, although the first time-shortened game state has a plurality of types of first time-shortened game states having different upper limit times, the priority order of the first time-shortened game state with that of the third time-shortened game state is reversed. The number of games differs depending on the type of the first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the 1st time-saving game state A (the 1st time-saving game state where the maximum number of times is 70 times), which shifts when the 4R normal jackpot result A is won, in the 1st to 20th special figure game times. When the special deviation result is obtained, the continuation of the first time-shortened game state A is prioritized, and after the 21st time, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is prioritized. In addition, in the 1st time-saving game state B (the 1st time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is 100 times), which shifts with the winning of the 4R normal jackpot result B as a trigger, the special loss result is obtained in the 1st to 50th special figure game times. At that time, the continuation of the first time-saving game state B is prioritized, and after the 51st time, the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized.

Such a relationship is the same in the first time-saving gaming state that shifts with the winning of the 10R normal jackpot result A and the first time-saving gaming state that shifts with the winning of the 10R normal jackpot result B. ..

If a negative determination is made in step Sb4802 (when the first support flag is not set), that is, in the normal gaming state, the normal drawing end process is executed in step Sb4807. This process is the same as the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the second time-saving gaming state transition process of FIG. 119. At that time, in the special figure game, a specific confirmed display time longer than the normal confirmed display time is set as the confirmed display time (FIG. 149), but the specific confirmed display time is the same as in the second embodiment. , The time (for example, 0.8 sec) longer than the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the forcibly terminated Fuzu game times may be set, or the forcibly terminated Fuzu game times as in the above modification 2. The fixed display time of, the fluctuation display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state, and the fixed display time of the normal figure game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state (for example, 0. The time may be longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) with 5 sec).

After the execution of step Sb4807, the process proceeds to step Sb4805 to execute the process of setting the third support flag. After that, the processes after step Sb4806 are executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb4801 (when the third support flag is set), the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb4802 to Sb3408. That is, even if a special deviation result occurs in the third time-shortened game state, the re-transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, and the remaining number of times at that time is maintained.

<Variable display time table of special figure game times>
The special figure game times control process and the variation start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 3 (FIGS. 145 and 146), but as described above, in this modified example, the first time-saving game is performed. It is configured to determine whether to prioritize the continuation of the first time-saving game state or the transition to the third time-saving game state when a special out-of-time result is obtained in the state, and the variable display time table is adjusted accordingly. Is set. Hereinafter, the variation display time table according to this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173.

As the variation display time table in this modification, at least the variation display time table for special deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-saving gaming state A) and the variation display time for special deviation in the second special figure are used. A table (for the first time-shortened game state B), a variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortened game state A), and a variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the second special figure). (For the first short game state B) is set.

The variable display time table for special deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortened game state A) is the second special figure in the situation where the first time-shortened game state A (the upper limit number of times is 70 times is the first time-shortened game state). It is referred to when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the figure becomes a special out-of-order result. In this variable display time table, the situation when the special deviation result is obtained is the situation where the continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized and the situation where the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. It is configured so that the selection mode of the fluctuation pattern is different between and.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the variation pattern W1 (for example, 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected in the first to twentieth special figure game times in which the continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized. , The variation pattern W2 (for example, 15 sec) is selected in the 21st to 70th special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. The variation pattern W1 corresponds to the completely out-of-reach effect, and the variation pattern W2 corresponds to the special reach out-of-reach A effect. That is, when the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern W1 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a completely off effect as a game rotation effect, and the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern W2 is produced. When transmitted to the control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach out-of-reach A effect as a game rotation effect.

The special reach out-of-reach A effect is the same as the special reach out-of-reach effect according to the third modification. That is, as shown in FIGS. 174 (a) and 174 (b), after the reach display is performed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a low-speed fluctuation state including the special symbol 479. After that, the special symbol 479 is stopped and displayed on the reach line. After the special reach-off A effect is performed, the same additional effect (FIG. 130 (c)) as in the second embodiment is executed. The number of additions notified at that time is 50 times, which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving gaming state (seventh upper limit number of times).

The variable display time table for special deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortened game state B) is the second special figure in the situation where the first time-shortened game state B (the upper limit number of times is 100 times is the first time-shortened game state). It is referred to when the result of the winning / failing lottery in the figure becomes a special out-of-order result. Also in this variable display time table, the situation when the special deviation result is obtained is the situation where the continuation of the first time-saving gaming state B is prioritized and the situation where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is prioritized. It is configured so that the selection mode of the variation pattern differs depending on the case. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the variation pattern W1 is selected in the first to 50th special figure game times in which the continuation of the first time-saving game state B is prioritized, and the third time-saving game state is selected. The variation pattern W2 is configured to be selected in the 51st to 100th special figure game times in which the transition to is prioritized.

In the variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortening game state A), the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure is the normal deviation result in the situation where the first time-shortening game state A is set. It is referred to when As shown in FIG. 173 (a), this variation display time table is configured such that the selection mode of the variation pattern differs depending on the number of executions of the special figure game times after the transition to the first time-saving game state A. ..

Specifically, in the first to twentieth special figure game times, any one of the fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H is selected. The fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H in FIG. 113 (d). Further, in the 21st to 60th special figure game times, when the value of the variation type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the variation pattern 21H to the variation pattern 24H is selected, and the variation type counter CS is selected. When the value of is "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern W3 (for example, 14 sec) is selected.

The fluctuation pattern W3 corresponds to the special reach out-of-reach B effect. The special reach out-of-B effect is a so-called ghost effect that is paired with the special reach out-of-A effect. It is something that makes you. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174 (a) and 174 (c), after the reach is displayed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at a low speed in a state including the special symbol 479. It is configured to display, and then stop and display the middle symbol column Z2 so that the special symbol 479 does not stop on the reach line.

In the 61st to 70th special figure game times, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "39", one of the fluctuation pattern 21H to the fluctuation pattern 24H is selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is selected. When is "40" to "99", the variation pattern W3 is selected. Compared with the case of the 21st to 60th special figure game times, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern W3 is higher. That is, in the 61st to 70th special figure game times, the special reach out-of-B effect is more likely to be executed than in the 21st to 60th special figure game times, and the special out-of-time (third time-shortening game state) is reached. The fanning is getting stronger.

It should be noted that the 1st to 20th special figure game times are in a situation where the game does not shift to the 3rd time reduction game state even if the special deviation result is obtained in the 1st time reduction game state A, and the 21st to 60th times are the 1st time reduction game. It corresponds to the middle stage of the state A, and the 69th to 70th times correspond to the final stage of the first short game state A. By the way, the fluctuation pattern W3 that can be selected in the 1st to 20th special figure game times is not included, and the special reach out-of-reach B effect is not executed in these special figure game times.

In the variable display time table for normal deviation in the second special figure (for the first time-shortening game state B), the result of the winning / failing lottery in the second special figure is the normal deviation result in the situation where the first time-shortening game state B is set. It is referred to when As shown in FIG. 173 (b), this variation display time table is also configured so that the variation pattern selection mode differs depending on the number of executions of the special figure game times after the transition to the first time-saving game state A. ..

Of these, the selection mode in the first to 70th special figure game times is the same as in the case of the variable display time table (for the first time-shortened game state A) for normal deviation in the second special figure of FIG. 173 (a). Is. That is, in the first to 70th special figure game times in the first time-saving game state B, the variation pattern is selected using the lottery table of the same aspect as in the case of the first time-saving game state A. Therefore, the selection tendency of the variable display time (game rounding effect) is likely to be similar to that in the first time-shortened game state A. As a result, whether it is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B (in other words, what is the maximum number of times of the first time-saving game state during the stay) is determined by the variable display time and the game. It is impossible or difficult for the player to discriminate from the behavior of the diversion effect.

It should be noted that the selection modes of the variation patterns do not necessarily have to be exactly the same, and may have the same degree of selection mode. For example, in the variation display time table for the first time-shortening game state B, the selection ratio of the variation pattern W3 becomes high in the 61st to 70th special figure game times, and the variation display time table for the first time-shortening game state A If they have a common tendency, they may have different fine selection probabilities, target game times, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in the 71st to 90th special figure game times, when the value of the variation type counter CS is "0" to "79", any one of the variation pattern 21H to the variation pattern 24H. Is selected, and the fluctuation pattern W3 is selected when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is “80” to “99”. Further, in the 91st to 100th special figure game times, when the value of the variation type counter CS is "0" to "39", one of the variation pattern 21H to the variation pattern 24H is selected, and the variation type counter CS is selected. When the value of is "40" to "99", the fluctuation pattern W3 is selected. That is, even in the case of the first short-time game state B, the special reach-out B effect is easily executed at the final stage, and the special out-of-time (third short-time game state) is strengthened.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described. First, a case where the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result in the situation of the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state where the upper limit number of times is 70 times) will be described with reference to FIG. 175.

The upper limit of the number of times of the third time-saving game state that shifts when the special loss result is won is set to 50 times, but the number of special figure game times after shifting to the first time-saving game state A is the first time. In the 20th time, the remaining number of times in the 1st time saving game state A is larger than the upper limit number of times in the 3rd time saving game state, and in the 21st to 70th times of the above special figure game times, the 1st time saving The upper limit of the number of times of the third time-saving game state is larger than the number of times of the remaining number of times of the game state A.

Here, in this modification, when the special deviation result occurs during the first time-saving game state and the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving game state is established, the continuation of the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state are established. Of the transitions to, the side (the side that is advantageous to the player) with a large number of remaining times in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is configured to be prioritized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), if a special deviation result is obtained in the first to twentieth special figure game times, the first time-saving game state A is continued, and the 21st to 70th times are continued. If a special out-of-game result is obtained in the special figure game round, the game shifts to the third short-time game state.

When shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving gaming state regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state A at that time. Therefore, for example, if a special out-of-game result is obtained in the 30th special figure game, the time-saving game state for 50 times is set from that point (FIGS. 175 (c) and 175 (d)). Similarly, for example, even if the special figure game round results in a special deviation in the 65th special figure game round, the time-saving game state for 50 times is set from that point (FIGS. 175 (e), (FIG. 175), (Fig. 175 (e)). f)). However, the total number of game times based on both the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state is 80 times in the former case and 115 times in the latter case. In other words, in the 21st to 70th special figure game times where the transition to the 3rd time reduction game state is allowed, the slower the special figure game time that results in the special deviation, the more the special figure game time can be played. The total number of times is increased, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the upper limit number of times is set in the first time-saving game state A, and the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving game state is not secured indefinitely. In particular, in this modification, in the normal gaming state, the winning of the second operating port 63 is restricted, and as a result, the first operating port 62 is made to win a prize and the game form is aimed at winning a big hit. In the winning / failing lottery of the first special figure performed by winning a prize in 62, the special result is not included in the result type. Therefore, if the first time-saving gaming state A ends without the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs, the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving gaming state disappears. In this case, the total number of special figure game times in which the time-saving game state can be played is 70 times, and the total number of times remains smaller than in the case where the result is a special out-of-game result.

In other words, the closer to the end of the 1st time-saving game state A, the greater the profit when the special out-of-game result is won, but the risk that the 1st time-shortening game state A ends and the remaining number of times cannot be increased increases accordingly. It will be. As a result, the game is played in a conflict between the expectation that the winning timing of the special loss result is later than the earlier, and the frustration that the special loss result must be assigned before the end of the first short game state A. It can be entertained, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first time-saving game state A.

In this modification, since the transition determination of the third time-saving game state is performed after the update of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is completed, the case where the first time-saving game state A is switched to the third time-saving game state is performed. In, after the switching is performed, the remaining number of times can be subtracted after the next special figure game round. Therefore, it is possible to preferably secure 50 times as the remaining number of times after shifting to the third time-shortened gaming state.

Next, the flow of the gaming state based on the first time-saving gaming state B (the first time-saving gaming state with an upper limit of 100 times) will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

In this modification, in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving game state A, the first time-saving game state B is set as the type of the first time-saving game state that shifts when the jackpot result is won. In this first time-saving game state B, the upper limit is 100 times, which is larger than that of the first time-saving game state A. The range of is different from that of the first short game state A. Specifically, even if the special figure game result is obtained in the 1st to 50th special figure game times, it does not shift to the 3rd time saving game state, and if the special figure game result is obtained in the 51st to 100th special figure game times, The third time short game state is entered and the remaining number of times is rewritten to 50 times (FIGS. 176 (c) and 176 (d)).

For example, if only the first time-shortened game state A is set and the range of the special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs when a special deviation result is obtained is fixed, at what timing. There is a risk that the player will be able to know in advance whether the profitability for himself / herself will be higher if the special deviation result is assigned, and the interest in other game times will be diminished. In this regard, in this modification, the range of the special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-shortening game state occurs when the special deviation result is obtained is diversified, so at what timing the special deviation result should be assigned to the game. It is not always possible to determine whether the profitability for a person will be high. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's attention from concentrating on the same game in the first time-saving game state of each time, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the first time-saving game state.

Here, in this modification, it is configured so that it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. Specifically, as described above, the selection mode of the variable display time (variable display pattern) is common to the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, and each of these time-saving gaming states is used. It is configured so that a common effect is executed as a start effect in the case of transition.

For example, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the case of the configuration in which the remaining number image 472 is displayed on the symbol display device 75 together with the title image 473 such as "chance time" in the start effect, the first time saving game state A is used. The title image 473 and the remaining number of times image 472 having the same contents are displayed in both the first time-shortened game state B. That is, even when the shifted first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B, the same number of times as in the case of the first time-saving game state A is notified as the initial remaining number of times.

The remaining number of times image 472 has the same display content as in the case of the first time-shortened game state A not only at the start effect but also in the subsequent special figure game times in the first time-shortened game state B. In the case of the first time-saving game state B, when the number of special figure game times reaches the 70th time, a predetermined additional effect (for example, the additional effect of FIG. 130 (c)) is executed. As a result, the increase in the remaining number of times corresponding to the difference (30 times) from the first time-saving game state A is notified, and the matching with the actual remaining number is attempted.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a background image for the first time-saving gaming state different from that for the normal gaming state is set as the background image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the background images are set to the first time-saving gaming state A and the first. It may be shared with the one-time short game state B. Further, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of types of display modes of each symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set according to the type of the gaming state, each of the same display modes in the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. It may be configured to display a symbol.

In order to make it impossible or difficult to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, it is not always necessary to implement all of the above configurations, and at least one of them should be implemented. Just do it.

As described above, by providing multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit times, the range of special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs when a special out-of-time result is obtained is uniformly determined. However, since it is impossible or difficult to determine each of the first time-shortened game states, various enjoyments according to the number of special figure game times after the transition to the first time-shortened game state are as follows. Can be given.

First, in zone A (FIG. 176 (e)) where the first to twentieth special figure game rounds are performed, the first time-shortened game state A or the first time-shortened game state B shifted after the open / close execution mode is changed. In any case, if the special out-of-game result is won, the transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur. In this zone A, since the remaining number of times is not added, the player can enjoy the game only with the aim of achieving a big hit result. In line with this, in the game rounding effect performed by the symbol display device 75, there is a special reach out-of-A effect that notifies the winning (occurrence of addition) to the special out-of-order result, and a special reach out-of-B effect that is the ghost effect. None of these are executed (FIGS. 172 and 173).

In Zone B (FIG. 176 (e)) where the 21st to 50th special figure game rounds are performed, if the transitioned first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A, the special deviation result is obtained. If the player is elected to the third time-shortened game state and is in the first time-shortened game state B, the transition to the third time-shortened game state does not occur even if the special off result is won. Therefore, the zone B becomes a zone in which the first time-saving gaming state A is determined by the addition of the remaining number of times.

As a result, from the player's point of view, the total number of special figure game times in which the time-saving game state can be played becomes larger than the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A due to the addition, but on the contrary, the addition does not occur. As a result, the possibility of the first time-saving game state B, in which a larger number of times can be aimed as the total number of special figure game times in which the time-saving game state can be played, remains. Therefore, regardless of how much the total number of times has increased, the player who expects the total number of times to increase will be in a state where he / she can enjoy aiming at a big hit result or a special out-of-order result. In addition, for a player who wants to increase the total number of times as much as possible, he / she will be in a state where he / she can enjoy aiming at a big hit result while avoiding a special out-of-order result.

In zone B, in the game rounding effect of the symbol display device 75, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a special out-of-order result, the special reach out-of-A effect is executed, and in some cases where the result is a normal out-of-order result, it is special. The out-of-reach B effect is executed (FIGS. 172 and 173).

In zone C (FIG. 176 (e)) where the 51st to 60th special figure game rounds are performed, the shifted first time-saving game state is either the first time-shortening game state A or the first time-saving game state B. However, if the game is in the 1st time-shortened game state B, the winning timing for the special out-of-game result (the timing for shifting to the 3rd time-shortened game state) will be earlier. , The increase in the total number of times remains small. For this reason, for a player who wants to increase the total number of times as much as possible, he / she does not want to have a special out-of-order result, and can enjoy aiming at a big hit result while avoiding a special out-of-order result. It becomes a state.

In Zone D (FIG. 176 (e)) where the 61st to 70th special figure game rounds are performed, the shifted first time-saving game state is either the first time-shortening game state A or the first time-saving game state B. However, if the first time-shortening game state that has been transferred is the first time-shortening game state A, it will be the final stage, so the first time-shortening game state A will end. It becomes a state where the possibility of doing is increasing. For players who want to avoid ending the time-saving game state without adding the remaining number of times, while enjoying the thrill that the time-saving game state is likely to end, it can be enjoyed aiming for a big hit result or a special off result. It becomes a state.

In the zone D, when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a normal deviation result, the probability that the special reach out-of-B effect B effect is executed is increased (FIG. 173). As a result, the player sees the production while being harassed by whether the special loss result is won and the remaining number of times is added, or whether the special loss result is not won and the time saving game state ends as it is. Opportunities can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

If the transitioned first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B, it still belongs to the early category as the winning timing for the special off result, and the increase in the total number of times remains small. .. For this reason, for the player who desires a larger total number of times, the time-saving game state does not end while avoiding a special out-of-order result (the shifted first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B). That) is in the desired state.

In zone E (FIG. 176 (e)) where the 71st to 90th special figure game rounds are performed, it is determined that the shifted first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B. For the player, it will be in a state where it can be enjoyed aiming at a big hit result or a special off result.

In addition, when the transitioned first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B and the 70th special figure game time is reached, as already described, the upper limit number of times of the first time-saving game state A is reached. Performs an additional effect corresponding to the difference between. In this case, there is an effect that the number of notifications by the remaining number of times image 472 can be matched with the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state B, and the game in which the shifted first time-saving game state is considered to be the first time-saving game state A. There is also an advantage that the player or the player who does not know the game playability in advance can recognize the 71st and subsequent special figure game times as if the remaining number of times is added.

At that time, before executing the additional effect, the end effect corresponding to the end of the first time-saving game state may be executed. As a result, it is possible to give a stronger impression that the first short game state has ended.

Zone F (FIG. 176 (e)) where the 91st to 100th special figure game rounds are performed is the final stage of the first time-saving game state B, and the possibility that the first time-saving game state B ends is increasing. Will be. For the player, if the special off result can be won at this timing (if the remaining number of additions can be generated), it means that the maximum number of times can be obtained as the total number of times, and the first time saving game state B ends. While enjoying the thrill that seems to be likely, you will be in a state where you can enjoy aiming for a big hit result or a special off result. In the zone F as well, as in the case of the zone D, the probability that the special reach out-of-reach B effect is executed when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a normal out-of-order result is increased (FIG. 173).

With the above configuration, it is possible to predict whether the shifted first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B, and at what timing the special deviation result can be assigned. If this is the case, the game can be enjoyed while predicting whether the total number of times can be increased, and the interest of the game can be appropriately enhanced.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, in which the range of the special figure game times in which the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is allowed to increase when a special out-of-time result is obtained, are provided. It was configured.

For example, if the special figure game times are fixed so that the remaining number of times can be increased (shift to the third time-shortened game state) when the special loss result is obtained, the special loss result can be obtained at any timing. In this case, the player can know in advance whether the number of remaining games will increase, and there is a risk that interest in other special game games will diminish. In this regard, since there are multiple first time-saving game states with different ranges of special figure game times that allow an increase in the remaining number of times of the special time-saving game state when a special time-saving game result occurs, the special time-saving game state is provided at any timing. As a result, it cannot be uniformly determined whether the remaining number of times will increase. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's attention from concentrating on the same special figure game times in the first time-saving game state of each time, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the first time-saving game state.

It is difficult or difficult for the player to determine whether the shifted first time-shortened game state is the first time-shortened game state A or the first time-shortened game state B without specifying the type of the first time-shortened game state. It was configured.

For example, if the configuration is such that the special figure game times in the allowable state (the state in which the increase in the remaining number of times is allowed) are clarified, a plurality of first time reductions in which the range of the special figure game times in such a state is different are different. Even if a game state is provided, there is a concern that the special figure game times to be noted in each first time-saving game state will be clarified, and the player's interest will be biased to a specific game time. In this regard, by making it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B, the player cannot or discriminates the range of the special figure game times that is the allowable state. Can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to entertain the game while letting the player predict which special figure game time is the allowable state in each 1st time-saving game state, and pay attention to the game throughout the 1st time-saving game state. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

After making the upper limit number of times of the first time saving game state B (for example, 100 times) larger than the upper limit number of times of the first time saving game state A (for example, 70 times), in the first time saving game state B, the first time saving game state A The configuration is such that the permissible state is included in the special figure game times (for example, the 71st to 100th special figure game times) after the upper limit number of times.

In this configuration, when the number of special figure game times after shifting to the time-saving game state becomes the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the first time-saving game state A (for example, 70 times), the game is played for the shifted first time-saving game state. If a person predicts that it is in the first time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state will end when the upper limit is reached, but on the other hand, if it is predicted that it is in the first time-saving game state B, It is possible to increase the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state by causing a special deviation result after the number of times corresponding to the above is exceeded, which is a desirable situation for the player. For this reason, when the number of special figure game times approaches the corresponding number of times in the first time-saving game state, there is anxiety that the time-saving game state will end, and the special deviation result after the number of times is exceeded. It is possible to play in a conflict with the expectation that the number of remaining times will be increased efficiently by winning the prize, and it will be possible to appropriately enhance the interest.

A common special figure game times (1st to 20th times) are provided in which the remaining number of times is not added even if a special deviation result occurs in the 1st time reduction game state A and the 1st time reduction game state B.

According to this configuration, in the above-mentioned common special figure game times, the remaining number of times is not added regardless of whether the shifted time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B. It is possible to secure a period in which a person can concentrate on a game aiming at a big hit result without worrying about the type of time-saving game state or winning a special out-of-game result.

In the above case, the above-mentioned common special figure game times in which the remaining number of times is not added even if the special loss result is obtained, and other special figure game times in which the remaining number of times is added when the special loss result is obtained. May be configured so that the player can discriminate. For example, it is conceivable that the background image or the like on the symbol display device 75 is different between the common special figure game times and the other special figure game times.

If a special loss result is obtained in the first time-shortened game state A or the first time-shortened game state B and the remaining number of times is added, the addition of the remaining number of times is limited even if the special loss result is obtained again in the time-saving game state after the addition. It was configured to be.

In this configuration, the addition of the remaining number of times based on the winning of the special loss result is limited to only once in the transitioned time-saving gaming state, so the addition may occur earlier in the transitioned time-saving gaming state. It is possible to make a big difference in the total number of game times in which the time-saving game state can be played depending on whether it occurs late. As a result, the importance of the timing resulting in the special deviation can be enhanced, and each effect of each of the above configurations can be suitably enhanced.

If a special deviation result occurs in the 1st time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the 1st time-shortening game state at that time is compared with the upper limit number of times in the 3rd time-saving game state, and the time-saving game on the side with the larger number of times is compared. The configuration is such that the state is prioritized.

According to this configuration, in the case of a special deviation result (when the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving game state is established), if the remaining number of times at that time is larger, the first time-saving game state is continued. On the contrary, if the upper limit number of times of the third time-shortened game state is larger, the switching from the first time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is performed. As a result, regardless of the timing of the special deviation result, it is possible to always shift to the time-saving gaming state on the side that is advantageous to the player.

Further, by adopting the above configuration, a pachinko machine having a plurality of time-saving gaming states having different ranges of gaming times to which an increase in the remaining number of time-saving gaming states is allowed when a special deviation result occurs can be achieved with a simple configuration. Moreover, it can be realized by simple control. That is, the above comparison and priority processing (step Sb4803) while performing end management for a plurality of time-saving game states (first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B) having different upper limit times by the existing control method. Since it is sufficient to add the above, it is possible to prevent the configuration and control processing from becoming complicated.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples thereof, either the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is provided, but in the present modification, both of the time-saving gaming states are provided. .. Further, in this modification, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving gaming state is restricted when any of the time-saving gaming states is in progress. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 190.

<Winning / failing table for special game games>
In this modification, the hit / miss table for the first special figure and the second special figure (for low probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the first special figure and the second special figure (high probability) are used as the hit / miss tables for the special figure game. (For mode) and. Each of these hit / miss tables is stored in the hit / miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The winning / failing table for the first special drawing and the second special drawing (for the low probability mode) is a winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Some are referenced when doing. In the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the first special figure and the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the value of the random number to be a big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) is "0". A total of 10 pieces of "9" are set, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Further, a total of 10 random numbers "10" to "19" are set as the values of the random numbers that result in the special deviation, and the probability of the special deviation result in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random value values are usually assigned to the out-of-normal results, and the probability of the out-of-normal results in the low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The winning / failing table for the first special drawing and the second special drawing (for the high probability mode) is a winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Some are referenced when doing. In the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first special figure and the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are used as jackpot random numbers. Is set, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/60. In the hit / miss table for the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure (for high probability mode), the special deviation result is not set as the lottery result, and all the values other than the random value for the big hit are assigned to the normal deviation result. Has been done. The probability of an out-of-order result is usually set to 59/60.

<Special figure game type table>
The type table of the special figure game times according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 179.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 179 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 179 (b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in four round games being performed.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high-probability gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving gaming state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 179 (b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results result in 10 round games being performed.

The 10R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to a high probability gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability game state in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

The 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to the first time-saving game state after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Here, in this modification, apart from the first time-saving game state in which the game shifts with the big hit as a trigger, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state in which the game shifts without the big hit as a trigger are provided.

Of these, the second time-saving game state is a time-saving game state in which the number of game times (out-of-game times) resulting in the loss reaches a predetermined number of ceilings (for example, 800 times). In this second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the second time-saving game state is a predetermined fifth upper limit number (for example, 500 times). Will continue until you reach.

The number of ceilings in this modification is set to a number larger than the upper limit number (number of continuations) of the first time-saving gaming state that shifts when the 4R normal jackpot result or the 10R normal jackpot result is obtained. Therefore, it is avoided that the number of times of the off-game game reaches the number of times of the ceiling during the first short-time game state.

The third time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that shifts when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becomes a special out-of-order result. As shown in FIG. 179 (d), in this third time-shortened game state, the number of executions of the special figure game times after the transition to the third time-shortened game state is the sixth upper limit number (6), which is smaller than the fifth upper limit number. For example, it is continued until it reaches 300 times). That is, the third time-saving game state has a smaller number of continuations than the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is more advantageous for the player. In this modified example, there is only one type of third time-saving gaming state.

<Migration process at the end of open / close execution mode>
The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180. This process is executed in step Sb915 of the game state transition process (FIG. 114) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of FIG. 116. In FIG. 180, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 116, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb1101, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb1102. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the first upper limit number of times is set in the probability variation counter area KC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1104, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

In step Sb5101, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the first upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. In step Sb1108, a high-probability game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1101 (when the jackpot result this time is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, and the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. As a result, the game shifts to the first short game state.

In step Sb5102, a value (for example, 100) corresponding to the second upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb1113, the first time-saving game state start command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

<Special figure game times control process>
The special figure game rotation control process according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 181. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (FIG. 107), and is executed in place of the special figure game time control process of FIG. 108. In FIG. 181, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 108, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb503 (when the special figure display unit 43 is not in variable display), it is determined in step Sb504 whether or not the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is not "0", that is, if the hold information of either the first special figure or the second special figure exists, the process proceeds to step Sb505 and the data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area Ra or the second special figure hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb5201, the variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure display unit 43 is executed, and then the special figure game round control process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation start processing in step Sb5201 will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb507 (when the variation display time has elapsed), the variation display flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 is cleared in step Sb509. In step Sb510, the high-probability mode update / end process for updating the remaining number of times of the high-probability mode and ending the high-probability mode is executed.

In the following step Sb5202, the high-frequency support mode termination process for terminating the high-frequency support mode is executed. In step Sb5203, the time-saving game state transition process for performing the transition process to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is executed. In step Sb5204, a definite display start process for starting the definite display on the special figure display unit 43 is executed, and then the special figure game round control process is terminated. Details of steps Sb5202 to Sb5204 will be described later.

<Variation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing of step Sb5201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 182. In FIG. 182, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those of the variation start process of FIG. 146, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the process of step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, in step Sb3304, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step Sb3305, and the jackpot type is drawn by referring to the corresponding type table (FIG. 179).

In step Sb3306, the type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot is not won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special deviation result. If it is a special deviation result, the special deviation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb3310. In step Sb3311, a stop result for special deviation is set as a stop result of the pattern that is variablely displayed on the special figure display unit 43.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb3308 (when it is not a special deviation result), it means that the result of this winning / failing lottery is a normal deviation result. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb3312, and a stop result for normal disengagement is set.

After the execution of step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, in step Sb5301, a high-frequency support mode update process for updating the number of special figure game times in the high-frequency support mode is executed. In step Sb5302, a process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened gaming state for determining whether or not the transition trigger of the second time-shortened gaming state has been established is executed, and in step Sb5303, the transition trigger of the third time-shortened gaming state is executed. The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state for determining whether or not the game has been established is executed. Details of steps Sb5301 to Sb5303 will be described later.

In step Sb3313, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is executed. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is drawn by using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table.

In this modification, as a variation pattern when a deviation result (special deviation result or normal deviation result) is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the first special figure, a complete deviation effect or various reach deviation effects when the normal deviation result is obtained. In addition to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the above, as shown in FIG. 183, a fluctuation pattern R1 (for example, 18 sec) for reaching the ceiling and a fluctuation pattern R2 (for example, 15 sec) for a special deviation result are set.

The variation pattern R1 is selected by the game times when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is the result of the deviation and the number of deviations reaches the number of ceilings. When the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern R1 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the effect for reaching the ceiling as the effect for game rotation. In the ceiling reaching effect, the arrival notification effect for notifying the arrival of the number of ceilings is executed after the disengagement result is notified by the complete disengagement effect using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, instead of or in addition to the arrival notification effect, at least a part of the start effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (for example, the start effect of FIG. 130A) may be performed.

The variation pattern R2 is selected when the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result. When the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern R2 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach out effect as a game rotation effect. The special reach out-of-reach effect is for notifying that a special out-of-reach result has occurred, and is the same as the special reach out-of-reach effect in FIG. 153 according to the above-mentioned modification 3.

In this modified example, even if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special result, the transition to the third time-saving game state may be restricted. The variation pattern R2 is selected when the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state occurs among the cases where the special deviation result occurs, and when the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, the above-mentioned modification 3 The variation pattern corresponding to the completely out-of-order effect is selected.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 182), after the execution of step Sb3313, the variation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb712. The variation display flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the variation display of the special figure game times is in progress. After the execution of step Sb712, the processes after step Sb713 are executed.

Next, the process for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301, the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302, and the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 will be described. These processes are executed in the variation start process, in other words, are executed when the variation display in the special figure game is started.

<Process for updating high frequency support mode>
The process for updating the high frequency support mode in step Sb5301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb5401, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a big hit result. If it is not a big hit result, it is determined in step Sb5402 whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The first support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the second support flag indicates that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state, and the third support flag indicates the current gaming state. It indicates that the state is the third short game state.

If these flags are set, the process proceeds to step Sb5403, and the values of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 are updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is subtracted by 1. As a result, the remaining number of times in each time-saving game state is subtracted by 1.

In step Sb5404, it is determined whether or not the value of the support counter area SC is “0”. When the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, when the number of times the game has been executed in each time-saving game state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb5405 and the various flag storage areas 314e described above. Set the time saving end flag to. The time saving end flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that each time saving game state should be ended.

After the execution of step Sb5405, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If an affirmative decision is made in step Sb5401 (a jackpot result) or a negative decision is made in step Sb5402 (when neither support flag is set), it is assumed that the remaining number of times in each time saving game state is not updated, and step Sb5403 The high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb5404 (when the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is assumed that each time saving game state should not be terminated, and the high frequency support mode is performed without executing the process of step Sb5405. End the update process.

<Process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb5302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 185.

First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a big hit result. If it is not a big hit result, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, and it is determined whether or not the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The reached flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the number of missed games has reached the number of ceilings.

If the reached flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5503 whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb5504, and the value of the out-of-number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. .. Specifically, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is subtracted by 1. The number-of-off counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, and the reached flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. ..

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5508, and then the flag for starting the second time reduction is set. The process for determining the transition to the second short game state is terminated. The second time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the second time reduction game state should be entered.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5507 (when any of the support flags is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5509 to determine whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. When the time saving end flag is set, it means that it is the final game round of each time saving game state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb5508, and the second time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. That is, when the number of ceilings is reached in the final game round of each time-saving game state, it is processed as if the second time-saving game state should be entered.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5509 (when the time saving end flag is not set), that is, if the player is staying in another time saving game state and is not the final game round, the process shifts to the second time saving game state. As it should not be, the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5508. This limits the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

When affirmative judgment is made in step Sb5502 (when the reached flag is set) or when affirmative judgment is made in step Sb5503 (when the high probability flag is set), the processing after step Sb5504 is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the second short game state is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb5505 (when the value of the number-of-offs counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes after step Sb5506. ..

If an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb5501 (when the result is a big hit), the process proceeds to step Sb5510, and the value of the counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the number of ceilings (for example, 800). In step Sb5511, it is determined whether or not the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the reached flag is set, the process of clearing the reached flag is executed in step Sb5512. After the execution of step Sb5512 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb5511 (when the reached flag is not set), the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is terminated.

<Process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state>
The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 186.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the special off flag is set, that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is the special off result, the process proceeds to step Sb5602, and whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Judge whether or not.

When the high probability flag is not set, that is, when the game is not in the high probability gaming state, in step Sb5603, one of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine if it is set. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is either the first time-shortening gaming state, the second time-shortening gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, step Sb5604. It is determined whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (when neither support flag is set and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (time saving end flag is set and each time saving). In the case of the final game round in the game state), the process proceeds to step Sb5605, and it is determined whether or not the second time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the second time reduction start flag is not set, that is, if it is not a situation that should shift to the second time reduction game state, the third time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5606. After that, the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated. The third time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the third time reduction game state should be entered.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5605 (when the flag for starting the second time reduction is set), the process for determining the transition to the third time reduction gaming state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5606. That is, even if the result is a special deviation, if the state should be shifted to the second time-shortened gaming state, the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is restricted.

Therefore, if the number of times the ceiling is reached and the winning of the special off result are established in the same game times, the game state shifts to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state has a larger upper limit number of times than the third time-saving game state, and is an advantageous time-saving game state for the player. However, with the above configuration, when both transition opportunities are established at the same time. It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state on the side that is advantageous to.

Here, in the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5302 (FIG. 185) and the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5303 (FIG. 186), the variable display of the special figure game times is started. (More specifically, before the variable display time setting process in step Sb3313) (FIG. 182).

Since these processes relate to the limitation of transition to the second time-shortened gaming state or the third time-shortened gaming state, originally, the transition timing to each of the time-shortened gaming states (the start timing of the definite display in the special figure game). It is natural to do it in. However, in such a configuration, when both reaching the number of ceilings and winning the special off result are established in the same game round, when setting the variable display time (variable pattern) in that game round, The MPU 312 recognizes only the special deviation result and does not recognize the arrival at the ceiling. Therefore, as the variation pattern of the game times, the variation pattern R2 (FIG. 183) corresponding to the special deviation result is inevitably set.

In the subsequent setting process of the variation start command in step Sb713 (FIG. 182), the variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern R2 is set. You will recognize the production. In other words, in the game state control, the ceiling arrival is prioritized over the special deviation result to shift to the second time-saving game state, but in the game rounding effect, the effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state (ceiling). Instead of the effect corresponding to the arrival (the effect corresponding to the arrival), the effect corresponding to the transition to the third time-saving game state (the effect of notifying the winning of the special loss result) will be performed. That is, there is a concern that the content of the game rotation effect may be inconsistent with the time-saving game state to be shifted, and that the player who sees the game rotation effect may misunderstand the time-saving game state to be transferred.

In such a case, the above-mentioned inconsistency can be resolved by performing exactly the same game rotation effect when the ceiling is reached and when the special off result is won. Despite the fact that various types of time-saving game states are provided, it cannot be utilized in the production, which is not preferable.

In this regard, in this modification, in order to execute the processes of steps Sb5302 and Sb5303 when the variation display of the special figure game times is started, the variation display time is in a state where the MPU 312 grasps the establishment of the ceiling arrival and the priority adoption. Can be set. Therefore, in the game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established, the setting of the variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special deviation result can be canceled and the variation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to the ceiling arrival can be set. As a result, even if a game rotation effect corresponding to reaching the ceiling and a game rotation effect corresponding to the special deviation result are provided separately, the game rotation effect matching the actual transition game state can be executed. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5601 (when the special off flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5602 (when the high probability flag is set), the process after step Sb5603 is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the third short game state is terminated.

Next, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181), the process for shifting to the time-saving game state in step Sb5203, and the process for starting the definite display in step Sb5204 will be described. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed in the special figure game round, in other words, are executed when the definite display in the special figure game round is started.

<Process for ending high frequency support mode>
The process for terminating the high frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 187.

First, in step Sb5701, it is determined whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the player is staying in any of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb5702 for the end of the time reduction. Determine if the flag is set. The time saving end flag indicates that the time saving game state during the stay should be ended, in other words, the special figure game this time is the final special figure game in the time saving game state during the stay. It indicates that it is a round.

If the time saving end flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb5703, and the support flags set in the various flag storage areas 314e are cleared. As a result, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state ends. In the following step Sb5704, the time saving end flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared.

In step Sb5705, the corresponding game state end command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 143, and then the high-frequency support mode end process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step Sb5701 (when neither support flag is set) or a negative determination is made in step Sb5702 (when the time saving end flag is not set), the processing after step Sb5703 is executed. The process for terminating the high frequency support mode is terminated without doing so.

<Process for transition to time-saving game state>
The process for shifting to the time-saving gaming state in step Sb5203 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 188.

First, in step Sb5801, it is determined whether or not the second time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The second time saving start flag indicates that the second time saving gaming state should be entered.

If the second time reduction start flag is set, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5802. As a result, the game shifts to the second short game state.

Here, in this modification, after executing the high-frequency support mode end process (process for terminating the time-saving game state) in step Sb5202, the time-saving game state transition process (process for shifting to the time-saving game state) in step Sb5203. It is configured to execute. For this reason, when the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the final game time in another time-saving game state, the preceding time-saving game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state without going through the normal game state. be able to.

In step Sb5803, a value (for example, 500) corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The support counter area SC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb5804, a second time-saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. The set second time-saving game state start command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (FIG. 107).

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5801 (when the second time reduction start flag is not set), the process proceeds to step Sb5805, and it is determined whether or not the third time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. do. The third time reduction start flag indicates that the third time reduction game state should be entered.

If the third time reduction start flag is set, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5806. As a result, the game shifts to the third short game state. In addition, when a special deviation result is obtained in the final game round in another time-saving game state, it is possible to seamlessly shift from the preceding time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without intervening the normal game state. ..

In step Sb5807, a value (for example, 300) corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb5808, a third time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143.

After the execution of step Sb5804 or step Sb5808, in step Sb5809, the time saving start flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e is cleared. In step Sb5810, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

When the second special figure flag is not set, that is, the special figure game times this time is the game times of the first special figure, and the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is from the normal game state. In the case of the transition of, the process for ending the normal drawing is executed in step Sb5811. This process is the same as the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the second time-saving gaming state transition process of FIG. 119.

After the execution of step Sb5811, the process for shifting to the time-saving game state is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb5810 (when the second special figure flag is set), the time-saving gaming state transition process is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5811. Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5805 (when the third time saving start flag is not set), that is, if the situation is not such that the time saving gaming state should be shifted, the time saving gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

Here, in this modification, in the end control and the transition control of the time-saving game state, the update process of the number of game times and the transition determination process of whether or not to shift to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state are performed. While the process of actually ending the time-saving game state and the process of shifting the game are performed at the start of the variable display, the process is performed after the variable display is completed.

When updating the number of times of the former or determining the migration at the start of the variation display, the processing timing of the latter end processing or migration processing is not set after the end of the variation, but is set to the same timing (processing times) as the former. Can be considered. From the viewpoint of processing efficiency, it is preferable to execute the processes together at the same timing rather than dividing the processes and distributing the execution timings.

However, if the end processing and the transition processing are performed at the start of the variable display, the Fuzu game times and the Fuden accessory 63a correspond to the time-saving game state before the winning / failing lottery result is notified in the special figure game times. There is a possibility that the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state can be inferred by the player observing these behaviors. Since the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state shifts when the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a losing result, in the above case, the player can grasp the losing result before the notification of the winning / failing lottery result. It leads to that. As a result, the expectation of a big hit may disappear at an early stage in the special figure game, which is not preferable for increasing the attention to the game.

In this regard, according to this modification, since the transition to the second time-shortening game state or the third time-saving game state occurs after the variation display is completed, the winning / failing lottery result is notified, and then the normal game times and the normal electric game are notified. The accessory 63a can be operated in a mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the result of the loss from being discriminated before the notification of the result of the winning / failing lottery, and it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation for the big hit.

<Process for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the final display in step Sb5204 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 189. In FIG. 189, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for the confirmation display start process of FIG. 149, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5901, it is determined whether or not the special figure game round this time is an out-of-ceiling game round. If it is not an off-game round that reaches the ceiling, it is determined in step Sb5902 whether or not a special off-flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

When the special deviation flag is set, that is, when the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery this time is the special deviation result, the process of clearing the special deviation flag is executed in step Sb5903. After the execution of step Sb5903 or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5901 (when the game is out of reach of the ceiling), it means that there is a transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state.

In this case, in step Sb5904, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. When the second special figure flag is set, that is, when the current special figure game is the second special figure game, in step Sb5905, the fixed display time in the current special figure game is usually set. Set the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5902 (when the special deviation flag is not set), that is, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a big hit result or a normal deviation result, the process proceeds to step Sb5905 and this confirmation is made. The above-mentioned normal confirmed display time is set as the display time.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb5904 (when the second special figure flag is not set), that is, when the special figure game time this time is the game time of the first special figure, the second time saving game state or the third It means that the transition to the time-saving gaming state is the transition from the normal gaming state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb5906, and a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time in the special figure game round this time. At this time, the specific definite display time may be longer (for example, 0.8 sec) than the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the forced termination of the normal game game as in the second embodiment. However, as in the above modification 2, the fixed display time of the normal map game times to be forcibly terminated, the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state, and the second. The time may be longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) with the definite display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal drawing game times corresponding to the two-time shortened game state.

After the execution of step Sb5905 or step Sb5906, the confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb1504, and then the processes of step Sb1505 and step Sb1506 are sequentially executed.

In step Sb3512, a game round execution signal for notifying the execution of the special figure game round and a lottery result signal for notifying the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery are output to the management control device on the game hall side. External signal setting processing for. In this modified example, if a special deviation result is obtained in the situation of the time-saving gaming state, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, but in the external signal setting processing, the special deviation result is obtained even in such a case. Set so that the external signal corresponding to is output.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 190.

When the number of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings in the normal game state (event A), the game shifts from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the effect for reaching the ceiling (FIG. 183) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game. In the ceiling arrival effect, a complete off effect by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a arrival notification effect for notifying the arrival of the number of ceilings are executed.

Here, in this modification, the number of missed counter area HC is updated (updated the number of missed game times) at the start of the variation display in the special figure game round (FIG. 182, FIG. 185), but the number of missed game images 475. The update of the number of deviations in (FIG. 128) is performed after the confirmed display time has elapsed in the special figure game round, as in the second embodiment.

For example, if the number of times of display of the number of times of loss image 475 is updated at the update timing of the number of times of loss counter area HC, the number of times of display of the number of times of loss image 475 is incremented by 1 before the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, there is a concern that the player can predict the result of the loss before the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and it becomes difficult to maintain the expectation for the big hit in the special figure game. be.

In this respect, as in this modification, the update timing of the deviation count image 475 is delayed with respect to the update timing of the deviation count counter area HC, and the deviation count image 475 is updated after the confirmed display time has elapsed. The flow may be such that the number of times the image 475 is displayed is incremented by 1 after the result of the loss is notified by the columns Z1 to Z3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of the deviation in advance, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the big hit.

In the above configuration, if there is hold information corresponding to the next special figure game, the missed number image 475 will be updated when the special figure game starts, and the next special figure game will be updated. If the hold information corresponding to the above does not exist, the loss count image 475 is updated after the special figure game round in which the loss count counter area HC is updated is completed.

It should be noted that the update of the disengagement number image 475 does not necessarily have to be performed when the fixed display time has elapsed, and may be performed at another timing. That is, in order to avoid the advance prediction of the deviation result, it is sufficient to update the deviation count image 475 after the hit / fail lottery result is notified by the stop display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, so that the deviation count counter area HC is updated. In the special figure game round, the number of deviations image 475 may be updated at any timing in the period from the end of the variable display to the end of the finalized display.

When a special deviation result is obtained in a situation of a normal gaming situation (event B), the normal gaming state is shifted to the third time-shortening gaming state. In this case, in the special figure game times that result in the special loss, the special reach loss effect (FIG. 183) is executed by the symbol display device 75.

If a special out-of-game result is obtained in a game other than the final game in the first time-shortening game state or the second time-shortening game state (event C), the transition to the third time-shortening game state is restricted, and the first time-shortening game state. Alternatively, the second short game state is continued. In this case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special deviation result, the complete deviation effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game rotation effect. In the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed.

When a special deviation result is obtained in the final game round of the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state (event D), the state shifts from the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. In addition, when the game times that result in the special deviation is the final game times of each time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted is the update process of the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (step). Sb5301 high-frequency support mode update process) is executed to recognize the end of the time-saving game state, and then the third time-saving game state transition determination process (step Sb5303 third time-saving game state transition determination process) is performed. To do it.

In the above case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special loss result, the special reach loss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game turn effect. Further, an additional effect (for example, an additional effect of FIG. 130 (c)) for notifying that the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode has increased is executed at least a part of the confirmed display time in the special figure game. At this time, the number of additions notified by the addition effect is the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state (for example, 300 times).

When the number of missed games reaches the ceiling number in games other than the final game in the third time-shortened game state (event E), the transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted, and the third time-shortened game state is changed. Will be continued. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the completely off effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game.

When the number of missed games reaches the number of ceilings in the final game in the third time-shortened game state (event F), the state shifts from the third time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the effect for reaching the ceiling is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game. In addition, the above-mentioned additional effect is executed at least a part of the fixed display time in the special figure game.

In this modified example, since the upper limit of the number of times of the first time-shortened game state is set to a number smaller than the number of times of the ceiling, the number of times of the off-game game reaches the number of times of the ceiling in the middle of the first time-shortened game state or in the final game time. However, when the upper limit number of times of the first time-saving game state and the number of ceilings are set to the same number as in the second embodiment, the result is lost in the final game time of the first time-saving game state. As a result, the state shifts from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state.

When the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established in the same special figure game times in the normal game state (event G), the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state (process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb5302). ) → The process is executed in the order of the transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state (the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5303), so that the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is prioritized. That is, when the time-saving game state is in progress, the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is restricted. By being determined, the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is restricted in the subsequent transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the transition to the third time-saving gaming state on the disadvantageous side for the player and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side.

In this case, in the special figure game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established, the ceiling arrival effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game time effect. In the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The second time-saving game state, which shifts when the number of out-of-game times becomes the number of ceilings, and the time-saving game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, are triggered by a special out-of-game result. In the configuration having the third time-shortening gaming state to be shifted as, even if a special deviation result occurs in the middle of the second time-shortening gaming state, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, and then the special feature of 1. In the game round, the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed, and then the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state is performed.

According to this configuration, when the number of times the ceiling is reached and the winning of the special loss result are established in the same special figure game times, the condition for shifting to the second time-saving game state is determined by the transition judgment of the second time-saving game state. Even if it is determined that the condition for transitioning to the third time-shortened gaming state is satisfied by the transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state after the establishment of the above-mentioned restriction is made, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is avoided due to the above restrictions. .. As a result, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

The configuration is such that the transition determination of the second time-shortened game state and the transition determination of the third time-shortened game state are performed at the start of the special figure game round.

In the above configuration, since the transition determination of the second time-shortening game state and the transition determination of the third time-shortening gaming state are performed at the start of the special figure game round, as a game rounding effect, a ceiling reaching effect corresponding to the arrival of the number of ceilings is performed. , Each of these transition determinations can be made before the execution of the special reach deviation effect corresponding to the special deviation result is set. For example, if the achievement of the number of ceilings and the winning of the special defeat result are established in the same special figure game times, both the above ceiling reaching effect and the special reach defeat effect are established as the execution targets of the game round effect. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to select each of the above effects based on the fact that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is avoided and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized. .. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state of the transition destination is adjusted to either one, it becomes possible to suitably execute the game rotation effect that matches the adjusted time-saving gaming state of the transition destination.

While the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state and the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state are performed at the start of the special figure game times, the transition to each of the time-saving gaming states is performed at the start of the confirmation display.

If the transition judgment of the second time-saving game state or the transition judgment of the third time-saving game state is executed to shift to each of the time-saving game states or the time-saving game state of the transition destination is determined, the time reduction is performed according to the determination result. It is in a state of only shifting to the game state (just setting the time saving flag corresponding to the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314). Therefore, in the configuration in which each of these transition determinations is performed at the start of the special figure game round, it is natural that the transition to the time-saving game state is also performed at the start of the special figure game round.

However, if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed at the start of the special figure game round, the player's interest shifts to the transition to the time-saving gaming state even before the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is notified. There is a concern that the role of the game will not be played properly. In this regard, by performing the transition to the time-saving game state after waiting for the start of the confirmation display, even if the player may notice the time-saving game state from the behavior of the general electric accessory 63a, the special figure winning / failing lottery will be held. It is possible to make the configuration in which attention is paid to the game times until the result is notified, and then the interest shifts to the transition to the time-saving game state. Therefore, while suppressing the loss of attention to the game rounds, each of the above transition determinations is executed at the start of the special figure game rounds, and the game rounds effect that matches the adjusted time-saving game state of the transition destination is executed. It will be possible to do.

In addition, the conditions for shifting to the second time-shortened gaming state and the conditions for shifting to the third time-shortened gaming state are both satisfied when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is out of order. For this reason, if the transition to the time-saving game state is performed at the start of the special figure game round, the player is out of the awareness of the time-saving game state even before the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is notified. There is also the inconvenience of being able to determine in advance. In this respect, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience by performing the transition to the time-saving gaming state after waiting for the start of the confirmation display.

After the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is updated, the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state and the transition determination of the third time-saving gaming state are performed.

According to this configuration, for example, when a special deviation result is obtained in the final game round of the second time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state is terminated in the final game round, and then the third time-shortened game state is reached. Can be migrated to. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the winning of the special out-of-order result is invalidated and the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state is restricted, and the second time-saving without intervening the special figure game times in the normal gaming state. It becomes possible to switch from the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

Set the execution of the special reach out-of-reach effect (notification corresponding to the special out-of-time result or the transition to the third time-saving game state) based on the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery as related to the transition to the third time-saving game state. In the case of providing a process (step Sb3313) and a process of updating the number of missed game times (step Sb5504) as related to the transition to the second time-saving game state, one game round (special result of the missed game) is provided. In the figure game times), the latter update process is configured to be performed before the former setting process is performed.

For example, if the former setting process is executed prior to the latter update process, in the special figure game times in which both the arrival at the number of ceilings and the winning of the special off result are established, at the stage of the setting process, The pachinko machine 10 is in a state of recognizing only the winning of the special off result and not recognizing the arrival of the number of times of the ceiling. In this case, the setting result is that the special reach out-of-reach effect is inevitably executed, but since the time-saving game state that actually shifts is adjusted to the second time-saving game state, the notification that does not match the time-saving game state of the adjustment destination is notified. It will be done. In this regard, by executing the latter update process prior to the former setting process, the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the number of times the ceiling has been reached at the stage of the setting process, and the execution of the special reach out-of-reach effect can be canceled. .. As a result, it is possible to adjust the time-saving game state of the transition destination while suppressing the notification inconsistent with the type of the time-saving game state that actually shifts in the special figure game times, and the control of the game state is suitable. It will be possible to do.

If the cumulative number of missed games does not reach the number of ceilings and the result is a special missed game, the execution of the special reach missed effect is set after the number of missed games is updated. That is, when only the condition for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the corresponding notification can be appropriately performed.

The symbol display device 75 displays the image 475 of the number of deviations, and the display content is updated after the confirmed display time has elapsed.

In the above configuration, by displaying the image of the number of times of disengagement, the player can grasp the progress of the cumulative number of times and the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings, which is useful information for advancing the subsequent game. can do. In this case, in the configuration in which the update processing of the number of deviations is performed prior to the setting of the notification corresponding to the special deviation result, the update processing is performed at a relatively early stage in the special figure game. In such a case, if the display content of the loss count image 475 is immediately updated in response to the update of the loss count, the player is missed even before the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is notified. There is a concern that it will be possible to determine that it is the result. In this respect, by waiting for the update of the image 475 of the number of deviations until the end of the confirmation display, it is possible to prevent the deviation result from being able to be determined in advance. As a result, the expectation for the big hit can be maintained, and it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention to the game times.

<Modification 7>
In the above modification 6, even if the ceiling is reached or the special deviation result occurs during the time saving game state, the transition to the second time saving game state or the third time saving gaming state is restricted, but in this modification, these transitions are made. It is configured to be acceptable. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the second embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the winning / failing table and the type table of the special figure game times in this modification is the same as the winning / failing table and the type table of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Further, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are the same as the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIG. 179. That is, the number of continuations is larger in the second time-saving game state than in the third time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state is more advantageous for the player.

<Variation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game times control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the variation start process of FIG. 182. In FIG. 191, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 182, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each winning / failing lottery result, in step Sb5301 to update the number of special figure game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb6101, a process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened gaming state for determining whether or not the transition trigger of the third time-shortened gaming state has been established is executed, and in step Sb6102, the transition trigger of the second time-shortened gaming state is executed. The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state for determining whether or not the game has been established is executed. That is, in the above-mentioned modification 6, the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened game state is executed, and then the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened game state is executed. After executing the determination process, the transition determination process for the second time-saving game state is executed. Details of steps Sb6101 and Sb6102 will be described later.

After the execution of step Sb6102, in step Sb3313, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is executed. Also in this modification, the variation pattern R1 (for example, 18 sec) for reaching the ceiling and the variation pattern R2 (for example, 15 sec) for the special deviation result are set as in the above modification 6 (FIG. 183). .. After the execution of step Sb3313, the processes after step Sb712 are executed.

<Process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state>
The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 192, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state of FIG. 186, and the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. When the special off flag is set, it is determined in step Sb5602 whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb6201 whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is either the first time-shortening gaming state, the second time-shortening gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, step Sb6202. The time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. That is, in this modification, if a special deviation result occurs in the situation of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, the time-saving game state during the stay is terminated. There is.

After the execution of step Sb6202 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb6201 (when none of the support flags are set), the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb6203, and then. , The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated. The third time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the third time reduction game state should be entered.

<Process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 193, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state of FIG. 185, and the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb5503 (when the high probability flag is not set), the value of the out-of-country counter area HC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb5504. In step Sb5505, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, and the reached flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. ..

In step Sb6301, it is determined whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is either the first time-shortening gaming state, the second time-shortening gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, step Sb6302. The time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

After the execution of step Sb6302 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb6301 (when none of the support flags are set), is the third time reduction start flag set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb6303? Judge whether or not. If the third time reduction start flag is set, that is, if the special figure game round that reaches the ceiling results in a special deviation, the process proceeds to step Sb6304 and the process of clearing the third time reduction start flag is performed. Run. As a result, the transition to the third time-saving game state is cancelled.

After the execution of step Sb6304 or when a negative determination is made in step Sb6303 (when the third time reduction start flag is not set), the second time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb6305. After that, the process for determining the transition to the second short game state is terminated. The second time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the second time reduction game state should be entered.

As described above, in this modification, when both the ceiling arrival and the special out-of-court result are established in the same game round, first, it is necessary to shift to the third time-saving game state based on the winning of the special out-of-court result. It is set, and then it is rewritten that it should shift to the second time saving game state based on the establishment of reaching the ceiling. The second time-saving game state has a larger upper limit number of times than the third time-saving game state, and is an advantageous time-saving game state for the player. However, with the above configuration, when both transition opportunities are established at the same time. It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state on the side that is advantageous to.

Further, in the high-frequency support mode update process of step Sb5301, the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6101, and the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6102, the variable display time of step Sb3313 is set. It is executed prior to processing. Therefore, in the special figure game in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established, the decision result that prioritizes the transition to the second time-saving game state can be reflected in the selection of the variable display time (variable pattern). .. Specifically, when the number of out-of-game rounds reaches the ceiling count at the same time as the special out-of-game result, the variation pattern R1 corresponding to the ceiling arrival is used as the variation pattern of the game rounds (Fig.). 183) can be set. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a game rotation effect that matches the game state to be transferred.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 194. Since the events A to B are the same as those of the event A to the event B in the modification 6, the description thereof will be omitted.

When a special deviation result is obtained in the situation of the first time-shortening game state or the second time-shortening game state (event C), the transition from each of those time-saving game states to the third time-shortening game state. In this case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special loss result, the special reach loss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game turn effect.

When the number of times of the off-games reaches the number of ceilings in the situation of the third time-shortened game state (event D), the state shifts from the third time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the effect for reaching the ceiling is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game.

When the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established in the same special figure game times in the normal game state (event E), the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state (process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb6101). ) → The process is executed in the order of the transition determination of the second time-shortened gaming state (the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6102), so that the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is prioritized. That is, when the transition opportunity is established during the time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is permitted. This is because even if the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is decided, the determination result is changed so that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is made later in the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the transition to the third time-saving gaming state on the disadvantageous side for the player and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side.

In this case, in the special figure game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established, the ceiling arrival effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game time effect. In the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The second time-saving game state, which shifts when the number of out-of-game times becomes the number of ceilings, and the time-saving game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, are triggered by a special out-of-game result. 1 In the special figure game round, the transition determination of the third time-shortening gaming state is performed, and then the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed.

According to this configuration, when the number of times the ceiling is reached and the winning of the special loss result are established in the same special figure game times, the transition to the third time reduction game state is made by the transition judgment of the third time reduction game state. Even if it is determined, the result of the previous transition determination of the third time-shortening gaming state can be canceled by subsequently determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state. .. As a result, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned modification 6 and modification 7, the order of the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state and the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state is fixed, but in this modification, the order is switched. It is configured to be possible. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the second embodiment and each modification, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, as in the case of the above modification 6, when the number of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings or the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a special out-of-time result in the situation of the time-saving game state, the second time reduction is performed. It is configured to limit the transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

Further, the configuration of the winning / failing table and the type table of the special figure game times in this modification is the same as the winning / failing table and the type table of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Further, the second time-saving game state in which the number of out-of-game times reaches the ceiling number is also the same as the second time-saving game state of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIG. 179.

However, in this modification, a plurality of types of special deviation results are set, and a plurality of types of the third time saving game state are also set.

<Type table for special off and 3rd time saving game state>
The type table for special deviation and the third time-saving gaming state according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 195.

In this modification, a type table for special deviation (for the first special figure) is provided as a type table different from the type table for big hits. The type table for special deviation (for the first special drawing) is a type table that is referred to when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special drawing becomes a special deviation result, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. ing.

As shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the special deviation type table (for the first special drawing), a special deviation result A and a special deviation result B are set as selectable special deviation types. The special deviation result A is a special deviation result that shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A, and the special deviation result B is a special deviation result that shifts to the third time-saving gaming state B.

As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state in which the number of executions of the special figure game is continued until the predetermined sixth upper limit number (for example, 300 times) is reached. .. The sixth upper limit number of times is less than the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 500 times) of the second time saving game state, and the second time saving game state is more advantageous for the player than the third time saving game state A. It is in a state.

The third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined seventh upper limit number (for example, 700 times). The 7th upper limit number of times is larger than the 5th upper limit number of times in the 2nd time saving game state, and the 3rd time saving game state B is more advantageous for the player than the 2nd time saving game state. ..

In the type table for special deviation (for the first special figure), "0" to "89" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the special deviation result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to the special deviation result B. are doing. That is, the probability of being distributed to the special deviation result A is set to 90%, and the probability of being distributed to the special deviation result B is set to 10%.

Although the special deviation result is set in the winning / failing lottery of the second special drawing (FIG. 178 (a)), only one type is set for the special deviation result of the second special drawing. That is, the type table for special deviation corresponding to the second special figure is not set. If a special miss result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state A. It should be noted that this configuration is for convenience in order to facilitate understanding and explanation, and a plurality of types of special deviation results of the second special figure may be set.

<Variation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game times control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the variation start process of FIG. 182. In FIG. 196, the same steps as those in FIG. 182 are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each winning / failing lottery result, in step Sb5301 to update the number of special figure game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb6501, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the special deviation flag is set, that is, if the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery this time is a special deviation result, the process proceeds to step Sb6502, and whether or not the type of the special deviation result is the special deviation result B is determined. judge. The special deviation result B is a trigger for the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B, and the third time-saving gaming state B is a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the second time-saving gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling. Is.

If the type of the special deviation result is not the special deviation result B, it means that it is the special deviation result A. The special deviation result A is a trigger for the transition to the third time-saving gaming state A, and the third time-saving gaming state A is a time-saving gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving gaming state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb6503 to execute the second time-saving gaming state transition determination process A, and then in step Sb6504, the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process A is executed.

The determination process A for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6503 and the determination process A for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6504 are the determinations for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state of step Sb5302 according to the above modification 6. This is the same as the process (FIG. 185) and the process (FIG. 186) for shifting the third time-shortening gaming state in step Sb5303. Therefore, if the number of ceilings is reached and the special loss result is won in the same game, and the type of special loss result is special loss result A, the time-saving game is reflected by reflecting the arrival of the number of ceilings. The transition process to the state is performed. That is, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state A is restricted, and it is determined that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state A is performed.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step Sb6501 (when the special deviation flag is not set), that is, when the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery this time is a normal deviation result, the process proceeds to step Sb6503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6502 (when the type of special deviation result is special deviation result B), the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process B is executed in step Sb6505, and then the third step Sb6506 is performed. 2 Executes the time-saving game state transition determination process B. That is, the processing is performed in the reverse order of the case where the negative determination is made in step Sb6502.

Here, the transition determination process B of the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 197, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state of FIG. 186, and the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 197, the third time-shortening gaming state transition determination process B in step Sb6505 is basically the same as the third time-shortening gaming state transition determination process in FIG. 186, but the process of step Sb5605 is performed. It differs in that it does not have. Step Sb5605 restricts the transition to the third time reduction gaming state when the second time reduction start flag is set (when the situation should shift to the second time reduction gaming state), but step Sb6505 In the third time-saving gaming state transition determination process B, such a process is not executed. That is, regardless of whether or not the situation should shift to the second time-saving gaming state, if the player is not staying in another time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state should be shifted to the third time-saving start state. Set the flag.

Next, the transition determination process B for the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 198. In FIG. 198, the same process as the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state of FIG. 185 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 198, the third time-shortening gaming state transition determination process B in step Sb6506 is basically the same as the second time-shortening gaming state transition determination process in FIG. 185, but the process of step Sb6601 is performed. It is different in that it has. Step Sb6601 limits the transition to the second time saving game state when the third time saving start flag is set. Therefore, if the number of ceilings is reached and the special loss result is won in the same game, and the special loss result type is special loss result B, the winning of the special loss result is reflected. The process of shifting to the time-saving game state is performed. That is, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is restricted, and it is determined that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B is performed.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 196), after the execution of step Sb6504 or step Sb6506, the variation display time setting process is executed in step Sb3313. In the variation display time setting process, when the number of missed game times has reached the ceiling count, the variation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to the ceiling arrival is set, and the winning / failing lottery result is a special missed result. Sets the variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special deviation result. However, if both reaching the number of ceilings and winning the special off result are established in the same game round, the fluctuation pattern is set in consideration of the decision result of which time-saving game state to shift to. do. Specifically, when it is decided to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation pattern R1 corresponding to the arrival at the ceiling is set, and when it is decided to shift to the third time-saving gaming state B. Sets the variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special deviation result. After the execution of step Sb3313, the processes after step Sb712 are executed.

<Process for transition to time-saving game state>
The time-saving game state transition process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 199. This process is executed in step Sb5203 of the special figure game times control process (FIG. 181), and is executed in place of the time-saving game state transition process of FIG. 188. In FIG. 199, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 188, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb5801 (when the second time reduction start flag is not set), it is determined in step Sb5805 whether or not the third time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. judge. If the third time reduction start flag is set, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5806. As a result, the game shifts to the third short game state.

In step Sb6701, it is determined whether or not the type of the special deviation result is the special deviation result B. If it is not the special deviation result B, that is, if it is the special deviation result A, the process proceeds to step Sb6702, and the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 has a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit (for example, 300). To set. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving gaming state A.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb6701 (when the special deviation result B is obtained), the process proceeds to step Sb6703, and a value (for example, 700) corresponding to the seventh upper limit is set in the support counter area SC. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transferred is set to the third time-saving gaming state B.

After the execution of step Sb6702 or step Sb6703, in step Sb6704, a third time saving game state start command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 143. At that time, when shifting to the third time-shortened game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state A is set, and when shifting to the third time-shortened game state B, it corresponds to the third time-shortened game state B. Set the start command. Each of these start commands contains information indicating the maximum number of times.

After the execution of step Sb5804 or step Sb6704, the process of clearing the time saving start flag is executed in step Sb5809. After that, the processes after step Sb5810 are executed.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 200. Since the event A is the same as the case of the event A in the modification 6, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B is obtained in the normal gaming situation (event B), the transition from the normal gaming state to the third time-shortening gaming state A or the third time-saving gaming state B occurs. In this case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special loss result, the special reach loss effect (FIG. 183) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game turn effect.

When the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B is obtained in the game times other than the final game times in the first time reduction game state or the second time reduction game state (event C), the third time reduction game state A or the third time reduction game The transition to the state B is restricted, and the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is continued. In this case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special deviation result, the complete deviation effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game rotation effect. In the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed.

When the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B is obtained in the final game round of the first time-shortening game state or the second time-saving gaming state (event D), the third time-saving gaming state A or the third time-saving gaming state A or the third from each of the time-saving gaming states. It shifts to the time-saving game state B. In this case, in the special figure game times resulting in the special loss result, the special reach loss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game turn effect.

When the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the game times other than the final game times in the third time-shortened game state A or the third time-shortened game state B (event E), the transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted. Then, the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B is continued. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the completely off effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game.

When the number of missed game times reaches the ceiling number in the final game times of the third time-shortened game state A or the third time-shortened game state B (event F), the second time-shortened game state from each of those third time-shortened game states. Move to. In this case, in the special figure game that has reached the ceiling, the effect for reaching the ceiling is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the effect for the game.

When the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result A are established in the same special figure game times in the normal game state (event G), the transition determination of the second time reduction game state (for the transition determination of the second time reduction game state in step Sb6503). By executing the processes in the order of process A) → determination of transition to the third time-saving gaming state (process A for determination of transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb6504), the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized. To. That is, when the time-saving game state is in progress, the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state A is restricted. Is determined, the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A is restricted in the subsequent transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the transition to the third time-saving gaming state A on the disadvantageous side of the player and to shift to the second time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side.

In this case, in the special figure game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result are established, the ceiling arrival effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game time effect. In the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result A is stopped and displayed.

When the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result B are established in the same special figure game times in the normal game state (event H), the transition judgment of the third time-shortening game state (for the transition judgment of the third time-shortening game state in step Sb6505). Processing B) → Transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state (processing B for transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb6506) is executed in this order, so that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B is prioritized. Will be done. That is, when the time-saving game state is in progress, the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state B is restricted. By determining the transition, the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is restricted in the later transition determination of the second time-shortened gaming state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the transition to the second time-saving gaming state on the disadvantageous side for the player and to shift to the third time-saving gaming state B on the advantageous side. In this case, in the special figure game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special off result are established, the special reach off effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game turn effect.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The second time-saving game state, which shifts when the number of out-of-game times becomes the number of ceilings, and the time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, are triggered by a special out-of-game result. In the configuration having the third time-saving game state B to be shifted as, even if a special deviation result occurs in the middle of the second time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-shortening game state B is restricted, and then 1 In the special figure game round, the transition determination of the third time-saving game state B (step Sb6505) is performed, and then the transition determination of the second time-saving game state (step Sb6506) is performed.

According to this configuration, when the number of times the ceiling is reached and the winning of the special loss result are established in the same special figure game times, the transition judgment of the third time reduction game state B is made to the third time reduction game state B. After it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, even if the transition judgment of the second time-saving gaming state determines that the transition condition to the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the above restriction avoids the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. Will be done. As a result, the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B on the advantageous side is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

It has a third time-shortening game state A, which is more disadvantageous than the second time-shortening game state, and a third time-shortening game state B, which is more advantageous than the second time-shortening game state. When the same special figure game times are established, the type of the special deviation result (type of the third time-saving game state of the transfer destination) is referred to, and the order of the transfer determination is switched based on the result.

According to this configuration, when the number of times the ceiling is reached and the winning of the special missed result are established in the same special figure game times, the type of the special missed result is the special missed result A (disadvantageous than the second time saving game state). (Type corresponding to the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A), the transition determination of the second time-shortened gaming state (step Sb6503) → the transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state A (step Sb6504). When the process is executed and the type of the special deviation result is the special deviation result B (the type corresponding to the transition to the third time-saving gaming state B, which is more advantageous than the second time-saving gaming state), the third time-saving gaming state. The process can be executed in the order of the transition determination (step Sb6505) of B → the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state (step Sb6506). With such a configuration, even in a situation where there are a plurality of third time-saving gaming states and a mixture of disadvantageous and advantageous ones as compared with the second time-saving gaming state, the time saving on the advantageous side is always achieved. It is possible to prioritize the transition to the gaming state.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, in the special figure game times in which the number of out-of-game games reaches the ceiling number and the condition for shifting to the second time-saving game state is satisfied, the determination process of whether or not to shift to the third time-saving game state is performed. It is configured not to run. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202.

In this modification, as in the above modification 8, when the number of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings or the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a special out-of-time result in a situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the second time reduction is achieved. It is configured to limit the transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

The winning / failing table, the jackpot type table, and the second time-saving game state of the special figure game in this modification are the same as the winning / failing table, the jackpot type table, and the second time-saving gaming state of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Is. Further, the special deviation type table and the third time saving gaming state in this modification are the same as the special deviation type table and the third time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 195. That is, it has a third time-shortening gaming state A and a third time-shortening gaming state B as the third time-shortening gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state A has a smaller upper limit number of times than the second time-shortening gaming state, and is a third time-shortening gaming state. B is in a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is larger than that in the second time-saving game state.

<Variation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game round control process (FIG. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the variation start process of FIG. 196. In FIG. 201, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each winning / failing lottery result, in step Sb5301 to update the number of special figure game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb7201, a process for determining the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is executed for determining whether or not to shift to the second time-shortened gaming state. This process is the same as the process for determining the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state of FIG. 185 according to the modification 6.

Explaining the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7201 with reference to FIG. 185, first, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery this time is a jackpot result. If it is not a big hit result, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, and it is determined whether or not the reached flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

If the reached flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5503 whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb5504, and the value of the off count counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, and the reached flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. ..

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set. If any of the support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5509 whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb5507 (when none of the support flags are set) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5509 (when a time saving end flag is set), the above-mentioned various flags are stored in step Sb5508. The second time reduction start flag is set in the area 314e. The second time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the second time reduction game state should be entered.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 201), after executing the process for determining the transition to the second time reduction game state in step Sb7201, in step Sb7202, the second time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Determine if it is set. If the flag for starting the second time reduction is not set, that is, if the situation is not such that the state should be shifted to the second time reduction gaming state, in step Sb7203, it is determined whether or not to shift to the third time reduction gaming state. The process for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state is executed. This process is the same as the process B for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state in FIG. 197 according to the above-mentioned modification 8.

Explaining the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7203 with reference to FIG. 197, first, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the special deviation flag is set, that is, if the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result (special deviation result A or special deviation result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602 and the above various flags are stored. It is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5603 whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .. When any of these support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5604 whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (when neither support flag is set and the current gaming state is a normal gaming state) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (a time saving end flag is set). In the case of the final game round in each time saving game state), the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5606. The third time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the third time reduction game state should be entered.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 201), if an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb7202 (when the second time reduction start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb7204, and the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Is set or not. When the special deviation flag is set, that is, when the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery this time is the special deviation result, the process of clearing the set special deviation flag is executed in step Sb7205.

After the execution of step Sb7203 and step Sb7205, or when a negative determination is made in step Sb7204 (when the special off flag is not set), in step Sb3313, this time in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS. The variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the game times of is executed. Also in this modification, the variation pattern R1 (for example, 18 sec) for reaching the ceiling and the variation pattern R2 (for example, 15 sec) for the special deviation result are set as in the above modification 6 (FIG. 183). .. After the execution of step Sb3313, the processes after step Sb712 are executed.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 202. Since the events A to F are the same as those of the event A to the event F in the modified example 8, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the processing is executed in the order of the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state (step Sb7201) → the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state (step Sb7203), and the transition determination of the second time-saving gaming state is performed. When the flag for starting the second time reduction is set in the processing, the execution of the processing for determining the transition of the third time reduction gaming state is avoided. Therefore, when the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result A or B are established in the same special figure game times in the normal game state (event G), the transition to the third time-saving game state A or B is restricted, and the normal game is performed. It shifts from the state to the second short game state.

In this case, in the special figure game times in which both the ceiling arrival and the special deviation result A or B are established, the ceiling arrival effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game time effect. At this time, on the special figure display unit 43, the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result A or B is stopped and displayed.

The third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, whereas the third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state. It is a gaming state, and each of the third time-saving gaming states has a configuration in which advantages and disadvantages differ in relation to the second time-saving gaming state. In this modification, regardless of the difference in the advantageous relationship, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized regardless of the type of the special deviation result established at the same time as reaching the ceiling. With such a configuration, the following effects can be expected.

Since the second time-saving game state shifts according to the cumulative number of out-of-game games, the player predicts the transition to the second time-saving game state before the out-of-game times reach the ceiling number (before the transition opportunity is established). It has the characteristic of being able to do it. For this reason, even though the off-game times have actually reached the number of ceilings and the transition opportunity has been established, if the transition to the second time-shortened game state is not performed, the transition to the second time-shortened game state has not occurred. It is easy for players to notice. In this case, there is a risk of being confused as to what happened to the ceiling, and even if the player shifts to another time-saving game state, there is a concern that it may give an unnatural impression that the game is not in the second time-saving game state. ..

On the other hand, in the third short-time game state, the transition is triggered by the winning of the special out-of-game result, and the transition is based on the conditions established in one game round. It is not possible to predict the transition to the 3 o'clock short game state. Therefore, even if the player is internally in a winning state for a special out-of-time result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state unless the player is positively notified of the winning state.

Based on these facts, if the opportunity to shift to the second time-saving gaming state and the trigger to shift to the third time-saving gaming state are established at the same time, and one of the time-saving gaming states must be selected, the third time-saving gaming state must be selected. It is considered that it is possible to make the limitation of the transition less noticeable to the player by limiting the transition to the time-saving gaming state and giving priority to the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, as in the present modification, by uniformly giving priority to the second time-saving game state regardless of advantages or disadvantages, it is possible to adjust the time-saving game state of the transition destination while suppressing the player's awareness.

In addition, even in the above-mentioned modification 6 and modification 7, in which only the third time-shortening game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, the number of ceilings is reached and the special deviation result is won. Is the same as this modification in that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is prioritized when the same game times are established. Therefore, the above effect is also applied to the configurations of the modification 6 and the modification 7. You can expect it.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, the winning / failing lottery result becomes a special out-of-order result, and the determination process of whether or not to shift to the second time-shortening gaming state is not executed in the special figure game times in which the transition condition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206.

In this modification, as in the above modification 8, when the number of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings or the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a special out-of-time result in a situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the second time reduction is achieved. It is configured to limit the transition to the gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

The winning / failing table, the jackpot type table, and the second time-saving game state of the special figure game in this modification are the same as the winning / failing table, the jackpot type table, and the second time-saving gaming state of the above-mentioned modification 6 shown in FIGS. 178 to 179. Is. Further, the special deviation type table and the third time saving gaming state in this modification are the same as the special deviation type table and the third time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 195. That is, it has a third time-shortening gaming state A and a third time-shortening gaming state B as the third time-shortening gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state A has a smaller upper limit number of times than the second time-shortening gaming state, and is a third time-shortening gaming state. B is in a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is larger than that in the second time-saving game state.

<Variation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 203. This process is executed in step Sb5201 of the special figure game round control process (FIG. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the variation start process of FIG. 196. In FIG. 203, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, that is, after setting the stop result corresponding to each winning / failing lottery result, in step Sb5301 to update the number of special figure game times in the high frequency support mode. Executes the process for updating the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb7501, a process for determining the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is executed for determining whether or not to shift to the third time-shortened gaming state. This process is the same as the process B for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state in FIG. 197 according to the above-mentioned modification 8.

Explaining the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7501 with reference to FIG. 197, first, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not the special off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the special deviation flag is set, that is, if the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result (special deviation result A or special deviation result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602 and the above various flags are stored. It is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined in step Sb5603 whether or not any of the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. .. When any of these support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5604 whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e.

When a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (when neither support flag is set and the current gaming state is a normal gaming state) or when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (a time saving end flag is set). In the case of the final game round in each time saving game state), the third time saving start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb5606. The third time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the third time reduction game state should be entered.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 203), after executing the process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb7501, it is determined in step Sb7502 whether or not to shift to the second time-saving gaming state. The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state for the purpose is executed. Details of step Sb7502 will be described later.

In the following step Sb3313, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is executed. Also in this modification, the variation pattern R1 (for example, 18 sec) for reaching the ceiling and the variation pattern R2 (for example, 15 sec) for the special deviation result are set as in the above modification 6 (FIG. 183). .. After the execution of step Sb3313, the processes after step Sb712 are executed.

<Process for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In FIG. 204, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state of FIG. 185, and the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb5503 (when the high probability flag is not set), it is determined in step Sb7601 whether or not the third time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the flag for starting the third time reduction is not set, that is, if it is not the situation that should shift to the third time reduction gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb7602, and whether the third support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Judge whether or not.

When the third support flag is set, that is, when the current gaming state is the third time saving gaming state, whether or not the time saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step Sb7603. Is determined. When the time saving end flag is set, it means that the special figure game time this time is the final game time in the third time saving game state.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb7602 (when the third support flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7603 (when the time saving end flag is set), various counters of the RAM 314 are set in step Sb7604. The value of the deviation count counter area HC provided in the area 314d is updated. Specifically, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is subtracted by 1. The number-of-off counter area HC is for the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings.

In step Sb7605, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation count counter area HC is “0”. When the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is "0", that is, when the number of times of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings, the process proceeds to step Sb7606, and the reached flags are set in the various flag storage areas 314e. ..

In step Sb7607, it is determined whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the first support flag is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step Sb7608, and whether or not the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. Is determined. When the time saving end flag is set, it means that the special figure game time this time is the final game time in the first time saving game state.

In this modified example, the upper limit of the number of times in the first time-shortening game state is set to be less than the number of ceilings (for example, 800 times) (for example, 100 times), and the result is a big hit, so that the number of times of loss counter area The HC value is configured to be reset to a value corresponding to the number of ceilings (for example, 800). Therefore, in the situation of the first short-time gaming state, the number of out-of-game games does not reach the number of ceilings, and the determination process in step Sb7607 always makes a negative determination. However, it is arbitrary whether or not the upper limit number of times of the first short game state is less than the number of ceilings, and the number of times may be set to be greater than or equal to the number of ceilings. Therefore, in such a configuration, the determination process of step Sb7607 In some cases, it is judged as negative, and in other cases, it is judged as positive.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb7607 (when the first support flag is not set) or an affirmative determination is made in step Sb7608 (when the time saving end flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5508 and the above various flags are stored. The second time reduction start flag is set in the area 314e. The second time reduction start flag is for the MPU 312 to understand that the second time reduction game state should be entered.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step Sb7601 (when the flag for starting the third time reduction is set), that is, when the situation should shift to the third time reduction gaming state, the process after step Sb7602 is not executed. The process for determining the transition to the second short game state is terminated. That is, the process of step Sb7604 is not executed, and the value of the out-of-country counter area HC is not updated. For this reason, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special missed result in the special figure game where the number of missed games is the number of ceilings, the update of the number of missed games is restricted and the arrival at the ceiling is suspended. Will be done.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sb7603 (when the time reduction end flag is not set), that is, during the third time reduction gaming state (excluding the final game round), the processing after step Sb7604 is executed. Instead, the process for determining the transition to the second short game state is terminated. That is, even during the third time-shortening game state (excluding the final game round), the value of the missed number counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, while staying in the third time-shortened game state, even if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a result of the loss, the number of times of the loss game is not updated and the same value is maintained.

When the third support flag is cleared and the third time-saving game state ends, a negative determination is made in step Sb7602, and the process of step Sb7604 is executed. That is, the state in which the number of times of the out-of-game games is restricted is released when the third time-saving game state ends.

By the way, in the case of negative determination in step Sb7602 (when it is determined that the third support flag is not set), both the third support flag and the first support flag are not set, and the game at that time. In addition to the case where the state is the normal gaming state, the first support flag may be set in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the gaming state at that time may be the first time-saving gaming state. In this case, the process of step Sb7604 is executed, and the value of the off count counter area HC is updated. That is, in the case of the first time-shortened game state, unlike the case of the third time-shortened game state, the number of times of the missed game is updated according to the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery.

<About the flow of the game state>
The flow of the gaming state in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 205.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the situation of the third time-reduced game state A or the third time-reduced game state B (excluding the final game times), the number of times of the off-game times is updated. This case will be described with reference to FIG. 206. Here, a case will be described as an example in which a 4R normal jackpot result is generated and the state shifts to the first time-shortened gaming state, and then a special deviation result A is obtained and the transition to the third time-shortened game state A is performed.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result ends at the timing t1, the first support flag is set and the game shifts to the first time-saving gaming state (FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times). The number of missed counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the number of ceilings (for example, 800 times) at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game times, which is the result of the 4R normal jackpot (FIG. 206 (d)). , (E)).

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at the timing t2, the first support flag is cleared, the first time-saving gaming state ends, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state. During the period from the start to the end of the first time-shortened game state (timing t1 to timing t2), the winning / failing lottery result becomes a deviation result (special deviation result or normal deviation result) in each special figure game round. , The value of the counter area HC is updated (FIG. 206 (e)).

When the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes the special deviation result A at the timing t3, the third support flag is set and the normal gaming state shifts to the third time-saving gaming state A (FIG. 206 (c)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 300 times).

Further, at the timing t3 of the transition to the third time-saving game state A, the transition to the restricted state in which the update of the number-of-off counter area HC is restricted. This restricted state is continued until the third time-saving gaming state A ends (FIG. 206 (e)). As a result, the number of disconnections in the middle of the third time-shortened game state becomes the number of ceilings, and the transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted, in other words, it is possible to prevent the ceiling arrival from being invalidated.

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at the timing t4, the third support flag is cleared, the third time saving game state A ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. Along with this, the above-mentioned restricted state is released, and the update of the number-of-off count counter area HC is restarted.

After that, when the value of the number-of-off counter area HC becomes "0" at the timing t5, the second support flag is set and the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (FIG. 206 (f)).

In the above configuration, at the timing t3 to the timing t4 in which the update of the loss count counter area HC is restricted, the loss count is not updated even in the loss count image 475 displayed on the symbol display device 75. That is, the number of deviations immediately before shifting to the third short game state A is maintained. At that time, as shown in FIG. 206 (g), the holding image 481 corresponding to the holding of the number of detachments is displayed, and it is notified that the update of the number of detachments is stopped. The holding image 481 is erased at the timing t4 when the update of the number-of-off count counter area HC is restarted.

At the timing t1 to timing t3 and the timing t4 to timing t5 where the value of the counter area HC is updated, the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becomes the deviation result as in the second embodiment. The number of missed images 475 is displayed so that the number of times of display increases. In this modification, the number of missed counter area HC is updated (updated the number of missed games) at the start of the special figure game (FIGS. 203 and 204), but the number of misses in the image 475 is updated. As in the second embodiment, the special figure game is performed after the final display time has elapsed. It should be noted that the update of the number-of-offs image 475 does not necessarily have to be performed when the confirmed display time has elapsed, from the end of the variable display to the end of the confirmed display in the special figure game times in which the number-of-offs counter area HC has been updated. The image 475 may be updated at any timing during the above period.

Next, the flow of the gaming state when each of the events A to E shown in FIG. 205 (b) occurs will be described. Of these, the events A to D are the same as the cases of the event A to the event D in the above-mentioned modification 8, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

When the number of missed games reaches the number of ceilings in the special figure game (games of the number of ceilings) and the result of the lottery is a special miss result A or a special miss result B (event E), the miss count counter. The update of the area HC is restricted (step Sb7601 in FIG. 204). As a result, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is held at "1", which is the value immediately before reaching the ceiling, and the arrival at the ceiling is suspended. Therefore, in the MPU 312, only the winning of the special out-of-time result is recognized, and the gaming state shifts to the third time-shortened gaming state A or the third time-saving gaming state B. In this case, in the special figure game round, the special reach off effect (FIG. 153) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game round effect.

In this modification, not only the game times in which the winning / failing lottery result is a special loss result, but also the update of the loss count counter area HC is restricted even in the third time-shortened game state. Therefore, the state in which the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is set to "1" is maintained even during the third time-shortening gaming state.

Then, when the third time-saving game state ends, the update limit of the number-of-off counter area HC is released. At that time, in this modification, the update process of the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode (process for updating the high frequency support mode in step Sb5301) → the update process of the number of disconnections (process for determining the transition to the second time-saving gaming state in step Sb7502). Since the processing is executed in the order of, after the end processing of the third time-saving game state is performed in the final game time of the third time-saving game state, the update of the number of misses is restarted in the special figure game time. To.

That is, the value of the number-of-off counter area HC held in "1" until then is subtracted by 1 in the final game round in the third time-shortened game state to become "0", and as a result, the second support flag is set. It shifts to the second short game state. In this way, the end of the third time-shortened game state and the release of the hold state of reaching the ceiling are performed in the same game round, and the third time-shortened game state is changed to the second time-shortened game state without going through the normal game state. Transition. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (for example, an additional effect of FIG. 130 (c)) for notifying that the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the number of additions notified by the addition effect is the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the second time-shortening gaming state (for example, 500 times).

In addition, the above-mentioned additional effect may be performed by using a part or all of the fixed display time of the final game round, or the variable display time (a part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (the fixed display time). It may be performed across a part or all).

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In a configuration having a second time-saving game state in which the number of out-of-game times shifts to the number of ceilings and a third time-saving game state in which the number of out-of-game times shifts when a special out-of-game result occurs, the third time-saving game state If this is the case, the configuration is such that the update of the number of missed game times is restricted.

The third time-shortened game state shifts based on the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becoming a special missed result, and the transition of the third time-shortened game state occurs randomly. It is possible that the cumulative number of times will reach the number of ceilings. In this case, if the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted and the third time-saving game state is continued, it is possible to avoid duplication of a plurality of time-saving game states and complicated processing, but on the other hand, the number of ceilings The repeated games aimed at reaching the ceiling will result in nothing. In particular, since the player can predict the arrival of the number of ceilings in advance, if the arrival of the number of ceilings is invalidated, the player is likely to notice it, and there is a concern that the player may feel unpleasant. In this regard, by limiting the update of the number of missed game times in the third time-shortened game state, the cumulative number of missed game times (the number of times recognized by the pachinko machine 10) in the middle of the third time-shortened game state is the ceiling. It is possible to suppress reaching the number of times. As a result, it is possible to suppress invalidation of reaching the number of ceilings, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

The above restriction is released based on the end of the third short game state. According to this configuration, when the third time-saving game state ends, the update of the number of missed game times is restarted. As a result, the player can play the game aiming at reaching the number of ceilings again from the continuation of the cumulative number of times before shifting to the third time-saving game state.

When the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a special out-of-game result, the number of out-of-game games is limited to be updated.

According to this configuration, when the cumulative number of missed games is the number of ceilings and the result is a special miss, the winning of the special miss result is prioritized and the number of ceilings is reserved. You can carry it over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the transition to the second time-saving gaming state and shift to the third time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to suppress the duplication of a plurality of time-saving gaming states. Then, after the third time-saving game state is completed, the update of the number of missed game times is restarted, so that the update result naturally reaches the ceiling number and shifts to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, if the cumulative number of out-of-game games is the number of ceilings and a special out-of-game result is obtained, the game can be sequentially shifted to the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and each of these time-saving games can be sequentially performed. It is possible to configure the player to enjoy both benefits of the state.

In one game round, after the transition determination to the third time-shortened game state is executed, the number of out-of-game rounds is updated.

According to this configuration, when the cumulative number of out-of-game times is the number of ceilings and a special out-of-game result is obtained, the number of out-of-game times is determined based on the result of the determination to shift to the third time-saving game state. You can switch whether to update or not. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to give priority to winning the special deviation result and to realize a configuration in which the number of ceilings is reserved.

In the case of the first short-time game state, the configuration is such that the number of times of the off-game game can be updated.

Regarding the first time-saving game state that shifts via the open / close execution mode, it is possible to adjust so that the cumulative number of off-game times does not reach the ceiling number during the first time-saving game state at the design stage of the pachinko machine. .. Specifically, the upper limit of the number of times of the first short game state may be set to be less than the number of times of the ceiling. Based on these characteristics, in the case of the third time-saving game state, it is possible to limit the number of times of the off-game game and to avoid reaching the ceiling number in the middle of the game in advance. By allowing the number of missed game times to be updated, the number of missed game times is excessively stagnant while avoiding reaching the ceiling in the third time-saving game state, which cannot be predicted in advance at the design stage. It is possible to prevent a large delay in the transition to the second short game state.

When the update of the number of out-of-game games is restricted, the display content of the out-of-game number image 475 is held in the state immediately before the restriction is performed.

In the configuration in which the update of the number of missed games is restricted in the third time-shortened gaming state, there is a discrepancy between the actual cumulative number of misses in the game and the internal cumulative number of misses recognized by the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, there is a concern that it may be difficult for the player to grasp how many times the cumulative number of times is internally recognized in relation to the number of times of the ceiling. The more the deviation becomes larger, the more remarkable it becomes. In this regard, when the number of times update is restricted, the player can easily understand the internal recognition number of times by displaying the disengagement number image 475 in a mode in which the state immediately before that is maintained. .. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, the output mode of the external signal when a special deviation result is obtained is different from the above modification 3.

Since the conventional pachinko machine has only the first short-time game state that shifts via the open / close execution mode, the hall computer (management control device) of the game hall and the notification unit (data counter, etc.) installed on the game island It is assumed that the hall equipment also has a configuration corresponding to that alone. For this reason, even if the pachinko machine is equipped with a third time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state that shifts when a special deviation result occurs) that shifts without going through the open / close execution mode, a dedicated external signal is output. There is a concern that the hall equipment cannot cope with it, and the game hall side cannot grasp the result of the special deviation and the occurrence of the third short-time game state. In this case, it can be dealt with by replacing the hall equipment, but that would increase the burden on the game hall.

The configuration of this modification is devised in consideration of such circumstances, and the configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 207.

First, an external signal in the case of shifting to the first time-saving game state via the open / close execution mode, which is usually a big hit result in the special figure winning / failing lottery, will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (a). In this modification, the first external signal (FIG. 207 (a4)) and the second external signal (FIG. 207 (a5)) are included as the external signals used in this case. The first external signal and the second external signal are output to the outside of the gaming machine by using different output terminals in the external output terminal 213.

The first external signal is a signal output corresponding to the open / close execution mode, and as shown in FIG. 207 (a4), the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode (FIG. 207 (a2)) (timing t2). It is turned on at the timing t3). The second external signal is a signal output corresponding to the open / close execution mode and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state), and as shown in FIG. 207 (a5), the time-saving game state from the start of the open / close execution mode. It is turned on during the period (timing t2 to timing t4) until the end of (FIG. 207 (a3)).

By the way, during the special figure game round, the direct external signal (big hit winning signal, etc.) corresponding to the normal jackpot result is not output, only the game round execution signal indicating that the special figure game round is executed is output. be. The game round execution signal is output at the start or end of the confirmation display in the special figure game round.

The hall computer, the notification unit, etc. recognize the execution (end) of the special figure game time by receiving the game time execution signal, and then receive the first external signal to generate a big hit or a big hit game (open / close). Recognize the occurrence of (execution mode). Further, since the second external signal is turned on after the first external signal is turned off, the transition to the time-saving gaming state (occurrence of the time-saving gaming state) is recognized.

Next, an external signal in the case of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state without going through the open / close execution mode, which is the result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery, will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (b).

If the special figure winning / failing lottery results in a special missed result, the direct external signal (special missed result winning signal, etc.) corresponding to the special missed result will not be output during the special figure game round, and the special figure game round will be played. Only the game times execution signal indicating that the game has been executed is output.

After that, the first external signal is output at the timing of transition to the third time-saving gaming state (FIG. 207 (b4)). In this modification, the first external signal is output at the start timing of the above-mentioned confirmation display in order to shift to the third time-shortening game state at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game that resulted in the special deviation. ..

As described above, the first external signal is a jackpot signal that notifies the hall device that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. The first external signal of 207 (b4) is a pseudo jackpot signal that does not correspond to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is turned on in a shorter period than in such a case (timing t12 to timing t13) so that it can be distinguished from the case where it actually corresponds to the open / close execution mode (usually when the big hit result is obtained). ).

The specific output period of the first external signal is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the first external signal in the case of a normal jackpot result, but the shortest period for one round in the open / close execution mode (game). It is preferable that the period is shorter than the firing cycle of the ball × the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 65). With such a configuration, it is suppressed that the output period of the first external signal output in the case of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state becomes longer than the output period in the case where the open / close execution mode is actually performed. It is possible to make a suitable distinction between the two. In this modification, the output period of the first external signal is, for example, 200 msec.

Further, when a special deviation result is obtained, a second external signal is output corresponding to the above-mentioned transition timing (FIG. 207 (b5)). The second external signal is turned on during the period (timing t12 to timing t14) from the transition timing to the end of the time-saving gaming state.

As described above, the same external signal as the external signal used when shifting to the 1st time-saving gaming state by winning the normal jackpot result in the case of shifting to the 3rd time-saving gaming state by winning the special out-of-game result (same). Since the signal output from the external terminal) is used, it is possible to receive the external signal when the hall device shifts to the third time-saving gaming state without adding a receiving terminal or the like.

At that time, if the hall equipment has a function that can determine the output period (difference in length) of the first external signal, the occurrence of a special deviation result is generated by receiving the first external signal with a short output period. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to manage the occurrence of the special deviation result in the hall computer and to perform the notification corresponding to the winning of the special deviation result by the data counter or the like.

Even if the difference in the output period cannot be determined, the behavior of the external signal in the case of a special out-of-order result is the same as in the case of the normal jackpot result, so the hall equipment can grasp the transition to the time-saving gaming state and the occurrence. can do. That is, even in the case of a special deviation result, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned on, and then the first external signal is turned off and the second external signal is turned on, as in the case of the normal jackpot result. Even if it is difficult to distinguish between the normal jackpot result and the special off result because the flow is turned on, the transition to the time-saving gaming state can be recognized.

Further, depending on the type of the data counter or the like, it is assumed that the configuration is such that the light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the first external signal. In this respect, in this modification, the first external signal in the case of a special deviation result is output after shifting to the time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state). Therefore, in the case of a special deviation result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode before the transition to the time-saving gaming state.

At that time, the above-mentioned light-emitting effect may be performed at the start of the time-saving game state, but since the output period of the first external signal is shortened in the case of a special deviation result, the light-emitting effect is terminated in a short time. be able to. Therefore, the light emission effect can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

In the above description, as a time-saving game state that shifts without going through the open / close execution mode, a third time-saving game state triggered by winning a special out-of-order result is illustrated, but the configuration of this modification is the number of ceilings. It is also possible to apply to the second time-saving gaming state that shifts when the player reaches. Specifically, the special figure game times (timing t11 to timing t12) of the special deviation result in FIG. 207 (b1) may be replaced with the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings. That is, when the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings, the first external signal and the second external signal of FIGS. 207 (b4) and (b5) correspond to the transition timing to the time-saving gaming state. The configuration may be such that an external signal is output.

<Modification 12>
In this modification, the output mode of the external signal when a special deviation result is obtained is different from the modification 3 and the modification 11. The configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 208, the first external signal A, the first external signal B, the second external signal A, the second external signal B, and the third external signal can be output as external signals. There is. Of these, the first external signal A and the second external signal A are the same as the first external signal and the second external signal of the modified example 11, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. That is, this modification has a configuration in which a first external signal B, a second external signal B, and a third external signal are added to the configuration of the modification 11.

The first external signal B is a signal output corresponding to the open / close execution mode, and is usually a big hit result in the special figure winning / failing lottery. , As shown in FIG. 208 (e), it is turned on during the period (timing t2 to timing t3) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. That is, the output mode is the same as that of the first external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), when the special drawing result is a special loss result and the game shifts to the third time-saving game state without going through the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode is not turned on. Is kept off in response to not being executed. That is, in the first external signal A (FIG. 209 (d)), in the case of the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state, the signal is turned on for a predetermined period (timing t12 to timing t13) as a pseudo jackpot signal. However, the first external signal B does not switch to such an on state.

The second external signal B is a signal output corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode and the time-saving gaming state, and in the case of transition to the first time-saving gaming state, the opening / closing execution mode is as shown in FIG. 208 (g). It is turned on during the period (timing t2 to timing t4) from the start of the game to the end of the time-saving gaming state. That is, the output mode is the same as that of the second external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209 (g), in the case of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, the off state is set during the period of the time-saving gaming state. That is, the second external signal A (FIG. 209 (f)) is turned on in the time-saving gaming state, but the second external signal B is not switched to such an on state.

The third external signal is a signal output corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, and is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the time-saving gaming state. This is the same regardless of whether the time-saving gaming state of the transition target is the first time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state (FIGS. 208 (h) and 209 (h)).

The first external signal B, the second external signal B, and the third external signal are output to the outside of the gaming machine from different output terminals.

When the third time-saving game state (time-saving game state without going through the open / close execution mode) is added as a function of the pachinko machine, the game hall supports the third time-saving game state in order to deal with such a function. It is conceivable to introduce new hall equipment (hall computers, data counters, etc.) or add functions to existing hall equipment.

However, not all game halls take such measures, and it is expected that there is a possibility that the conventional hall equipment will continue to be used. That is, there is a possibility that non-compatible devices that do not support the third time-saving gaming state and compatible devices that support the third time-saving gaming state coexist as hall devices that are expected to receive external signals. be.

The configuration of this modification is devised based on such a mixed state. It should be noted that the corresponding device is assumed to have a function of recognizing the time-saving gaming state from the third external signal.

In order for the data counter or the like to receive the external signal from the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to connect the wiring from the data counter or the like to each terminal of the external output terminal 213 of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, in this modification, the connection mode of the external output terminal 213 to each terminal is made different depending on whether the hall device on the game hall side is a non-compatible device or a compatible device.

Specifically, when the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a non-compatible device, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the output terminal for the first external signal A provided in the external output terminal 213. And the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the second external signal A. As a result, the hall equipment is in a state where it can receive the first external signal A and the second external signal B that are externally output from the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the hall device recognizes the transition of the first time-shortening gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state in the embodiment described in the modified example 11.

On the other hand, when the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a compatible device, the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal provided in the external output terminal 213. do. As a result, the hall equipment is in a state where it can receive the first external signal B and the third external signal that are externally output from the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, in the case of the transition to the first time-saving game state, the first external signal B is turned on in the open / close execution mode, and the third external signal is turned on in the time-saving game state (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210). b)). In this case, the hall device has transitioned to the time-saving gaming state via the opening / closing execution mode by recognizing the time-saving gaming state after recognizing the opening / closing execution mode, that is, the transition to the first time-saving gaming state. Can be grasped.

Further, in the case of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, the third external signal is turned on in the time-saving gaming state without the first external signal B being turned on (FIG. 210 (b)). In this case, the hall device recognizes the time-saving game state without recognizing the open / close execution mode, thereby shifting to the time-saving game state without going through the open / close execution mode, that is, shifting to the third time-saving game state. I can understand what I did.

It should be noted that the data counter or the like may be equipped with a function of automatically adding the number of jackpots based on the first external signal (big hit signal) being turned on. In this case, in the case of the transition to the third time-saving gaming state (the transition to the time-saving gaming state that does not go through the open / close execution mode), if the on state for a predetermined period is provided like the first external signal A. However, even though it is a special off result, the number of big hits notified by the data counter or the like may increase. In this regard, if a compatible device capable of recognizing the time-saving gaming state from the third external signal is connected to the pachinko machine 10, using the first external signal B maintained in the off state will result in a special deviation result. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of jackpots notified each time.

In the above description, the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal are exemplified as connection terminals when the hall device connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a compatible device. Alternatively, the output terminal for the second external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal may be used as connection terminals. In this case, in the hall device, the transition to the first time-saving gaming state can be recognized by turning on both the second external signal B and the third external signal, and the second external signal B is turned off. By turning on the third external signal in this state, it is possible to recognize the transition to the third time-saving gaming state. Which of the output terminals of the first external signal B and the second external signal B to connect the hall device can be arbitrarily selected according to the specifications of the hall device and the like.

In addition, as a time-saving game state that shifts without going through the open / close execution mode, a third time-saving game state triggered by winning a special out-of-order result is illustrated, but the configuration of this modification is to reach the number of ceilings. It is also possible to apply to the second time-saving gaming state that shifts as an opportunity. Specifically, the special figure game times (timing t11 to timing t12) of the special deviation result in FIG. 209 (a) may be replaced with the special figure game times that have reached the number of ceilings.

<Other variants>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described second embodiment and the description of each modification, and may be carried out as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the second embodiment or each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined for the second embodiment or each modification. It may be applied. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the second embodiment and each modification. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In the second embodiment and each modification, the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is stored up to four pieces, but may be less than four pieces. (It may be one), and it may be five or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (may be 1) or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of each operating port 62, 63 may be different.

Further, at least one of the first actuating port 62 (first special figure) or the second actuating port 63 (second special figure) may be configured not to have a holding function. In particular, with respect to the modified example 3, the final game round (a special figure game in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed when a special deviation result is obtained) is provided by a configuration that does not have a holding function for winning a prize in the second operating port 63. It is possible to emphasize the superiority of times).

(2) In the second embodiment and each modification, the reserved information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is distinguished, but it may not be distinguished. Further, the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is prioritized over the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and is subject to the winning / failing judgment, but the relationship is reversed. There may be a configuration in which the winning or failing judgment is made in the order of winning.

(3) In the second embodiment and each modification, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but the left route flows down. It may be configured so that only the game ball to be passed or won a prize, or it may be configured so that it can be passed or won a prize from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to improve the sharpness of the game, only the game ball flowing down one of the right route and the left route can win a prize in the first operating port 62, and only the game ball flowing down the other of the right route and the left route is a through gate. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it can pass through 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize.

(4) In the second embodiment and each modification, the result of the hit / fail judgment becomes the big hit result, so that the game shifts to the big hit game (open / close execution mode). As described above, the result of the winning / failing determination is the small hit result, and the V winning opening (V winning opening) in the small hit game (the game state in which the variable winning device having the V winning opening or the V winning opening and the out opening is opened and closed). When the game ball passes through the sensor) (when the result of the grant determination is a predetermined result and the predetermined game result is obtained), the game may be shifted to the jackpot game.

It should be noted that, in the present invention of the present invention, "a predetermined privilege can be given to the player based on the result of the special determination being a specific result" and "the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result". As mentioned above, whether or not the game is correct or not, as described above, for "a predetermined privilege can be given to the player", "a transition to a special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result", etc. It can be understood that the result of the determination becomes a small hit result, and the case of shifting to the big hit game through the V prize is also included.

(5) In the second embodiment and each modification, the first support flag, the second support flag, and the third support flag are used for the first time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, and the third time-saving game state. Although the configuration is such that different support flags are associated with each other, such a distinction may not be made, and a support flag of 1 may be provided as a flag common to each of these time-saving gaming states.

In such a configuration, for example, in the second embodiment described above, the support flag is set in response to the transition to the first time-saving game state, and the support flag is set in the final game round in the first time-saving game state. When the cumulative number of game times reaches the ceiling number, the above support flag is once cleared according to the number of game times since the transition to the first time-shortened game state has reached the upper limit, and then. The support flag may be reset according to the determination of the transition to the second shortened gaming state by the determination of the transition to the second shortened gaming state.

(6) In the second embodiment and each modification, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode (time saving game state), and the various flag storage areas. The high-frequency support mode is configured to end when various support flags are cleared from 114e, but information corresponding to the first value in a specific storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 114e (for example, under support). When the flag) is stored, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and the information corresponding to the second value different from the first value (for example, the unsupported flag) is stored in the specific storage area. The high-frequency support mode may be terminated. That is, information corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode are provided, and depending on which information is stored (set), the high-frequency support mode is entered. The configuration may be such that the transition to the high frequency support mode and the termination of the high frequency support mode are controlled.

Further, the high frequency support mode may be terminated when the information corresponding to the same or different second value as the first value is stored in the storage area different from the specific storage area. That is, a storage area corresponding to the high frequency support mode and a storage area corresponding to the non-high frequency support mode are provided, and information is stored (set) in which storage area. The configuration may be such that the transition to the high-frequency support mode and the termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled.

(7) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the configuration is such that the cumulative number of out-of-game games reaches the number of ceilings or the special out-of-game result occurs, and the game shifts to the time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to shift to a high-probability gaming state. In this case, the support mode in the high-probability gaming state may be the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, instead of the configuration that shifts to the short-time game state or the high-accuracy game state, a special effect that cannot be seen in the normal game state is performed, or a special effect character or the like appears. It may be a thing. Further, it may shift to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal gaming state is performed. In these cases, it is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state in that a special effect or the like can be seen and a special lottery can be received. As an example of a special lottery, a point lottery can be considered. Depending on the points given in the point lottery and the total number of points, the player may shift to a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or an open / close execution mode. Further, a special effect (for example, a character's costume) may be released, or a development secret story about the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(8) In the second embodiment and each modification, the configuration has a first time-saving game state that shifts via the open / close execution mode, in addition to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. However, the configuration may not include the first time-saving game state. Further, the configuration may not be provided with a high probability gaming state.

(9) In the second embodiment and each modification, the time-saving game that does not go through the open / close execution mode is triggered by the cumulative number of times of the off-games reaching the number of ceilings or the result of a special out-of-game. Although it is configured to shift to the state, it may be configured to shift to the time-saving gaming state triggered by an event other than those. For example, the configuration may be such that the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state based on the fact that the game ball enters or passes through the specific entry portion or the specific passage portion provided inside the game area PE or the predetermined entry portion. .. In this case, the prize ball may or may not be paid out based on the entry or passage of the ball.

It should be noted that the specific entry part may be a type of entry part that is not provided with an opening / closing mechanism and is always open, or an opening / closing mechanism is provided so that the game ball can enter or is easily entered. It may be a variable type entry portion that can switch to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the predetermined ball entry portion.

Further, in the configuration in which a specific entry / passage portion is provided in the predetermined entry section, only the specific entry / passage portion is provided in the predetermined entry section, and the game ball entered the predetermined entry section. May be configured to always enter or pass through a specific entry / passage portion, or one or a plurality of other entry / passage portions different from the specific entry / passage portion within a predetermined entry / passage portion. Is provided, and the game balls that have entered the predetermined entry section are distributed, so that the game balls that have entered the predetermined entry section do not enter the specific entry section or pass through the specific passage section. It may be configured so that it may or may not be present. In the latter configuration, when a game ball that has entered a predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, an opportunity to shift to a time-saving gaming state is established. So, even if the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section enters the other entry section or passes through the other passing section, the opportunity to shift to the time-saving gaming state is not established. be able to.

(10) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is added, the configuration is accompanied by the end of the preceding time-saving game state and the transition to the subsequent time-saving game state. However, the remaining number of times may be increased while the time-saving game state continues. For example, as in the modification example 3, if the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state increases due to the special deviation result in the final game time of the first time-saving game state, the end processing of the time-saving game state (support flag). The remaining number of times may be rewritten (a process of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the third time saving game state in the support counter area SC) without performing the clearing).

When the number of remaining times of the time-saving game state is increased as described above without the end of the time-saving game state, as described in (5) above, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the first It is preferable to have a configuration in which a support flag is associated as one flag common to the three-time short game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the process of rewriting the type of the support flag according to the rewriting of the remaining number of times.

(11) In the second embodiment and each modification, the fixed display time of the special figure game is configured to be selected separately from the variable display time, but it is selected as a set with the variable display time. You may do it. For example, the fixed display time is associated with each variable display time (variable pattern) in advance, and by selecting the variable display time, the fixed display time can be selected at the same time. In that case, the selected fixed display time may be set at the start of the fixed display, or may be set at the start of the variable display together with the setting of the variable display time.

(12) In the second embodiment and the probable variation example, the modes of the normal game times and the character opening / closing game are common in the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state. The configuration may be different in at least one of the normal game times and the accessory opening / closing game. For example, in the first short-time game state, the support lottery in the normal game times is performed with a higher winning probability than in the normal game state, while in the second short-time game state and the third short-time game state, the support lottery is in the normal game state. It may be configured to be performed with the same winning probability as. Further, in the third time-saving game state, the accessory opening / closing game may be performed in a manner more advantageous than the second time-saving game state, for example, the opening time of the general electric accessory 63a is long. Further, the third time-saving gaming state has a plurality of states including the third time-saving gaming state A and the third time-saving gaming state B, and the third time-saving gaming state A is more advantageous than the third time-saving gaming state B. An accessory opening / closing game may be performed.

(13) In the second embodiment and each modification, only one type of ceiling count is set, but a plurality of different ceiling counts may be set. Further, a plurality of types having different upper limit times may be set for the second short game state. In this case, a plurality of types of ceiling counts may be set, and the type of the second time-saving gaming state may be associated with each ceiling count. When one ceiling count is set and the ceiling count is reached. In some cases, a lottery may be made to determine which second time-saving gaming state is to be entered.

(14) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the number of detachments reaches the number of ceilings and the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state ends without a big hit result. Is configured so that the second ceiling arrival does not occur regardless of the number of subsequent detachments, but the value corresponding to the number of ceilings in the detached count counter area HC when the second short game state ends without a big hit result. Is reset, and the ceiling may be reached from the second time onward. In that case, a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, three times) may be set for the number of times the ceiling is reached (the number of transitions to the second time-shortening game state), or a configuration may be configured in which such an upper limit number of times is not set.

In the configuration where the ceiling is allowed to reach only once, the normal gaming state before reaching the ceiling (before shifting to the second time-saving game state) and the second time-shortening game state after the second time-saving game state is completed without a big hit result. Even if the normal gaming state is the same as the normal gaming state of, the former normal gaming state is more advantageous than the latter normal gaming state in that it can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. It can also be said that. In the present specification, the former normal gaming state and the latter normal gaming state are not distinguished, and these states may be collectively referred to as, for example, a predetermined gaming state, and the former normal gaming state and the latter normal gaming state may be referred to. One of them may be referred to as, for example, a predetermined gaming state, and the other may be a gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from, for example, the predetermined gaming state.

(15) In the second embodiment and each modification, the fluctuation pattern and the game rotation effect correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship, but a one-to-many relationship may be used. In this case, the effect control device 143 acquires a random number for the effect lottery, and the random number acquired above is used from the plurality of game rotation effects associated with the variation pattern of 1, and the game rotation effect of 1 is used. Can be configured to be selected.

(16) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, each support flag is set when the normal figure game round is terminated in correspondence with the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state. The Fuzu game round is terminated from, but the Fuzu game round is terminated based on the fact that the transition condition to each time-saving game state is satisfied and the time-saving game state of the transition destination is determined, and then each support The flag may be set.

(17) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the normal gaming state is changed to the second time-saving gaming state (second embodiment, etc.), the normal gaming state is changed to the third time-saving gaming state. In the case of (modification example 4, modification 6, etc.), when shifting from the first time-shortening gaming state to the normal gaming state (modification example 3 etc.), the normal drawing game round is terminated, but the second time-shortening gaming state is used. Or, the configuration may be such that the transition is made when transitioning from the third short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Further, for example, when shifting from the first time-shortening gaming state to the third time-shortening gaming state, or when shifting from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-shortening gaming state, the third time-shortening gaming state A to the third time-shortening gaming state B It may be configured to end the normal game round when shifting from a predetermined time-saving game state to another time-saving game state, such as when shifting to. In these cases, it is expected that it will be useful in a configuration in which the modes of the normal game times and the accessory opening / closing game are different in each time-saving game state as in (12) above.

(18) In the second embodiment and each modification, the special figure game in which the transition timing to the second time-shortening gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state is matched and the transition condition to each time-saving gaming state is satisfied. The normal figure game round is ended at the start timing of the confirmed display of the times, but the normal figure game round may be ended at the middle timing of the confirmed display or the end timing of the confirmed display. In addition, from the viewpoint of securing a grace period (a period in which the game state has shifted to the second time-shortened game state, but the special figure game times have not yet been performed since the transition to the second time-shortened game state). Then, it is preferable that the grace period is completed before the end timing of the confirmation display.

(19) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the support lottery result of the normal figure game time to be ended is the support winning result at the end processing of the normal figure game time, the result is changed to the out result. However, it may be configured so that the change processing to the deviation result is not performed. It is assumed that the support lottery performed in the normal game state has a high probability of being out of order, and it is rare that the result of the support lottery will be the support winning result in the normal game times being executed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state. Because.

(20) In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, the special figure game times in which the conditions for transitioning to the second time reduction game state and the third time reduction game state are satisfied are the game times of the second special figure ( When the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are satisfied in the situation of the time-saving game state), the end processing of the normal drawing game times is not executed. 2 The end processing may be executed without distinguishing between the special figures. That is, the end processing may be executed even when the transition condition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the situation of the time-saving gaming state.

(21) In the second embodiment and each modification, when the special figure game times in which the conditions for transitioning to the second time reduction game state and the third time reduction game state are satisfied are the game times of the second special figure. The configuration is such that the end processing of the normal drawing game is not executed uniformly, but the game time of the second special figure is the special figure game time during the time saving game state, or the remaining hold after the time saving game state is finished. It may be configured to identify whether it is a special figure game, and if it is the latter special figure game, execute the end process of the normal game. Since the game times of the second special figure held at the end of the time-saving game state are performed under the normal game state, the normal game times started during the execution of these special figure game times are changed to the normal game state. It is done in the corresponding manner. In this case, by performing the end processing of the normal drawing game, the same effect as that described in the second embodiment and the first modification can be expected.

(22) In the second embodiment and each modification, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC at the time of transition to the time-saving game state, and the value is set each time the special figure game is performed. By subtracting 1 each, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated, but when shifting to the time-saving game state, the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times to the support counter area SC is not set, and the special figure game times By adding the value of the support counter area SC by 1 each time the game is performed, the number of special figure game times executed in the time-saving game state may be updated. In this case, the time-saving gaming state may be terminated when the updated count value reaches the upper limit number of times.

(23) In the second embodiment and each modification, the display content of the image 475 is updated after the fixed display time of the special figure game has elapsed. The display content of the image 475 may be updated after the variation display time has elapsed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display content of the missed number image 475 from being updated before the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is notified by the stop display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, the display content of the missed number image 475 may be updated at the start or after the start of the next special figure game.

(24) In the second embodiment and each modification, the symbol display device 75 executes notifications corresponding to the arrival of the number of ceilings and the winning of the special deviation result, but other notifications. It may be configured to be executed by the unit. Further, the notification is not limited to the notification by image display, but may be notified by using a light emitting means such as an LED, or by operating a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for a movable effect in a predetermined operation mode. May be good. Further, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be a visual notification, and may be an auditory notification by voice from the speaker unit 29. This also applies to the notification of the remaining number of time reductions, the notification of the number of deviations, the notification of right-handed strike, and the like.

(25) In the second embodiment, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 6 to the modified example 10 (a configuration including a second time-saving game state that shifts when the number of ceilings is reached), the time-saving game is performed. After the update process of the remaining number of states is executed, the update process of the number of missed game times (the number of missed game counter area HC) (the process of step Sb1405 in the second embodiment) is executed. , If the process of determining whether or not to shift to the second time-saving game state (process of step Sb1406 in the second embodiment) is performed after the process of updating the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state, Prior to the update process of the remaining number of times, the update process of the number of off-game times may be performed. As such a configuration, for example, it is conceivable to execute the update process of the number of times of the off-game game at the start of the special figure game. In this case, the pachinko machine can recognize the arrival of the number of ceilings at the start of the special figure game, and when it is desired to execute the game rotation effect corresponding to the above arrival from the start of the special figure game, or when the above arrival is reached. This is effective when you want to set a dedicated fluctuation display time (variation pattern) corresponding to.

(26) In the second embodiment, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 6 to the modified example 10, the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state is lost, and the cumulative number of game times reaches the ceiling number. Although it is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmed display in the special figure game round, it may be configured to be executed after the start of the confirmed display. Specifically, the transition to the second time-saving game state is executed at the intermediate timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game times when the number of ceilings is reached, the end timing of the confirmation display, and the start timing of the next special figure game times. May be good. However, a grace period (the game state has shifted to the second time-shortened game state, but the special figure game times have not yet been performed since the transition to the second time-shortened game state) at the end processing of the normal figure game times. In order to secure the period of the state), it is preferable to shift to the second time-shortening game state before the confirmation display of the special figure game times that has reached the number of ceilings is completed.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the second time-shortened game state at the end timing of the confirmation display, the end processing of the normal drawing game may be executed at the end timing.

In that case, in the normal process (FIG. 107), the process for shifting to the second time-saving game state (step Sb512) → the normal process game time control process (step Sb405) is performed in this order, so that the process is performed in the second time-shortened game state. It is possible to configure the configuration in which the first normal figure game round in the second short-time game state is started before the first special figure game round is started. That is, in the processing times (1 periodic processing in the normal processing) in which the transition processing to the second time-saving gaming state is performed, after the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (after the support flag is set), the normal game game rotation control By executing the process, it is possible to start the first normal-figure game in the second time-shortened game state, and then start the first special figure game in the second time-shortened game state in the next processing time. can.

Further, even in a configuration in which the second time-saving game state transition process is performed after the normal game time control process, the normal game time control process in step Sb405 becomes the special game time control process in step Sb403 in the normal process. If it is configured to be performed in advance, it is possible to start the normal figure game time prior to the special figure game time after the transition to the second time-saving game state. That is, in the next processing round in which the transition to the second time-shortening game state is performed, the processing can be performed in the order of the start of the fluctuation of the normal figure game round → the start of the fluctuation of the special figure game round, and the second time-shortening game state. It is possible to start the Fuzu game times corresponding to.

(27) In the second embodiment, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 6 to the modified example 10, the second time-saving game state is set based on the cumulative number of times of the off-game times reaching the ceiling number. Although it is configured to shift, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state based on the total number of points such as internal point information reaching a predetermined number of points. In this case, the number of points may be given based on, for example, the number of out-of-game games reaching a predetermined number of times, or when the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is out of order. , When the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 or the variable type counter CS becomes a predetermined predetermined value, a predetermined point lottery is executed, and the number of points is given by winning the lottery. good. In addition, the number of points to be given may be a certain number based on the establishment of a granting opportunity, or a plurality of points are prepared as the number of points that can be given, and points are given from among them. The number of points selected by the number lottery may be given. The points given and the number of points given may be taught or suggested to the player by notification, or may be configured so that the player cannot or is difficult to identify because the notification is not performed.

(28) In the second embodiment, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 6 to the modified example 10, the number of times the special figure game is missed in the special figure game times where the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is a big hit result counter area. Although the HC value is set to the number of ceilings, it may be set at the start or end of the open / close execution mode, at the middle timing of the open / close execution mode, or at the transition to the first time-shortening game state.

Further, in the second embodiment, the modified example 1, the modified example 2, the modified example 6 to the modified example 10, the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings is updated, but the value of the number-of-off counter area HC is set to the ceiling. The second time is shortened based on the fact that the value of the number-of-offs counter area HC is added by 1 each time the number of times of the off-games is executed after the end of the open / close execution mode without setting the number of times, and the total value reaches the number of times of the ceiling. It may be configured to shift to the gaming state. In this case, if the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery becomes a big hit result before the number of ceilings is reached, the update result of the off result is cleared (initialized) in the special figure game times, the opening / closing execution mode, etc. The configuration should be such that

(29) In the second embodiment and the first modification, the value corresponding to the number of ceilings is set in the number-of-off counter area HC in the special figure game times that resulted in a big hit, but the opening / closing execution mode The above set may be executed at the start of the game, during the open / close execution mode, at the end of the open / close execution mode, or at the transition to the first time-saving game state. When the value of the counter area HC for the number of disconnections is added by 1 as in (28) above, the first time is shortened at the start of the open / close execution mode, during the open / close execution mode, at the end of the open / close execution mode, and so on. It is preferable to initialize the value of the number-of-off counter area HC to 0 at the time of transition to the gaming state.

(30) In the second embodiment, the first modification and the second modification, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-shortening gaming state is executed at the start of the final display in the special figure game. However, it may be executed at the start of the special figure game as in the modified examples 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be made at the start of the special figure game round, while the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be made at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be made at the start of the special figure. It may be configured to be performed at the start of the game round.

Further, the above-mentioned transition determination may be executed at an intermediate timing of the fluctuation display in the special figure game times when the cumulative number of times of the off-game games reaches the number of ceilings. Further, in the case of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state after the start of the final display, the shift determination may be executed after the start of the final display.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, as in the first modification, right-handed notification (second operating port 63) is performed at the definite display time of the special figure game times when the number of times of the off-game games reaches the number of ceilings. It may be configured so that a notification (notification for urging a prize) is performed. In this case, the above notification may be performed for the entire fixed display time, or the above notification may be performed for at least a part of the fixed display time. Further, in the first modification, the right-handed notification may be performed over the entire fixed display time.

(32) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the fixed display time of the special figure game times when the number of off-game times reaches the ceiling number is set as the fixed display time of the forcibly terminated normal figure game times. , The variable display time of the Fuzu game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state and the confirmed display time of the Fuzu game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state are longer than the total period, but they are forcibly terminated. From the total period of the variable display time of the Fuzu game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state and the confirmed display time of the Fuzu game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state, not including the confirmed display time of the figure game times. May be configured to be longer. In the normal game state (left-handed game), winning the through gate 64 basically does not occur, and in many cases it is assumed that the forced termination of the normal game game is not performed, so even with the above configuration , The end of the first normal game round after shifting to the second time-shortened game state (the start of the first character opening / closing game after shifting to the second time-shortened game state) shifts to the second time-shortened game state. This is because it is considered that a configuration that is performed prior to the start of the first special figure game after that can be realized.

(33) In the first modification of the second embodiment, the end of the first normal game round (the end of the confirmation display) after the transition to the second time-shortened game state shifts to the second time-shortened game state. Although it is configured to be performed prior to the start of the first special figure game after that, the end of the variation display in the first normal figure game is preceded by the start of the first special figure game. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the fixed display time of the special figure game times when the number of out-of-game times reaches the ceiling number, the fixed display time of the normal figure game times to be forcibly terminated, and the normal figure game times corresponding to the second short-time game state. It may be longer than the total period with the variable display time of, or may be longer than the variable display time of the normal drawing game times corresponding to the second time-shortened game state. Even with such a configuration, compared to the configuration in which the variation display of the first normal figure game round ends after the first special figure game round is started, the first role after shifting to the second time-saving game state is achieved. The object opening / closing game is started earlier, and the effect of accelerating the timing at which the general electric accessory 63a is opened can be expected.

(34) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the special deviation result is provided as a part of the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery, but the special drawing winning / failing lottery is a big hit result. Or, it may be configured to perform only a lottery as to whether or not the result is a loss, and if the result is a loss result, a separate lottery (type lottery for the loss result) is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not the result is a special loss. .. In this case, another lottery may be performed by using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS, or by using a dedicated random number for drawing the type of the outlier result. You may be broken.

Further, instead of the type lottery of the result of the loss, a transition lottery may be performed as to whether or not the transition condition to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied. In this case, the lottery may be performed by using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS, or by using a dedicated random number for drawing whether or not the transition condition is satisfied. You may be broken.

(35) In the modification 3 to the modification 10 of the second embodiment, the special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to the special deviation result, but the game rotation effect without the reach effect is used. Notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed. Further, the notification does not have to be performed using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, by displaying a predetermined symbol such as a predetermined character on the symbol display device 75, the notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed. ..

Further, the symbol (so-called fourth symbol) which is completely synchronized with the special symbol symbol which is variablely displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than each symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a symbol. In the pachinko machine displayed on the display device 75, the notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed by displaying the fourth symbol in a specific mode different from the normal mode. Further, the notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed by the combination of the mode of the fourth symbol to be stopped and displayed and at least a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the notification corresponding to the special deviation result may be performed in the whole of the special figure game times, or may be performed in a part of the period of the special figure game times. By the way, in the special reach effect exemplified in the modified example 3 to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the player cannot determine whether or not the result is a special deviation result at the start of the special figure game, and the special figure. Since the player can determine that the result is a special deviation result at the end of the game round, it can be said that the notification corresponding to the special deviation result is executed in a part of the special figure game round.

(36) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, when a special deviated result is obtained, an external signal corresponding to the special deviated result is output, but the external signal is not output. It may be configured.

Further, the configuration may be such that it is possible to switch whether or not to output the external signal. For example, it is preferable that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a switching operation unit such as a changeover switch, and the possibility of outputting the external signal can be switched by operating the changeover operation unit. At that time, it is preferable to arrange the switching operation unit at a position that can be operated when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, such as the back side of the front door frame 14 or the back side of the game board 60. With such a configuration, the switching operation is permitted only for hall employees, and misuse for fraudulent activities can be suppressed.

(37) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, when the special figure game times other than the final game times are obtained in the first time-shortened game state (to the third time-shortened game state). Even when the special deviation result is obtained in the situation where the transition of the above is restricted), the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output, but the external signal may not be output. In this case, the configuration may be such that the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is not output, or the external signal corresponding to the normal deviation result may be output instead of the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result.

For example, based on the external signal for the special deviation result output from the pachinko machine, the game record related to the special deviation result (for example, the fact that the special deviation result has been obtained or the winning probability of the special deviation result in the actual game) is displayed in the game hall. In a configuration in which notification is performed by a predetermined notification unit (for example, a data counter installed above each pachinko machine on a game island or its light emitting unit), the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted. When the external signal for the special deviation result is output, the above-mentioned predetermined notification unit performs notification and the like corresponding to the winning of the special deviation result, even though the transition to the third time-saving gaming state does not occur. There is a concern that it may lead to misunderstandings and confusion among players and hall employees. In this respect, by adopting the configuration of (37), if a special out-of-order result occurs in a situation where the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, it is prevented from being reflected in the notification in the predetermined notification unit. Therefore, the occurrence of misunderstandings and the like can be suitably suppressed.

(38) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained in the situation of the third time-shortened gaming state, the re-transition to the third time-shortened gaming state (remaining number of times). Although it is configured to limit the addition), it may be configured to allow re-migration. At that time, the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result that is the trigger of the re-migration may be output.

Further, the special deviation result may be configured not to output an external signal corresponding to the special deviation result, although the transition to the third time-saving gaming state occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the predetermined notification unit of the game hall about the special deviation result at the time of the first transition, but not to notify the special deviation result at the time of re-migration. ..

(39) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration is executed at the start of the final display in the special figure game times in which the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state results in a special deviation result. However, it may be configured to be executed after the confirmation display is started. Specifically, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is executed at the intermediate timing during the confirmation display in the special figure game times that resulted in the special deviation result, the end timing of the confirmation display, and the start timing of the next special figure game times. It may be configured to be performed.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the third time-shortened game state at the end timing of the confirmation display, the end processing of the normal drawing game may be executed at the end timing.

In that case, in the normal process (FIG. 107), the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state (step Sb3202) → the normal process game time control process (step Sb405) is performed in this order, so that the process is performed in the third time-saving game state. It is possible to configure the configuration in which the first normal figure game round in the third time-shortened game state is started before the first special figure game round is started. That is, in the processing times (1 periodic processing in the normal processing) in which the transition processing to the third time-shortening gaming state is performed, after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state (after the support flag is set), the normal game game rotation control By executing the process, it is possible to start the first normal-figure game in the third time-shortened game state, and then start the first special figure game in the third time-shortened game state in the next processing time. can.

Further, even in a configuration in which the third time-saving game state transition process is performed after the normal game time control process, the normal game time control process in step Sb405 becomes the special game time control process in step Sb403 in the normal process. If it is configured to be performed in advance, it is possible to start the normal figure game round prior to the special figure game round after the transition to the third time-saving game state. That is, in the next processing round in which the transition to the third time-shortening game state is performed, the processing can be performed in the order of the fluctuation start of the normal figure game round → the fluctuation start of the special figure game round, and the third time-shortening game state. It is possible to start the Fuzu game times corresponding to.

(40) In the modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state may be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the external signal is, for example, one of the on state and the off state (for example, the on state) in the time-saving gaming state, and the other of the on state and the off state (for example, the off state) in the non-time-saving gaming state. Anything is fine. By outputting the external signal, it becomes possible for the management control device of the game hall to grasp whether or not the current game state is the time-saving game state. In addition, under the configuration that limits the transition even if the transition condition of the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the situation of the time-saving gaming state, the transition to the time-saving gaming state is restricted by outputting the above-mentioned external signal. It is also possible to let the management control device of the game hall know that this is the case. It should be noted that the external signal does not necessarily have to indicate a time-saving gaming state (a state of a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode), and even if the support mode is a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode. good.

In addition, in the configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to the time-saving game state, the result of the special figure winning / failing lottery is obtained at the final game time of the time-saving game state (special figure game time at which the time-saving game state ends). When a special loss result is obtained, the external signal corresponding to the time-saving game state is turned off, and then the external signal corresponding to the special loss result (lottery result signal or game round execution signal) is turned on. It is good to say.

In the above case, the game shifts to the subsequent time-saving gaming state when the special deviation result is obtained. For example, the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is turned on → the external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is turned off. When the process is executed, there is a concern that the management control device on the game hall side may recognize that the game has transitioned to the time-saving gaming state even though the transition to the time-saving gaming state is restricted. In this regard, by setting the order of turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-saving gaming state → turning on the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result, the special disconnection result is obtained after the time-saving gaming state is completed for the above management control device. It is possible to make it grasp that it has become, and it is possible to suppress that it is recognized as an unnatural behavior even if it shifts to a time-saving game state after that.

(41) In the modification 3 to the modification 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output when the confirmation display is started in the special figure game. , May be output at the middle timing of the confirmation display or the end timing of the confirmation display. In addition, it may be output at the middle timing of the fluctuation display in the special figure game times that resulted in the special deviation.

(42) In the modification 3 to the modification 10 of the second embodiment, when the special deviation result is obtained in the situation where the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state is restricted, the stop corresponding to the special deviation result is obtained. Although the result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43, the stop result corresponding to the normal deviation result may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop result corresponding to the special deviation result in the situation where the transition to the third short game state is restricted (corresponding to the special deviation result, but the transition to the above transition is not restricted, the special deviation result is obtained. It may be configured so that the stop display is different from the stop result displayed in the case.

(43) In the modified examples 3 to 5 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is executed at the start of the final display in the special figure game. However, it may be executed when the special figure game round is started as in the modified examples 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be made at the start of the special figure game round, while the transition to the third time-shortened game state may be made at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the third time-shortened game state may be made at the start of the special figure. It may be configured to be performed at the start of the game round.

Further, the above-mentioned transition determination may be performed at the mid-timing of the variation display in the special figure game times that resulted in the special deviation result. Further, in the case of shifting to the third time-shortened gaming state after the start of the final display, the shift determination may be executed after the start of the final display.

(44) In the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted only in the final game time in the first time-saving game state, but special features other than the final game time. The configuration may be such that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is permitted in the game times. For example, a configuration is provided with an allowance flag indicating that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is permitted when a special deviation result is obtained, and the allowance flag is set to a special figure game time other than the final game time (for example, 70). During the period (for example, from the transition to the first short-time game state to the elapse of a predetermined period) when the special figure game times other than the final game time are executed (for example, the time from the first to the 80th special figure game times). ) Can be set to allow it. In this configuration, if a special figure game time in which the permissible flag is set or a special out-of-game result is obtained during the period, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted, and the special figure game time in which the permissible flag is not set is allowed. If a special out-of-game result is obtained during the period, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted.

In addition to or in addition to the permissible flag, a configuration may be provided with a restriction flag indicating that the transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted when a special deviation result is obtained. In this case, the restriction flag is set in the special figure game times and the period during which the third time-shortened game state is not transferred even if the special deviation result is obtained, and the state is set so as to be in the unacceptable state.

When the transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted in the special figure game times other than the final game times, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted in the special figure game times on the latter half side in the first time-shortened game state. It is preferable to have a configuration that includes game times. As the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state decreases, the expected value of winning the jackpot result in the time-saving game state decreases. It becomes difficult to be done. In such a situation, by allowing the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state due to the special deviation result, it becomes possible to sustain the expectation satisfactorily.

(45) In the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the final game times in the first short-time game state and the game times in the second special figure (the second special game performed under the normal game state) for the remaining reserved portion. It may be configured so that the effect for the game round is different from that of the game round in the figure). For example, it is conceivable to make the background image or the like on the symbol display device 75 different.

(46) In the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the fixed display time when a special deviation result is obtained in the final game times in the first time-shortened game state or the game times in the second special figure of the remaining reserved portion. It may be configured to be set to a shorter time than the normal confirmation display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start the game (special figure game times) after shifting to the third time-saving game state.

(47) In the modified example 3, the modified example 5, and the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration may have a special deviation result in the first special drawing as in the modified example 4. When both the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure have special deviation results, the winning probability of the special deviation result in the 1st special figure is the same as the winning probability of the special deviation result in the 2nd special figure. It may be different or it may be different. In addition, the maximum number of times of the third time-saving gaming state that shifts when the special deviation result is obtained in the first special figure is the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving gaming state that shifts when the special deviation result is obtained in the second special figure. It may be the same as or different from.

Further, in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, unlike the other modified examples, the first special figure may be configured so that the special deviation result is not provided.

(48) In the modified example 3, the modified example 4, and the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the special reach-off effect (gase effect) may be executed as in the modified example 5.

(49) In the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, the configuration is disadvantageous to the player when a special deviation result is obtained in the first time-shortening gaming state, but the configuration may be likely to be disadvantageous. Specifically, a third time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is relatively small (for example, a third time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is 10 times) and a third time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is relatively large (for example, the upper limit number of times is 10 times). It may be configured to have 1000 times of the third time-shortening game state), and the former third time-shortening game state may be more easily selected when a special deviation result is obtained.

(50) In the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, the special deviation result is obtained in the first time-saving game state, so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is reduced. The mode of the normal figure game times and the accessory opening / closing game in the three-time short-time game state may be set to a more disadvantageous mode than that of the first time-short-time game state. For example, the variable display time of the Fuzu game times becomes longer, the opening time of the Fuden accessory 63a becomes shorter, or the opening number of the Fuden accessory 63a in one bonus opening / closing game decreases. Can be considered.

(51) In the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, the remaining number of times of the time-saving gaming state is not specified in the whole of the first time-saving gaming state, but the remaining number of times of the first time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number (for example). In a situation where the number of times is more than 10 times), the remaining number of times may be unspecified, and when the number of times becomes less than a predetermined number, it may be specified. With such a configuration, if the special deviation result does not occur until the end of the first time-saving game state, the player can be notified of the remaining number of times before the end, giving the impression that the time-saving game state has suddenly ended. Can be suppressed.

(52) In the modified example 5 of the second embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of first time-saving game states, that is, the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. The number of types of states may be three or more.

(53) In the modified example 5 of the second embodiment, the third time-shortening game is given priority by comparing the remaining number of times of the first time-shortening game state with the upper limit number of times of the third time-saving game state. Although the configuration is such that a plurality of first time-saving game states having different ranges of game times allowed to be transferred to the state are provided, the transition to the third time-saving game state is performed without using the priority processing based on the comparison of the remaining number of times. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of first time-saving gaming states having different ranges of allowed gaming times are provided. For example, the range of game times in which the permissible flag is set and the permissible state is set is set after the configuration is provided with a permissible flag indicating that the transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted when a special deviation result is obtained. It is conceivable that the configuration will be different for each first time-saving game state.

In this case, not only when the permissible flag is set for the range of the special figure game times, but also for one special figure game times or a plurality of special figure game times without continuity as a range, the permissible flag is set. May be set. For example, in the 1st time-saving game state A, the 60th special figure game time is set as the allowable special figure game time, or the 40th, 50th, and 60th special figure game times are the allowable state special figure game times. On the other hand, in the 1st time-saving game state B, the 80th special figure game is set as the allowable special figure game, and the 80th, 90th, and 100th special figure game times are allowed. It is set as a special figure game time of the state.

Further, the permissible flag may be set for the period. For example, in the first time-saving game state A, the first period (for example, 5 minutes) after the predetermined number of times (for example, the 20th time) of the special figure game is started after the transition to the time-saving game state is set as the allowable state. On the other hand, in the first time-saving game state B, the second period (for example, 10 minutes) after the start of the special figure game times for a specific number of times (for example, the 20th or 25th time) after shifting to the time-saving game state. Is an acceptable state.

Even when the permissible state is set using the permissible flag as described above, the permissible state in the first time-saving game state B is included in the 70th and subsequent special figure game times as in the modified example 5, or the first If the range or period of the special figure game times and the special figure game times in which the transition to the third time reduction game state is restricted between the time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is set in common, Each effect described in the modified example 5 can be achieved.

When the permissible state is set by using the permissible flag, the upper limit number common to the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B may be set. Further, instead of or in addition to the permissible flag, a configuration may be provided including a restriction flag indicating that the transition to the third time-shortening gaming state is restricted when a special deviation result is obtained.

(54) In the modified example 6 to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the special figure game times that reach the ceiling and the special figure game times that result in the special deviation result are other than the end timing of the variation display. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set to stop display (either temporary stop display or main stop display may be used) earlier than the special figure game times, and the rest after the stop display until the variable display ends. At least a part of the notification corresponding to the ceiling arrival or the special deviation result may be performed by using the period.

(55) In the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination of whether or not to shift to the second time-saving gaming state and the transition determination of whether to shift to the third time-saving gaming state are performed. Is configured to be executed at the start of the special figure game round, but it is executed at the start of the definite display (the timing of transition to each time-saving game state) as in the second embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 5. May be done. Further, each of the above-mentioned transition determinations may be executed at an intermediate timing of the variation display in the special figure game times in which the transition condition to each time-saving gaming state is satisfied. Further, in the case of shifting to each time-saving gaming state after the start of the confirmation display, the above shift determination may be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(56) In the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the second time-saving gaming state is the setting process of the variation pattern (setting process of the game rotation effect). Although the configuration is set to be executed before, the above transition determination may be executed after the variation pattern setting process as long as it is before the execution of the notification corresponding to the ceiling arrival or the special deviation result. In such a configuration, when both the achievement of the number of ceilings and the winning of the special missed result are established in one special figure game, first, based on the grasp that the special missed result is won, the special missed. The notification corresponding to the result is set to be executed, but after that, the execution target is based on the fact that the arrival at the ceiling number is grasped by the transition judgment as to whether or not to shift to the second short game state. It is advisable to change the notification from the notification corresponding to the special deviation result to the notification corresponding to the ceiling arrival.

(57) In the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is executed before the variation pattern setting process. The transition determination may be executed after the variation pattern setting process, and only the process of updating the number of out-of-game rounds may be executed before the variation pattern setting process. Even in such a configuration, before setting the fluctuation pattern, it is grasped that both the winning of the special deviation result and the arrival of the ceiling count are established, and the fluctuation pattern is executed so that the notification corresponding to the ceiling arrival is executed. This is because it is possible to set.

(58) In the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the advantages and disadvantages between the second time-shortened gaming state and the third time-shortened gaming state are caused by the magnitude of the upper limit number of times, but instead of this. In addition, the configuration may be such that advantages and disadvantages occur depending on the mode of the normal drawing game times and the accessory opening / closing game in the time-saving game state. For example, if the second time-shortening gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-shortening gaming state, the variation display time of the normal figure game times in the second time-shortening gaming state is shorter than that of the third time-shortening gaming state. It is conceivable that the number of times the general electric accessory 63a is opened in one accessory opening / closing game in the second time-shortened game state is larger than that in the third time-shortened game state.

(59) In the modified example 7 of the second embodiment, the second time-shortening gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the third time-shortening gaming state, but the third time-shortening gaming state is more advantageous. The configuration may be more advantageous to the player than the second short-time gaming state. In this case, when the winning of the special loss result and the arrival of the number of ceilings are established in the same special figure game times, in order to shift to the third time-shortened game state on the advantageous side, the second time-shortened game state is shifted. It is preferable that the processing is executed in the order of the transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the third time-saving gaming state.

(60) In the modified example 7 of the second embodiment, as in the modified example 5, when the transition condition to another time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the situation of the time-saving gaming state (reaching the number of ceilings or reaching the ceiling number). (When the winning of the special out-of-order result is established), the remaining number of time-saving game states at that time is compared with the upper limit number of other time-saving game states scheduled to be transferred, and the time-saving game state on the side with the larger number of times is compared. May be prioritized.

(61) In the modified example 8 of the second embodiment, the transition to the other time-saving gaming state is restricted when the transition condition to the other time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the situation of the time-saving gaming state. However, the configuration may be such that the transition is permitted as in the modified example 7. In this case, in order to shift to the time-saving gaming state on the advantageous side when winning the special loss result and reaching the number of ceilings are established in the same special figure game round, whether to shift to the second time-saving gaming state? It is preferable to configure the order of the transition determination of whether or not to shift and the transition determination of whether or not to shift to the third time-shortening gaming state to be the reverse order of the case of the modified example 8.

(62) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the update of the number of misses is restricted when the special figure game results in which the number of missed games is the number of ceilings. Although it is configured, it may be configured so that the update is permitted. That is, when the special figure game times of the number of times of the ceiling result in a special deviation, the arrival of the number of times of the ceiling is invalidated, and the transition to the second time-saving game state may be restricted.

(63) In the modification 10 of the second embodiment, the update of the number of missed game times is restricted in the case of the third time-shortened game state, while the update is executed in the final game time. Although it is configured, the configuration may be such that the update of the number of off-game rounds is restricted even in the final game round. That is, when the number of times of the off-game is the number of times of the ceiling and the special figure out-of-game result is obtained, the game first shifts to the third time-saving game state, and is performed after the third time-saving game state is completed. It may be configured that the update of the number of missed game times is restarted in the special figure game times (special figure game times in the normal game state). In this case, although the special figure game times in the normal game state intervene, it is possible to shift to each of the third time-shortening game state and the second time-shortening game state.

(64) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration may be such that the number of missed game times can be updated in a part of the third time-shortened game state. For example, in the situation of the third short-time game state, the number of times of the off-games is allowed to be updated until the number of times of the off-games becomes a predetermined value smaller than the number of ceilings (for example, the value immediately before the number of ceilings). Updates may be restricted after the value is reached. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that reaches the number of ceilings in the middle of the third short game state.

(65) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration may be configured to switch whether or not to limit the update of the number of disconnections by referring to the remaining number of times up to the number of ceilings. Specifically, if the number of remaining times up to the number of ceilings is less than the upper limit of the number of times of the third time-shortening game state, the update of the number of misses is restricted in the third time-saving game state, and if it is large, in the third time-saving game state. The configuration may be such that the update is permitted.

(66) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the upper limit number of times is larger in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state, which is advantageous for the player. The second time-shortened game state may have a smaller upper limit number of times than the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state, and may be configured to be disadvantageous to the player.

(67) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of deviations is allowed to be updated in the first time-saving gaming state, but the updating is performed in the first time-saving gaming state. It may be a restricted configuration. In this case, even if the number of times equal to or greater than the number of ceilings is set as the upper limit of the number of times of the first time-shortened game state, it is possible to suppress reaching the number of times of ceilings in the case of the first time-shortened game state.

In the case of a pachinko machine having both a first time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is equal to or greater than the number of ceilings and a first time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is less than the number of ceilings, the number of missed times is updated in the former case. However, in the latter case, the number of deviations may be updated.

(68) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, when the update of the number of disconnections is restricted, the state immediately before the restriction is performed is maintained and the image of the number of detachments 475 is displayed. However, the disengagement number image 475 may not be displayed. In this case, only the holding image 481 may be displayed, or another image related to the third time-shortening gaming state such as "during chance time" may be displayed. Further, the configuration may be such that only the disengagement count image 475 is erased with the transition to the restricted state, and other images are not displayed at the display location of the disengagement count image 475.

(69) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, a predetermined external signal is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the limitation of updating the number of disconnections is started or is being limited. May be good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the management control device on the game hall side know that the number of off-game rounds has not been updated in the pachinko machine 10, and even if the number of out-of-game rounds exceeds the number of ceilings. It is possible to immediately determine that the pachinko machine 10 is not abnormal with respect to not shifting to the second short game state.

(70) Although the second external signal is provided in the modification 11 of the second embodiment, this may be omitted. That is, if the hall device can determine the difference in the output period, it can determine the occurrence of the special deviation result based on the first external signal. The difference between the first external signal in the case of the normal jackpot result and the case of the special deviation result is not limited to the output period (the period of the ON state), and may be, for example, the output level or the like. ..

(71) In the modified example 11 of the second embodiment, the second external signal is turned on during the open / close execution mode and the time-saving game state, but is turned off during the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to be turned on during the time-saving game state. This also applies to the second external signals A and B in the modified example 12.

(72) In the modified example 11 and the modified example 12 of the second embodiment, the first external signal and the second external signal in the case of a special deviation result are turned on at the transition timing to the time-saving gaming state. However, it may be turned on before the transition to the time-saving gaming state (for example, immediately before the transition) or after the transition (for example, immediately after the transition). In short, those external signals may be turned on in response to the transition to the time-saving gaming state.

(73) In the modified example 11 and the modified example 12 of the second embodiment, the first external signal in the case of a normal jackpot result is turned on during the open / close execution mode, but the open / close execution mode is used. It may be turned on before the transition to (for example, immediately before the transition) or after the transition (for example, immediately after the transition). That is, the first external signal may be turned on in response to the transition to the open / close execution mode.

(74) In the modified example 12 of the second embodiment, both the first external signal B and the second external signal B can be output, but one of them may not be output. ..

(75) In the second embodiment and each modification, the symbols that are variablely displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the left-right direction, but the symbols are arranged side by side on the left, middle, and right. Is displayed, and these symbols may be displayed in a variable manner so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. That is, the arrangement direction and scroll direction of the symbols are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of columns in the symbol row) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(76) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic aA group-Characteristic aI group>
The inventions described in the following feature aA group to feature aI group are extracted from the above-mentioned first embodiment and each modification thereof. The invention described in these feature groups states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result becomes a specific result, the player is notified. Regarding the background technique that "a device that grants a predetermined privilege is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)", "Here, in a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, there is still a game effect. There is room for improvement. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic aA group>
The feature aA group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 1 to modification of the first embodiment and the first embodiment described above. It is extracted based on Example 6.

Features aA1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function for executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is performed.
A hold notification means (holding notification means) that performs a hold notification (holding image) by a notification means different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution. (Function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. The main control device 162 in the destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (mods 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, modified examples 1 to 3, and modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment). The function of executing the hold look-ahead process by the main control device 162, the function of executing the hold command setting process by the main control device 162, and the function of executing the first hold look-ahead process by the staging control device 143 in the modified example 4 of the first embodiment).
Specific mode means (first embodiment) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the prior identification process. , A function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process for the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the modified examples 1 to 6 of the first embodiment).
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When a predetermined event occurs in a state where the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (the effect mode is switched between the first embodiment and the first and second modifications 1 to 2). In the case where the open / close execution mode is performed in the modified examples 3 to 4 of the first embodiment, and the electric power failure state occurs in the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment). At least the hold notification in the specific mode is configured to be in a specific state in which the specific mode or the hold notification is not executed (variation example 1 of the first embodiment and the first embodiment). -In the modification 2, the display mode of the holding image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the effect mode, and in the modification 3 to the modification 4 of the first embodiment, the holding image is executed by executing the opening / closing execution mode. , The configuration in which the reserved image disappears due to the occurrence of a power failure state in the modified examples 5 to 6 of the first embodiment),
After the end of the specific state, the player can recognize that the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. A predetermined second aspect (upper) capable of being recognized by the player as higher than the aspect (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) or the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. In the specific means (first embodiment, modification 1 to modification 4 of the first embodiment) that can be a specific display mode, etc., the setting process for returning the notice by the effect control device 143, the hold notice 2nd execution process, function to execute 3rd execution process of hold notice, function to execute return process of hold notice by effect control device 143 in modification 5, and function to execute 4th execution process of hold notice, modification The gaming machine provided with the function of executing the setting process of the display mode by the effect control device 143 in Example 6).

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the grant response result will be obtained even before the start of the game round. can. Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the expected degree of the granting response result is different as a specific aspect, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expected degree and suggest it, in order to arouse the expectation of the player. It can be an advantageous configuration. In such a configuration, when a predetermined event occurs in a situation where the hold notification is set to a specific mode, the state shifts to a specific state in which the specific mode or the hold notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the expected degree suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to the non-execution of the specific mode or the like. In this regard, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, the hold notification is performed as the first mode having the same rank as the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than that, so that the expectation level is renewed. It can be suggested, and it becomes possible to maintain the expectation that the result will be a grant response.

Feature aA2. At least, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification, which is a specific mode, can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode, the specific means has the same as the predetermined first mode based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. (1st embodiment, a function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice in the effect control device 143 in the modified examples 1 to 4 of the 1st embodiment, and the setting process of the display mode in the modified example 5. The gaming machine according to feature aA1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the end of the specific state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, after the end of the specific state, it is possible to suitably return the notification mode of the hold notification to the mode of the same rank as before the specific state (before the occurrence of the predetermined event).

Feature aA3. It is provided with an execution notification unit (execution display area D) for performing predetermined notification (displaying a hold image on the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times.
The specific means sets the mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit in the predetermined first mode or the predetermined mode in the game round of the special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the target of the specific state. The third execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 is executed in the specific means that can be the second aspect (the first embodiment, the first embodiment to the fourth modification of the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature aA1 or the feature aA2, characterized in that the function, the function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the modification 5 to the modification 6) is provided.

In the above configuration, after the end of the specific state, when the process of the first mode having the same rank as the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than the notification mode is performed, the target of the specific state is applied. Up to the game times of the hold notification can be included in the implementation period. As a result, it is possible to secure a long processing period for returning the notification mode to the same mode, for example, when a predetermined event occurs immediately before the start of the game round of the hold notification as the specific mode. However, the return process can be performed by using the execution period of the game times after the end of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Features aA4. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing processing for displaying special figure variation in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
When the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode, the specific means has the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. (1st embodiment, a function of executing the 3rd execution process of the hold notice by the staging control device 143 in the 1st embodiment and the 1st to 4th modifications, the 5th to 6th modifications. The gaming machine according to feature aA3, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a fourth execution process of a hold notice.

For example, if only the notification mode is returned to the apposition mode after the end of the specific state, it is not possible to suggest a degree of expectation higher than that suggested before the occurrence of the predetermined event. However, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a higher level, it will not be consistent with the game rotation effect actually performed in the game times, and on the contrary, there is a risk of damaging the trust of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the holding notification is based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game rotation effect in the holding notification game time that is the target of the specific state. Is promoted to a higher aspect than before the occurrence of a predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification while suppressing the notification mode of the predetermined notification from becoming inconsistent with the game rotation effect actually performed in the game times.

Feature aA5. The specifying means is a determination means for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. (Functions for executing the third execution process of the hold notice by the staging control device 143 in the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications 1 to 4, and the hold notice in the modifications 5 to 6 The function of executing the fourth execution process) is provided, and when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined second mode is used, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode. Feature a The gaming machine according to A4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to use the higher mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game rotation effect, and when the determination allows promotion to the higher mode, the promotion process is performed. Will be done. As a result, after the end of the specific state, it is possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification within a range that does not exceed the expected degree of the game rotation effect actually performed.

Features aA6. The specific means includes means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state to the predetermined first mode and then to the predetermined second mode after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aA1 to the feature aA5.

When the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of the specific state, if the mode is suddenly set to the higher mode, the specific mode that was performed before the occurrence of the predetermined event from the player's point of view. It is difficult to understand the correspondence with and may cause confusion. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is once changed from the same notification mode to the higher notification mode, it can be easily understood that the notification mode has been restored, and the above confusion can be suppressed.

Features aA7. When the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the specific mode, the specific mode means sets the notification scenario (effect scenario) for setting the notification mode of the hold notification to the specific mode. The first scenario setting means (effect control). A function to execute the setting process for the hold notice in the device 143) is provided.
When the specific means sets the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode after the end of the specific state, the hold notification A function of executing a second scenario setting means (function for executing a setting process for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for setting the notification mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode. ), The gaming machine according to any one of the features aA1 to aA6.

For example, in a configuration in which a game can be played in a specific state, since the game times are digested during the specific state, the execution period (remaining) after the specific state in the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event. Period) is expected to fluctuate depending on the length of stay in a specific state. In this regard, in this configuration, apart from the notification scenario set before the occurrence of a predetermined event, a notification scenario for making the hold notification that is the target of the specific state into the same mode after the end of the specific state. Is reset, so that the notification mode of the hold notification can be suitably changed to the same rank mode even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state fluctuates.

Features aA8. After the end of the specific state, the process of holding number grasping means (step Sa2103) for grasping the number of holdings of the game times before or before the special information corresponding to the holding notification that is the target of the specific state is executed. Function)
The second scenario setting means is characterized in that a notification scenario for making the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode is set based on the number of holds grasped by the hold number grasping means. The gaming machine described in aA7.

In the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the notification scenario is reset to grasp the number of holds and take the result into consideration to make it the same rank, etc., so regardless of the length of stay in the specific state, The notification mode of the hold notification can be suitably changed to a mode of the same rank or the like.

Features aA9. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aA1 to the feature aA8, wherein the specific state is at least the hold notification in the specific mode, wherein the notification mode is the normal mode.

Misunderstanding that when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode due to the transition to the specific state, the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event has disappeared. It becomes easier to give the player anxiety. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aA1 to the above-mentioned features aA8 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, when the hold notification is set to the normal mode in the specific state, it is necessary to change (upgrade) the mode from the normal mode to the mode of the same rank after the end of the specific state. By applying to the above, even if the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state fluctuates, it is possible to suitably change from the normal mode to the same rank mode and the like.

Features aA10. With respect to the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state, the means for restricting the execution of the specific mode in the specific state (holding triggered by the hold information acquired in the effect mode B). The gaming machine according to feature aA9, which is characterized by having a function of limiting the execution of a notice effect).

For example, it is specified that the notification mode of the hold notification, which has been regarded as a specific mode, is changed to the normal mode in the specific state, while the special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode. Since it is necessary to distinguish between the special information acquired before the state and the special information acquired during the specific state, there is a concern that the processing will be complicated. Further, even though there is a hold notification changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, if the hold notification of the special information acquired after that exists as the specific mode, the normal mode in the previous hold notification is used. There is also a risk of further anxiety that expectations for the change to the mode have disappeared. In this respect, in this configuration, since the change to the specific mode is restricted in the specific state for the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired in the specific state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. It will be possible.

Features aA11. A means for allowing the specific mode means to perform processing after the end of the specific state for the hold notification in which the execution of the specific mode is restricted (the first for holding notice in the first modification of the first embodiment). 2 The gaming machine according to feature aA10, which is characterized by having a function of executing a setting process).

As described in the effect of the above feature aA10, by restricting the change to the specific mode for the special information acquired during the specific state, the expectation for the change to the normal mode in the previous hold notification disappears. It is possible to suppress the anxiety that it may have been done. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation will be lost for the special information acquired during the specific state. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the hold notification with such a restriction is allowed to be changed to a specific mode after the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation.

Features aA12. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aA1 to the feature aA8, wherein the specific state is such that the hold notification is not executed at least for the hold notification in the specific mode.

If the notification mode of the hold notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, the player is given a misunderstanding or anxiety that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared before the occurrence of the predetermined event. It will be easier. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aA1 to the above-mentioned features aA8 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aA13. After the specific state is completed, the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is configured to be executed in the normal mode.
The specific means is a means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which is the normal mode, to the predetermined first aspect or the predetermined second aspect (setting for advance notice return in the effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature aA12, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

It is suggested by the specific mode that the hold notification is restarted in the normal mode after the notification mode of the hold notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, before the occurrence of the predetermined event. There is a risk of further aggravating anxiety that the degree of expectation may have disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aA1 to the above-mentioned features aA8 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In the case of a configuration in which the hold notification is not executed in the specific state and the hold notification is restored in the normal mode after the end of the specific state, the normal mode is changed to the same mode after the end of the specific state. A process of changing (upgrading) is required, but by applying this feature to the feature aA7 or feature aA8, even if the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes, the normal mode is changed to the same rank mode, etc. The changes can be preferably made.

In addition, this feature is "the specific means, after the end of the specific state, after the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is executed in the normal mode, the predetermined first aspect or the predetermined mode. It is also possible to express that it is provided with a means for changing to the second aspect (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the staging control device 143). "

Feature aA14. Specific effect means (function for executing the processing of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode, the means for limiting the execution of the specific effect (change suggestion effect). A function that restricts execution) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aA1 to the feature aA13.

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the higher notification mode by the specific effect, the expectation that the notification mode is changed to the higher mode is aroused, and the player to the hold notification is aroused. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific effect is performed when the mode is the same after the end of the specific state, the player has the notification mode (the notification mode) that the player remembers even though the mode is actually the same. It is assumed that a higher-level notification mode is associated with the mode before the occurrence of a predetermined event). In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player's trust in the specific effect may be impaired. In this respect, in this configuration, when the mode is the same after the end of the specific state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that the player is prevented from associating a mode higher than the actual notification mode. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience.

For each configuration of the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aB group>
The feature aB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Features aB1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
In the specific notification means (effect control device 143) that enables the specific notification (holding notice effect) to be performed by the predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the predetermined execution trigger (look-ahead result). Function to execute pending command support processing) and
Equipped with
The specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). The setting means (a function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) is provided, and the specific notification is executed based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Is configured to
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36), one of a plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) including the predetermined effect state is produced. A staging state transition means (a function of executing the staging mode switching process in the staging control device 143) for shifting from the staging to another staging state.
When the specific notification (holding notice effect by the hold image HW) is executed, the predetermined effect state is changed to another effect state, and then the predetermined effect state is changed, the specific notification is specified in the later predetermined effect state. A second notification mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the notification based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the predetermined effect state (a function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice by the effect control device 143 in the first embodiment). )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of effect states are provided, and when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the effect state is switched. As a result, the mood of the player can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the chance of notification or suggestion by the specific notification disappears. There is a concern that misunderstandings and anxieties may be given to the player. In such a case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the effect state is reduced, and the significance of providing multiple types of effect states may be impaired. be.

In this respect, in this feature, when the predetermined effect state is changed to another effect state during the execution of the specific effect state and then the predetermined effect state is changed, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set first. Since the setting is based on the notification mode in the predetermined effect state, the specific notification can be returned to the original notification mode by returning the effect state to the original state. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the specific notification without causing restrictions on the switching of the effect state. That is, it is possible to preferably achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state.

Feature aB2. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature aB1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying the configuration of the feature aB1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

It should be noted that this characteristic may include the feature that "the effect state transition means is provided with a means for switching the effect state in accordance with the execution of the game times". In a configuration in which the effect state is switched according to the division of the game times while the specific notification is performed across the game times, the event that the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is particularly likely to occur. Can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature aB3. Information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of RAM 344).
The second notification mode setting means according to the feature aB1 or the feature aB2, characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined effect state is set based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when the state shifts to the predetermined effect state later, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state can be suitably restored to the original notification mode executed in the previous predetermined effect state.

Feature aB4. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Equipped with
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification before the special information targeted for the prior identification process is subject to the grant determination. ,
The specific notification means shifts from the previous predetermined effect state to the other effect state during execution of the specific notification triggered by the specific special information (hold information of the target hold image HW), and then the specific effect state. If the specific information shifts to a later predetermined effect state before the end of the game round of the special information or before the specific special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means, the specific effect state is specified later. Equipped with specific means for executing specific notification in response to special information (a function to execute a setting process for returning a notice in the staging control device 143, a second execution process for a hold notice, and a third execution process for a hold notice). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aB1 to the feature aB3.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, the grant determination is performed by suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination will be the grant correspondence result depending on the notification mode of the specific notification. It is possible to preferably arouse the player's expectation that the result of the grant will be given in advance. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled as the effect state is switched as described above, it is misunderstood that the grant response result has disappeared or the expectation level has decreased for the player. There is a concern to give.

In this regard, according to this configuration, if the original effect state is restored before the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification is completed or before the special information is subject to the grant determination, the original notification is made. The notification mode of the specific notification is set according to the mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the grant response result has not disappeared, and the degree of expectation for the special information before the grant determination result for the special information that triggered the specific notification is notified. Can be suggested again. Therefore, the above concerns can be appropriately dealt with, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state can be suitably compatible with each other.

Feature aB5. The second notification mode setting means is based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the predetermined production state, regardless of the result of the prior identification processing in the predetermined production state. The gaming machine according to feature aB4, which comprises setting a notification mode.

For example, if the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous predetermined effect state, the notification of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state is performed. It is assumed that a mode different from the mode is set. Further, in the configuration in which the notification mode of the specific notification is gradually changed (ranked up), even if the same look-ahead result is obtained, the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching may differ depending on the switching timing of the effect state. If the notification mode in the later predetermined production state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead, it becomes easy to set a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state.

In this respect, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is specified when the effect state is switched to another effect state, not the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous predetermined effect state. Since the setting is based on the notification mode of the notification, when the effect state returns to the original state, the notification mode can be set to the same as the specific notification actually notified. As a result, the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state can be suitably matched with the notification mode in the subsequent predetermined production state, and it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification mode has been restored. become.

Feature aB6. The specific notification means is
When performing specific notification triggered by the specific special information in the predetermined production state, the first scenario setting means (for holding notice) for setting a notification scenario (effect scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification. Function to execute the setting process of) and
When the specific notification is performed in correspondence with the specific special information in the later predetermined production state, the second scenario setting means (return to the notice) for resetting the notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification is performed. Function to execute the setting process for) and
The gaming machine according to the feature aB4 or the feature aB5.

In the case of performing the specific notification in the later predetermined production state, after switching to the later predetermined production state due to the length of the stay period in the other production state, the game round of the special information corresponding to the specific notification starts or It is assumed that the period until the end, that is, the period during which the specific notification can be executed varies. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific notification is performed later in the predetermined production state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset. Therefore, even if the above period fluctuates, the notification mode of the specific notification is the original. It can be changed to suit the embodiment.

Feature aB7. When the game shifts to the predetermined effect state after that, it is provided with a hold number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step Sa2103) for grasping the hold number of the game times before or before the specific special information.
The gaming machine according to feature aB6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of holds grasped by the hold number grasping means.

In the above configuration, when the screen is switched to the predetermined production state later, the number of hold states is grasped and the notification scenario of the specific notification is reset in consideration of the result. Therefore, regardless of the length of stay in other production states, the notification scenario is reset. The notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode.

Feature aB8. When the state shifts from the predetermined effect state to the other effect state during the execution of the specific notification, a means for restricting the continuation of the specific notification (a function of setting the display mode of the reserved image HW to the normal display mode HMa) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aB1 to the feature aB7.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the specific notification that has been executed up to that point is restricted (regulated) as the production state is switched, so that it is easy to give the player a misunderstanding that the chance has disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aB1 to the above-mentioned features aB7 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aB9. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aB1 to the feature aB8, wherein the predetermined effect state is an effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from that of the other effect states.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk of inviting. In this case, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in the degree of expectation or the like by canceling the execution of the specific notification when the effect state is switched. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aB1 to the above-mentioned features aB8 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In the present feature, "the predetermined effect state is an effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from that of the other effect state" is defined as a state in which the other effect state can execute the specific notification. It can be understood that not only the configuration to be set but also the configuration in which another effect state is set as a state in which the specific notification is not executed is included.

Features aB10. The plurality of types of notification modes in the specific notification are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different.
The second notification mode setting means allows the player to recognize that the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is the same as the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. Features aB1 to feature that include a first means (setting process for returning to advance notice in the staging control device 143) for setting one mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of aB9.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is set to the mode in which the player can recognize that the notification mode is the same as the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, the specific notification is restored. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it has been done.

Feature aB11. After setting the notification mode of the specific notification to the predetermined first aspect in the later predetermined production state, the second notification mode setting means is higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. The feature aB10 is provided with a second means (setting process for returning to advance notice in the staging control device 143) for setting a predetermined second mode (higher-level specific display mode, etc.) that can be recognized by the player. The game machine described in.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state can be a notification mode higher than the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, the notification mode in the later predetermined production state is the first. It is possible to prevent the range of the suggestable degree of expectation and the like from being narrowed by being limited to the notification mode in the predetermined effect state. At that time, if the notification mode is suddenly set to a higher level, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence relationship with the notification mode performed in the predetermined predetermined production state, and the production may be difficult to understand. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is once changed from the same notification mode to the higher notification mode, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has been restored, and it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature aB12. A specific effect means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
When the notification mode of the specific notification is the predetermined first mode in the subsequent predetermined effect state, the means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect). When,
The gaming machine according to the feature aB10 or the feature aB11.

In the above configuration, it is suggested that the notification mode of the specific notification is changed to the higher notification mode by the specific effect, so that the expectation that the specific notification is changed to the higher notification mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification is generated. You can increase the degree. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific effect is performed when the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the same rank mode, the player remembers the destination even though the specific notification mode is actually the same rank mode. It is assumed that a higher-level notification mode is associated with the notification mode in a predetermined production state as a reference. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player's trust in the specific effect may be impaired. In this respect, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher notification mode, if it is only returned to the notification mode in the predetermined predetermined effect state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that the actual effect is achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from associating a mode higher than the notification mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aB13. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function for executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
Equipped with
The specific notification is described in any one of the feature aB1 to the feature aB12, wherein the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Gaming machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is assumed that the effect when the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to the switching of the staging state is large. To. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aB1 to the above-mentioned features aB12 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aB14. In the situation where the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) is set as the specific mode, when the predetermined effect state is changed to the other effect state, the specific special The feature aB13, wherein the feature aB13 is provided with a means for setting the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the information to the normal mode (a function of setting the display mode of the hold image HW to the normal display mode HMa). Game machine.

In the above configuration, the hold notification, which had been a specific mode until then, is changed to the normal mode as the production state is switched, so that the player is likely to receive the impression of being downgraded and the degree of expectation is lowered. It is easy to misunderstand. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aB1 to the above-mentioned features aB12 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aC group>
The feature aC group is a feature of the invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 1 of the first embodiment. Is.

Features aC1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function for executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means for holding notification (holding image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holdings of the game times before execution. The hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143) performed in the section) and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
A specific mode means capable of executing a specific mode process in which the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the prior specific process (specific mode means). In the first modification of the first embodiment, the function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the staging control device 143) and
Equipped with
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B), the mode is configured to shift to a restricted state in which the execution of the specific mode or the hold notification is restricted. ,
For the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, a setting means (first) for setting the notification mode after the restricted state based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing a second setting process for holding notice by the staging control device 143 in the first modification of the first embodiment).

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the grant response result will be obtained even before the start of the game round. can. Under such a configuration, a restricted state may be provided to limit the execution of the specific mode or the hold notification for the hold notification that has already been set as the specific mode. However, if new special information is acquired in the restricted state, the player's expectation for the special information acquired during the restricted state is assumed that the change to the specific mode is not made even for such special information. There is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse the feeling.

In this regard, according to this configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the end of the restricted state, it was acquired during the restricted state. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation about special information. At that time, since the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the look-ahead processing (holding look-ahead processing) executed during the restricted state, the look-ahead processing is performed in the same manner as in the non-restricted state. be able to. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the destination identification process, the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state is changed after the restricted state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. Will be possible.

Feature aC2. The destination specifying means is characterized in that the destination specifying process for the acquired special information is performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of the special information regardless of whether or not the restricted state is set. Features The gaming machine according to aC1.

According to the above configuration, the advance identification process can be performed according to the acquisition timing of the special information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state. Therefore, the advance identification process is performed in the former case and the latter case. There is no need to distinguish between processes. Therefore, it is possible to change the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Features aC3. The gaming machine according to feature aC1 or feature aC2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when the restricted state ends or after the restricted state ends.

For example, if the notification mode after the restricted state is set based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state, and the setting is made during the restricted state, it corresponds to the hold notification for which the notification mode is set. If the game of the special information to be played is executed during the restricted state, the hold notification may end without reflecting the setting of the notification mode, and the setting may be wasted. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is set at the end of the restricted state or after the end, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

Features aC4. The restricted state limits the execution of the specific embodiment.
Regarding the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, a predetermined mode (black display mode) in which the notification mode during the restricted state is different from the normal mode or any of the normal mode and the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aC1 to the feature aC3, which is provided with means (a function of forcibly setting the display mode of the reserved images HB1 and HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode). ..

In the above configuration, since the hold notification is performed in the normal mode or a predetermined mode different from the normal mode and the specific mode in the restricted state in which the execution of the specific mode is restricted, the player can recognize the number of hold times of the game times. In this way, the specific mode can be non-executed. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aC1 to the above-mentioned features aC3 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aC5. When the special information is acquired during the restricted state, the predetermined information (the generation is suspended during the restricted period) so that it can be grasped after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aC1 to the feature aC4, characterized in that the information) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if the special information acquired before the restricted state and the special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the end of the restricted state, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is stored. It is possible to identify the special information acquired during the restricted state based on the information in. As a result, in the setting means related to the feature aC1, the special information acquired during the restricted state and the special information not otherwise can be identified, and processing is performed only for the special information acquired during the restricted state. It will be possible.

Feature aC6. As the effect state, a plurality of effect states including the first effect state (effect mode A) and the second effect state (effect mode B) are set.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36), an effect state transition means (effect) for shifting from one effect state among a plurality of types of effect states to another effect state. It is equipped with a function to execute the effect mode switching process in the control device 143).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aC1 to the feature aC5, which is configured to shift to the restricted state when the state shifts from the first effect state to the second effect state.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is entered as the effect state is switched. In this case, since it is considered that the player plays the game in the staging state after switching, it is assumed that special information is acquired during the restricted state. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aC1 to the above-mentioned features aC5 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features aC7. The gaming machine according to feature aC6, wherein the second effect state is an effect state in which the ease with which the specific mode processing is executed is different from that of the first effect state.

In the case of a configuration in which the susceptibility to change to a specific mode differs depending on the staging state, if the staging state is switched while the specific mode is maintained, the expectation degree suggested by the specific mode may not match before and after the switching. In this case, by limiting the execution of the specific mode and the hold notification along with the transition from the first effect state to the second effect state, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in the degree of expectation. However, even if the above restriction is applied to the hold notification which was a specific mode before the transition to the second effect state, a new hold is performed by acquiring special information in the second effect state. There are concerns about how notifications should be handled. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aC1 to the above-mentioned features aC6 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in this feature, "the second staging state is a staging state in which the ease of executing the specific mode processing is different from the first staging state" includes both the first staging state and the second staging state. The specific notification can be executed in, and not only when the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification is different in each of these effect states, but also the specific notification is performed in one of the first effect state and the second effect state. It can be understood that the configuration that is not executed is also included.

Features aC8. The gaming machine according to feature aC6 or feature aC7, characterized in that the restricted state is configured to end when the second effect state ends.

In the above configuration, since the restricted state is released when the second effect state ends, the hold notification of the special information acquired during the second effect state is a specific mode or the hold notification during the second effect state. The execution of the above can be restricted, and then the specific mode can be set according to the end of the second effect state.

Features aC9. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times. With D)
When the game of the special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit corresponding to the special information is performed. It is characterized in that it is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step Sa2901 to step Sa2903) for setting a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aC1 to the feature aC8.

According to the above configuration, with respect to the hold notification for which the change of the notification mode is restricted due to the transition to the restricted state, the change to the specific mode is permitted as the game progresses to the game times of the hold notification. Therefore, even when the game times of the special information acquired during the restricted state are executed during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information.

For each configuration of the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aD group>
The feature aD group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 2 of the first embodiment. ..

Features aD1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set and the game rotation operation is terminated. As one time, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game rotation operation is performed, and
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means for holding notification (holding image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holdings of the game times before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
Based on a predetermined execution trigger (look-ahead result), it is possible to execute a specific mode process in which the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Aspect means (a function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) and
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
A plurality of types of states including a first state (effect mode A) and a second state (effect mode B) in which the specific mode processing is different from the first state are set.
When the specific mode processing is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to any one of a plurality of types and then shifts to the second state, the notification mode of the hold notification is set. Mode determination for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first state is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank. A gaming machine comprising means (a function of executing an effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143 in the second modification of the first embodiment).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the hold notification is set as a specific mode, and a plurality of types of modes are set in the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the grant response result is different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by setting the hold notification to any specific mode, and it is possible to preferably arouse the player's expectation that the result of the grant response will be obtained. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of states including a first state and a second state in which the easiness of change to a specific mode is different from that of the first state are set. Since switching between these states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed.

Under such a configuration, when the state shifts from the first state to the second state in the situation where the hold notification of the specific mode is performed, if the specific mode is maintained, the corresponding expectation is the second depending on the type. It will be far from the state before the transition to the state, which may lead to misunderstanding of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, when such a transition occurs, the player recognizes that the notification mode of the hold notification is the same as the notification mode in the first state after the transition to the second state. It is determined whether or not the mode is possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suitably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In addition, in the "second state in which the ease of executing the specific mode processing is different from the first state" in this feature, the second state is set as a state in which the change to the specific mode of the hold notification can be executed. It can be understood that not only the configuration to be performed but also the configuration in which the second state is set as the state in which the change to the specific mode of the hold notification is not executed is included.

Feature aD2. The gaming machine according to feature aD1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, in the second state, the hold notification is less likely to be a specific mode than in the first state. Therefore, the degree of expectation for the grant response result when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the specific mode. It is assumed that the second state is higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the degree of expectation for the grant response result for the specific mode is low to a state in which the expectation is high. By applying the configuration of, it becomes possible to suppress the inconsistency of the expectation degree and preferably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In the present feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state", the probability that the hold notification is set to the specific mode in the second state is the first. In addition to the configuration set to be lower than that of the state, it can be understood that the configuration in which the second state is set as the state in which the change to the specific mode of the hold notification is not executed is also included.

Feature aD3. When the mode of the hold notification when the mode shifts to the second state is higher than the predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), the mode determination means determines the mode of the hold notification. When it is determined that the mode is not allowed and the notification mode of the hold notification when shifting to the second state is the mode equal to or less than the predetermined notification mode, the notification mode of the hold notification is the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to the feature aD1 or the feature aD2, which is determined to allow the embodiment.

In the above configuration, it is possible or not to have the same mode as the notification mode in the first state by comparing the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state with the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state. Is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each aspect has the same rank based on the corresponding expectation in the second state, and it is possible to suitably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state. Become.

In this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set in response to the second state".

Features aD4. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the special information is the information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, and the special information is the grant determination. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function to execute a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) that executes a destination identification process to be specified at a timing before the target.
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on the result of the prior specific process.
Any of the features aD1 and aD3, wherein the aspect determining means makes the determination based on the result of the prior identification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the aspect determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is performed based on the result of the look-ahead processing (so-called look-ahead result). Then, when it is determined by the aspect determining means whether or not the aspect has the same rank, the above determination is made based on the look-ahead result of the hold notification which is the determination target. As a result, the pre-reading result of the hold notification, that is, the notification result in the game times executed when the special information of the hold notification becomes the judgment target of the grant determination means, or the game times in the game times. Based on the production, it can be determined whether or not the mode has the same rank.

Feature aD5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set according to the result of the prior identification process (return determination table).
The mode determination means is
A grasping means (a function for executing the process of step Sa3105) for grasping the result of the prior identification process with respect to the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the mode determination means.
A means for making the determination based on the upper limit mode corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types (a function of executing the process of step Sa3106).
The gaming machine according to feature aD4, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of upper limit modes are set according to the look-ahead result, and when determining whether or not the mode has the same rank by the mode determination means, the look-ahead result of the hold notification, which is the determination target, is used. The corresponding upper limit embodiment is applied and the above determination is made. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the notification mode of the hold notification in the case of shifting to the second state does not exceed the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and the mode is the same.

Feature aD6. When the specific mode processing is executed, the specific mode means performs the hold notification in the first specific mode (blue display mode HMb) which is one of the plurality of types, and then the specific mode means. Means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) higher than the first specific mode (for the hold notice in the effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aD1 to the feature aD5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a setting process).

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the specific mode, the notification mode is gradually changed to a higher mode. In such a configuration, when the processing for which the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the specific mode is performed in the first state, for example, when the transition to the second state occurs in the early stage after the specific mode is set. It is assumed that the specific mode at that time is a relatively low mode (a mode with a low degree of expectation), and conversely, if the above transition occurs in the final stage, a relatively high mode (expected). It is expected that the mode will be high. That is, depending on the transition timing to the second state, there is a difference in which mode is the specific mode in the hold notification. By applying any of the configurations from the feature aD1 to the feature aD5 to the configuration in this way, it is possible to sort out whether or not the configuration has the same rank according to the notification mode each time, and the transition to the second state is possible. It becomes possible to preferably perform the hold notification later.

In this feature, "whether or not the aspect determining means is a predetermined aspect that can be recognized as having the same rank as the notification mode in the first aspect immediately before the transition to the second state. It may be further provided with the feature of "providing a means for determining."

Feature aD7. The second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.
When the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to any one of a plurality of types and then shifts to the first state, the determination by the mode determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features aD1 to aD6, which comprises means for non-execution (a function of skipping the processing of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 when a negative determination is made in step Sa3104).

In the above configuration, there is a high expectation for the transition from the second state in which the hold notification is relatively difficult to be a specific mode to the first state in which the hold notification is relatively easy to be a specific mode, that is, the result of the grant response to the specific mode. In the case of switching from the state to the low state, it is not determined whether or not the mode has the same rank. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for maintaining the notification mode of the hold notification from being excessively limited, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Features aD8. When it is determined by the aspect determining means that the predetermined aspect is to be set, the changing means (process of step Sa3110) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aD1 to the feature aD7, which is characterized by having a function to perform.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the same mode, the normal mode is once changed to the same mode. In this case, in both the case where the mode is the same and the mode where the mode is not the same, the notification mode of the hold notification can be switched to the normal mode when the first state is switched to the second state. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the specific mode is changed to the normal mode due to the determination that the mode is not the same. In addition, by setting the configuration to change to a specific mode after becoming a normal mode, the hold notification that has been set to the normal mode is specified after the transition to the second state, including the case where it is determined that the mode is not the same. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the mode will be changed, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

Feature aD9. A specific effect means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the change means, the means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (the function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect). ,
The gaming machine according to the feature aD8, which is characterized by the above.

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the higher notification mode by the specific effect, the expectation that the notification mode is changed to the higher notification mode is aroused, and the game for the hold notification is aroused. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of the person. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, the notification mode in the first state stored by the player is used as a reference, and a higher notification mode is associated with the notification mode. It is expected that it will end up. In this case, there is a concern that even though the specific effect has been performed, it may give an unnatural impression that the original mode has just been restored. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher level, when the normal mode is changed to the same mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that such an inconvenience is preferable. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Feature aD10. When it is determined by the mode determination means that the predetermined mode is not used, the mode of the hold notification that is the target of the determination is the normal mode, or a means (step) that is lower than the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aD1 to the feature aD9, which is characterized by having a function of executing the process of the Sa3108).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not the same, the notification mode of the hold notification that is the judgment target is the normal mode or the lower notification mode, so that the hold notification when the second state is entered is performed. It is possible to prevent the notification mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation in the first state, and it is possible to suitably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

For each configuration of the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aE group>
The feature aE group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 3 of the first embodiment. ..

Features aE1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (a function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means for holding notification (holding image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holdings of the game times before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the notification mode of the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). It is equipped with a function for executing the setting process for advance notice and the first execution process for hold notice).
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. Function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
Regarding the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the special mode. Specific means for making the mode different from the notification mode before the game state (a function of executing the setting process for the advance notice return by the effect control device 143 in the modification 3 of the first embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the grant response result will be obtained, and the player's expectation is suitable. Can be aroused to. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as game states, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, any one of the plurality of types of game states is executed. It is transferred to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination and the game rotation effect performed in the game times may differ depending on the game state. There is. In this respect, in this configuration, regarding the hold notification that is set as a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is special when the gaming states before and after the execution of the special gaming state are different. Since the notification mode is different from that before the game state, even if the grant determination result or the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state changes, the hold notification suppresses the misunderstanding of the player. It becomes possible to suitably perform the hold notification in the gaming state after the transition.

Features aE2. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specific means has the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, after the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature aE1, which comprises means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the hold notification is performed. As a result, after the special game state, the hold notification that does not match the actual expected degree is performed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player. Further, by uniformly adopting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Features aE3. The specific means is
The first means as the means to set in the above-mentioned normal aspect and
After the normal mode is set by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is set to the specific mode, and based on the result, the notification mode of the hold notification is determined. 2nd means to set (a function to execute the 3rd execution process of the hold notice) and
The gaming machine according to feature aE2, characterized in that it is provided with.

To change the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode after that, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the expectation level is notified. It becomes possible to do the same.

Features aE4. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times. With D)
The specific means is
The first means as the means to set in the above-mentioned normal aspect and
In the game of the hold notification, which is the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notification is a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is A second means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on
The gaming machine according to the feature aE2 or the feature aE3.

To change the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the holding notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode as the game progresses to the game times of the holding notification. Therefore, even when the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified.

Features aE5. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing processing for displaying special figure variation in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
The second means is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. The gaming machine described in aE4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game turn effect by the game turn effect setting means. As a result, when the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game rotation effect actually performed in the gaming round after the special gaming state. Can be changed to a specific mode.

When this feature is applied to the feature aE2, "the second means is a specific mode of the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. "Determining whether or not to do so" is "the second means refers to the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means, regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit." Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode. "

Features aE6. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the predetermined storage for the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A feature characterized by being provided with an aspect setting means (a function of executing a setting process for returning a notice in the staging control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the unit. The gaming machine according to any one of aE1 to feature aE5.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode is set different from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this respect, in this configuration, when the special gaming state is executed in the situation where the holding notification of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is before the special gaming state. If it is the same as the gaming state of, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably return the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the holding notification which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state. "For the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the prior identification processing." It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting a mode".

Features aE7. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the special gaming state for the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. Mode setting for setting the later notification mode to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE1 to the feature aE6, which comprises means (a function of executing a setting process for returning a notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible, it is possible to similarly arouse the expectation even after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to a specific aspect before the special gaming state. ..

Features aE8. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The specific means is
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the normal mode for the hold notification which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. The first means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504) set in the embodiment and
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the notification mode for the hold, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. (Function to execute the setting process for returning to the notice in 143) and
Equipped with
The second means is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3507) that can be set to the predetermined mode after setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE1 to the feature aE7.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the normal mode is once changed to the same rank mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode as the special gaming state is executed. Is changed to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the normal mode is changed due to the difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to a specific mode after becoming a normal mode, the hold notification that is the normal mode is changed to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including the case where the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

Features aE9. The specific means is a game for determining whether or not the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same in the special gaming state or when the special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE1 to the feature aE8, which comprises a state determination means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3416).

In the above configuration, the same or not determination of whether or not the gaming states are the same is performed when the special gaming state is being executed or when the special gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to promptly respond after the special game state as to what kind of mode the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as the specific mode before the special game state, should be after the special game state. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of holdings before the holding notification is small after the special gaming state, the notification mode of the holding notification can be suitably adjusted.

Features aE10. Variable that can be switched between the first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (variable winning device 65) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) for executing switching control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state. ,
Equipped with
The special gaming state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once.
The gaming machine according to feature aE9, wherein the gaming state determining means performs the determination during the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state in the special game state, the processing load is relatively high, for example, it is necessary to perform an effect based on the ball entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Is expected. If the same or reject judgment is made using such a period, there is a concern that a higher load will be caused. In this respect, in this configuration, since the same or not is determined by using the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Features aE11. The grant determination means performs the grant determination based on the first information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information.
The game round effect (reach effect) performed in the game round based on the second information (value of the fluctuation type counter CS) included in the special information or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the effect control device 143) to be set.
In the prior identification process, the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specific information corresponding to the second information is included in the predetermined special information. Is specified at a timing before the target of the grant determination.
The plurality of types of gaming states correspond to a first gaming state (any of a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a highly accurate gaming state) and predetermined second information (variable type counter CS having a value of 80). A second gaming state in which the game rotation effect or specific information is different from the first gaming state (any of a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state, which is different from the first gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE1 to the feature aE9, which comprises the feature aE1 to the feature aE9.

In the above configuration, the game rotation effect is set based on the second information included in the special information, and the corresponding game is set in the first game state and the second game state even if the value of the second information is the same. It is configured so that the staging is different. Therefore, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, if the notification mode after the special gaming state in the hold notification is the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the special gaming state There is a possibility that the game rotation effect suggested by the hold notification will not match before and after the special game state. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aE1 to the above-mentioned features aE9 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features aE12. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE1 to the feature aE10, which comprises means for disabling the hold notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step Sa3411).

When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed due to the end of the special game state, if the hold notification that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player is unnatural. There is a concern that you will be impressed. For example, when downgrading the notification mode of the hold notification to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold notification itself is not executed in the special game state, so when changing the notification mode, a period during which the hold notification itself is not performed, including other hold notifications, is provided. Can be done. As a result, the change in the notification mode is suppressed from being noticeable, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the specific notification is not executed, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the special gaming state.

Feature aE13. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (a function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means for holding notification (holding image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holdings of the game times before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the notification mode of the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). It is equipped with a function for executing the setting process for advance notice and the first execution process for hold notice).
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. Function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
Regarding the hold notification that was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state. Specific means (a function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice by the staging control device 143 in the modification 3 of the first embodiment) and the case where the case is not changed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the grant response result will be obtained, and the player's expectation is suitable. Can be aroused to. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as game states, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, any one of the plurality of types of game states is executed. It is transferred to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination and the game rotation effect performed in the game times may differ depending on the game state. There is. In this respect, in this configuration, regarding the hold notification which is a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, the notification mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the gaming state before and after the execution of the special gaming state. Since it is different depending on whether it is the same or not, it is possible to set the notification mode based on the change in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state, and the hold notification in the game state after the transition can be set. It becomes possible to do it suitably.

Features aE14. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the predetermined storage for the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. The feature is that it is provided with an aspect setting means (a function of executing a setting process for returning a notice in the staging control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the unit. The gaming machine described in aE13.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode is set different from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this respect, in this configuration, when the special gaming state is executed in the situation where the holding notification of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is before the special gaming state. If it is the same as the gaming state of, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably return the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the holding notification which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state. "For the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the prior identification processing." It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting a mode".

Feature aE15. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the special gaming state for the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. Mode setting for setting the later notification mode to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature aE13 or feature aE14, which comprises means (a function of executing a setting process for returning a notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible, it is possible to similarly arouse the expectation even after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to a specific aspect before the special gaming state. ..

Features aE16. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specific means has the holding notification set to the specific mode before the special gaming state after the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE13 to the feature aE15, which comprises means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504). ..

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the hold notification is performed. As a result, after the special game state, the hold notification that does not match the actual expected degree is performed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player. Further, by uniformly adopting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Features aE17. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times. With D)
The specific means is
The first means as the means to set in the above-mentioned normal aspect and
In the game of the hold notification, which is the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notification is a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is A second means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on
The gaming machine according to feature aE16, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

To change the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the holding notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode as the game progresses to the game times of the holding notification. Therefore, even when the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified.

Features aE18. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing processing for displaying special figure variation in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
The second means is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. The gaming machine according to aE17.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game turn effect by the game turn effect setting means. As a result, when the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game rotation effect actually performed in the gaming round after the special gaming state. Can be changed to a specific mode.

When this feature is applied to the feature aE2, "the second means is a specific mode of the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. "Determining whether or not to do so" is "the second means refers to the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means, regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit." Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode. "

Features aE19. In the specific mode, a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The specific means is
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the notification mode for the hold, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A first means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. (Function to execute the setting process for returning to the notice in 143) and
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the usual mode for the hold notification which was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504) set in the embodiment and
Equipped with
The first means is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3507) that can be set to the predetermined mode after setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aE13 to the feature aE18.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the normal mode is once changed to the same rank mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode as the special gaming state is executed. Is changed to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the normal mode is changed due to the difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to a specific mode after becoming a normal mode, the hold notification that is the normal mode is changed to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including the case where the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

It is possible to apply the configuration of the feature aE9 to the feature aE12 to the feature aE13 to the feature aE19. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aF group>
The feature aF group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 4 of the first embodiment. ..

Features aF1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores special information (holding information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Specific notification means (effect control) that executes specific notification (display of a hold image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. The function of executing the first execution process of the hold notice in the device 143) and
Equipped with
Regarding the predetermined special information, the information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is before the special information is the target of the grant determination. A first destination specifying means (a function of executing a first hold look-ahead process by the staging control device 143 in the modification 4 of the first embodiment) specified at a predetermined timing (holding information acquisition timing), and
Judgment when a predetermined event (opening / closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during execution of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination for the predetermined special information. The second destination specifying means (modification 4 of the first embodiment) for specifying the information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result at the specific timing (end timing of the opening / closing execution mode, etc.) after the predetermined event is produced. (Function to execute the second hold look-ahead processing by the control device 143) and
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
The first means (execution of the setting process for holding notice in the staging control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event based on the specific result of the first destination specifying means. Function to do) and
The second means (execution of the setting process for returning the advance notice in the staging control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event based on the specific result of the second destination specifying means. Function to do) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the grant response, and the expectation of the player is preferably aroused. Can be done. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of a predetermined event, and even if the value of the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination or the like may differ before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and the specific notification is performed based on the result. Set the notification mode of. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the predetermined event can be adjusted to be a suitable mode after the predetermined event, and the specific notification after the predetermined event can be suitably performed.

Feature aF2. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature aF1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, it is easy to cause a situation in which a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification. By applying the configuration of the feature aF1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aF3. It is characterized in that the grant information (random value corresponding to the jackpot) or the determination condition (winning probability) in the grant determination means can be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature aF1 or feature aF2.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, the result of the grant determination may differ between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. Therefore, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a result different from the notification result (result of the grant determination) actually notified in the game round may be suggested. By applying the configuration of the feature aF1 or the feature aF2 to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode so as to match the actual notification result in the game round and perform notification after a predetermined event. , It becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Features aF4. The gaming machine according to feature aF3, wherein the second destination specifying means performs the identification by applying the given information or the determination condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the given information and the determination condition corresponding to the state after the predetermined event. .. As a result, regarding the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, the notification mode can be adjusted so as to match the actual notification result in the game round, and the notification after the predetermined event can be performed, and the specific notification after the predetermined event can be performed. Notification can be suitably performed.

Feature aF5. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) so that the game turn operation is performed.
Game turn effect setting means (effect control device 143) for setting a game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in a game time based on special information (holding information) or specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. (Function to execute processing for displaying special figure fluctuations) and
Equipped with
It is configured so that the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the predetermined specific information (variation pattern having a value of 80) derived from the predetermined special information can be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aF1 to the feature aF4.

In the above configuration, even if the values of the special information or the specific information are the same, there may be a difference in the game rotation effect set by the game time setting means between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation may be caused in which a different effect from the game time effect actually performed in the game time is suggested. By applying the configuration described in any of the features aF1 to aF4 to such a configuration, the notification mode is such that the specific notification performed before the predetermined event is consistent with the actual game rotation effect. Can be adjusted to give notification after a predetermined event, and specific notification after a predetermined event can be suitably performed.

Features aF6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are means for specifying the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information as the information corresponding to the determination result. Equipped with
The second destination specifying means is described in feature aF5, which is characterized in that after the predetermined event, the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information is specified. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game rotation effect and the specific information are pre-read according to the state after the predetermined event. As a result, regarding the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, the notification mode can be adjusted so as to match the actual game rotation effect, and the notification after the predetermined event can be performed, and the specific notification after the predetermined event is suitable. It will be possible to do it.

Features aF7. The second means is any one of the feature aF1 to the feature aF6, which is characterized in that the notification mode after the predetermined event is set based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination specifying means. The gaming machine described in.

For example, if the notification mode of the specific notification changes frequently with the occurrence of a predetermined event, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this respect, in this configuration, in order to set the notification mode after the predetermined event in consideration of not only the specific result of the second destination specifying means but also the notification mode before the predetermined event, for example, the notification mode before the predetermined event is the first. (2) In light of the specific result of the destination specifying means, if there is no problem even if the same mode is used after the predetermined event, the specific notification can be performed by taking over the notification mode before the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive change in the notification mode with the predetermined event as a boundary, and it is possible to execute the specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Features aF8. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode) are set so that the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information is different is different. HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set.
In the second means, the player has the same rank as the notification mode before the predetermined event in the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination identification means. A mode determination means (function for executing the process of step Sa4703 to step Sa4705) for determining whether or not to use a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized as The gaming machine according to feature aF7, which is characterized by being provided.

In the above configuration, as the notification mode of the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the grant response result is different is different. In such a configuration in which the expectation degree is set stepwise and a large number of notification modes are provided, the range of the expectation degree corresponding to one notification mode is narrowed, so that the notification mode before the predetermined event is the predetermined event. When the specific notification is performed later, the degree of expectation suggested before and after the predetermined event tends to be different. In this respect, in this configuration, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the predetermined event is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event, based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination specifying means. In order to determine whether or not the mode is possible, even in a situation where a large number of notification modes are set, it is possible to match the degree of expectation and preferably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Features aF9. When it is determined by the mode determining means that the second means does not have the predetermined mode, the notification mode after the predetermined event is lower than the normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or the notification mode before the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature aF8, which comprises means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa4706).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not the same, the notification mode of the specific notification that is the judgment target is the normal mode or the lower notification mode, so that the notification mode after the predetermined event corresponds to the notification mode before the predetermined event. It is possible to suppress exceeding the expected degree, and it becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Features aF10. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function for executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aF1 to the feature aF9, wherein the specific notification is a hold notification.

When the specific notification is performed by using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and a situation in which a predetermined event is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target of the expectation degree suggested by the specific notification is, it is assumed that there is a large influence when the expectation degree differs before and after the predetermined event. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aF1 to the above-mentioned features aF9 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features aF11. A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (A function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and the special gaming state to be transferred to
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. Function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aF1 to the feature aF10, wherein the predetermined event is in the special gaming state.

There are gaming machines that shift to a gaming state such as a normal gaming state, a highly accurate gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state, triggered by the transition to the special gaming state. In such a gaming machine, even if the value of the special information used for the grant determination is the same between the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state, the result of the grant determination before and after the special gaming state. Etc. may be different. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aF1 to the above-mentioned features aF10 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature aF12. The feature aF11 is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3411) for disabling the specific notification in the special gaming state when the special gaming state is entered during the execution of the specific notification. The gaming machine described in.

When the notification mode of the specific notification is changed with the end of the special gaming state, if the specific notification that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special gaming state, the player gives an unnatural impression. I am concerned about receiving it. For example, when downgrading the notification mode of the specific notification to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific notification is not executed in the special gaming state, it is possible to intervene a period in which the specific notification itself is not performed when changing the notification mode. As a result, the change in the notification mode is suppressed from being noticeable, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the specific notification is not executed, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the special gaming state.

For each configuration of the feature aF1 to the feature aF12, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aG group>
The feature aG group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modifications 5 to 6 of the first embodiment. It is a thing.

Features aG1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function for executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
For the first specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) that enables the specific notification (holding notice effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (design display device 75) based on the result of the destination identification process. (Function to execute the setting process, the first execution process of the hold notice),
Equipped with
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). It is provided with a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 143), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Ori,
When a predetermined abnormality (power interruption state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the second specific notification means (modification of the first embodiment) that re-executes the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved. Example 5 is provided with a function of executing the process for returning the hold notice by the effect control device 143, and a function of executing the effect setting process by the effect control device 143 in the modification 6 of the first embodiment).
The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, and before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. A second notification mode setting means (mod 5 to modification of the first embodiment) to be set based on the result of the executed destination identification process or the result of the destination identification process performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved. The gaming machine provided with the function of executing the setting process of the display mode by the effect control device 143 in Example 6).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the grant response, and the expectation of the player is preferably aroused. Can be done. At that time, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification modes of the specific notification, by setting one of the plurality of types of modes and executing the specific notification, the degree of expectation is suggested by giving a magnitude. be able to. Under such a configuration, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in a situation where the specific notification is performed and then the abnormality is resolved, the specific notification that was executed before the occurrence of the abnormality is re-executed. .. As a result, the specific notification can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to prevent the specific notification from disappearing due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At that time, since the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set based on the notification mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the occurrence of the abnormality, or the pre-reading result performed again after the occurrence of the abnormality, the notification mode is set before the occurrence of the abnormality. It becomes possible to suitably restore the specific notification that has been performed.

Features aG2. The gaming machine according to feature aG1, characterized in that the specific notification is configured not to be executed when the predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification.

In a configuration in which the specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality, not only the specific notification but also the expected degree associated with the specific notification is likely to cause anxiety of the player. By applying the configuration of the feature aG1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Features aG3. The second notification mode setting means is set at a predetermined timing in a period from the resolution of the predetermined abnormality to the time when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to feature aG1 or feature aG2.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set in the period from the resolution of the abnormality to the start of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to return the notification mode of the specific notification to the mode before the occurrence of the abnormality before the game round of the special information is started, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation before the game round.

Features aG4. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information about the image for holding) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG3, characterized in that the information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved can be suitably performed.

Features aG5. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the grant correspondence result will be different is different.
When the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is a notification mode higher than the predetermined predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is the predetermined mode. Aspect The following notification mode is set (a function of executing the process of step Sa5407), or the specific notification is not executed (a function of not executing the hold notice effect after the abnormality is resolved). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG4.

For example, when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the abnormality occurs and the result of the grant determination performed after the abnormality is resolved are inconsistent. .. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed as it is even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game times or the game times will be performed. There is a concern that the game performance will not match the expectations suggested by the specific notification, giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the notification mode of the specific notification performed at the time of the occurrence of the abnormality is a predetermined or higher mode and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is limited to the lower notification mode. Re-execute or do not execute the specific notification itself. As a result, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result in the game times by the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Features aG6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained.
When the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or lower. It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the staging control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification or the non-execution based on the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature aG5, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or the specific notification is not executed due to the limitation to the lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation, the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that is not executed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the situation where the suggested expectation level remains low and the specific notification is completely lost. At that time, since the notification mode is reset or the like based on the result of the grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in a state of being in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Features aG7. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification processing executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
Information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the prior identification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG6, characterized in that the information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the look-ahead result is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved can be suitably performed.

Features aG8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification processing executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the grant correspondence result will be different is different.
When the specific result of the prior identification means becomes a predetermined result (hit result) before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is displayed in a higher notification mode (red display) than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). It is permissible to set the aspect HMd, the iridescent display aspect HMe).
The notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is limited to the notification mode of the predetermined mode or less (a function of executing the process of step Sa6303), or the notification mode executed before the predetermined abnormality occurs. When the result of the prior identification process is a predetermined result, the specific notification is not executed (a function of not executing the hold notice effect after the abnormality is resolved). The gaming machine described in any of aG7.

For example, when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the abnormality occurs and the result of the grant determination performed after the abnormality is resolved are inconsistent. .. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed as it is even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game times or the game times will be performed. There is a concern that the game performance will not match the expectations suggested by the specific notification, giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this respect, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is limited to the predetermined mode or less, or if the pre-reading result before the abnormality occurs is the predetermined result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed. , It is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result in the game times by the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Features aG9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained.
When the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or lower. It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the staging control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification or the non-execution based on the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature aG8, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or the specific notification is not executed due to the limitation to the lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation, the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that is not executed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the situation where the suggested expectation level remains low and the specific notification is completely lost. At that time, since the notification mode is reset or the like based on the result of the grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in a state of being in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Features aG10. When a predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, and the result of the prior identification process performed before the abnormality occurs after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved cannot be specified. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG9, characterized in that the means for restricting the execution of the above (a function of shifting to the step Sa6311 when a negative determination is made in the step Sa6308) is provided.

In the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, if the look-ahead result that is the basis of the notification cannot be specified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is restricted, so that an erroneous expectation is made. It is possible to suppress the suggestion of degree.

Features aG11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification processing performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved.
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the staging control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) according to the number of game times for which execution is held.
The first specific notification means, as the specific notification, sets the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).
A predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup) can store specific information (change location information) capable of grasping the hold notification in which the specific notification is performed in a situation where a plurality of the hold notifications are performed. It has a configuration that can be stored in RAM345).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG10, which is configured to be able to retain the information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is used to perform the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, which hold is performed after the abnormality is resolved and before the abnormality occurs. It is possible to preferably grasp whether or not the specific notification has been performed by the notification.

Features aG12. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, the holding notification that was performed before the predetermined abnormality occurs is grasped and grasped. The gaming machine according to feature aG11, characterized in that the specific processing is executed for the holding notification.

In the above configuration, since the prior identification process is executed after the abnormality is resolved for the hold notification for which the specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, the hold notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred is executed. Specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Furthermore, the number of executions of the prior identification process can be suppressed to a smaller number than when the prior identification process is performed for all hold notifications performed after the abnormality is resolved, and the processing load at the time of recovery can be reduced. ..

Features aG13. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, the holding notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the predetermined abnormality occurs is grasped, and the holding notification thereof is grasped. The gaming machine according to the feature aG11 or the feature aG12, characterized in that the means for setting the grasped notification mode of the hold notification to the normal mode is provided.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed after the abnormality is resolved for the hold notification that was not performed before the abnormality occurred, and it is possible to match the notification modes before and after the abnormality occurs. Become.

Features aG14. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG13, wherein the predetermined abnormality is in an electric power failure state.

If a power interruption state occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, so that the specific notification that has been performed up to that point suddenly disappears. In this case, it is assumed that the player is worried whether the expected degree suggested before the power failure does not disappear and remains after the power is restored after the power is restored from the power failure state. By applying any of the configurations from the feature aG1 to the feature aG113 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably re-execute the specific notification after the power is restored, and to make each of these features function effectively. Can be done.

It should be noted that the "electric power cut state" of this feature can also be expressed as "a power cut state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)".

Features aG15. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
In the specific notification, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aG1 to the feature aG14, characterized in that the plurality of types of notification modes are set in the specific mode.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that the effect of the case where the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality is large. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aG1 to the above-mentioned features aG14 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aH group>
The feature aH group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modifications 7 of the first embodiment. ..

Features aH1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (holding notice effect) by a predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process. (Function to execute the setting process for, the first execution process of the hold notice),
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the modification 7), one of the multiple types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) is selected from the other effect states. The effect state switching means for executing the process for switching to the effect state (the function of executing the effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143 in the modification 7 of the first embodiment) and
Switching limiting means that can limit the switching of the effect state by the effect state switching means when the specific notification is being executed (in the modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the effect control device 143 is used. Function to execute the judgment process for mode switching) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the grant response, and the expectation of the player is preferably aroused. Can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of effect states are provided and switching between these effect states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the change in the effect state distracts the attention to the specific notification, or conversely concentrates on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the production state may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the switching of the effect state is restricted when the specific notification is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state from overlapping. This makes it possible for the player to easily pay attention to each of the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. There is also an advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Features aH2. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) in which the ease with which specific notification is executed is different from the first effect state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature aH1, wherein the switching limiting means includes means for limiting switching to the second effect state when the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the expectation level suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the specific notification and the result of the grant determination actually notified may be inconsistent in the effect state after switching, which may give an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying the configuration of the feature aH1 to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the discrepancy and preferably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in the "second effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from the first effect state" in this feature, only the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification can be executed is required. It can be understood that a configuration in which the second state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Features aH3. The gaming machine according to feature aH2, wherein the second effect state is an effect state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease with which the specific notification is executed in the second effect state is lower than that in the first effect state, switching from the first effect state to the second effect state while the specific notification is being executed is apparently expected. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the ease of executing the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the ease of executing the specific notification is low from the first effect state (specific notification). (The corresponding expectation is relatively high) When switching the second effect state, if the specific notification is being executed, the execution of the switching is restricted, so it is preferable to suggest a higher expectation than the actual one. It becomes possible to suppress it.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state", the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. In addition to the configuration in which is set to be lower than that in the first effect state, it can be understood that the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Features aH4. The switching limiting means is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step Sa7207) for limiting the switching of the effect state based on the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of aH1 to feature aH3.

In the above configuration, switching of the effect state is restricted based on the result of the look-ahead processing that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be performed, such as when a jackpot is pre-read, based on the pre-reading, the production state until the game round of the special information for which the pre-reading was performed is completed. It can be configured to limit the switching of. In this case, the switching can be restricted quickly, and it is possible to preferably suppress the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state. In addition, the following effects can be expected by adopting such a configuration. When the pre-reading result is a big hit or the like, it is assumed that a fanning effect such as a notice effect is performed to arouse the expectation of the player even before the special information is subject to the grant determination. If the switching of the effect state is inserted during the execution of the fanning effect, the player may find it difficult to understand the fanning effect. At this time, by limiting the switching of the staging state based on the pre-reading of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to suppress the switching of the staging state in the middle of the fanning staging, and it is possible to preferably suppress the obscureness of the staging. Become.

Further, for example, while the change of the effect state is basically not allowed during the execution of the specific notification, the change of the effect state may be allowed in a special case such as when the jackpot is pre-read. In this case, even though the production state is not originally switched, the switching causes the rule to be broken from the player's point of view, and it is possible to suggest a big hit or the like. That is, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the effect state as one of the expected degree suggestion effects.

It should be noted that the "means for restricting switching" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for making a difference whether or not switching is restricted".

Features aH5. The switching limiting means has a predetermined degree of expectation that the result of the prior identification process that triggered the specific notification will be a predetermined first result (big hit look-ahead result) corresponding to the grant response result or the grant response result. It is provided with a means (function for executing the process of step Sa7207) for limiting the switching of the effect state based on whether or not it is a predetermined second result (pre-reading result of SPSP reach effect) corresponding to the degree of expectation. The gaming machine according to the feature aH4.

When the look-ahead result is a jackpot result (first result) or a high expectation result (second result), the switching of the staging state is restricted or conversely allowed, so that each of the above effects of the feature aH4 can be obtained. It becomes possible to exert it suitably.

Features aH6. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the grant response result is different. It has been set and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aH1 to the feature aH5, wherein the switching limiting means includes a means (step Sa7211) for limiting the switching of the effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification.

For example, if the configuration is such that the switching of the effect state is uniformly restricted during the execution of the specific notification, the switching of the effect state may be excessively restricted or the execution frequency of the specific notification may be suppressed to a low level. There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of staging states and the significance of installing a specific notification execution function will be diminished. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the switching of the effect state is restricted based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, for example, in the case of the specific notification corresponding to the expectation degree below a certain level, the switching of the effect state is not restricted. , It is possible to operate such as allowing the switching. As a result, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to appropriately secure those opportunities.

Features aH7. The limiting means limits the switching of the effect state when the notification mode of the specific notification is higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and the notification mode of the specific notification is the predetermined mode or less. In the case, the gaming machine according to the feature aH6, which allows switching of the effect state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the switching of the effect state only when the specific notification of a predetermined mode or more is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to appropriately secure those opportunities.

Features aH8. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) set so that the execution frequency of the specific notification is lower than that of the first effect state. And
In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the grant response result is different. It has been set and
The switching limiting means is
When the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state, the first means for restricting the switching to the second effect state (process when affirmative determination is made in step Sa7206) is executed regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification. Function to do) and
When the specific notification is being executed in the second effect state, the second means for restricting the switching to the first effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (a negative determination is made in step Sa7206, and the process of step Sa7211 is performed. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aH1 to the feature aH7.

In the above configuration, switching from an effect state (first effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low to an effect state (second effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high. In the case of, since the switching of the staging state is uniformly restricted, it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. On the contrary, switching from the effect state (second effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high to the effect state (first effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low. In this case, since the switching of the staging state is restricted to only a part of the notification modes, it is possible to suppress the switching of the staging state from being excessively restricted and to appropriately secure the opportunity for the switching. ..

Features aH9. The effect state switching means is
A switching determination means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7102) for determining whether or not to switch the effect state based on a predetermined opportunity (which is the switching lottery timing), and
When it is determined by the switching determination means to switch, the switching execution means (function for executing the process of step Sa7106) for executing the switching of the effect state, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aH1 to the feature aH8, wherein the switching limiting means limits at least one of the determination by the switching determining means and the execution by the switching executing means.

In the above configuration, when the switching of the effect state is restricted, at least one of the switching determination of whether to switch the effect state and the execution process of whether to execute the switch is restricted, so that the effect state switching is performed. It becomes possible to limit it suitably.

Features aH10. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aH1 to the feature aH9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aH1 to the above-mentioned features aH9 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features aH11. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
The specific notification is described in any one of the feature aH1 to the feature aH10, wherein the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Gaming machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the effect state is switched is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that the influence when the degree of expectation suggested fluctuates with the switching of the staging state is large. .. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aH1 to the above-mentioned features aH10 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic aI group>
The feature aI group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 8 of the first embodiment. ..

Features aI1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
With respect to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination identification means (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) for executing a destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (holding notice effect) by a predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process. (Function to execute the setting process for, the first execution process of the hold notice),
The effect state switching means for switching the effect state from one effect state of one of the plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A and effect mode B) to another effect state (in the modification 8 of the first embodiment). (Function to execute the effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143) and
Equipped with
The effect state switching means is
When a predetermined first condition is satisfied (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8109 in the modification 8 of the first embodiment), it is known that the effect state is switched after that. A first means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8111 in the modification 8 of the first embodiment) to be in a state (standby state), and
When a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8115 in the modification 8 of the first embodiment), the effect is produced. A second means for executing the state switching (a function of executing the process of step Sa8117 in the modification 8 of the first embodiment) and
Equipped with
It is provided with limiting means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8203 in the modification 8 of the first embodiment) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification in the specific state. A gaming machine featuring.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the grant response, and the expectation of the player is preferably aroused. Can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of effect states are provided and switching between these effect states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the change in the effect state distracts the attention to the specific notification, or conversely, the focus is on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the production state may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted under the specific state in which it is known that the effect state is switched after that, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification. This makes it possible for the player to easily pay attention to each of the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. There is also an advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Features aI2. The limiting means is characterized by having means capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (a function of executing the hold command correspondence process in the staging control device 143). Features The gaming machine according to aI1.

In the above configuration, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific notification for the special information acquired during the specific state in which the switching of the effect state is awaited. As a result, the range of special information to be restricted by the specific notification is widened, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity of the specific notification from being excessively restricted.

Features aI3. The limiting means is characterized by being able to limit the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information regardless of the result of the prior identification processing for the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine described in aI2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly limit the execution of the specific notification regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification. Further, since the execution restriction of the specific notification is not affected by the result of the look-ahead processing, the look-ahead processing can be advanced even in the specific state (during the waiting period of the specific notification) as in the case of the non-specific state. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the look-ahead process (look-ahead specifying process), it is possible to limit the specific notification in the specific state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Features aI4. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) in which the ease with which specific notification is executed is different from the first effect state. ,
The limiting means is characterized in that the execution of the specific notification can be restricted when at least the switching from the first effect state to the second effect state is in the specific state. The gaming machine described in either.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the expectation level suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the specific notification and the result of the grant determination actually notified may be inconsistent in the effect state after switching, which may give an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying any of the configurations from the feature aI1 to the feature aI3 to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the discrepancy and preferably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in the "second effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from the first effect state" in this feature, only the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification can be executed is required. It can be understood that a configuration in which the second effect state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Features aI5. The gaming machine according to feature aI4, wherein the second effect state is an effect state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease with which the specific notification is executed in the second effect state is lower than that in the first effect state, switching from the first effect state to the second effect state while the specific notification is being executed is apparently expected. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the ease of executing the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the ease of executing the specific notification is low from the first effect state (specific notification). Is a specific state for switching to the second effect state (which has a relatively high degree of expectation), the execution of the specific notification is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress switching from the first effect state to the second effect state during the execution of the specific notification, and it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual state.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state", the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. In addition to the configuration in which is set to be lower than that in the first effect state, it can be understood that the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Features aI6. When the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the limiting means, the specific means corresponding to the special information is executed after the specific state or after the effect state is switched (effect control). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aI1 to the feature aI5, characterized in that the device 143 includes a second setting process for the hold notice and a function for executing the first execution process for the hold notice).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification whose execution is restricted due to the specific state is executed after the specific state or after switching the staging state, the execution of the specific notification remains restricted for the special information acquired during the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inability to suggest the degree of expectation.

Features aI7. The specific means is based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the specific state for the special information whose execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, after the specific state or after the switching of the staging state is switched. The gaming machine according to feature aI6, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step Sa8302).

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification after the change of the effect state is performed based on the pre-reading result performed during the specific state, the specific notification is executed without executing the pre-reading process again after the change of the effect state. be able to. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the look-ahead processing (pre-specifying processing), and it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated.

Features aI8. The specific means is the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the specific state for the special information whose execution of the specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. It is provided with a specific determination means (a function for executing the process of step Sa8307) for determining whether or not to execute, and is configured to execute a specific notification when it is determined to be executed by the specific determination means.
The gaming machine according to feature aI6 or feature aI7, wherein the specific determination means applies the determination condition (execution winning probability) set corresponding to the effect state after switching to perform the determination.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, and when it is determined to execute the specific notification, the specific notification is executed. At that time, in the above judgment, the judgment is not set according to the judgment condition when the special information is acquired (the judgment condition set corresponding to the effect state before switching), but the judgment set according to the effect state after switching. The condition applies. As a result, even if the ease of executing the specific notification differs between the effect state before switching and the effect state after switching, it is possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched.

Features aI9. In the notification mode of the specific notification, there are a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the given response result is different. ) Is set,
When the specific means executes the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state, the plurality of types are applied by applying the lottery conditions (scenario lottery table, etc.) set corresponding to the effect state after the change. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aI6 to the feature aI8, which comprises means for drawing any aspect from the embodiments (a function of executing the process of step Sa8310 to step Sa8313).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification modes of the specific notification, it is possible to give a magnitude to the degree of expectation and suggest it, and it is possible to more preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Under such a configuration, when the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state is executed, the notification mode is drawn by applying the lottery conditions set corresponding to the effect state after the change. Even when the degree of expectation corresponding to each notification mode differs between the effect state before switching and the effect state after switching, it is possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched.

Features aI10. When special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (waiting occurrence information) so that it can be grasped after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features aI6 to aI9, which is configured to store the information in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even when the special information acquired before the specific state and the special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state or after the change of the effect state, the predetermined storage unit is stored. It is possible to identify the special information acquired during the specific state based on the stored predetermined information. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Features aI11. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature aI1 to the feature aI10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state are likely to overlap. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aI1 to the above-mentioned features aI10 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features aI12. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the game rotation operation to be performed is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
The specific notification is described in any one of the feature aI1 to the feature aI11, wherein the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Gaming machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that the influence when the degree of expectation suggested fluctuates with the switching of the staging state is large. .. By applying any of the above-mentioned features aI1 to the above-mentioned features aI11 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature aI1 to the feature aI12, the feature aA1 to the feature aA14, the feature aB1 to the feature aB14, the feature aC1 to the feature aC9, the feature aD1 to the feature aD10, the feature aE1 to the feature aE19, and the feature aF1 to the feature aF12. , The technical idea shown in the configuration of any one of the features aG1 to the feature aG15, the feature aH1 to the feature aH11, and the feature aI1 to the feature aI12 can be individually applied, and each of the technical ideas can be applied individually. It is also possible to apply a part or all in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature groups to each configuration of the feature aA group to the feature aI group described in detail above, and each technique. It is also possible to apply a combination of ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using rotating body-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts with the fluctuation of the symbol, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and also provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball tray, and paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

<Characteristic bA group-Characteristic bN group>
The inventions described in the following feature bA group to feature bN group are extracted from the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification thereof.

<Characteristic bA group>
The feature bA group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment and the second embodiment described above. It is extracted based on Example 10.

In addition, the invention described in the feature bA group is "for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bA1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
A second time-saving game by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, the first modification of the second embodiment, and the second modification means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state. The function of executing the state transition process, the function of executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modification 3 to the modification 5, and the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10. (Function to execute the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened game state, the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened game state),
When the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the transition means for the specific gaming state (the first) that can shift to the specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The function of executing the process for shifting to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, the first modification and the second modification, and the main modification according to the third to fifth embodiments. A function for executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the control device 162, a function for executing the time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10), and the like.
Equipped with
As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
Number of times to update the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state or the remaining number of game times in the specific game state Update means (second embodiment, modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment) The function for executing the high-frequency support mode update / termination process by the main control device 162 according to 5, the function for executing the high-frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10, etc.) Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the update is performed by the number-of-times updating means, the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Since this specific game state ends on the condition that the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state reaches the upper limit, the control performed during the execution period of the game times shifts to the specific game state. The process of updating the number of game times since then and the remaining number of game times in the specific game state is performed.

Further, the above configuration has a specific gaming state that shifts without going through the special gaming state. Since the conventional specific gaming state shifts via the special gaming state, it has been possible to process the transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the special gaming state. That is, although the transition determination could be performed separately from the game round, when the transition to the specific gaming state is performed without going through the special gaming state, the state immediately before the transition to the specific gaming state is the game round. , The process of transition determination must be included in the control performed during the execution period of the game.

That is, in the control performed during the execution period of the game times, it is necessary to both update the number of times for ending the specific game state and determine whether or not to shift to the specific game state. There is a concern that the control of the specific gaming state cannot be suitably performed depending on the processing order. In this respect, in this configuration, since the order is such that the number of times update is executed and then the transition determination is executed, the number of times update is executed in the same game times immediately after the transition to the specific game state in a certain game times. Can be suppressed. That is, when the transition to the specific gaming state is performed in a certain game round, it is possible to control so that the number of times update is started from the next game round, so that the remaining number of times after the transition to the specific gaming state can be appropriately set. It can be secured, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bA2. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied. When the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is used as the transition correspondence result.
The gaming machine according to feature bA1, characterized in that the transition condition can be satisfied in the gaming times during the specific gaming state.

In this configuration, a transition to the specific gaming state can be established while staying in the specific gaming state. In such a case, in addition to the effect that the remaining number of times after shifting to the specific gaming state described in the above-mentioned feature bA1 can be appropriately secured by the order in which the number of times update is executed and then the transition determination is executed. If the game times in which the transition opportunity is established are the final game times in the specific game state (the game times in which the upper limit is reached), the preceding specific game state is terminated, and then the subsequent identification based on the establishment of the transition opportunity is established. You can expect the effect of being able to shift to the game state.

Moreover, since the end of the preceding specific gaming state and the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state can be performed in the same gaming round, the preceding specific gaming state can be performed without intervening the gaming round in the normal gaming state. It is possible to realize a seamless transition from to the subsequent specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to make the state equivalent to the addition of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, and when the player can achieve the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state, the joy is appropriately aroused. Will be possible.

Feature bA3. Predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag, etc.) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage areas 314e of RAM 314).
Based on the predetermined information being set to the first state (state set in the various flag storage areas 314e, etc.), the game shifts to the specific gaming state, and the predetermined information set to the first state is the first state. It is configured to end the specific game state based on the second state (state not set in the above-mentioned various flag storage areas 314e, etc.) different from the above.
High-frequency support mode update by the end control device 162 according to the end determination means (second embodiment, modification 1 to modification 5 of the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied. A function to execute the end processing, a function to execute the high-frequency support mode update processing by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10), and
Termination processing execution means (second embodiment, which recognizes that the predetermined information should be in the second state or the predetermined information should be in the second state based on the determination result of the termination determination means. A function for executing high-frequency support mode update / termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the modification 1 to the modification 5 of the second embodiment, and higher by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10. Function to execute the process for updating the frequency support mode, etc.) and
Equipped with
Feature bA1 or feature bA1 characterized in that the processing by the termination processing execution means is configured to be performed after the update by the number-of-times updating means and before the migration determination by the migration determination means. Feature b The gaming machine described in A2.

In the above configuration, after the number of times is updated, it is recognized that the specific gaming state should be internally terminated or terminated based on the result, and then a transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state. .. As a result, in the case where the game round in which the transition opportunity is established is the final game round of the preceding specific gaming state, after the preceding specific gaming state is terminated, the game is shifted to the subsequent specific gaming state in the same game round. be able to.

In addition, even if the game round in which the transition trigger is established is not the end game round of the preceding specific gaming state, if the configuration allows the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state, it is internal. It is possible to end the preceding specific gaming state and then shift to the subsequent specific gaming state. This makes it possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific gaming state to the succeeding specific gaming state.

Feature bA4. Predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage areas 314e of RAM 314).
Based on the predetermined information being set to the first state (state set in the various flag storage areas 314e, etc.), the game shifts to the specific gaming state, and the predetermined information set to the first state is the first state. It is configured to end the specific game state based on the second state (state not set in the above-mentioned various flag storage areas 314e, etc.) different from the above.
Termination processing execution means (second embodiment, second embodiment) that recognizes that the predetermined information should be in the second state or the predetermined information should be in the second state based on the establishment of the termination condition. A function for executing high-frequency support mode update / termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the modification 1 to the modification 5 of the above embodiment, and high-frequency support by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10. Functions to execute mode update processing, etc.) and
Restricting means for limiting the transition by the specific gaming state transition means in the situation where the predetermined information is in the first state (second embodiment, modified example 1, modified example of the second embodiment). 3. The feature bA1 characterized in that the main control device 162 in the modified example 6 and the modified example 8 to the modified example 10 is provided with a function of limiting the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state or the third time-shortened gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bA3.

In the above configuration, it is restricted to shift to the subsequent specific gaming state in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the continuation of the preceding specific gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the game state from being frequently changed, complicating the game playability, and reducing the playability. However, on the other hand, there is a possibility that the chance of transition to the specific gaming state is reduced. In this regard, by the order in which the transition determination is executed after the number of times update is executed, the final game times (game times that reach the upper limit number of times) in the preceding specific game state are shifted to the subsequent specific game state. Can be tolerated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance of transition to the specific gaming state as compared with the case where the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is restricted in the entire specific gaming state.

Feature bA5. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied. When the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is used as the transition correspondence result.
The transition condition includes that the number of game times for which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (off result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state is the specific number of times (ceiling number).
As a specific gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state (4R probability variation jackpot result in the second embodiment) set so that the gaming times that reach the upper limit number can be the same as the gaming times that reach the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bA1 to the feature bA4, which includes a high-probability gaming state that shifts with A as a trigger, a first time-shortening gaming state that shifts with the 4R normal jackpot result A as a trigger, and the like).

In the above configuration, the special gaming state has a specific gaming state in which the cumulative number of non-specific results (so-called off-results) that do not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state in the special determination reaches the specific number of times. , It has a predetermined specific game state set so that the game times that reach the upper limit number can be the same game times as the game times that reach the specific number of times. In this case, if a predetermined specific gaming state is implemented as the preceding specific gaming state, the cumulative number of non-specific results will naturally reach the specific number of times in the final game round, and the predetermined specific gaming state will reach the specific number of times. It is possible to shift to a specific gaming state triggered by. That is, even if the predetermined specific gaming state ends without being able to allocate the specific result, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state will be added by the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the arrival at the specific number of times. From the player's point of view, the chances of allocating a specific result in a specific game state will be significantly increased compared to the case where such a remaining number of times is not added. As a result, not only can the enjoyment of expecting that a predetermined specific gaming state be selected as the specific gaming state be given, but also the attractiveness (appeal power to the player) of the predetermined specific gaming state can be enhanced, and the motivation for playing can be enhanced. It becomes possible to arouse it suitably.

Feature bA6. The gaming machine according to feature bA5, wherein the predetermined specific gaming state is a specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that shifts via the special gaming state.

According to this configuration, when the game shifts to a predetermined specific game state after the end of the special game state, even if the predetermined specific game state ends without being able to assign a specific result, the specific number of times is reached. The remaining number of times in the specific gaming state can be increased by shifting to the specific gaming state as an opportunity. As a result, after the special gaming state ends, it is possible to increase the chance of attracting a specific result and shifting to the special gaming state again while maintaining an advantageous specific gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest. ..

Feature bA7. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied. When the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is used as the transition correspondence result.
As the transition condition, the result of the special determination is a predetermined result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (disappearance result). Features bA1 to feature bA1 to include that the result of the specific determination (out-of-type determination, transition lottery, etc.) performed in the game times is a predetermined result (special out-of-order result, transition lottery winning result, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bA4.

In the above configuration, a predetermined result different from a specific result (so-called jackpot result) in the special judgment is obtained, or a predetermined result is obtained in the specific judgment performed in the game round in which the non-specific result (so-called off-result) is obtained in the special judgment. It has a specific gaming state that shifts based on the above. In this case, if the game times that resulted in the predetermined result in the special judgment or the specific judgment are the final game times in the specific game state, the transition to the specific game state triggered by the winning of the predetermined result is permitted. .. That is, if a predetermined result can be assigned by a special determination or a specific determination in the final game round of the specific gaming state, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state can be added. Generally, the psychology of the player in the final game of the specific game state is that the player has a strong sense of anxiety about the end of the specific game state and tends to feel discouraged. The final game round can be made to function as a chance game round, and it becomes possible to appropriately arouse the game motivation. As a result, the game can be enjoyed until the end of the specific game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest.

Feature bA8. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied. When the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is used as the transition correspondence result.
Means for setting the upper limit number of times when the game shifts to the specific gaming state (a function of executing the shift process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment of the modified examples 2 to 10). When,
Means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a situation of a specific gaming state (the main control device 162 according to the second modification of the second embodiment performs the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. The function to be executed, the function to execute the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 4 and the modified example 5, and the function to execute the process for shifting to the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 7. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bA1 to the feature bA7, characterized in that the processing, the processing for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state, and the function for executing the processing for shifting to the time-saving gaming state) are provided.

In the above configuration, when the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific gaming state, the upper limit number of times of the specific gaming state is reset. That is, where the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is permitted when the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state, the order in which the transition determination is executed after the number of updates is executed as in the above feature bA1. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after shifting to the subsequent specific gaming state.

Feature bA9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined cycle.
The game according to any one of the feature bA1 to the feature bA8, which is configured to be able to execute the update by the number of times update means and the shift determination by the shift determination means in one process of the periodic process. Machine.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing the periodic processing, the number of times update and the transition determination are performed in the same processing time, so that the preceding specific game state is followed by the subsequent specific game state. In the case of shifting to, it is possible to preferably suppress the intervention of the game times in the normal game state.

Feature bA10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter.
In the specific game state, the ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bA1 to the feature bA9, wherein the special determination means can execute the special determination based on the entry into the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the player shifts to the specific gaming state, it is easier for the ball to enter the predetermined ball-entry means than in the normal gaming state, and it is easier to receive a special determination. By applying any of the above-mentioned features bA1 to the above-mentioned features bA9 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature bA11. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
A second time-saving game by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, the first modification of the second embodiment, and the second modification means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state. The function of executing the state transition process, the function of executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modification 3 to the modification 5, and the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10. (Function to execute the process for determining the transition of the second time-shortened game state, the process for determining the transition of the third time-shortened game state),
When the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the transition means for the specific gaming state (the first) that can shift to the specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The function of executing the process for shifting to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, the first modification and the second modification, and the main modification according to the third to fifth embodiments. A function for executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the control device 162, a function for executing the time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10), and the like.
Termination processing execution means (second embodiment, second embodiment) for recognizing that the specific gaming state should be terminated or the specific gaming state should be terminated when a predetermined termination condition (that the upper limit has been reached) is satisfied. A function for executing high-frequency support mode update / termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the modification 1 to the modification 5 of the embodiment, and a high-frequency support mode by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10. Functions to execute update processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the processing by the termination processing execution means is performed, the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means.

In the above configuration, as the specific gaming state, there is a specific gaming state that shifts without going through the special gaming state. Since the conventional specific gaming state shifts via the special gaming state, it has been possible to process the transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in the special gaming state. That is, although the transition determination could be performed separately from the game round, when the transition to the specific gaming state is performed without going through the special gaming state, the state immediately before the transition to the specific gaming state is the game round. , The process of transition determination must be included in the control performed during the execution period of the game.

In addition, in the control performed during the execution period of the game round, it is grasped whether or not the predetermined end condition corresponding to the end of the specific game state is satisfied, and it is recognized that the specific game state should be ended or should be ended. It is also necessary to perform termination processing for such purposes. That is, in the control performed during the execution period of the game times, it is necessary to perform both a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the specific game state and an end process for ending the specific game state. There is a concern that the control of the specific gaming state cannot be suitably performed depending on the processing order of.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the order is to execute the termination process and then the transition determination, when the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is established during the specific gaming state, the preceding specific gaming state is established. It is possible to shift to the subsequent specific game state after finishing. As a result, it is possible to suppress duplication of a plurality of specific gaming states, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming states. Moreover, since the end of the preceding specific gaming state and the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state can be processed in the same game round, the preceding specific gaming state can be processed without intervening the transition to the normal gaming state. It is possible to switch from to the subsequent specific gaming state. As a result, even under the situation where the above-mentioned switching occurs, it is possible to keep the specific gaming state which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to realize a configuration excellent in ease of playing.

Feature bA12. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether or not predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied. When the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is used as the transition correspondence result.
As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
Means for setting the upper limit number of times when the game shifts to the specific gaming state (a function of executing the shift process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 2 to 10 of the second embodiment). When,
Means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a situation of a specific gaming state (the main control device 162 according to the second modification of the second embodiment performs the second time-saving gaming state transition process. The function to be executed, the function to execute the process for shifting to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 4 and the modified example 5, and the function to execute the process for shifting to the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 7. (Function to execute processing, processing for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state, processing for transitioning to the time-saving game state),
The gaming machine according to feature bA11, characterized in that the machine is provided with.

In the above configuration, when the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific gaming state, the upper limit number of times of the specific gaming state is reset. That is, since the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state is permitted when the transition condition is satisfied in the middle of the preceding specific gaming state, it is necessary to switch from the middle of the preceding specific gaming state to the succeeding specific gaming state. Become. In such a configuration, the order of executing the termination process and then the transition determination as in the above feature bA11 facilitates switching from the preceding specific gaming state to the succeeding specific gaming state. Will be possible.

It is possible to apply any of the configurations from the feature bA1 to the feature bA10 to the feature bA11 or the feature bA12. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bB group>
The feature bB group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment and the second embodiment described above. It is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in the feature bB group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bB1. Variable that can be switched between the first mode (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. Ball entry means (second actuating port 63) and
The first determination means (function for executing the special figure hit / fail determination in the main control device 162) for executing the first determination (special figure hit / miss determination) based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and
A privilege giving means (game state in the main control device 162) capable of giving a predetermined privilege (opening / closing execution mode, etc.) to the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result (big hit result, etc.). Functions to execute migration processing, etc.) and
A second determination means (execution of the normal figure hit / fail judgment in the main control device 162) for executing the second judgment (normal figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (passage of the game ball of the through gate 64) is executed. Function) and
Based on the result of the second determination being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then at least the switching control to be the second aspect is performed. A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a process for supporting electric service in the main control device 162) that executes a variable ball entry control (feature opening / closing game) performed once, and
The game rounding operation is started based on the second determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the second determination is regarded as one of the game rounds (general game rounds). (A function to execute the game time control process in the main control device 162) and the game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process in the main control device 162).
Equipped with
It has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (normal gaming state, etc.) and a second gaming state (second time-saving gaming state, etc.) as a gaming state.
A situation in which the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state (a situation in which the normal gaming state changes to the second time-saving gaming state, a situation in which the normal gaming state changes to the third time-saving gaming state, and a situation in which the second time-saving gaming state changes to the normal gaming state. A situation that changes to a state, a situation that changes from a third time-shortening gaming state to a normal gaming state, a situation that changes from a first time-shortening gaming state to a normal gaming state, a situation that changes from a second time-shortening gaming state or a third time-shortening gaming state, respectively. Specific termination means (second embodiment, second embodiment) capable of terminating the running game when the game is being executed in a situation where the game is changed to the other side of the time-saving game state) A gaming machine comprising: a function of executing the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811 by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 1 to 10 of the embodiment).

In the above configuration, the first determination is made based on the entry into the variable ball entry means, and the result is a specific result, so that a predetermined privilege is given. Further, a second determination is performed separately from the first determination, a game round for notifying the result is executed, and the result of the second determination becomes a predetermined result, so that the variable ball entry means becomes the first. Variable entry control, which is an embodiment, is executed. Here, in a gaming machine having such a configuration, the mode of the above-mentioned gaming times and variable ball entry control differs depending on the type of gaming state, and for example, the gaming times in the changed gaming state are different from those in the gaming state before the change. Some are performed in a manner that is advantageous to the player. In such a case, for example, if the second determination is made immediately before the game state changes, the determination is started under the game state before the change, so that the game times and the like based on the determination result are performed by the player. It will be done in a disadvantageous manner. In this respect, in this configuration, if a game round is being executed in a situation where the first game state changes to the second game state, the game round is forcibly terminated, so that the second determination under the second game state is made. Can be executed promptly. As a result, it is possible to speed up the start timing of the game times and the like corresponding to the second game state, and it becomes possible to suitably control the game state.

In addition, "when the game round is being executed in the situation where the first game state changes to the second game state" of this feature is "the first game in the situation where the first game state changes to the second game state". It can also be expressed as "when the game times started during the state are being executed".

Feature bB2. As the privilege granting means, a special game state transition means (main control) capable of shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. A function to execute the game state transition process in the device 162) is provided.
The specific ending means can end the running game when the game is being executed in a situation where the first game state is changed to the second game state without going through the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature bB1, which is characterized by being present.

For example, if the game state changes via the special game state such as the first game state → the special game state → the second game state, the game times or variable ball entry control started in the first game state. Can be terminated in the special gaming state, so that its influence can be suppressed from reaching the second gaming state. However, when the change from the first game state to the second game state is performed without going through the special game state, the period for absorbing the game times and the like started in the first game state cannot be secured, so that the first game state cannot be secured. There is a concern that the game times and the like corresponding to the game state will be easy to continue in the second game state. By applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bB1 to such a case, the above-mentioned effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature bB3. When the end is performed by the specific end means, if the result of the second determination in the game times to be ended is the predetermined result, the means for changing to a result different from the predetermined result (out-of-the-box result). The gaming machine according to feature bB1 or feature bB2, which comprises (a function of executing the process of step Sb1313 by the main control device 162).

In the above configuration, when the game round is forcibly terminated due to a change in the game state, the result of the second determination that triggered the game round is a predetermined result corresponding to the execution of the variable ball entry control. In some cases, it is changed to another result that does not execute the variable ball entry control. As a result, after the forced end of the game round, the next game round can be started without going through the variable ball entry control. By that amount, the start timing of the game times and the like corresponding to the two game states (game state after the change) can be advanced, and it becomes possible to respond more quickly to the change of the game state.

Feature bB4. The game rotation control means controls the game rotation so that after the game rotation operation is performed, a specific notification (stop display in the normal figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second determination. And
Described in any one of the feature bB1 to the feature bB3, which is configured to be able to limit the end by the specific end means when the specific notification is being executed in a situation where the gaming state changes. Gaming machine.

For example, if the notification is forcibly terminated in a situation where the specific notification (notification as a result of the specific determination) is being executed, the notification period is shortened. As a result, the visibility of the specific notification is lowered, and there is a concern that it becomes difficult to grasp the result of the second determination. In this respect, in this configuration, when the specific notification is being executed, the forced termination due to the change in the gaming state is restricted. As a result, an appropriate notification period can be secured, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the specific notification from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to the feature bB3, the following effects can be obtained. For example, in a configuration in which forced termination is executed due to a change in the gaming state even while specific notification is being executed, when the result of the second determination is changed from a predetermined result to a different result, the result before the change is dealt with. The specific notification (notification that a predetermined result has been obtained) is executed, and then the notification is terminated by forced termination. That is, after the predetermined result, which is the result before the change, is notified until the execution timing of the forced termination, the game round itself is terminated by the forced termination, so that the result after the change is not notified. For this reason, even though the predetermined result is notified, the variable ball entry control may not be performed, which may reduce the player's trust in the gaming machine or the gaming hall. In this respect, since the feature bB4 does not exceptionally forcibly terminate when the specific notification is being executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency between the result indicated by the specific notification and the result of the second determination after the change. In the end, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the variable ball entry control is not performed while the predetermined result is notified.

Feature bB5. The first game rounding operation is started based on the first determination, and after the end of the first game rounding operation, a predetermined notification corresponding to the result of the first determination (stop display of the special figure). Is performed as one of the first game times (special figure game times), and the first game time control means (special figure game time control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the first game times to be performed is performed. Function to execute) and
A second game time control means for controlling the second game time as the game time, and
Transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state when predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning a special deviation result, entering a specific ball entry section, reaching the maximum number of times, etc.) are satisfied. The function of executing the second time-saving gaming state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the first embodiment and the second modification of the second embodiment, and the main control according to the third to fifth modifications. A function for executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the device 162, a process for determining the transition of the second time-shortening game state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification example 10, and a function for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state. Processing, function to execute processing for time saving game state transition, etc.) and
Equipped with
The transition means has a predetermined timing before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (the start timing of the final display in the special figure game, the intermediate timing of the final display, and the start of the variable display). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bB1 to the feature bB4, which is configured to shift to a specific gaming state at (timing, timing during variable display, etc.).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special determination result) ends in the first game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first game after shifting to the second game state as the next first game starts. Will be done. At this time, in the above configuration, since the transition to the second gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification ends in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first game after the transition to the second gaming state is performed. A grace period until the rounds are played (the game state has shifted to the second game state, but the first game round after the transition to the second game state has not been played yet) Can be secured. If the second game round is terminated in response to the transition to the second gaming state and the next second game round is started during the grace period, the first game after the transition to the second gaming state is performed. The second game round can be started prior to the round. As a result, the start timing of the variable ball entry control is advanced, and it is possible to create a situation in which the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an early stage after the transition to the second gaming state.

Feature bB6. The second game round control means starts the second game round operation based on the second determination, and after the end of the second game round operation, corresponds to the result of the second determination. The second notification (stop display of the normal figure) is set as one of the second game times (normal figure game times), and the second game time is controlled to be performed.
The period from the predetermined timing to the start of the first first game after the transition to the second game state is the period of the second notification in the second game that is the target of the end by the specific end means. A function of executing a confirmation display start process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 10 of the second embodiment. Etc.). The gaming machine according to feature bB5, which is characterized by having (etc.).

In the above configuration, the period (grace period) from the transition to the second gaming state to the start of the first first gaming after the transition to the second gaming state at a predetermined timing is the specific termination means. It is configured to be longer than the execution period of the second notification in the second game round, which is the target of the end by. In this case, since the second notification of the second game round, which is the end target, ends in the middle of the grace period, the next second game round is started before the grace period ends. Since the next second game is performed under the second game state, the second game corresponding to the second game state can be started prior to the first first game. As a result, it is possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the second gaming state, and to cause a situation in which the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an early stage.

When this feature is applied to the feature bB5, the "predetermined notification" in the feature bB5 can be read as "first notification".

Feature bB7. Means for making the period of the first notification in the first game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied longer than the period of the first notification in the predetermined first game in which the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (second implementation). The feature bB5 or the feature bB6 is characterized by having a function of setting a specific fixed display time in the main control device 162 according to the first to tenth modifications of the second embodiment. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the period of the first notification in the first game in which the condition for transition to the second game state is satisfied is longer than the period of the first notification in the other first game, so that the grace period is extended. Can be planned.

When this feature is applied to the feature bB6, "In order to realize the configuration of the feature bB6 in which the grace period is longer than the second notification period, it is possible to avoid an unreasonable shortening of the second notification period. This makes it possible to realize the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bB6 while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience that the result of the specific determination becomes difficult to see due to the shortening of the notification period. " The effect can be expected.

Features bB8. As the privilege granting means, for a special gaming state capable of shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. It is equipped with a transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162).
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
Described in any one of the feature bB1 to the feature bB7, wherein one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the other of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is the specific gaming state. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, when the game state changes between the normal game state and the specific game state, the forced termination of the game times is executed. That is, since the end is executed by the specific end means in response to changes in the game times and the variable ball entry control mode, it is possible to suitably exert each of the above effects in the features bB1 to bB7. Become.

Feature bB9. As the privilege granting means, for a special gaming state capable of shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result. It is equipped with a transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162).
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bB1 to the feature bB7, wherein the first gaming state is a normal gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when the transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state is performed, the end of the game round by the specific termination means is executed. That is, since the end by the specific end means is executed in response to the switching from the situation where the game times and the variable ball entry control are performed in the disadvantageous mode to the situation where the game is performed in the advantageous mode, the feature bB1 to the feature bB7 It becomes possible to preferably exert each of the above-mentioned effects in the above.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned feature bB8 or feature bB9 "has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state". Has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which at least one of the gaming times and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as the gaming state. " You can also do it.

Feature bB10. As a specific game state, it has a plurality of types of specific game states (first time-saving game state, second time-shortening game state, third time-saving game state, etc.).
It is configured so that the end by the specific end means is restricted when the game is being executed in a situation where the predetermined specific gaming state changes to another specific gaming state different from the predetermined specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bB8 or feature bB9, characterized in that it is present.

In the case of a change from one specific gaming state to another specific gaming state, the game times and variable ball entry control have already been executed in a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state before the change. If the game round is terminated halfway in such a situation, the start of the game round or the like corresponding to the changed game state may be delayed. In this respect, in this configuration, when switching from one specific gaming state to another specific gaming state, the end of the game times by the specific ending means is restricted, so that the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

For each configuration of the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bC group>
The feature bC group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment and the second embodiment described above. It is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in the feature bC group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bC1. A ball entry means (first operating port 62) through which a game ball can enter, and
Variable that can be switched between the first mode (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. Ball entry means (second actuating port 63) and
A special determination means (a function for executing a special figure hit / fail determination in the main control device 162) for executing a special determination (special figure hit / fail determination) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means. ,
A transition means for a special gaming state that can shift to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (A function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
The first game round operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the first game rounds (special figure game rounds). 1st game time control means for controlling so that the 1st game time is performed (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143). When,
Specific determination means for executing a specific determination (normal figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (passage of a game ball of a through gate 64) (a function for executing a normal figure hit / fail judgment in the main control device 162). When,
Based on the result of the specific determination being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then at least one switching control to be the second aspect is performed. A variable ball entry control means (a function for executing an electric service support process in the main control device 162) that executes variable ball entry control (feature opening / closing game) that is performed repeatedly, and
The second game round operation is started based on the specific determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the specific determination is set as one of the second game rounds (Public game rounds). A second game time control means (a function of executing the normal game time control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the second game time to be performed, and
Equipped with
As the gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which at least one of the second game round and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
When the predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning the special missed result, entering the specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied, it is possible to transfer to the specific game state without going through the special game state. Specific game state transition means (a function of executing a second time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment of the first modification and the second modification, modification 3 to 5). The function for executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162, the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 6 to the modification 10, and the third time-saving game state. (Function to execute transition judgment processing, time-saving game state transition processing),
When the state is changed to the specific game state, the first second game after the state is changed to the specific game state is preceded by the first first game after the state is changed to the specific game state. (Second embodiment, processing of step Sb1311 to step Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, step Sb5811 by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 1 to 10 of the second embodiment). , A function to execute the process for starting the confirmation display),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, at least one of the game times and the variable ball entry control has a specific gaming state in which the game is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, by shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state, it becomes easier for the player to enter the variable ball entry means, and the player is more likely to receive a special determination, so that the game can be advanced advantageously. Further, in the above configuration, the transition to the specific gaming state is executed without going through the special gaming state. That is, when the above transition condition is satisfied in a certain first game round, the next game round is immediately started as the first first game round after the transition to the specific gaming state after the end of the game round. .. Under such a premise, in the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is entered, the first second game after the transition to the specific gaming state is the first first game after the transition to the specific gaming state. It is configured to precede the times. As a result, it is possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the specific gaming state, and to cause a situation in which the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an early stage.

Feature bC2. The first game round control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination.
The transition means for the specific gaming state is a predetermined timing (start timing of confirmation display in special figure game rotation, intermediate timing of confirmation display, variation) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bC1, which is configured to shift to a specific gaming state at a display start timing, a timing during variable display, etc.).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special determination result) ends in the first game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first game after shifting to the specific game state as the next first game starts. Will be done. At this time, in the above configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification is completed in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first gaming round after the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Securing a grace period (a period in which the game state has shifted to the specific game state, but the first game round after the transition to the specific game state has not yet been performed) until be able to. If the second game round is started using this grace period, the second game round can be started prior to the first game round after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the configuration of the feature bC1 is configured. It can be a preferred embodiment for realization.

Feature bC3. It is configured so that the case where the game ball enters the variable ball entry means is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball enters the ball entry means (determination of the jackpot type in the second special figure). The gaming machine according to feature bC1 or feature bC2, which is characterized by having a configuration that is more favorable than the jackpot type determination of the first special figure).

In the above configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to cause the ball to enter the variable ball entry means than to cause the ball to enter the ball entry means, so that the benefit of the specific gaming state for the player is a special determination. Not only does it increase the frequency of receiving balls, but it also makes it easier for players to play games on the advantageous side based on entering the variable ball entry means. In this case, the player wants to suppress as much as possible the disadvantageous side of the game based on the entry into the ball entry means after the transition to the specific gaming state, but the variable entry means on the advantageous side. By speeding up the ball entry timing, it is possible to reduce the number and possibility of games based on ball entry into the ball entry means. This makes it possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the game after the transition to the specific game state is performed in a mode according to the player's request.

Feature bC4. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means or the variable entry means, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Equipped with
The special determination means makes the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the special information acquired based on the entry into the ball entry means and the special information acquired based on the entry into the variable entry means are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the above-mentioned Priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 162) capable of giving priority to the special determination regarding the special information acquired based on the entry into the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bC1 to the feature bC3.

In the above configuration, a special determination is made in the special determination means based on the special information acquired by entering the ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means. For such a configuration, the feature bC1 or the feature bC2 By applying the configuration, it becomes possible to easily acquire special information corresponding to the entry into the variable ball entry means at an early stage after the transition to the special gaming state. In addition, in the above configuration, when both the special information based on the entry into the ball entry means and the special information based on the entry into the variable entry means are acquired, the special determination regarding the latter special information is obtained. Is executed with priority, so when the special information corresponding to the entry into the variable ball entry means is acquired, the special information corresponding to the entry into the ball entry means remains in the acquired information storage means. Even if there is, a special determination based on the entry into the variable entry means is executed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to accelerate the execution timing of the special determination based on the entry into the variable ball entry means after the transition to the special gaming state.

When this feature is applied to the above feature bC3, the timing at which the game based on the entry into the variable ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player, is performed can be accelerated, and the game is based on the entry into the ball entry means. It is possible to reduce the number and possibility of games played on the disadvantaged side.

Feature bC5. The specific means causes the second game round operation in the first second game round to end prior to the first first game round when the game shifts to the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bC1 to the feature bC4, which is capable of (a function of setting a specific fixed display time by the main control device 162 according to the modification 1 of the second embodiment). ..

In the above configuration, since the operation for the game round in the first second game round is completed before the first first game round is performed after the transition to the specific gaming state, after the first second game round is finished. It is possible to facilitate the variable ball entry control of the above before the start of the first first game round. As a result, it becomes possible to facilitate the game round based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means as the first game round after shifting to the specific gaming state.

Feature bC6. The second game round control means controls so that a specific notification (stop display of a normal figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific determination.
When the specific means shifts to the specific gaming state, the specific notification in the first second gaming round can be terminated prior to the first first gaming round. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bC1 to the feature bC5, which is characterized by (a function of setting a specific fixed display time by the main control device 162 according to the modification 1 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification (notification of the specific determination result) in the first second game is completed before the first first game is performed after the transition to the specific game state, the first second game is described. It is possible to execute the variable ball entry control after the game round is completed before the start of the first first game round. As a result, it becomes possible to carry out a game round based on the entry into the variable ball entry means as the first game round after the transition to the specific gaming state.

Feature bC7. The first game round control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination.
The transition means for the specific gaming state is a predetermined timing (start timing of confirmation display in special figure game rotation, intermediate timing of confirmation display, variation) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied. It is configured to shift to a specific gaming state at the start timing of display, timing during variable display, etc.).
The specific notification executing means for executing the specific notification (display of the right-handed notification image 477a and the target guidance image 477b) for prompting the ball to enter the variable ball entry means is provided.
The specific notification executing means is a specific timing in the period from the predetermined timing to the first first game round (the timing after the transition to the second time-saving gaming state and before the start of the accessory opening / closing game). The feature bC1 to be characterized in that the specific notification can be executed at any timing in the period from the transition to the second short game state to the elapse of the confirmed display time). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bC6.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special determination result) ends in the first game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first game after shifting to the specific game state as the next first game starts. Will be done. At this time, in the above configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed before the predetermined notification is completed in the first gaming round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first gaming round after the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Securing a grace period (a period in which the game state has shifted to the specific game state, but the first game round after the transition to the specific game state has not yet been performed) until be able to. When the first second game after the transition to the specific gaming state is performed prior to the first first game after the transition to the specific gaming state, the variable ball entry means is entered during the above grace period. By performing the specific notification for urging the ball to enter, it becomes possible to more preferably promote the rapid entry of the ball into the variable ball entry means.

Feature bC8. The specific means is characterized in that when the transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the first second gaming round can be performed prior to the first first gaming round. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bC1 to the feature bC7.

In the above configuration, in the case of a transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the first second gaming round after the transition to the specific gaming state becomes the first first gaming round after the transition to the specific gaming state. The process is executed as if it were performed in advance. That is, since the above processing is executed in response to the switching from the situation where the game times and the variable ball entry control are performed in the disadvantageous mode to the situation where the game times and the variable ball entry control are performed in the advantageous mode, each of the above effects in the feature bC1 to the feature bC7. Can be suitably exerted.

Feature bC9. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means or the variable entry means, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Equipped with
The special determination means makes the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the special game corresponding to the next first game is stored in the acquired information storage means and the state shifts to the specific game state, the first second game precedes the first first game. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bC1 to the feature bC8, which is characterized in that it can be performed.

When the special information corresponding to the next first game round is stored in the acquisition information storage means for the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, new ball entry to the variable ball entry means does not occur. However, after the end of the first game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first first game (the next first game) after the transition to the specific game state is started immediately. In the configuration, even in such a case, the first second game is performed before the first first game is performed. Thereby, each configuration of the above-mentioned feature bC1 to the above-mentioned feature bC9 can be effectively functioned, and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bD group>
The feature bD group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 1 to modification of the second embodiment and the second embodiment described above. It is extracted based on Example 10.

The invention described in the feature bD group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bD1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A pattern display means (special figure display unit 43, symbol display device 75) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the special determination, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the special determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times, and the game times are performed. The game times control means (a function of executing the special figure game times control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
When the predetermined transition conditions (reaching the number of ceilings, winning the special missed result, entering the specific ball entry section, etc.) are satisfied, it is possible to transfer to the specific game state without going through the special game state. Specific gaming state transition means (function and modification for executing the second time-saving gaming state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, the modification 1 and the modification 2 of the second embodiment). A function for executing a third time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to Examples 3 to 5, and a process for determining a transition to a second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10. , A function to execute the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state, the process for shifting to the time-saving game state),
A period setting means (second) that can set the stop display period for displaying the stop in the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied to a period different from the stop display period in the predetermined game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied. The function of setting the specific confirmed display time by the main control device 162 according to the first to tenth modifications of the second embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in the above configuration, there is a gaming state that shifts as such a specific gaming state without going through a special gaming state. This specific gaming state shifts when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, but in order for the player to smoothly start the game in the specific gaming state, it is the first time after the transition to the specific gaming state. It is desirable to inform the player of the transition to the specific gaming state before the game round is started. In this case, if the transition is made via the special gaming state as in the conventional specific gaming state, the period of the special gaming state (for example, the period of the end-time effect in the special gaming state, etc.) is used to specify. It is possible to perform notification corresponding to the transition to the gaming state, but in the case of the specific gaming state in which the transition is made without going through the special gaming state, the specific game is performed after the game round in which the transition condition is satisfied is completed. Since the first game round after the transition to the state is performed immediately, it becomes difficult to secure the execution period of such notification. In this respect, in this configuration, in order to make the stop display period for displaying the stop display of the pattern in the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied different from the stop display period in other game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to the specific game state is made. When the above occurs, it is possible to suitably secure the execution period of the above notification by using the special stop display period.

Feature bD2. The period setting means can set the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied to be longer than the stop display period of the predetermined game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature bD1.

In the above configuration, since the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied is longer than the stop display period of other game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied, it is possible to suitably secure the execution period of the above notification. ..

Feature bD3. In the case of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the period setting means sets the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied to be greater than the stop display period of the predetermined game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bD2, which is characterized in that it can be set for a long period of time.

In the above configuration, in the case of transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied is made longer than the stop display period of other game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied. In this case, the player's preparation period for switching to the specific game state can be secured by the long stop display period in the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. Such a configuration is particularly effective when the operation mode of the player in the game in each of the game states is different, for example, the firing intensity of the recommended game ball is different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Become.

Feature bD4. Specific notification execution means (effect control device 143) that executes specific notification (starting effect of the second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, ceiling reaching effect, etc.) corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition or the transition to the specific gaming state. Equipped with a function to execute the second transition effect setting process, special figure variation display process, etc.)
The game machine of feature bD2 or feature bD3, characterized in that the specific notification execution means includes means for executing the specific notification during at least a part of the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. ..

In order to notify the transition to the specific gaming state in advance, it is conceivable to use the variable display period of the pattern in the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied, and perform notification corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state. However, in this configuration, the player's interest tends to shift to a specific gaming state in the middle of the gaming round, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the gaming round may be impaired. In this respect, in this configuration, the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied is made longer than the stop display period of other game times in which the transition condition is not satisfied, and the above notification is performed using at least a part of the period. Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure both the degree of attention to the game times and the securing of the period for the above notification.

Feature bD5. The specific notification executing means is described in the feature bD4, which is capable of executing the specific notification after the stop display is started in the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the result of the special determination by the stop display of the pattern and then notify the transition to the specific gaming state, and the player grasps both the result of the special determination and the transition to the specific gaming state. It can be a preferred embodiment.

Feature bD6. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter.
In the specific game state, the ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the normal game state.
The special determination means can execute the special determination based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entry means.
A predetermined notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (display of a right-handed notification image 477a and a target guidance image 477b) for prompting the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means is provided.
The predetermined notification executing means is any one of the feature bD2 to the feature bD5, characterized in that the predetermined notification executing means includes means for executing the predetermined notification during at least a part of the stop display period of the game times in which the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the predetermined notification prompting the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means is stopped for a long time in the game times when the transition condition is satisfied. It is done by using a part of the display period. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to enter the predetermined ball-entry means before the first game round after the transition to the specific game state is started, and the player smoothly and preferably starts the game in the specific game state. Will be possible.

For each configuration of the feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bE group>
The feature bE group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 3 of the second embodiment. ..

The invention described in the feature bE group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in improving the enjoyment of pachinko games. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bE1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
Predetermined specific conditions (winning for special out-of-game results, entry into the specific entry section, etc.) for specific game times in a specific game state (final game times, allowable game times, game times different from restricted game times, etc.) When a ball, etc.) is established, it is possible to re-shift to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, or to execute a specific process so that the remaining number of game times in the specific gaming state is increased. A gaming machine comprising a possible specific means (a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. This specific gaming state ends on condition that the number of gaming times after shifting to the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit. Under such a premise, in the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game time in a specific game state, the user is re-shifted to the specific game state after the end of the specific game state, or the specific game is played. It is configured to increase the number of remaining game times in the state. For this reason, by establishing a specific condition in a specific game time, the period during which the specific game state can be played is extended, and a chance to draw a specific result and shift to the special game state while maintaining an advantageous specific game state. Can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible not only to assign a specific result in a specific game state, but also to add a game aiming to satisfy a specific condition in a specific game time, expanding the range of enjoyment and improving the interest. Will be possible.

Feature bE2. The specific means can be made to be re-transitioned to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming times in the specific gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature bE1, characterized in that the end of the previous specific gaming state and the transition to the later specific gaming state can be executed at the same game times.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game round, the end of the specific game state and the re-transition to the specific game state are performed in the same game round. As a result, it is possible to switch from the preceding specific gaming state to the succeeding specific gaming state without intervening the gaming times in the normal gaming state, and the state equivalent to the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is added. It becomes possible to.

Feature bE3. The configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize the end of the specific gaming state, or it is more difficult to recognize than the end of the specific gaming state when the re-transition is not performed.
Predetermined notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (additional effect) that the player can recognize as if the remaining number of game times in the specific game state has increased in the same game times or the next game times. The gaming machine according to feature bE2, which is characterized by having (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143).

In the above configuration, the player cannot recognize or makes it difficult to recognize the end of the preceding specific game state, and then the specific game state is performed in the game times in which the transition to the subsequent specific game state is performed or in the next game time. Predetermined notification is performed so that the remaining number of times of is increased. This makes it easier for the player to feel that the remaining number of times has been added.

Feature bE4. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game times in the specific game state, the specific means is re-shifted to the specific game state or the remaining number of times is increased without going through the special game state. Features bE1 to feature bE3, characterized in that they are provided with means for making the game (a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 3 of the second embodiment). The gaming machine described in either.

In the above configuration, it is possible to re-shift to the specific gaming state and increase (add) the remaining number of times without going through the special gaming state. That is, since it is not necessary to win a specific result for re-transition to a specific gaming state, the probability of the above re-transition etc. (probability of satisfying a specific condition) is changed to the probability of transition to a special gaming state (specific result). It can be set independently of the winning probability). This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in game design, for example, by making the probability of the former higher than the probability of the latter. In addition, by re-shifting to the specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state, the specific gaming state before the specific condition is satisfied and the specific gaming state after the specific condition is satisfied are largely separated. Can be suppressed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to feel a sense of unity with respect to the specific gaming state of both, and it becomes possible to easily give the impression that the specific gaming state is extended.

Feature bE5. Restriction means for limiting the execution of the specific process when a specific condition is satisfied in another game time different from the specific game time in the specific game state (in the third modification of the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bE1 to the feature bE4, characterized in that the main control device 162 is provided with a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state).

According to the above configuration, the re-transition to the specific gaming state is performed only when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming times. That is, in order to realize the re-migration, etc., not only the specific conditions are satisfied, but also the timing is required. Therefore, when the difficulty level of the re-migration, etc. can be appropriately increased and realized. It becomes possible to appropriately bring out the joy and sense of accomplishment of the player. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a specific game.

Feature bE6. The gaming machine according to feature bE5, wherein the specific gaming times are the latter half of the gaming times in the specific gaming state.

As the number of remaining game times in the specific game state decreases, the expected value for assigning a specific result in the specific game state decreases, so there is a concern that the closer to the end of the specific game state, the less likely the player will have a sense of expectation. be. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific game times are set on the latter half side of the specific game state, the player can realize the re-transition to the specific game state even if the expectation for the specific result is low. Can be provided. As a result, it is possible to excite the latter half of the game in the specific game state, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

Feature bE7. The game according to feature bE5 or feature bE6, which comprises means for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) in a specific game time (a function of executing the process of step Sb3802 by the effect control device 143). Machine.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed in a specific game time, which is not performed in other game times, the player can grasp that it is a specific game time through the specific notification. As a result, the player can engage in the game with enthusiasm in the case of a specific game time, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that this feature is provided with "means for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) that is not executed in the other game times in a specific game time (a function of executing the process of step Sb3802 by the effect control device 143). In addition, the present feature may further include a configuration that "the specific notification is configured not to be executed in the other game times".

Feature bE8. The specific condition is that the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (disappearance result). ), The result of the specific determination (outlier type determination, transition lottery, etc.) is the predetermined determination result (special deviation result, transition lottery winning result, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bE7.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the result of the special determination is the specific result and the determination of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in one game round. Therefore, it is possible to make a specific game time function as a chance game time (a game time that is more advantageous than other game times) in which both of these judgments can be received, and the expectation and attention to the game time can be preferably set. It will be possible to increase.

Feature bE9. A feature characterized in that the probability of the predetermined determination result in the special determination or the specific determination in the specific gaming state is set higher than the probability of the specific result in the special determination in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in bE8.

In the above configuration, since the probability of achieving a predetermined determination result is set higher than the probability of achieving a specific result, it is necessary to raise the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied and to improve the degree of attention to the specific game times. Will be possible.

Feature bE10. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
When the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined result (special deviation result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state in the first predetermined situation (final game times in the first time-shortened gaming state), the first predetermined situation. In a second predetermined situation different from the above (special figure game times other than the final game times in the first time-shortened game state), the result of the special determination is made more advantageous to the player than the case where the predetermined result is obtained. Specific means capable of (a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the third modification of the second embodiment, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In conventional gaming machines, since the game is an alternative game of whether or not a specific result is obtained, the player can only have a feeling of expectation that the specific result will be obtained during the game, and there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. there were. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the result of the special determination is a predetermined result (so-called off result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state, it can be advantageous, so even if the result is not a specific result, there is a sense of expectation. It can be aroused and the game can be diversified. At that time, even if the result is off, it is advantageous only when the situation at that time is the first predetermined situation, so that it is possible to prevent the superiority of the specific result from being excessively impaired. .. That is, it is possible to realize a game that does not end with disappointment even if a specific result is not obtained, while ensuring the fun of the game aiming at a specific result, and it is possible to improve the interest.

It is possible to apply the configuration of the feature bE1 to the feature bE9 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bF group>
The feature bF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly a modification 3, a modification 6, a modification 8 to a modification of the second embodiment. It is extracted based on Example 12.

The invention described in the feature bF group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bF1. A special judgment means (hit / fail judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute etc.) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
A transition means for a specific gaming state (second) that can transition to a specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state when certain conditions (such as achieving a special deviation result or reaching the number of ceilings) are satisfied. The function of executing the second time-saving gaming state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the first embodiment and the second modification of the second embodiment, and the main control according to the third to fifth modifications. A function of executing the third time-saving game state transition process by the device 162, a function of executing the time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10), and the like.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the transition is performed by the transition means for the specific gaming state, or when the transition is performed, the specific signal (external signal corresponding to the special deviation result such as the modification 3 and the modification). External output means capable of outputting the first external signal of 11 and the first external signal A of modification 12 to the outside of the gaming machine (modification 3, modification 6, modification of the second embodiment). 8 to the function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10, the function of outputting the first external signal in the modified example 11, the function of outputting the first external signal A of the modified example 12, etc.) When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state without going through the special gaming state. If the transition is made via a special gaming state as in the conventional specific gaming state, the occurrence can be grasped on the game hall side, but the specific gaming state that transitions without going through the special gaming state is There is a concern that the game hall side cannot grasp the occurrence. In this respect, in this feature, in order to output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine in response to the establishment of such a transition opportunity (predetermined condition) to the specific gaming state and the transition to the specific gaming state, the gaming hall side. It becomes possible to preferably perform the above grasp.

Feature bF2. Restricting the transition to the specific gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the first time-shortening game state is in progress, a situation in which the second time-shortening game state is in effect, a situation in which the game is limited game times, etc.). The transition limiting means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the modified example 6, the modified example 8 to the modified example 10). It is equipped with a function to execute the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162).
It is possible to enable the output of the specific signal by the external output means to be executed in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation and the restriction is performed by the transition limiting means. (The processing of step Sb3511 is executed by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 3, the modified example 6, and the modified example 8 to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment, so that the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is executed. The gaming machine according to feature bF1, which is characterized in that (a configuration in which is output).

In the above configuration, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, if the predetermined situation is met, the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted. When such a limitation is applied, it is conceivable to cancel the output of the specific signal in response to the fact that the transition to the specific gaming state does not occur. From the viewpoint of matching with the subsequent game state, it is more reasonable not to output a specific signal than to output a specific signal.

However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the actual number of times that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game cannot be grasped on the game hall side, and it becomes difficult to specify whether the probability of satisfying the condition is generally in line with the design probability. be. In particular, as a result of thinning out the number of times notified to the game hall side by canceling the output of a specific signal, the number of times grasped by the game hall side becomes less than the actual number of times. Even if such an act is performed, there is a risk that the discovery will be delayed.

In this respect, in this configuration, even if the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific signal is intentionally output. Therefore, the actual number of times the condition is satisfied is the game. The hall side can grasp it properly. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the discovery when the probability of establishment of the transition condition is illegally increased, and it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraud.

Feature bF3. The external output means is
A means for outputting the specific signal of the first aspect when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific situation different from the predetermined situation (such as a situation not in the first time-saving gaming state).
A means for outputting a specific signal of a second aspect different from the first aspect when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation, and a means for outputting the specific signal of the second aspect.
The gaming machine according to the feature bF2, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

In the above configuration, a specific signal having a different mode is output depending on whether the transition to the specific gaming state is permitted or the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted, so that a predetermined condition is satisfied on the game hall side. Not only that, it is possible to grasp from one specific signal whether or not the state should shift to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the gaming machine is not abnormal with respect to the fact that the game does not shift to the specific gaming state even though the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Feature bF4. It is configured so that the predetermined condition can be satisfied in relation to the result of the special determination (the condition for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state is established when the result of the winning / failing lottery or the deviation type determination becomes the special deviation result. Configuration),
It is provided with a specific external signal output means (a function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162) capable of outputting a specific external signal (lottery result signal) corresponding to the result of the special determination to the outside of the gaming machine.
Feature bF1 characterized in that it is possible to output the specific signal by using the specific external signal (a configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to a special deviation result by using a lottery result signal). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bF3.

According to the above configuration, since the specific signal can be output by using the existing terminal or the existing wiring for notifying the result of the special determination, the gaming machine has a comparison with the case of outputting the dedicated signal as the specific signal. The number of output terminals and the like can be reduced. Further, if the management control device on the game hall side also has an input terminal or the like for receiving a notification about the result of the special determination, it can be used to receive a specific signal.

In addition, "the specific external signal output means is configured to be able to output the specific signal by using the specific external signal" of this feature, "the specific external signal output means is a specific external in a situation where the predetermined condition is not satisfied." The first means (function to output the lottery result signal for big hit or normal deviation) capable of outputting the specific external signal of the first aspect when outputting the signal, and the specific condition in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied. A second means as the external output means (lottery result signal for special deviation) capable of outputting the specific external signal of the second aspect different from the first aspect as the specific signal when outputting the external signal. It is also possible to express that it has a function to output).

Feature bF5. It is configured so that the predetermined condition can be satisfied in relation to the result of the special determination (the condition for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state is established when the result of the winning / failing lottery or the deviation type determination becomes the special deviation result. Configuration),
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Predetermined external signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal (game round execution signal, game round start signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine corresponding to each game round (modification example 3 of the second embodiment, The function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6, the modified example 8 to the modified example 10), and
Equipped with
Feature bF1 characterized in that the specific signal can be output by using the predetermined external signal (the external signal corresponding to the special deviation result is output by using the lottery result signal). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bF3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to output a specific signal by using a predetermined external signal output to the outside of the gaming machine corresponding to each gaming time. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration by omitting the signal terminal and the signal wiring for the specific signal, and it is possible to avoid the addition of the input terminal in the management control device on the game hall side. In addition, since a specific signal can be output at the same time as a predetermined external signal, the number of signal outputs from the gaming machine can be reduced, and the processing load required for signal transmission / reception at both the gaming machine and the management control device on the gaming hall side can be reduced. It will be possible to reduce it.

In addition, "the predetermined external signal output means is configured to be able to output the specific signal by using the predetermined external signal" of this feature, "the predetermined external signal output means is a predetermined external in a situation where the predetermined condition is not satisfied." A first means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal of the first aspect when outputting a signal, and a second means different from the first aspect when outputting a predetermined external signal in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is also possible to include a second means as the external output means capable of outputting the predetermined external signal of the embodiment as the specific signal. "

Feature bF6. Any of the feature bF2 to the feature bF5 characterized by being provided with a means capable of outputting a predetermined output signal (time saving state signal, high frequency support signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine in the predetermined situation. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, a predetermined output signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine when the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted in a predetermined situation. As a result, when the specific game state is not entered in the situation where the specific signal that the predetermined condition is satisfied is output, the management control device on the game hall side refers to the predetermined output signal, and the cause is predetermined. It is possible to easily identify whether or not the situation is present. That is, on the game hall side, by also referring to the predetermined output signal, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is abnormal with respect to the fact that the specific signal is output but does not shift to the specific gaming state. It will be possible to do it easily.

Feature bF7. A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. It is equipped with a turn control means (a function of executing the special figure game round control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143).
The predetermined situation is configured to end based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (reaching the upper limit number of times, etc.).
The external output means can output the specific signal at the end timing of the predetermined situation or at a predetermined timing after the end timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the game times in which the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature bF6, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

For example, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined situation, the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted, while if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the end game times in the predetermined situation, the transition to the specific gaming state is allowed. Can be considered. In such a case, if the specific signal is output earlier than the end timing of the predetermined situation, it is assumed that the management control device on the game hall side shifts to the specific game state even though the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation. There are concerns that will be recognized. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific signal is output at the end timing of the predetermined situation or at a predetermined timing after the end timing, the management control device is made to know that the predetermined situation has ended. After that, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress the recognition as an unnatural behavior even if the game shifts to the specific gaming state after that.

Feature bF8. The external output means is
A first means (usually a jackpot) capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine from a predetermined output terminal (output terminal for the first external signal) in response to the transition to the special gaming state or the execution of the special gaming state. Function to output the first external signal when the result is obtained) and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means (special deviation) capable of outputting the specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the transition is performed by the transition means for the specific gaming state or when the transition is performed. Function to output the first external signal when the result is obtained) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature bF1, wherein the second means can output a specific signal from the predetermined output terminal.

In the above configuration, the same terminal as the output terminal that outputs an external signal when the game is transitioned to the special game state or is being executed is used, and a specific signal corresponding to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition or the transition to the specific game state is output. Will be done. As a result, even if the hall device is only compatible with the specific gaming state that shifts via the special gaming state, it becomes possible to recognize the specific gaming state that shifts without going through the special gaming state.

Feature bF9. The first means can output a signal of a predetermined mode (a first external signal that is turned on during the opening / closing execution mode).
The second means can output a signal having a mode different from the predetermined mode (a first external signal that is turned on for a predetermined period shorter than the period of the opening / closing execution mode) as the specific signal. The gaming machine according to feature bF8.

In the above configuration, external output is performed from a predetermined output terminal with different signal modes depending on whether the signal mode is changed to a special gaming state or the like and a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, even when each of these external signals is output from the same output terminal, both external signals can be recognized separately.

Feature bF10. The external output means can output a signal (second external signal) from an output terminal different from the predetermined output terminal to the outside of the gaming machine, at least in a situation of transitioning to a specific gaming state or a situation of a specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature bF8 or the feature bF9, which is characterized by having a third means (a function of outputting a second external signal).

In the above configuration, the output terminal different from the predetermined output terminal to which the signal is output externally when the special gaming state or the predetermined condition is satisfied is made to correspond to the transition to the specific gaming state or the execution thereof. The signal is output externally. This makes it possible for the hall device to recognize the transition to the specific gaming state or the specific gaming state.

For each configuration of the feature bF1 to the feature bF10, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bG group>
The feature bG group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 4 of the second embodiment. ..

The invention described in the feature bG group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in improving the enjoyment of pachinko games. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bG1. A special judgment means (hit / fail judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute etc.) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As a specific gaming state, when a predetermined first condition is satisfied (such as when a 4R normal jackpot result is obtained in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment), the first specific game state can be transferred via the special gaming state. A special game when the game state (first time-saving game state) and a predetermined second condition different from the first condition are satisfied (when a special deviation result occurs, when the ball enters a specific ball entry portion, etc.). It has a plurality of types of specific gaming states including the second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) that can be transferred without going through the states.
The configuration is such that the second condition can be satisfied in the situation of the first specific gaming state.
Specific means that can be more disadvantageous to the player when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state than when the second condition is not satisfied (a modified example of the second embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to 4.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state that shifts via the special gaming state and a second specific gaming state that shifts without going through the special gaming state are provided. Then, when the second condition, which is the trigger for the transition to the second specific gaming state, can be satisfied in the situation of the first specific gaming state, and such establishment occurs and the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs. Is configured to be more disadvantageous than the case where the transition to the second specific gaming state does not occur.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enjoy the thrill that may be demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on the subsequent game development when the state shifts to the first specific game state through the special game state. It is possible to add more fun than just aiming to win a specific result. However, while it is possible to provide such a thrill, if the player's disappointment when demoted to a disadvantageous state is too severe, the subsequent game motivation will be diminished, and there is a concern that it will have an adverse effect. In this respect, in this configuration, when the second condition is satisfied, the player shifts to the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, so that the disappointment of the player is reduced as compared with the case of shifting to the normal gaming state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the above-mentioned thrill can be enjoyed while suppressing the motivation for the game to be significantly impaired.

Feature bG2. A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
The upper limit of the number of times of the second specific gaming state is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) smaller than the upper limit of the number of times of the first specific gaming state (for example, 1000 times).
The gaming machine according to feature bG1, wherein the specific means shifts to the second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, by satisfying the second condition in the middle of the first specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is switched to the second specific gaming state in which the number of times the game can be played is small. In this case, even when the state shifts to the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be continued within the range up to the upper limit number of times, and it becomes possible to leave a chance to allocate a specific result in the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the second condition is satisfied, while enjoying the feeling of excitement that the second condition may be satisfied and the player may fall into a disadvantageous state.

Feature bG3. Upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times corresponding to the transition to a specific gaming state (a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 4 of the second embodiment). )
When the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the upper limit number of times setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state regardless of the remaining number of gaming times in the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bG2, which comprises means for setting the predetermined number of times as the upper limit number of times (a function of executing the process of step Sb4108 in the main control device 162).

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied is uniformly the first regardless of the number of game times in the first specific gaming state (remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state). 2 It is set to the maximum number of times in the specific game state. Therefore, the later the timing at which the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state is delayed, the more the total number of times the specific gaming state can be played increases, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to enhance the fun of avoiding the establishment of the second condition in advancing the game in the first specific game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Feature bG4. When the number of remaining times up to the upper limit is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times in the first specific gaming state or in the first specific gaming state, the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state can be hidden. The gaming machine according to feature bG2 or feature bG3, which is provided with means (a function of displaying a state notification image 450 instead of the remaining number of times image 472).

For example, if the configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state is clearly indicated, the player can grasp how many times the remaining number of times was before the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times in the second specific gaming state is set as the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state, the player can easily specify how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this respect, in the above configuration, by making the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state unclear, it is possible for the player to be unable or difficult to grasp the remaining number of times before the second condition is satisfied. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify the decrease in the number of remaining times when the state shifts to the second specific gaming state, and even if the decrease is large, the player is greatly discouraged and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Feature bG5. When the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state and the state shifts to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined notification (remaining number of times image 472) that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of times in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bG4, characterized in that the means for executing the above (a function of executing the process of step Sb4403 in the staging control device 143) is provided.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times is not specified during the stay in the first specific gaming state, while the remaining number of times is specified when the state shifts to the second specific gaming state. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second condition is satisfied and the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, and the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state after the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed.

Feature bG6. The second condition is that the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (disappearance). The feature bG1 characterized in that the result of the specific judgment (out-of-type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) performed when the result is (result) is the predetermined judgment result (special out-of-order result, transition lottery winning result, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bG5.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since a specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to determine whether or not to demote to a disadvantageous state in each game. As a result, the thrills that may cause the above demotion can be tasted in each game, and the games that enjoy such thrills can be strengthened.

Feature bG7. The configuration is such that the second condition can be satisfied in a normal gaming state.
It is characterized by having a means (a function of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state A in the main control device 162) capable of shifting to the second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bG1 to the feature bG6.

In the above configuration, the second condition can be satisfied not only in the first specific gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the process shifts to the second specific gaming state. It is configured as follows. Since the second specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous if the second condition is satisfied during the first specific gaming state, while the second condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state. It is possible to realize a configuration that is advantageous. That is, even if the same second condition is satisfied, the advantages and disadvantages are reversed depending on the game state when the condition is satisfied. It will be possible to achieve this.

Feature bG8. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
Upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times corresponding to the transition to a specific gaming state (a function of executing a process for shifting to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 4 of the second embodiment). )
When the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the upper limit number setting means sets a larger number of upper limit times (for example, 100 times) than when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bG7, characterized in that it is provided with possible means (a function of executing the process of step Sb4106 in the main control device 162).

Since the second specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, it is advantageous for the player even if the transition from the normal gaming state to the second specific gaming state occurs, but the above configuration is not limited to that. When the second condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state, a larger number of upper limit times is set than when the second condition is satisfied during the first specific gaming state. As a result, the superiority can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to enhance the fun of aiming at the establishment of the second condition in the normal gaming state.

For each configuration of the feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bH group>
The feature bH group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 5 of the second embodiment. ..

The invention described in the feature bH group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in improving the degree of attention to the game. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bH1. A special judgment means (hit / fail judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute etc.) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function to execute the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162) and
When a predetermined transition condition (for example, when the 4R normal jackpot result A and the 4R normal jackpot result B are obtained in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment) is satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. It is opened and closed by the main control device 162 according to the modification 5 of the second embodiment, which is a transition means for a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) capable of transitioning to a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) different from the special gaming state. A function to execute the migration process at the end of the execution mode) and
Equipped with
As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific game state is an allowable state (the number of game times in the third time-shortened game state is larger than the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state) (when a special deviation result is obtained). A means capable of increasing the number of remaining game times in the specific game state (such as when the ball enters the specific ball entry portion) (the third time is shortened by the main control device 162 according to the modification 5 of the second embodiment). Equipped with a function to execute the game state transition process)
As the specific gaming state, it is necessary to have a plurality of types of specific gaming states (first time-shortening game state A, first time-saving gaming state B) having different game times, game times range or period corresponding to the permissible state. A featured gaming machine.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. When a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific game state is acceptable, the remaining number of times in the specific game state is increased (added), so that the player can proceed with the game more advantageously. It is possible.

In such a configuration, for example, if the game times in which the remaining number of times increases due to the fulfillment of a specific condition are fixed, the player decides at what timing the remaining number of times will increase if the specific condition is satisfied. It can be grasped in advance, and there is a risk that interest in other game times will diminish. In this regard, in the above configuration, since a plurality of types of specific gaming states having different game times, game times range or period are provided, which is an allowable state in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed, a specific condition is satisfied at any timing. If you do so, it will not be decided uniformly whether the remaining number of times will increase. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from concentrating on the same game in each specific game state, and to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the specific game state.

Feature bH2. In each specific gaming state, the game times, the range or the period of the game times corresponding to the permissible state are configured to be indistinguishable or difficult for the player to identify (the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B). The gaming machine according to feature bH1, which is characterized in that it is impossible or difficult to discriminate.

For example, in the case of a configuration in which the game times and the like that are in the permissible state are clarified, even if a plurality of specific game states with different game times and the like that are in the permissible state are set, attention is paid to each specific game state. There is a concern that the game times to be played will be clarified, and the effect of deterring the player's interest from being biased to a specific game time will not be exhibited well. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the player cannot or is difficult to identify the game times, etc. that are in the permissible state, the player is informed which game time, etc. is the permissible state in each specific game state. It is possible to entertain the game while making predictions, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game throughout the specific game state.

Feature bH3. As the specific game state, the first type specific game state (first time-saving game state A) in which the upper limit number is the first number (for example, 70 times) and the second number (for example) in which the upper limit number is larger than the first number. It has a plurality of types of specific gaming states including the second type specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state B) (100 times).
The game according to feature bH1 or feature bH2, wherein at least the type 1 specific gaming state and the type 2 specific gaming state have different game times, range or period of game times corresponding to the permissible state. Machine.

In the above configuration, as the specific game state in which the allowable number of games is different, the maximum number of times is set to the first number, and the upper limit is set to the second number, which is larger than that. A type 2 specific gaming state is provided. As a result, not only when the specific condition should be satisfied, but also when the specific condition should be satisfied can be diversified for each specific gaming state, and the interest can be enhanced. It will be possible.

Features bH4. In the type 2 specific gaming state, the permissible state is reached in the gaming times (for example, the 71st to 100th gaming times) after the gaming times corresponding to the first number of times (for example, the 70th special figure game). The gaming machine according to feature bH3, which comprises a corresponding gaming time, a range or a period of the gaming times.

In the above configuration, the game times and the like that are allowed in the type 2 specific game state are included in the game times after the upper limit number of times (first number of times) of the type 1 specific game state. In this case, assuming that the transferred specific gaming state is the first type specific gaming state, the specific gaming state ends when the first number of times is reached, but on the other hand, the transferred specific gaming state is Assuming that it is the second type specific gaming state, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state can be increased if the specific condition is satisfied in the game after the first number of times is exceeded, which is a desirable situation for the player. For this reason, when the number of game times approaches the first time in the transition to the specific game state, there is anxiety that the specific game state will end, and the specific condition after the first time is exceeded. It is possible to play a game in a conflict with the expectation that an efficient increase in the number of remaining times will be achieved by the establishment of the above, and it will be possible to appropriately enhance the interest.

Feature bH5. When a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific game state is in an unacceptable state (the number of game times in the third time-saving game state is less than the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state), the game times in the specific game state It is configured to limit the increase in the number of remaining times,
In the type 1 specific gaming state and the type 2 specific gaming state, the game times, the range of the game times, or the range of the game times common as the range or period of the game times corresponding to the unacceptable state (1st to 20th times). The gaming machine according to feature bH3 or feature bH4, characterized in that it is configured to include (game times) or a period.

In the above configuration, a common game number, range or period of game times is set in each specific game state as an unacceptable state in which the remaining number of times is not added even if the specific condition is satisfied. In this common game round, etc., the remaining number of times is not added regardless of which specific game state the transferred specific game state is, so the player does not have to worry about the type of the specific game state or the establishment of the specific condition. , It will be possible to secure a period in which you can concentrate on the game that aims to achieve a specific result.

Feature bH6. It is configured that the player cannot or is difficult to discriminate between the type 1 specific gaming state and the type 2 specific gaming state (the first time-shortening game state A and the first time-shortening game state B cannot be discriminated or difficult to discriminate. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bH3 to the feature bH5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether the transferred specific gaming state is the first-class specific gaming state or the second-class specific gaming state, and the above-mentioned feature bH3 to the above-mentioned feature bH5. It becomes possible to appropriately exert each effect.

Feature bH7. When the specific condition is satisfied in the permissible state of the specific game state and the remaining number of game times is increased, the increase in the remaining number of game times is restricted when the specific condition is satisfied again in the specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bH1 to the feature bH6, which is provided with a means capable of performing (a function of executing the process of step Sb4801 by the main control device 162).

In the above configuration, the addition of the remaining number of times based on the establishment of the specific condition is limited to only once in the transferred specific game state, so the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied greatly affects the subsequent game. It becomes possible to suitably exert each of the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features bH1 to bH6.

Feature bH8. The specific condition is that the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state (disappearance result). ), The result of the specific determination (outlier type determination, transition lottery, etc.) is the predetermined determination result (special deviation result, transition lottery winning result, etc.). The gaming machine according to any one of the features bH7.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination becomes a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed when the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result becomes the predetermined determination result. Since the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the result of the special determination is the specific result and the determination of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in one game round. Therefore, in a situation where the specific gaming state is acceptable, the player can play both the challenge of drawing a specific result and the challenge of increasing the number of remaining times of the specific gaming state. , It becomes possible to play under advantageous conditions as compared with the case of staying only in the latter. This makes it possible to suitably increase the motivation to play in a specific gaming state.

For each configuration of the feature bH1 to the feature bH8, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bI group>
The feature bI group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly described in the modification 6, modification 8, and modification 9 of the second embodiment. It is extracted based on.

The invention described in the feature bI group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bI1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
It is possible to update the predetermined update information (number of missed game times, internal point information, etc.) based on the predetermined update opportunity (the result of the winning / failing lottery is a result of being out of order, winning the point lottery, etc.). Update means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment, the modified example 6, the modified example 8, and the modified example 9), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state (second time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (number of ceilings, predetermined number of points, etc.) and the special determination. The result is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (outlier result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The second specific game state (third time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the result of the specific judgment (outside type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) to be the predetermined judgment result (special deviation result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.) ), And has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
The first transition determination means (mainly modified example 6 and modification 9 of the second embodiment) that makes a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means. A function of executing the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state by the control device 162, a function of executing the process A for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 8), and the like.
A second transition determination means for performing a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (mods 6 and 9 of the second embodiment). (A function to execute the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the above, a function to execute the process A for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 8) ,
Equipped with
In one game round, it is possible to make the second transition determination by the second transition determination means after the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means. (A function to execute the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the modification 6 of the second embodiment, and a step after executing the process of step Sb6503 when a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in the modification 8. A gaming machine characterized by a function of executing the process of Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb7203 after executing the process of step Sb7201 in the modification 9).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state that shifts based on the result of the update information updated by the predetermined update trigger and the result of the special determination are predetermined determination results different from the specific results. Alternatively, it has a second specific gaming state in which the result of the specific determination performed in the game times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In such a gaming machine, the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state may be satisfied in the same gaming times. In this respect, in the above configuration, in order to make a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state and then to perform a second transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, the first transition is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not to adopt the result of the second transition determination based on the result of the determination, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bI2. When the result of the first transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the result of the second transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state. Also, means capable of limiting the transition to the second specific gaming state or limiting the execution of the second transition determination (the main control device according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment, the modified example 6 and the modified example 8). The gaming machine according to feature bI1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the process of step Sb5605 by 162 and a function of executing the process of step Sb7202 by the main control device 162 according to the modification 9.

In the above configuration, when the transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination performed earlier, the transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination performed thereafter. However, it is invalidated or the execution of the second transition judgment itself is restricted. Thereby, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state can be prioritized.

Feature bI3. The gaming machine according to feature bI2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination is the non-specific result.

Since the first specific game state shifts based on the update result (cumulative number of out-of-game times) of the number of times that the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result, the player is the first before the update result becomes a predetermined result. 1 It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. Therefore, even if the update result is a predetermined result, if the player does not shift to the first specific gaming state, the player can easily notice that the transition to the first specific gaming state has not occurred. On the other hand, since the second specific gaming state shifts based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination, the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific gaming state in advance. Based on these characteristics, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. , It becomes possible to adjust the specific game state of the transition destination while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bI4. The gaming machine according to feature bI2 or feature bI3, wherein the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bI5. When the result of the second transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the result of the first transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature bI1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of shifting to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when the transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination performed later, even if the transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the previous first transition determination. , The result is invalidated. Thereby, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the second specific gaming state can be prioritized.

Feature bI6. The gaming machine according to feature bI5, wherein the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the second specific gaming state is prioritized. It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bI7. When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state, the first means (for reaching the ceiling by the effect control device 143) for executing the predetermined first notification (effect for reaching the ceiling) is executed. Function to execute the production) and
A second means (effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (special reach out effect) when the special determination or the result of the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result or when the process shifts to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute a special reach out-of-reach effect) and
Equipped with
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at predetermined timings (at the start of fluctuation, during display of fluctuation) prior to the execution timings of the first notification and the second notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bI2 to the feature bI6.

In the above configuration, when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result, or when the first specific gaming state is entered, the first notification is executed, and when the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result, or Since the second notification is executed when the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the first specific gaming state or the transition to the second specific gaming state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timings of the first notification and the second notification, the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are performed. When and are established in the same game times, each of the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment result of the specific game state to be transferred. As a result, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred.

Feature bI8. The game times control means controls the game times so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (fixed display time) after the game rotation operation is performed.
A transition means for a specific gaming state (second) capable of shifting the gaming state to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means. The embodiment is provided with a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6, the modified example 8, and the modified example 9).
The specific gaming state transition means is any specific timing in the period from the end of the gaming round operation to the start of the next gaming round (start timing of the definite display in the special figure gaming round, definite display). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bI1 to the feature bI7, characterized in that the transition can be executed at the intermediate timing, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.).

When the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices that the gaming state is the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, if the transition to the specific gaming state is performed at the start or in the middle of the gaming rotation operation in the gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to and the role of the game will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game rotation operation is completed, it is possible to notify the result of the special determination and then notice the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to the above feature bI3, "the result of the special determination in both the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is a non-specific result (so-called off result). ), But in such a configuration, if the transition to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of each transition condition is performed at the start of the gaming round or in the middle of the gaming round operation, a special judgment is made. Even before the result of the above is notified, there is a concern that the player may not be aware of the specific gaming state and can grasp the result in advance, and the role of the game round may not be properly fulfilled. By applying this feature to various configurations, it is possible to suppress the possibility of grasping the deviation result in advance. "

Further, when this feature is applied to the feature bI7, "in a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, each of the transition determinations is performed. It will be performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the transition to the specific gaming state is performed immediately when each of these transition determinations is executed, the result of the special determination is not notified. Despite this, there is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to the specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming times will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, the result of the special determination is notified. Even if each transition determination has been completed before, the transition to the specific gaming state based on the result of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of the result notification. Therefore, even if the player may notice the specific game state, the attention to the game time can be impaired after the player pays attention to the game time until the result notification. It is possible to exert the effect of the above-mentioned feature bI7 while suppressing the above-mentioned effect. "

Feature bI 9. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
The number of times updating means for updating the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state or the remaining number of game times in the specific game state (corresponding to the modified example 6, the modified example 8, and the modified example 9 of the second embodiment). It is equipped with a function (etc.) of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162).
In one game round, after the update is performed by the number-of-times updating means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination by the second transition determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of feature bI1 to feature bI8, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of being performed.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific game state and the remaining number of game times in which the specific game state can be played, for example, the first specification When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, the first specific gaming state can be terminated in the final game round and then the transition to the second specific gaming state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without intervening the game times in the normal game state, and the state is equivalent to the increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature bI10. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined cycle.
The update by the number-of-times updating means, the first migration determination by the first migration determining means, and the second migration determination by the second migration determining means can be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to feature bI9.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing the periodic processing, the number of times update and each transition determination are performed in the same processing time, so that the subsequent specific game state is specified from the preceding specific game state. When shifting to the gaming state, it is possible to preferably suppress the intervention of the gaming times in the normal gaming state.

Feature bI11. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As a specific game state, the first transition is possible based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching the number of ceilings, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., winning a special deviation result, winning a transition lottery, etc.). A specific game state (second time-shortened game state or third time-shortened game state B) and a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special deviation result, winning a transition lottery, etc., reaching the number of ceilings, reaching a predetermined number of points) It has a plurality of types of specific gaming states including a second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state A or second time-saving gaming state) that can be transferred based on the establishment of (reach, etc.).
The first transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state (the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6 and the modified example 9 of the second embodiment). (Function of executing the transition determination process A of the third time-saving gaming state, etc.) and the function of executing the transition determination process A of the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 8).
A second transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state (a second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6 and the modified example 9 of the second embodiment). (Function of executing the transition determination process A of the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 8) and
Equipped with
In one game round, it is possible to make the second transition determination by the second transition determination means after the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means. (A function to execute the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the modification 6 of the second embodiment, and a step after executing the process of step Sb6503 when a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in the modification 8. A gaming machine characterized by a function of executing the process of Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb7203 after executing the process of step Sb7201 in the modification 9).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, there is a first specific gaming state that shifts when the first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific gaming state that shifts when the second transition condition is satisfied. As described above, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of specific gaming states that are transitioned by different transition conditions, each of the transition conditions may be satisfied in the same gaming times. In this respect, in the above configuration, in order to make a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state and then to perform a second transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, the first transition is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not to adopt the result of the second transition determination based on the result of the determination, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

It is possible to apply the configuration of the feature bI2 to the feature bI10 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the feature bI1 to the feature bI11, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bJ group>
The feature bJ group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly described in the modification 7, modification 8, and modification 10 of the second embodiment. It is extracted based on.

The invention described in the feature bJ group is described as "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bJ1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
It is possible to update the predetermined update information (number of missed game times, number of points, etc.) based on the predetermined update opportunity (the result of the winning / failing lottery is a result of being out of order, winning the point lottery, etc.). Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 7 and the modified example 8 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10. Etc.) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state (second time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (number of ceilings, predetermined number of points, etc.) and the special determination. The result is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (outlier result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The second specific game state (third time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the result of the specific judgment (outside type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) to be the predetermined judgment result (special deviation result, winning the transition lottery, etc.) Has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
The first transition determination means (modification example 7 and modification 10 of the second embodiment) that makes a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means. A function for executing the transition determination process for the second time-saving game state by the control device 162, a function for executing the transition determination process B for the second time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 8), and the like.
A second transition determination means for performing a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (mods 7 and 10 of the second embodiment). (A function to execute the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the above, a function to execute the process B for determining the transition to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 8) ,
Equipped with
In one game round, it is possible to execute the first transition determination by the first transition determination means after the second transition determination by the second transition determination means is executed. (A function to execute the process of step Sb6102 after executing the process of step Sb6101 in the modification 7 of the second embodiment, and after executing the process of step Sb6505 when affirmative determination is made in step Sb6502 in the modification 8. A gaming machine characterized by a function of executing the process of step Sb6506, a function of executing the process of step Sb7502 after executing the process of step Sb7501 in the modification 10).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state that shifts based on the result of the update information updated by the predetermined update trigger and the result of the special determination are predetermined determination results different from the specific results. Alternatively, it has a second specific gaming state in which the result of the specific determination performed in the game times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In such a gaming machine, the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state may be satisfied in the same gaming times. In this respect, in the above configuration, in order to make a second transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state and then to perform a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state, the second transition is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not to adopt the result of the first transition determination based on the result of the determination, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bJ2. When the result of the second transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the result of the first transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state. Also means that can limit the transition to the first specific gaming state or limit the execution of the first transition determination (step Sb6601 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment of the modification 8). The gaming machine according to feature bJ1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the processing of step Sb7601 by the main control device 162 according to the modification 10.

In the above configuration, when the transition to the second specific gaming state is determined by the second transition determination performed earlier, the transition to the first specific gaming state is determined by the first transition determination performed thereafter. However, it is invalidated or the execution of the first transition determination itself is restricted. Thereby, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state can be satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the second specific gaming state can be prioritized.

Feature bJ3. When the result of the second transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the means capable of restricting the update by the update means (main control device 162 according to the modification 10). The gaming machine according to feature bJ2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step Sb7601.

For example, based on the fact that both the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state is invalidated and the second If the configuration is such that the player shifts to the specific gaming state, there is a concern that the player will not be able to receive the benefits of the first specific gaming state. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the transition to the second specific gaming state is determined by the second transition determination, the execution of the update by the update means is restricted. As a result, in the game times in which the transition condition to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, it is restricted that the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result, and by extension, the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the second It is avoided that the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied in the same game times. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize the transition to the second specific gaming state while suppressing the player from being unable to receive the benefits of the first specific gaming state.

Feature bJ4. It is provided with means capable of restricting the update by the update means in the second specific gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10). The gaming machine according to the feature bJ3.

In the above configuration, when the update by the update means is restricted based on the determination of the transition to the second specific gaming state in the second transition determination, the restriction is applied even after the transition to the second specific gaming state. Will be continued. As a result, the update by the updating means can be restarted after the second specific gaming state ends, and it is possible to suppress the establishment of the transition condition of the first specific gaming state in the middle of the second specific gaming state.

Feature bJ5. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bJ2 to the feature bJ4, wherein the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the second specific gaming state is prioritized. It becomes possible to shift to a specific gaming state on the advantageous side.

Feature bJ6. When the result of the first transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the result of the second transition determination is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state. Also described in feature bJ1 which is provided with means capable of shifting to the first specific gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps Sb6303 and Sb6304 by the main control device 162 according to the modification 7). Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, when the transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination performed later, even if the transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the previous second transition determination. , The result is invalidated. Thereby, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state can be satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state can be prioritized.

Feature bJ7. The gaming machine according to feature bJ6, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination is the non-specific result.

Since the first specific game state shifts based on the update result (cumulative number of out-of-game times) of the number of times that the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result, the player is the first before the update result becomes a predetermined result. 1 It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. Therefore, even if the update result is a predetermined result, if the player does not shift to the first specific gaming state, the player can easily notice that the transition to the first specific gaming state has not occurred. On the other hand, since the second specific gaming state shifts based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination, the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific gaming state in advance. Based on these characteristics, when the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are satisfied in the same game times, the transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. , It becomes possible to adjust the specific game state of the transition destination while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bJ8. When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state, the first means (for reaching the ceiling by the effect control device 143) for executing the predetermined first notification (effect for reaching the ceiling) is executed. Function to execute the production) and
A second means (effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (special reach out effect) when the special determination or the result of the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result or when the process shifts to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute a special reach out-of-reach effect) and
Equipped with
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at predetermined timings (at the start of fluctuation, during display of fluctuation) prior to the execution timings of the first notification and the second notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bJ2 to the feature bJ7.

In the above configuration, when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result, or when the first specific gaming state is entered, the first notification is executed, and when the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result, or Since the second notification is executed when the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the first specific gaming state or the transition to the second specific gaming state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timings of the first notification and the second notification, the transition condition to the first specific gaming state and the transition condition to the second specific gaming state are performed. When can be established in the same game times, each of the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment result of the specific game state to be transferred. As a result, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred.

Feature bJ9. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
The number of times updating means for updating the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state or the remaining number of game times in the specific game state (corresponding to the modified example 7, the modified example 8, and the modified example 10 of the second embodiment). It is equipped with a function (etc.) of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162).
In one game round, after the update is performed by the number-of-times updating means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination by the second transition determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bJ1 to the feature bJ8, which is configured to be capable of being performed.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific game state and the remaining number of game times in which the specific game state can be played, for example, the first specification When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, the first specific gaming state can be terminated in the final game round and then the transition to the second specific gaming state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without intervening the game times in the normal game state, and the state is equivalent to the increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature bJ10. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined cycle.
In the same processing times of the periodic processing, the update by the number-of-times updating means, the first migration determination by the first migration determining means, and the second migration determination by the second migration determining means can be executed. The gaming machine according to the feature bJ9.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing the periodic processing, the number of times update and each transition determination are performed in the same processing time, so that the subsequent specific game state is specified from the preceding specific game state. When shifting to the gaming state, it is possible to preferably suppress the intervention of the gaming times in the normal gaming state.

For each configuration of the feature bJ1 to the feature bJ10, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bK group>
The feature bK group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modifications 6 and 8 of the second embodiment. It is a thing.

The invention described in the feature bK group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bK1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As a specific game state, the first transition is possible based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching the number of ceilings, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., winning a special deviation result, winning a transition lottery, etc.). A specific gaming state (second time-shortening gaming state or third time-saving gaming state B) and a predetermined second transition condition (a predetermined second transition condition that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state and is different from the first transition condition). The second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state A or first) that can be transferred based on the establishment of winning a special out-of-order result, winning a transition lottery, reaching the number of ceilings, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.) It has multiple types of specific game states including 2 hours short game state).
It is possible to limit the transition to the second specific gaming state when the second transition condition is satisfied in the situation of the first specific gaming state (affirmative judgment in step Sb5603 and negative in step Sb5604). A gaming machine characterized by (flow when judged, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state that shifts when the first transition condition is satisfied and the first specific gaming state that shifts when the second transition condition is satisfied, which is more disadvantageous than the first specific gaming state. It has 2 specific gaming states. In such a case, if the second transition condition is satisfied in the situation of the first specific gaming state, the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being treated unfavorably. , It becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Features bK2. A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Step Sb5302, step Sb6503 by the main control device 162 according to the first modification means for determining whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state (modification 6 of the second embodiment, modification 8). The function for executing the transition determination process of the second time-saving gaming state of the above, or the main control device 162 according to the modification 8 of the second embodiment executes the process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state of step Sb6505. Function) and
A second transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state (step Sb5303, step Sb6504 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6 and the modified example 8 of the second embodiment). The function for executing the transition determination process of the third time-saving gaming state of the above, or the main control device 162 according to the modification 8 of the second embodiment executes the process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state of step Sb6506. Function etc.) and
Equipped with
In one game round, it is possible to make the second transition determination by the second transition determination means after the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means. (A function to execute the process of step Sb5303 after executing the process of step Sb5302 in the modification 6 of the second embodiment, and a step after executing the process of step Sb6503 when a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in the modification 8. The gaming machine according to feature bK1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of Sb6504, a function of executing the process of step Sb6506 after executing the process of step Sb6505 when affirmative determination is made in step Sb6502, and the like).

In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of specific gaming states to be migrated according to different migration conditions, each of the transition conditions may be satisfied in the same gaming times. In view of such a situation, in this feature, when the second transition condition is satisfied in the situation of the first specific gaming state, the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, and then the first specific gaming is performed. It is configured to make a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the state, and then perform a second transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state. According to such a configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game times, after it is determined by the first transition determination to shift to the first specific gaming state, the first 2 Even if the transition determination determines that the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the second specific gaming state is avoided due to the above restrictions. As a result, the transition to the first specific gaming state on the advantageous side is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Features bK3. Predetermined notification execution means (effect control) capable of executing predetermined notification (ceiling reaching effect, special reach out effect) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state in the game times. It is equipped with a function to execute a game rotation effect by the device 143).
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during variation display) prior to the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature bK2.

In the above configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state by executing the predetermined notification in the game times. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the predetermined notification, each transition is performed in the game times in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied. Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined notification. That is, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game times and the transition to the first specific gaming state is carried out, the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be suitably carried out. Become.

Features bK4. Specific notification execution means (effect control) capable of executing specific notification (special reach off effect, ceiling reach effect) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in the game times. The device 143 is provided with a function of executing a game rotation effect based on a fluctuation pattern from the main control device 162).
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at predetermined timings (at the start of fluctuation, during variation display) prior to the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature bK2 or the feature bK3.

In the above configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific gaming state by executing the specific notification in the game times. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the specific notification, each transition is performed in the game times in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification based on the result of the determination. As a result, even if the second transition condition is satisfied, if the first transition condition is also satisfied and the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. can. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred.

Features bK5. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bK2 to the feature bK4, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be executed when the gaming round is started.

In the above configuration, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are executed at the start of the game round, the notification corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition and the notification corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition are notified in the game round. When doing so, it becomes possible to control whether or not each of the notifications is carried out based on the result of each of the above transition determinations. As a result, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred. It is also effective when notifying the establishment of the first transition condition and the second transition condition based on the result of the game round.

When this feature is applied to the feature bK3 and the feature bK4, "not to mention the case where the predetermined notification and the specific notification are executed in the middle of the game round, each of these notifications is executed in the early stage of the game round. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to set the game round effect to be executed in the game round at the start of the game round, the set game round effect can be appropriately dealt with. It is possible to flexibly respond to the case where the predetermined notification or the specific notification is incorporated. "

Features bK6. The game times control means controls the game times so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (fixed display time) after the game rotation operation is performed.
A transition means for a specific gaming state (second) capable of shifting the gaming state to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means. The embodiment is provided with a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 6 and the modified example 8).
The specific gaming state transition means is any specific timing in the period from the end of the gaming round operation to the start of the next gaming round (start timing of the definite display in the special figure gaming round, definite display). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bK2 to the feature bK5, which is configured to be able to execute the transition at the intermediate timing, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.).

When the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices that the gaming state is the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, if the transition to the specific gaming state is performed at the start or in the middle of the gaming rotation operation in the gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to and the role of the game will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game rotation operation is completed, it is possible to notify the result of the special determination and then notice the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to the feature bK3 and the feature bK4, "in a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the predetermined notification or the specific notification, each of the transition determinations is made. May be performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. For example, in a configuration in which the setting for executing the predetermined notification is performed at the start of the game round, it is necessary to perform each of the above transition determinations at the start of the game round. In such a case, if the transition to the specific gaming state is performed immediately when each of the transition determinations is executed, the specific gaming state is set even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to, and the role of the game round will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, each transition judgment is completed before the notification of the result of the special judgment. Even so, the transition to the specific gaming state based on the results of each of these transition determinations is performed after waiting for the start of the result notification. As a result, the player notices the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. Even if there is a case, it is possible to make the configuration so that the attention shifts to the specific game state after paying attention to the game times until the result notification. Therefore, while suppressing the loss of attention to the game times, the above-mentioned features It is possible to exert each of the above-mentioned effects of bK3 or the feature bK4. "

Further, when this feature is applied to the above feature bK5, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, the state is only to shift to the specific gaming state, so that the first transition determination is made. In the configuration in which the second transition determination is performed at the start of the game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific gaming state is also performed at the start of the game round. However, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed at the start of the game round. Even before the result of the special determination is notified, there is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to the specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming times will not be properly fulfilled. In this configuration, even if each of the above transition determinations is made at the start of the game round, the transition to the specific gaming state based on the result of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of the result notification. As a result, even if the player may notice the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine, the configuration can be such that the player pays attention to the game times until the result notification, and then the interest shifts to the specific gaming state. It is possible to exert the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bK5 while suppressing the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired. "

Features bK7. The first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in the game times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (off result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature bK6.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the game times when the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (so-called out-of-specification result). If the transition to the specific gaming state based on is performed at the start of the gaming round or in the middle of the gaming round operation, the player notices the specific gaming state even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the role of the game will not be played properly because the result can be grasped in advance. By applying the feature bK6 to such a configuration, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effects of the feature bK2 to the feature bK5 while suppressing the possibility of grasping the deviation result in advance.

Features bK8. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
It is provided with a number updating means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) for updating the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state or the remaining number of game times in the specific game state.
In one game round, after the update is performed by the number-of-times updating means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination by the second transition determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bK2 to the feature bK7, which is configured to be capable of being performed.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the remaining number of game times that can be played in the specific game state, for example, in the final game times of the first specific game state. When the second transition condition is satisfied, the first specific gaming state can be terminated in the final game round, and then the transition to the second specific gaming state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without intervening the game times in the normal game state, and the remaining number of times in the specific game state is substantially added. It becomes possible.

Features bK9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined cycle.
The update by the number-of-times updating means, the first migration determination by the first migration determining means, and the second migration determination by the second migration determining means can be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to the feature bK8.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing the periodic processing, the number of times update and each transition determination are performed in the same processing time, so that the subsequent specific game state is specified from the preceding specific game state. When shifting to the gaming state, it is possible to preferably suppress the intervention of the gaming times in the normal gaming state.

Features bK10. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bK1 to the feature bK9, wherein the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is larger than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number of times (remaining number of times) of the first specific gaming state is larger than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state, and the first specific gaming state is more for the player than the second specific gaming state. It is advantageous. By applying any of the above-mentioned features bK1 to the above-mentioned features bK9 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature bK1 to the feature bK10, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bL group>
The feature bL group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 7 of the second embodiment. ..

The invention described in the feature bL group states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bL1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state (second time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the establishment of the predetermined first transition condition (reaching the number of ceilings, reaching the predetermined number of points, etc.) and the first It is possible to make a transition based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special deviation result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and is different from the first transition condition. It has a plurality of types of specific gaming states including the second specific gaming state (third time-saving gaming state).
A first transition determination means (a function for executing a process for determining a transition to a second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162, etc.) for performing a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state, and
A second transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162, etc.) and
Equipped with
It is possible to allow the transition to the first specific gaming state when the first transition condition is satisfied in the situation of the second specific gaming state (flow when affirmative determination is made in step Sb6301).
In one game round, it is possible to make the first transition determination by the first transition determination means after the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means. (A function of executing the process of step Sb6102 after executing the process of step Sb6101 in the main control device 162 according to the modification 7 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state that shifts when the first transition condition is satisfied and the first specific gaming state that shifts when the second transition condition is satisfied, which is more disadvantageous than the first specific gaming state. It has 2 specific gaming states. As described above, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of specific gaming states that are transitioned by different transition conditions, each of the transition conditions may be satisfied in the same gaming times.

In view of such a situation, in the above configuration, when the first transition condition is satisfied in the situation of the second specific gaming state, the transition to the first specific gaming state is permitted, and then the second specific gaming state is allowed. It is configured to make a second transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the state, and then perform a first transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state. According to such a configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game times, even if it is determined by the second transition determination to shift to the second specific gaming state, after that. , The result of the previous second transition determination can be canceled by determining that the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed by the first transition determination. As a result, the transition to the first specific gaming state on the advantageous side is carried out, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bL2. Predetermined notification execution means (effect control) capable of executing predetermined notification (ceiling reaching effect, special reach out effect) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state in the game times. It is equipped with a function to execute a game rotation effect by the device 143).
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during variation display) prior to the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature bL1.

In the above configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific gaming state by executing the predetermined notification in the game times. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the predetermined notification, each transition is performed in the game times in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied. Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined notification. That is, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game times and the transition to the first specific gaming state is carried out, the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be suitably carried out. Become.

Feature bL3. Specific notification execution means (effect control) capable of executing specific notification (special reach off effect, ceiling reach effect) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in the game times. The device 143 is provided with a function of executing a game rotation effect based on a fluctuation pattern from the main control device 162).
The first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed at predetermined timings (at the start of fluctuation, during variation display) prior to the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature bL1 or the feature bL2.

In the above configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific gaming state by executing the specific notification in the game times. In this case, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the specific notification, each transition is performed in the game times in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification based on the result of the determination. As a result, even if the second transition condition is satisfied, if the first transition condition is also satisfied and the transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. can. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred.

Feature bL4. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bL1 to the feature bL3, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be executed when the gaming round is started.

In the above configuration, since the first transition determination and the second transition determination are executed at the start of the game round, the notification corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition and the notification corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition are notified in the game round. When doing so, it becomes possible to control whether or not each of the notifications is carried out based on the result of each of the above transition determinations. As a result, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, it is possible to suppress the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state to be transferred. It is also effective when notifying the establishment of the first transition condition and the second transition condition based on the result of the game round.

When this feature is applied to the feature bL2 and the feature bL3, "not to mention the case where the predetermined notification or the specific notification is executed in the middle of the game round, each of these notifications is executed in the early stage of the game round. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to set the game round effect to be executed in the game round at the start of the game round, the set game round effect can be appropriately dealt with. It is possible to flexibly respond to the case where the predetermined notification or the specific notification is incorporated. "

Feature bL5. The game times control means controls the game times so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (fixed display time) after the game rotation operation is performed.
A transition means for a specific gaming state (second) capable of shifting the gaming state to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means. The embodiment is provided with a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 7.
The specific gaming state transition means is any specific timing in the period from the end of the gaming round operation to the start of the next gaming round (start timing of the definite display in the special figure gaming round, definite display). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bL1 to the feature bL4, characterized in that the transition can be executed at the intermediate timing, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.).

When the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, it is assumed that the player notices that the gaming state is the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, if the transition to the specific gaming state is performed at the start or in the middle of the gaming rotation operation in the gaming round, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the player's interest will shift to and the role of the game will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, since the transition to the specific gaming state is performed after the game rotation operation is completed, it is possible to notify the result of the special determination and then notice the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to the feature bL2 and the feature bL3, "in a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed before the execution timing of the predetermined notification or the specific notification, each of the transition determinations is made. Is performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed immediately when each of the transition determinations is executed, the result of the special determination is not notified. In spite of this, there is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to the specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming times will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, the result of the special determination is notified. Even if each transition determination is completed before, the transition to the specific gaming state based on the result of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of the result notification. Even if the player may notice the specific gaming state from the behavior, it is possible to make the configuration so that the player pays attention to the specific gaming state until the result notification, and then the attention shifts to the specific gaming state. It is possible to exert each of the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned feature bL2 or the above-mentioned feature bL3 while suppressing the damage. "

Further, when this feature is applied to the above feature bL4, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, the state is only to shift to the specific gaming state, so that the first transition determination is made. In the configuration in which the second transition determination is performed at the start of the game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific gaming state is also performed at the start of the game round. However, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed at the start of the game round. Even before the result of the special determination is notified, there is a concern that the player's interest will shift to the transition to the specific gaming state, and the role of the gaming times will not be properly fulfilled. In this configuration, even if each of the above transition determinations is performed at the start of the game round, the transition to the specific gaming state based on the results of each transition determination is performed after waiting for the start of the result notification. As a result, even if the player may notice the specific gaming state from the behavior of the gaming machine, the configuration can be such that the player pays attention to the game times until the result notification, and then the interest shifts to the specific gaming state. It is possible to exert each of the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned feature bL4 while suppressing the degree of attention to the game times to be impaired. "

Feature bL6. The first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in the game times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (off result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature bL5.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the game times when the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (so-called out-of-specification result). If the transition to the specific gaming state based on is performed at the start of the gaming round or in the middle of the gaming round operation, the player notices the specific gaming state even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that the role of the game will not be played properly because the result can be grasped in advance. By applying the above-mentioned feature bL5 to such a configuration, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features bL1 to the above-mentioned features bL4 while suppressing the possibility of grasping the deviation result in advance.

Feature bL7. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
It is provided with a number updating means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) for updating the number of game times after shifting to the specific game state or the remaining number of game times in the specific game state.
In one game round, after the update is performed by the number-of-times updating means, the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means, and then the first transition determination by the first transition determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bL1 to the feature bL6, which is configured to be capable of being performed.

According to the above configuration, in order to execute the first transition determination and the second transition determination after updating the number of games in the specific game state and the remaining number of game times in which the specific game state can be played, for example, the first specification When the second transition condition is satisfied in the final game round of the gaming state, the first specific gaming state can be terminated in the final game round and then the transition to the second specific gaming state can be performed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without intervening the game times in the normal game state, and the state is equivalent to the increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature bL8. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (normal processing by the main control device 162, etc.) at a predetermined cycle.
The update by the number-of-times updating means, the first migration determination by the first migration determining means, and the second migration determination by the second migration determining means can be executed in one processing time of the periodic processing. The gaming machine according to the feature bL7.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the progress of the game is controlled by repeatedly executing the periodic processing, the number of times update and each transition determination are performed in the same processing time, so that the subsequent specific game state is specified from the preceding specific game state. When shifting to the gaming state, it is possible to preferably suppress the intervention of the gaming times in the normal gaming state.

Feature bL9. As a condition for ending the specific game state, the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state is included in the predetermined upper limit.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bL1 to the feature bL8, wherein the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is larger than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number of times (remaining number of times) of the first specific gaming state is larger than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state, and the first specific gaming state is more for the player than the second specific gaming state. It is advantageous. By applying any of the above-mentioned features bL1 to the above-mentioned features bL8 to such a structure, each of the above-mentioned features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the feature bL1 to the feature bL9, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bM group>
The feature bM group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each modification, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 10 of the second embodiment. ..

The invention described in the feature bM group is described as "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features bM1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, a first gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) and a second gaming state (third time-saving gaming state, first time-saving) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and are different from the special gaming state. Has a game state)
Update that can update the predetermined update information (number of missed game times, number of points, etc.) based on the predetermined update opportunity (the result of the winning / failing lottery is the result of the loss, winning the point lottery, etc.) Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment) and
Transition means capable of transitioning to the first gaming state based on the update result of the updating means being a predetermined result (number of ceilings, predetermined number of points, etc.) (shifting to the second time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162). Judgment processing, function to execute time-saving game state transition processing, etc.) and
The update limiting means capable of limiting the update by the update means in the second gaming state (the main control device 162 according to the modification 10 of the second embodiment processes the steps Sb7602 and Sb7603. Functions to be executed, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, there are a first gaming state and a second gaming state as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ing. Of these, the first gaming state shifts based on the result of the update information updated by the predetermined update trigger becoming the predetermined result.

Here, depending on the transition timing to the second gaming state, the updating result of the updating means may become a predetermined result in the middle of the second gaming state. In this case, in order to avoid overlapping execution of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is conceivable to invalidate the arrival at the predetermined result under such a situation. However, there is a concern that the repeated games aimed at achieving the predetermined result will be lost and the player will feel unpleasant. In this respect, in this configuration, since the update by the update means is restricted in the second gaming state, it is possible to prevent the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result in the middle of the second game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrival at a predetermined result from being invalidated, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bM2. A means capable of releasing the restriction by the update limiting means when the second gaming state ends (a function of executing the process of step Sb7602 by the main control device 162 according to the modification 10 of the second embodiment). Etc.) The gaming machine according to feature bM1, which is characterized by having (etc.).

According to the above configuration, when the second gaming state ends, the update by the update means is restarted. As a result, the player can play the game again aiming at the predetermined result from the continuation of the update result before shifting to the second gaming state.

Feature bM3. A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
For the transition means for the second gaming state (for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162) that can shift to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (which results in a special deviation result) is established. Processing, function to execute processing for time saving game state transition, etc.) and
A means capable of restricting the update by the update means in a predetermined game in which the predetermined transition trigger (which results in a special deviation) is established (main control device according to a modification 10 of the second embodiment). Function to execute the process of step Sb7601 by 162) and
The gaming machine according to the feature bM1 or the feature bM2.

In the above configuration, the execution of the update by the update means is restricted in the game times in which the condition for shifting to the second game state is satisfied. As a result, both the trigger for the transition to the second gaming state and the trigger for the transition to the first gaming state (the trigger for the transition to the first gaming state) of the update means can be established in the same game round. In this case, it is possible to carry over the arrival at a predetermined result (transition to the first gaming state) while giving priority to the transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the transition to the first gaming state and shift to the second gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the two gaming states from overlapping.

In addition, in the above configuration, the update of the update information is restarted with the end of the second game state, so that the update result becomes a predetermined result. Can be done. That is, when the transition opportunity of each of these game states can be established in the same game times, it is possible to sequentially shift to the second game state and the first game state, and both in each of those game states. It can be configured so that the player can enjoy the benefits of.

Features bM4. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second gaming state (a function of executing a process for determining the transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modification 10 of the second embodiment). Etc.)
In one game, the update is performed by the update means after the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (the process of step Sb7604 is executed after the process of step Sb7501 is executed). The gaming machine according to the feature bM3, which is characterized by the above-mentioned structure.

In the above configuration, the update processing of the update information is executed after the transition to the second gaming state is determined. For this reason, both the opportunity to shift to the second gaming state and the result of updating the updating means to be a predetermined result (trigger to shift to the first gaming state) can be established in the same game times. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not to update the update information based on the result of the determination of transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, it can be a preferable mode in that the update of the update information is restricted in the game times in which the transition condition to the second game state is satisfied as in the above-mentioned feature bM3.

Feature bM5. A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. It is equipped with a turn control means (a function of executing the special figure game round control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143).
A game in which the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (disengagement result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. Transition for the second gaming state that can be transferred to the second gaming state based on the result of the specific determination (outlier type determination, transition lottery, etc.) performed at the times becomes the predetermined determination result (special outlier result). The description according to any one of the feature bM1 to the feature bM4, which is provided with means (a function for determining a transition of a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162, a function for executing a processing for shifting to a time-saving gaming state, etc.). Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the result of the special determination is a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific determination performed in the game round in which the result of the special determination is the non-specific result is the predetermined determination result. Based on this, it is configured to shift to the second gaming state. In the configuration in which the transition to the second gaming state is established by the special determination itself or the specific determination linked to the result of the special determination, the transition timing to the second gaming state is random, so that the second game is played. In the middle of the state, an event may occur in which the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result. By applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bM1 to such a case, the occurrence of the above-mentioned event is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably control the gaming state.

Feature bM6. It has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
The second gaming state can be transferred without going through the special gaming state, and the third gaming state can be transitioned via the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bM1 to the feature bM5, which is configured to allow the update by the update means in the third gaming state.

Regarding the third gaming state that shifts via the special gaming state, it is possible to adjust so that the updating result of the updating means does not become a predetermined result during the third gaming state at the design stage of the gaming machine. Based on such characteristics, in the above configuration, the update of the updated information is restricted in the case of the second gaming state, but such restriction is not imposed in the case of the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the update of the updated information from being excessively stagnant, and to prevent a large delay in the transition to the first gaming state.

It should be noted that this feature has "a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state, and the predetermined update information is available. The transition to the third gaming state is performed in a state of being set to a predetermined initial value (value corresponding to the number of ceilings), or the predetermined update information corresponds to the transition to the third gaming state is the predetermined initial value. The present invention is described in any one of the feature bM1 to the feature bM5, which is configured to allow the update by the update means in the third gaming state. It can also be expressed as "game machine."

Feature bM7. As a condition for ending the third gaming state, the number of gaming times after shifting to the third gaming state includes a specific number of times (sixth upper limit number or seventh upper limit number).
The first gaming state is characterized in that it is possible to shift based on the result of the updating by the updating means performed for the game after the special gaming state ends to be a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to the feature bM6.

In the above configuration, the number of game times after shifting to the third game state becomes a specific number of times, so that the third game state ends, and the update information by the update means ends after the special game state ends. It is configured to be played for games. In this case, the specific number of times, which is the upper limit of the number of times of the third game state, is set to be less than the number of times of the game times required for the update result of the update information to be a predetermined result, so that the third game state is completed. The update result can be configured to reach a predetermined result. That is, since it is possible to prevent the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result in the middle of the third game state, it can be a preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bM6.

Feature bM8. It is provided with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the loss count image 475 by the staging control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (display of the loss count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means.
The specific notification executing means is characterized by comprising means capable of holding the notification content of the specific notification in a state immediately before the restriction is performed when the update by the update means is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bM1 to the feature bM7.

In the above configuration, by executing the specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means, the player can grasp the progress of the update information and the rest until the predetermined result is obtained, and the subsequent game is advanced. It can be used as useful information above. At that time, when the update is restricted due to the second gaming state, the specific notification is performed in a mode in which the state immediately before the restriction is performed, so that the update is not performed and the update is not performed. It is possible to easily make the player understand the rest when the update is restarted by removing the restriction, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

Features bM9. Described in any one of feature bM1 to feature bM8, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (off result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. Gaming machine.

Since the first game state shifts based on the update result (cumulative number of out-of-game times) of the number of times that the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result, the player first moves before the update result becomes a predetermined result. It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to the gaming state. For this reason, if the update result becomes a predetermined result in the middle of the second game state and the player does not shift to the first game state, there is a concern that the player may easily notice that the state has not shifted to the first game state. .. If the configuration of the feature bM1 can be applied to such a configuration and the occurrence of an event in which the update result becomes a predetermined result can be avoided in the middle of the second gaming state, which is the original factor, the transition to the first gaming state is not performed. It is possible to suppress the arousal of distrust of the feature bM1 and to suitably exert the above-mentioned effect of the feature bM1.

Features bM10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter.
In the first game state and the second game state, the ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bM1 to the feature bM9, wherein the special determination means can execute the special determination based on the entry into the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the player shifts to the first gaming state or the second gaming state, it is easier for the ball to enter the predetermined ball-entry means than in the normal gaming state, and it is easier to receive a special determination. By applying any of the configurations from the feature bM1 to the feature bM9 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bA1 to feature bA12, feature bB1 to feature bB10, feature bC1 to feature bC9, feature bD1 to feature bD6, feature bE1 to feature bE10, feature bF1 to feature bF10, Any of feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic bN group>
The feature bN group is an invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment. It is a thing.

The invention described in the feature bN group is described as "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and the lottery result becomes a specific result. Regarding the background technique that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, a gaming machine or the like as exemplified above, etc." There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature bN1. A special judgment means (special figure hit / miss in the main control device 162) that executes a special decision (special figure hit / miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63). Function to execute judgment) and
A transition means for a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) capable of transitioning to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result (big hit result). (Function to execute the game state transition process in the main control device 162) and
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means (a function of executing the special figure game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing the special figure variation display process in the staging control device 143), and
It is possible to update the predetermined update information (number of missed game times, number of points, etc.) based on the predetermined update opportunity (the result of the winning / failing lottery is a result of being out of order, winning the point lottery, etc.). Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 7 to 9 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10. Etc.) and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state (second time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (number of ceilings, predetermined number of points, etc.) and the special determination. The result is a predetermined determination result (special deviation result) different from the specific result, or the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (outlier result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state. The second specific game state (third time-saving game state) that can be transferred based on the result of the specific judgment (outside type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) to be the predetermined judgment result (special deviation result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.) ), And has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
Notification setting to set so that predetermined notification (special reach out-of-reach effect, etc.) is performed when the special determination or the result of the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result, or when the second specific gaming state is entered or when the transition is made. Means (a function of executing the process of step Sb3313 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment of the modified examples 6 to 10 and a function of setting the game rotation effect by the effect control device 143).
Equipped with
In one game, the update is performed by the update means before the setting is performed by the notification setting means (steps 6 to 9 of the second embodiment). A game comprising: a configuration in which the process of step Sb3313 is executed after the process of Sb5504 is executed, and a configuration in which the process of step Sb3313 is executed after the process of step Sb7604 is executed in the modification 10 of the second embodiment). Machine.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state that shifts based on the result of the special determination becoming a specific result, the specific gaming state is possessed as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, as such a specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state that shifts based on the result of the update information updated by the predetermined update trigger and the result of the special determination are predetermined determination results different from the specific results. Alternatively, it has a second specific gaming state in which the result of the specific determination performed in the game times in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result becomes a predetermined determination result. In this case, both the result of the special determination or the specific determination being the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means being the predetermined result may be established in the same game times, and a plurality of specific game states may be established. It is conceivable to adjust the specific gaming state of the transition destination to the first specific gaming state in order to avoid duplication.

In this case, for example, prior to the update of the update information, if the predetermined notification is set corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state or the establishment of the transition condition to the second specific gaming state, the transition destination is set. Although the adjustment to the first specific gaming state actually shifts to the first specific gaming state, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned predetermined notification corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state or the like is performed in the game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the update information is updated prior to the predetermined notification setting process, the gaming machine can grasp that the update result is the predetermined result before the predetermined notification execution setting is performed. , The execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification can be canceled based on the adjustment result of the migration destination. As a result, it is possible to adjust the specific gaming state of the transition destination while suppressing the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state that actually shifts in the game times, and the gaming state is suitably controlled. Will be possible.

If the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result in the game times in which the update result of the update means does not become the predetermined result, the execution of the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated. That is, when only the condition for shifting to the second specific gaming state is satisfied, the corresponding notification can be appropriately performed.

Feature bN2. When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result and the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result, the means capable of shifting to the first specific gaming state (second implementation). The main control device 162 according to the modified example 6, the modified example 8, and the modified example 9 is provided with a function for executing a process for determining the transition of the second time-saving gaming state and a process for determining the transition of the third time-saving gaming state). The gaming machine according to feature bN1, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, when both the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becomes the predetermined result in the same game times, the first specific gaming state is established. It is configured to give priority to the transition to. By applying the above-mentioned feature bN1 in such a case, it is possible to avoid that the notification corresponding to the second specific gaming state is performed.

Feature bN3. The gaming machine according to feature bN1 or feature bN2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination is the non-specific result.

Since the first specific game state shifts based on the update result (cumulative number of out-of-game times) of the number of times that the result of the special determination becomes a non-specific result, the player is the first before the update result becomes a predetermined result. 1 It has the characteristic of being able to predict the transition to a specific gaming state. For this reason, if the update result becomes a predetermined result in the middle of the second specific gaming state and the first specific gaming state is not shifted, the player can easily notice that the transition to the first specific gaming state has not been performed. I have concerns. Considering such circumstances, both the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becomes the predetermined result can be established in the same game times. If so, it is preferable to give priority to the transition to the first specific gaming state. In such a case, by applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bN1, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed while suppressing the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state that actually shifts in the game times. Can be prioritized.

Feature bN4. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bN1 to the feature bN3, wherein the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes the predetermined determination result and the update result of the updating means becomes the predetermined result, both can be established in the same game round. In addition, by giving priority to the transition to the first specific gaming state, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state on the advantageous side. In such a case, by applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature bN1, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed while suppressing the notification that is inconsistent with the type of the specific gaming state that actually shifts in the game times. Can be prioritized.

Feature bN5. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature bN1 to the feature bN4, wherein the update is performed by the update means when the game round is started.

In the above configuration, since the update information is updated at the start of the game round, it is possible to set the execution setting of the predetermined notification at the start of the game round. As a result, it is possible to deal with the case where the predetermined notification is performed at the beginning of the game round or the predetermined notification is performed in the whole game round, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the predetermined notification.

Feature bN6. It is provided with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the loss count image 475 by the staging control device 143) capable of executing the specific notification (disengagement count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means.
The specific notification execution means updates the notification content of the specific notification based on the update of the predetermined update information by the update means (the effect control device 143 updates the display content of the disengagement number image 475). Function to do)
The game times control means controls the game times so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (fixed display time) after the game rotation operation is performed.
The notification update means has any predetermined timing (special figure game times) in the period from the end of the game turn operation of the game times to be updated by the update means to the start of the next game turn. The feature bN1 to the feature bN5, which is provided with means capable of updating the notification content at the start timing of the confirmation display, the intermediate timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc. The gaming machine described in either.

In the above configuration, by executing the specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means, the player can grasp the progress of the update information and the rest until the predetermined result is obtained, and the subsequent game is advanced. It can be used as useful information above. In this case, the configuration in which the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated as in the above-mentioned feature bN1, in other words, the transition condition to the second specific gaming state necessary for setting the predetermined notification is satisfied. In a configuration in which the update information is updated prior to the determination of whether or not the update information is performed, the update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in the game. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is immediately updated in response to the update of the update information, the player is interested in the update result even before the result of the special determination is notified. There is a concern that it will move and the role of the game will not be played properly. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the reflection in the specific notification is performed after waiting for the notification of the result of the special determination to be started, so that the result of the special determination is notified. You can pay attention to the game times until it is done. Therefore, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bN1 while suppressing the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired.

In addition, this feature may further include a configuration that "the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination becomes the non-specific result". In this case, "The update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in the game. In such a case, the content of the specific notification is immediately updated in response to the update of the update information. Then, there is a concern that the player can determine that the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (so-called off-result) even before the result of the special determination is notified. In the configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, it is reflected in the specific notification after waiting for the notification of the result of the special determination to start, so it is possible to predetermine that the result is out of order. It is possible to exert the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bN1 while suppressing the above-mentioned effect. "

Feature bN7. The game times control means controls the game times so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period (fixed display time) after the game rotation operation is performed.
When the update result of the update means is a predetermined result, the transition to the first specific gaming state is specified in any period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round. One of the feature bN1 to the feature bN6 characterized in that it is configured to be performed at the timing (the start timing of the confirmation display in the special figure game, the intermediate timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.). The described gaming machine.

A configuration in which the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated as in the above feature bN1, in other words, whether or not the transition condition to the second specific gaming state required for the predetermined notification setting is satisfied. In a configuration in which the update information is updated prior to the determination, the update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in the game. In such a case, if the player immediately shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the fact that the update result is a predetermined result, the behavior of the gaming machine shows that the result of the special determination has not been notified yet. As a result of the player noticing that he / she is in the first specific gaming state and distracting his / her attention, there is a concern that the role of the gaming times may not be properly fulfilled. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed after waiting for the notification of the result of the special determination to be started, so that the special determination is made. You can pay attention to the game times until the result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effect of the above-mentioned feature bN1 while suppressing the degree of attention to the game times from being impaired.

For each configuration of the feature bN1 to the feature bN7, the feature bA1 to the feature bA12, the feature bB1 to the feature bB10, the feature bC1 to the feature bC9, the feature bD1 to the feature bD6, the feature bE1 to the feature bE10, and the feature bF1 to the feature bF10. , Feature bG1 to feature bG8, feature bH1 to feature bH8, feature bI1 to feature bI11, feature bJ1 to feature bJ10, feature bK1 to feature bK10, feature bL1 to feature bL9, feature bM1 to feature bM10, feature bN1 to feature bN7. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature bA group to the feature bN group to each configuration of the feature bA group to the feature bN group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using rotating body-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts with the fluctuation of the symbol, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and further provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball tray, and paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 143 ... Staging control device, 162 ... Main control device.

Claims (6)

A special judgment means for executing a special judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition, and
A transition means for a special gaming state that can shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the special determination being a specific result.
A game in which the game rotation operation is started based on the special determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special determination is set as one of the game times, and the game is controlled so that the game times are performed. Time control means and
An update means capable of updating a predetermined update information based on a predetermined update opportunity, and an update means.
Equipped with
As a gaming state, it has a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state.
As the specific game state, the first specific game state that can be transferred based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result, and the result of the special determination having a predetermined determination result different from the specific result, or the above. The second specific gaming state that can be transferred based on the result of the specific determination performed in the game times that the result of the special determination does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state becomes the predetermined determination result, and Has multiple types of specific gaming states, including
A notification setting means for setting the predetermined notification to be performed when the special determination or the result of the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result, or when the second specific gaming state shifts to or shifts to the second specific gaming state.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, the update is performed by the update means before the setting is performed by the notification setting means. When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result and the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result, the means capable of shifting to the first specific gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special determination is the non-specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state. A specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means is provided.
The specific notification execution means includes a notification update means for updating the notification content of the specific notification based on the update of predetermined update information by the update means.
The game rotation control means controls the game rotation so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period after the game rotation operation is performed.
The notification update means has the notification content at any predetermined timing in the period from the end of the game round operation of the game round in which the update is performed by the update means to the start of the next game round. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of executing the update of the above. The game rotation control means controls the game rotation so that the notification corresponding to the notification result is performed in a predetermined notification period after the game rotation operation is performed.
When the update result of the update means is a predetermined result, the transition to the first specific gaming state is specified in any period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be performed at a timing.

Images